Canon 2983b013aa IPF750 User Manual B6fb9f70 F53a 4151 A117 C3a7f75b1d3d

User Manual: canon 2983b013aa Canon Printer 2983B013AA User Guide |

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 742 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

User Manual
ENG
Large Format Printer
Contents
Contents ��
Contents
Introduction 1
How to use th�s manual ....................................................................................1
About Th�s User Manual ..............................................................................................................1
Search�ng Top�cs .........................................................................................................................3
HTML Vers�on of the Manual for Pr�nt�ng .....................................................................................5
Printer Parts 13
Pr�nter parts ....................................................................................................13
Front ..........................................................................................................................................13
S�de ...........................................................................................................................................15
Top Cover (Ins�de) .....................................................................................................................16
Roll Cover (Ins�de) .....................................................................................................................17
Carr�age .....................................................................................................................................17
Ink Tank Cover (Ins�de) ..............................................................................................................18
Stand .........................................................................................................................................19
Control Panel .............................................................................................................................20
Control Panel ..................................................................................................22
Control Panel .............................................................................................................................22
Turn�ng the Pr�nter On and Off ..................................................................................................24
Control Panel D�splay ................................................................................................................26
How to V�ew Instruct�ons W�th Nav�gate ....................................................................................29
Pr�nter Menu Operat�ons ...........................................................................................................30
Menu Operat�ons .......................................................................................................................32
Menu Structure ..........................................................................................................................35
Menu Sett�ngs ...........................................................................................................................49
Menu Sett�ngs (Dur�ng Pr�nt�ng) ................................................................................................60
Status Pr�nt ................................................................................................................................62
Pr�nt�ng Interface Sett�ng Reports .............................................................................................65
Check�ng Instruct�ons Dur�ng Pr�nter Operat�ons ......................................................................69
Opt�onal accessor�es ......................................................................................70
Roll Holder Set ..........................................................................................................................70
Printer Specications ......................................................................................71
Specications ............................................................................................................................71
Pr�nt Area ...................................................................................................................................75
Basic Printing Workow 76
Pr�nt�ng procedure ..........................................................................................76
Pr�nt�ng Opt�ons Us�ng Rolls and Sheets ..................................................................................76
Load�ng and Pr�nt�ng on Rolls ...................................................................................................78
Load�ng and Pr�nt�ng on Sheets ................................................................................................81
Pr�nt�ng �n W�ndows ...................................................................................................................83
�� Contents
Contents
Pr�nt�ng �n Mac OS X .................................................................................................................84
Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver (W�ndows) .....................................................................86
Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver (Mac OS X) ...................................................................88
Cancel�ng pr�nt jobs ........................................................................................90
Cancel�ng Pr�nt Jobs from the Control Panel ............................................................................90
Cancel�ng Pr�nt Jobs from W�ndows ..........................................................................................91
Cancel�ng Pr�nt Jobs from Mac OS X ........................................................................................92
Paus�ng Pr�nt�ng ..............................................................................................94
Paus�ng Pr�nt�ng ........................................................................................................................94
Handling Paper 95
Paper ..............................................................................................................95
Types of Paper ..........................................................................................................................95
Paper S�zes .............................................................................................................................100
Handl�ng rolls ................................................................................................103
Attach�ng the Roll Holder to Rolls ............................................................................................103
Load�ng Rolls �n the Pr�nter .....................................................................................................106
Chang�ng the Type of Paper .................................................................................................... 110
Spec�fy�ng the Paper Length ................................................................................................... 112
Pr�nt�ng From a Des�red Start�ng Po�nt .................................................................................... 113
Remov�ng the Roll from the Pr�nter ......................................................................................... 116
Remov�ng the Roll Holder from Rolls ...................................................................................... 118
Clear�ng Jammed Roll Paper ..................................................................................................120
Clear�ng Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot) ............................................................................123
Feed�ng Roll Paper Manually ..................................................................................................125
Keep�ng Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left .....................................................................126
Spec�fy�ng the Ink Dry�ng T�me for Rolls ..................................................................................127
Spec�fy�ng the Cutt�ng Method for Rolls ..................................................................................129
Cutt�ng the Lead�ng Edge of Roll Paper Automat�cally ............................................................133
Reduc�ng Dust from Cutt�ng Rolls ...........................................................................................134
Roll Holder Set ........................................................................................................................135
Handl�ng sheets ............................................................................................136
Load�ng Sheets �n the Pr�nter ..................................................................................................136
Chang�ng the Type of Paper ....................................................................................................139
Pr�nt�ng From a Des�red Start�ng Po�nt ....................................................................................141
Remov�ng Sheets ....................................................................................................................144
Clear�ng a Jammed Sheet .......................................................................................................145
Clear�ng Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot) ............................................................................148
Output Stacker ..............................................................................................150
Us�ng the Output Stacker ........................................................................................................150
Working With Various Print Jobs 152
Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images ..........................................................................152
Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images ....................................................................................................152
Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images (W�ndows) ..................................................................................154
Contents
Contents ���
Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images (Mac OS X) ................................................................................156
Pr�nt�ng CAD Draw�ngs .................................................................................159
Pr�nt�ng CAD Draw�ngs ............................................................................................................159
Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text ..............................................................................................160
Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (W�ndows) ............................................................................162
Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (Mac OS X) ..........................................................................164
Spec�fy�ng Colors and Pr�nt�ng CAD Draw�ngs ........................................................................167
Spec�fy�ng Colors and Pr�nt�ng CAD Draw�ngs (W�ndows) ......................................................168
HP-GL/2 Pr�nt�ng .....................................................................................................................170
Printing Ofce Documents ............................................................................171
Printing Ofce Documents .......................................................................................................171
Printing Ofce Documents (Windows) .....................................................................................172
Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS X) ...................................................................................174
Enhanced Printing Options 177
Adjust�ng Images ..........................................................................................177
Adjust�ng the Color �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver ..................................................................................177
F�ne-Tun�ng Colors of Photos and Images (W�ndows) ............................................................181
F�ne-Tun�ng Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) ..........................................................184
G�v�ng Pr�or�ty to Part�cular Graph�c Elements and Colors for Pr�nt�ng ...................................187
Choos�ng the Document Type and Pr�nt�ng Cond�t�ons (W�ndows) .........................................190
Choos�ng the Document Type and Pr�nt�ng Cond�t�ons (Mac OS X) .......................................192
Choos�ng Paper for Pr�nt�ng ..........................................................................194
Choos�ng a Paper for Pr�nt�ng .................................................................................................194
Chang�ng the Type of Paper ....................................................................................................195
Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver .....................................................................................197
Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver (W�ndows) ...................................................................197
Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver (Mac OS X) .................................................................199
Pr�nt�ng enlargements or reduct�ons .............................................................201
Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze ............................................................................201
Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (W�ndows) ..........................................................202
Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (Mac OS X) ........................................................204
Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth ...................................................................................207
Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (W�ndows) .................................................................208
Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (Mac OS X) ...............................................................210
Res�z�ng Or�g�nals by Enter�ng a Scal�ng Value.......................................................................213
Res�z�ng Or�g�nals by Enter�ng a Scal�ng Value (W�ndows).....................................................214
Res�z�ng Or�g�nals by Enter�ng a Scal�ng Value (Mac OS X) ...................................................216
Pr�nt�ng at full s�ze .........................................................................................219
Pr�nt�ng on Overs�zed Paper ...................................................................................................219
Pr�nt�ng at Full S�ze (W�ndows) ...............................................................................................220
Pr�nt�ng at Full S�ze (Mac OS X) ..............................................................................................222
Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze ...........................................................................................225
Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (W�ndows) .........................................................................227
Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (Mac OS X) .......................................................................229
�v Contents
Contents
Borderless Pr�nt�ng .......................................................................................232
Borderless Pr�nt�ng on Paper of Equ�valent S�ze .....................................................................232
Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (W�ndows) ......................234
Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (Mac OS X) ....................236
Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth ...............................................239
Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (W�ndows) .............................241
Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (Mac OS X) ...........................243
Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze ...........................................................................................246
Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (W�ndows) .........................................................................248
Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (Mac OS X) .......................................................................250
Pr�nt�ng banners or at other non-standard s�zes ...........................................253
Pr�nt�ng Vert�cal or Hor�zontal Banners (Large-Format Pr�nt�ng) .............................................253
Pr�nt�ng Vert�cal or Hor�zontal Banners (Large-Format Pr�nt�ng; W�ndows) .............................254
Pr�nt�ng Vert�cal or Hor�zontal Banners (Large-Format Pr�nt�ng; Mac OS X) ...........................258
Pr�nt�ng on Non-Standard Paper S�zes ...................................................................................261
Pr�nt�ng on Non-Standard Paper S�zes (W�ndows) .................................................................262
Pr�nt�ng on Non-Standard Paper S�zes (Mac OS X) ................................................................266
T�l�ng and mult�ple pages per sheet ..............................................................269
Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Or�g�nals Next to Each Other ........................................................................269
Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Or�g�nals Next to Each Other (W�ndows) ......................................................271
Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Or�g�nals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X) ....................................................273
Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Cont�nuously ......................................................................................275
Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Cont�nuously (W�ndows) ....................................................................276
Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Cont�nuously (Mac OS X) ..................................................................278
Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Per Sheet ...........................................................................................280
Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Per Sheet (W�ndows) .........................................................................281
Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) .......................................................................283
Pr�nt�ng Posters �n Sect�ons ....................................................................................................286
Pr�nt�ng Large Posters (W�ndows) ...........................................................................................287
Center�ng or�g�nals ........................................................................................289
Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Rolls .......................................................................................289
Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Rolls (W�ndows) .....................................................................290
Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) ...................................................................292
Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Sheets ....................................................................................295
Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Sheets (W�ndows) ..................................................................296
Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) ................................................................298
Conserv�ng roll paper ....................................................................................301
Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Rotat�ng Or�g�nals 90 Degrees ......................................................301
Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Rotat�ng Or�g�nals 90 Degrees (W�ndows) ....................................302
Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Rotat�ng Or�g�nals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) ...................................304
Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals W�thout Top and Bottom Marg�ns ......................307
Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals W�thout Top and Bottom Marg�ns (W�ndows) ....308
Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals W�thout Top and Bottom Marg�ns (Mac OS X) ..310
Check�ng Images Before Pr�nt�ng .................................................................313
Check�ng the Layout �n a Prev�ew Before Pr�nt�ng ..................................................................313
Check�ng the Layout �n a Prev�ew Before Pr�nt�ng (W�ndows) ................................................315
Check�ng the Layout �n a Prev�ew Before Pr�nt�ng (Mac OS X) ..............................................317
Contents
Contents v
Other useful sett�ngs .....................................................................................318
Pr�nt�ng W�th Watermarks ........................................................................................................318
Pr�nt�ng w�th Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (W�ndows)......................................319
Mak�ng the Or�g�nal Or�entat�on Match the Paper Or�entat�on .................................................321
Mak�ng the Or�g�nal Or�entat�on Match the Paper Or�entat�on (W�ndows) ...............................322
Mak�ng the Or�g�nal Or�entat�on Match the Paper Or�entat�on (Mac OS X) .............................324
Us�ng Favor�tes .......................................................................................................................327
Us�ng Favor�tes (W�ndows) .....................................................................................................328
Us�ng Favor�tes (Mac OS X) ....................................................................................................330
Cutt�ng Roll Paper After Pr�nt�ng ..............................................................................................331
Cutt�ng Roll Paper After Pr�nt�ng (W�ndows) ............................................................................332
Cutt�ng Roll Paper After Pr�nt�ng (Mac OS X) ..........................................................................333
Windows Software 336
Pr�nter Dr�ver .................................................................................................336
Pr�nter Dr�ver Sett�ngs (W�ndows) ...........................................................................................336
Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver (W�ndows) ...................................................................338
Conrming Print Settings (Windows) .......................................................................................340
Check�ng the Layout �n a Prev�ew Before Pr�nt�ng (W�ndows) ................................................342
Us�ng Favor�tes (W�ndows) .....................................................................................................344
Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from Appl�cat�ons (W�ndows) ...................................346
Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from the Operat�ng System Menu (W�ndows) .........348
Ma�n Sheet (W�ndows) ............................................................................................................350
Paper Informat�on on Pr�nter D�alog Box (W�ndows) ...............................................................353
Paper Deta�led Sett�ngs D�alog Box (W�ndows) ......................................................................354
V�ew Sett�ngs D�alog Box for the Pr�nt�ng Appl�cat�on (W�ndows)............................................355
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (W�ndows) ..............................................................................356
Object Adjustment d�alog box: Color .......................................................................................358
Match�ng Sheet (W�ndows) .....................................................................................................359
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome (W�ndows) ..................................................................361
Object Adjustment d�alog box: Monochrome ...........................................................................363
Page Setup Sheet (W�ndows) .................................................................................................364
Paper S�ze Opt�ons D�alog Box (W�ndows) .............................................................................367
Layout Sheet (W�ndows) .........................................................................................................368
Page Opt�ons D�alog Box (W�ndows) ......................................................................................370
Spec�al Sett�ngs D�alog Box (W�ndows) ..................................................................................371
Favor�tes Sheet (W�ndows) .....................................................................................................372
Ut�l�ty Sheet (W�ndows) ...........................................................................................................374
Support Sheet (W�ndows) .......................................................................................................375
Sett�ngs Summar�es D�alog Box (W�ndows) ............................................................................376
Dev�ce Sett�ngs Sheet (W�ndows) ...........................................................................................377
Prev�ew .........................................................................................................378
The Features of Prev�ew .........................................................................................................378
Operat�ng Env�ronment ...........................................................................................................378
Start�ng Prev�ew ......................................................................................................................379
Prev�ew Ma�n W�ndow .............................................................................................................380
D�alog Area ..............................................................................................................................382
Pr�nt on the Center ..................................................................................................................384
Not Pr�nt Spaces at the Top/Bottom ........................................................................................385
v� Contents
Contents
Pr�or�ty sett�ng for rotat�ng 90 degrees ....................................................................................386
Pr�nt�ng w�th Select�ng the Layout ...........................................................................................387
Enlarge/Reduce the screen d�splay .........................................................................................389
Mov�ng a Page ........................................................................................................................389
Us�ng the ruler .........................................................................................................................389
Free Layout ...................................................................................................390
The Features of Free Layout ...................................................................................................390
Operat�ng Env�ronment ...........................................................................................................390
Start�ng Free Layout ................................................................................................................391
Free Layout Ma�n W�ndow .......................................................................................................393
Deta�led Sett�ngs .....................................................................................................................394
Preferences D�alog Box ...........................................................................................................395
Page Opt�ons D�alog Box ........................................................................................................397
Zoom D�alog Box .....................................................................................................................398
Format D�alog Box ...................................................................................................................399
Lay�ng out a Mult�ple-F�le Document on One Page .................................................................401
Lay�ng out a Document Created w�th Mult�ple Appl�cat�on Programs on One Page ................404
Select�ng an Object .................................................................................................................407
Chang�ng the Object S�ze ........................................................................................................408
Mov�ng an Object ....................................................................................................................409
Rotat�ng an Object ...................................................................................................................409
Lay�ng out Objects Automat�cally ............................................................................................410
Al�gn�ng Objects ...................................................................................................................... 411
Chang�ng the Object Overlapp�ng Order .................................................................................413
Past�ng a Cop�ed or Cut Object ...............................................................................................415
Folded Duplex W�ndow ...........................................................................................................416
Pr�nts us�ng Folded Duplex .....................................................................................................418
F�n�shed S�ze Sett�ngs D�alog Box ..........................................................................................419
B�nd�ng Sett�ngs D�alog Box ....................................................................................................420
Color �mageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ....................................................421
The Features of Color �mageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ....................................................421
Operat�ng Env�ronment ...........................................................................................................421
Start�ng Color �mageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .................................................................422
Color �mageRUNNER Enlargement Copy D�alog Box ............................................................424
Hot Folder ................................................................................................................................425
Creat�ng a New Hot Folder ......................................................................................................426
Spec�fy�ng an Ex�st�ng Shared Folder as a Hot Folder ............................................................429
Sett�ng the Pr�nt Parameters ...................................................................................................431
Pr�nt�ng Enlargements of Scanned Or�g�nals from a Color �mageRUNNER (W�ndows) ..........432
Status Mon�tor ...............................................................................................434
The Features of �magePROGRAF Status Mon�tor ..................................................................434
Job Management Us�ng �magePROGRAF Status Mon�tor ......................................................436
Account�ng ....................................................................................................437
Account�ng Manager ...............................................................................................................437
Launch�ng the Account�ng Manager ........................................................................................437
Account�ng Manager Ma�n W�ndow .........................................................................................438
Account�ng Manager Bas�c Procedures ..................................................................................441
Conguring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager .......................................................................441
Contents
Contents v��
Sett�ng the Un�t Cost for Ink ....................................................................................................442
Sett�ng the Un�t Cost for Paper ................................................................................................443
Sett�ng the Un�t Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper ......................................................444
Conguring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager .............................................445
Automat�cally Acqu�r�ng Pr�nt Job Logs at Regular Intervals ...................................................446
Cancel�ng Regular Pr�nt Job Log Acqu�s�t�on ..........................................................................446
Sw�tch�ng Between D�splay�ng Jobs on Pr�nter and Regularly Acqu�red Jobs ........................447
Export�ng Pr�nt Job Data as a CSV F�le ..................................................................................447
Show�ng Job Propert�es ..........................................................................................................448
Show�ng, Sav�ng and Load�ng Selected Un�t Cost Data .........................................................448
Show�ng the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed .........................................................448
D�g�tal Photo Front-Access ...........................................................................449
D�g�tal Photo Front-Access ......................................................................................................449
Us�ng PosterArt�st to Compose Or�g�nals .....................................................450
Us�ng PosterArt�st to Compose Or�g�nals ...............................................................................450
Dev�ce Setup Ut�l�ty .......................................................................................452
�magePROGRAF Dev�ce Setup Ut�l�ty .....................................................................................452
Install�ng �magePROGRAF Dev�ce Setup Ut�l�ty .....................................................................452
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ...............................453
Mac OS X Software 454
Pr�nter Dr�ver .................................................................................................454
Pr�nter Dr�ver Sett�ngs (Mac OS X) .........................................................................................454
Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver (Mac OS X) .................................................................455
Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X) .....................................................................................457
Check�ng the Layout �n a Prev�ew Before Pr�nt�ng (Mac OS X) ..............................................459
Us�ng Favor�tes (Mac OS X) ....................................................................................................460
Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from Appl�cat�ons (Mac OS X) .................................460
Ma�n Pane (Mac OS X) ...........................................................................................................461
Paper Informat�on on Pr�nter D�alog Box (Mac OS X) .............................................................464
Paper Deta�led Sett�ngs D�alog Box (Mac OS X) ....................................................................465
V�ew sett�ngs D�alog Box for the Pr�nt�ng Appl�cat�on (Mac OS X) ..........................................466
Color Sett�ngs Pane: Color (Mac OS X) ..................................................................................467
Color Sett�ngs Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X) ......................................................................469
Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X) ................................................................................................471
Ut�l�ty Pane (Mac OS X) ..........................................................................................................473
Add�t�onal Sett�ngs Pane (Mac OS X) .....................................................................................474
Support Pane (Mac OS X) .......................................................................................................475
Prev�ew .........................................................................................................476
The Features of Prev�ew .........................................................................................................476
Operat�ng Env�ronment ...........................................................................................................476
Start�ng Prev�ew ......................................................................................................................477
Prev�ew Ma�n W�ndow .............................................................................................................478
Paper Sett�ngs Panel ...............................................................................................................480
Easy Sett�ngs ..........................................................................................................................482
Advanced Sett�ngs ..................................................................................................................484
Output Sett�ngs Panel .............................................................................................................485
v��� Contents
Contents
Color Sett�ngs Panel ................................................................................................................487
Color Adjustment .....................................................................................................................488
Match�ng ..................................................................................................................................490
Dr�ver Match�ng Mode .............................................................................................................492
ICC Match�ng Mode .................................................................................................................493
ColorSync ................................................................................................................................494
Preferences D�alog Box ...........................................................................................................495
Zoom D�alog Box .....................................................................................................................495
Go to Page D�alog Box ............................................................................................................495
Pr�nt w�th No Borders ..............................................................................................................496
Pr�nt on the Center ..................................................................................................................497
Not Pr�nt Spaces at the Top/Bottom ........................................................................................498
Pr�nt Page Rotated 90 Degrees ..............................................................................................499
D�splay w�th F�tt�ng to the W�dth of the Paper ..........................................................................500
D�splay w�th All ........................................................................................................................501
D�splay w�th Actual S�ze ..........................................................................................................502
Mov�ng a Page ........................................................................................................................503
Free Layout ...................................................................................................504
The Features of Free Layout ...................................................................................................504
Operat�ng Env�ronment ...........................................................................................................504
Start�ng Free Layout ................................................................................................................505
Free Layout Ma�n W�ndow .......................................................................................................506
Paper Sett�ngs Panel ...............................................................................................................508
Easy Sett�ngs ..........................................................................................................................510
Advanced Sett�ngs ..................................................................................................................512
Color Sett�ngs Panel ................................................................................................................513
Color Adjustment .....................................................................................................................514
Match�ng ..................................................................................................................................516
Dr�ver Match�ng Mode .............................................................................................................518
ICC Match�ng Mode .................................................................................................................519
ColorSync ................................................................................................................................520
Preferences D�alog Box ...........................................................................................................521
Page Setup D�alog Box ...........................................................................................................523
Zoom D�alog Box .....................................................................................................................524
Format D�alog Box ...................................................................................................................525
Lay�ng out a Mult�ple-F�le Document on One Page .................................................................526
Lay�ng out a Document Created w�th Mult�ple Appl�cat�on Programs on One Page ................526
Select�ng an Object .................................................................................................................527
Chang�ng the Object S�ze ........................................................................................................528
Mov�ng an Object ....................................................................................................................529
Rotat�ng an Object ...................................................................................................................529
Lay�ng out Objects Automat�cally ............................................................................................530
Al�gn�ng Objects ......................................................................................................................531
Chang�ng the Object Overlapp�ng Order .................................................................................533
Past�ng a Cop�ed or Cut Object ...............................................................................................535
Color �mageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ....................................................536
The Features of Color �mageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ....................................................536
Operat�ng Env�ronment ...........................................................................................................536
Start�ng Color �mageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .................................................................537
Color �mageRUNNER Enlargement Copy D�alog Box ............................................................538
Contents
Contents �x
Hot Folder ................................................................................................................................539
Creat�ng a New Hot Folder ......................................................................................................539
Ed�t�ng a Hot Folder (Sett�ng Pr�nt Cond�t�ons) ........................................................................541
Delet�ng a Hot Folder ..............................................................................................................543
Sett�ng the Pr�nt Parameters ...................................................................................................544
Paper Sett�ngs Panel ...............................................................................................................544
Easy Sett�ngs ..........................................................................................................................546
Advanced Sett�ngs ..................................................................................................................548
Output Sett�ngs Panel .............................................................................................................549
Color Sett�ngs Panel ................................................................................................................551
Dr�ver Match�ng Mode .............................................................................................................552
ICC Match�ng Mode .................................................................................................................553
ColorSync ................................................................................................................................554
Pr�nt�ng Enlargements of Scanned Or�g�nals from a Color �mageRUNNER (Mac OS X) ........555
Pr�ntmon�tor ..................................................................................................557
The Features of �magePROGRAF Pr�ntmon�tor ......................................................................557
Job Management Us�ng �magePROGRAF Pr�ntmon�tor .........................................................558
Network Setting 560
Network Sett�ng ............................................................................................560
Network Env�ronment ..............................................................................................................560
Conguring the IP Address on the Printer ...............................................................................563
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ...............................564
Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel ...................................................565
Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands ...............................................567
Conguring TCP/IPv6 Network Settings..................................................................................568
Us�ng RemoteUI ......................................................................................................................569
Conguring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings .................................................................570
Conguring the Printer's AppleTalk Network Settings .............................................................574
Conguring the Printer's NetWare Network Settings ...............................................................575
Spec�fy�ng Pr�nter-Related Informat�on ....................................................................................577
Conguring the Communication Mode Manually .....................................................................578
Email Notication When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur .................................................579
In�t�al�z�ng the Network Sett�ngs ..............................................................................................580
Network Sett�ng (W�ndows) ..........................................................................581
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows) .............................................................581
Shar�ng the Pr�nter �n W�ndows ...............................................................................................582
Conguring the Printer's NetWare Network Settings ...............................................................584
Specifying the Printer's Frame Type ........................................................................................586
Spec�fy�ng NetWare Pr�nt Serv�ces ..........................................................................................588
Spec�fy�ng NetWare Protocols .................................................................................................591
Conguring NetWare Network Settings ...................................................................................593
Install�ng �magePROGRAF Dev�ce Setup Ut�l�ty .....................................................................594
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ...............................595
Network Sett�ng (Mac OS X) .........................................................................596
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh) ...........................................................596
Conguring the Printer's AppleTalk Network Settings .............................................................597
Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Networks (Macintosh) ............................................598
x Contents
Contents
Conguring the Destination in TCP/IP Networks (Macintosh) .................................................600
Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network (Macintosh) ................................................602
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 603
Adjust�ng the Pr�nthead .................................................................................603
Adjust�ng the Pr�nthead ...........................................................................................................603
Automat�c Adjustment to Stra�ghten L�nes and Colors (Head Pos�. Adj.) ................................604
Manual Adjustment to Stra�ghten L�nes and Colors (Head Pos�. Adj.) ....................................606
Adjust�ng L�ne M�sal�gnment (Head Inc. Adj.) ..........................................................................608
Troubleshoot�ng Paper Abras�on and Blurry Images (Head He�ght) ........................................ 611
Adjust�ng the feed amount ............................................................................612
Adjust�ng the Feed Amount .....................................................................................................612
Select�ng a Feed Amount Adjustment Method (Feed Pr�or�ty) .................................................613
Automat�c Band�ng Adjustment (Adj. Qual�ty) ..........................................................................614
Manual Band�ng Adjustment (Adj. Qual�ty) ..............................................................................616
F�ne-Tun�ng the Paper Feed Amount (Adj. F�ne Feed) ............................................................618
Adjust�ng L�ne Length (Adjust Length) ....................................................................................619
Adjust�ng the Vacuum Strength (VacuumStrngth) ...................................................................621
Maintenance 622
Ink Tanks .......................................................................................................622
Ink Tanks .................................................................................................................................622
Replac�ng Ink Tanks ................................................................................................................623
Check�ng Ink Tank Levels ........................................................................................................628
When to Replace Ink Tanks .....................................................................................................629
Pr�ntheads .....................................................................................................630
Pr�nthead .................................................................................................................................630
Check�ng for Nozzle Clogg�ng .................................................................................................630
Clean�ng the Pr�nthead ............................................................................................................632
Replac�ng the Pr�nthead ..........................................................................................................633
Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge .................................................................................639
Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge ............................................................................................................639
Replac�ng the Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge .....................................................................................639
Check�ng the Rema�n�ng Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge Capac�ty .....................................................644
When to Replace the Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge .........................................................................645
Clean�ng the Pr�nter ......................................................................................646
Clean�ng the Pr�nter Exter�or ...................................................................................................646
Clean�ng Ins�de the Top Cover ................................................................................................647
Clean�ng the Pr�nthead ............................................................................................................650
Other Ma�ntenance .......................................................................................651
Prepar�ng to Transfer the Pr�nter .............................................................................................651
Updat�ng the F�rmware ............................................................................................................654
Contents
Contents x�
Troubleshooting 655
Frequently Asked Quest�ons .........................................................................655
Frequently Asked Quest�ons ...................................................................................................655
Problems Regard�ng Paper ..........................................................................657
Clear�ng Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot) ............................................................................657
Clear�ng Jammed Roll Paper ..................................................................................................659
Clear�ng a Jammed Sheet .......................................................................................................662
Roll Paper Cannot be Inserted �nto the Paper Feed Slot ........................................................665
Cannot load sheets .................................................................................................................665
Paper �s not cut stra�ght ...........................................................................................................665
Paper �s not cut .......................................................................................................................665
Depress�on on the lead�ng edge �s left ....................................................................................665
The size of clear lm cannot be detected ................................................................................665
Roll Paper �s Cont�nuously Ejected .........................................................................................666
Pr�nt�ng does not start ...................................................................................667
The Data Recept�on Lamp on the Control Panel does not l�ght up .........................................667
The pr�nter does not respond even �f pr�nt jobs are sent .........................................................667
Ink F�ll�ng.. �s d�splayed ...........................................................................................................667
The d�splay screen �nd�cates Ag�tat�ng ....................................................................................667
The pr�nter stops dur�ng a pr�nt job ...............................................................668
An error message �s shown on the D�splay Screen .................................................................668
The pr�nter ejects blank, unpr�nted paper ................................................................................668
The pr�nter stops when pr�nt�ng a HP-GL/2 job (the carr�age stops mov�ng) ...........................668
Problems w�th the pr�nt�ng qual�ty .................................................................669
Pr�nt�ng �s fa�nt .........................................................................................................................669
Paper rubs aga�nst the Pr�nthead ............................................................................................670
The edges of the paper are d�rty .............................................................................................671
The surface of the paper �s d�rty ..............................................................................................672
The back s�de of the paper �s d�rty ..........................................................................................672
Pr�nted colors are �naccurate ...................................................................................................673
Band�ng �n d�fferent colors occurs ...........................................................................................674
Colors �n pr�nted �mages are uneven .......................................................................................675
Image edges are blurred or wh�te band�ng occurs ..................................................................676
The contrast becomes uneven dur�ng pr�nt�ng ........................................................................676
The length of pr�nted �mages �s �naccurate �n the feed�ng d�rect�on ........................................677
Images are pr�nted crooked .....................................................................................................677
Documents are pr�nted �n monochrome ..................................................................................677
L�ne th�ckness �s not un�form ...................................................................................................678
L�nes are m�sal�gned ...............................................................................................................678
Problems w�th the pr�nt�ng qual�ty caused by the type of paper ..............................................678
Cannot pr�nt over a network ..........................................................................679
Cannot connect the pr�nter to the network ..............................................................................679
Cannot pr�nt over a TCP/IP network ........................................................................................679
Cannot pr�nt over a NetWare network .....................................................................................680
Cannot pr�nt over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks ...................................................................680
x�� Contents
Contents
Installat�on problems .....................................................................................681
Remov�ng Installed Pr�nter Dr�vers ..........................................................................................681
HP-GL/2 problems ........................................................................................682
W�th HP-GL/2, pr�nt�ng �s m�sal�gned .......................................................................................682
L�nes or �mages are m�ss�ng �n pr�nted HP-GL/2 jobs. ............................................................682
L�nes are pr�nted too th�ck or th�n �n HP-GL/2 pr�nt jobs ..........................................................682
HP-GL/2 jobs are pr�nted �n monochrome (or color) ...............................................................682
Pr�nted colors of l�nes are �naccurate dur�ng HP-GL/2 pr�nt�ng ...............................................682
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed 6 mm larger than specied .............................................................683
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed at maximum size, even if a standard size is specied ....................683
HP-GL/2 pr�nt�ng takes a long t�me .........................................................................................683
Replott�ng w�th HP-GL/2 jobs �s not poss�ble. .........................................................................683
The pr�nter stops when pr�nt�ng a HP-GL/2 job (the carr�age stops mov�ng) ...........................683
Other problems .............................................................................................684
The pr�nter does not go on ......................................................................................................684
If the Pr�nter Makes a Strange Sound .....................................................................................685
Messages adv�s�ng to check the ma�ntenance cartr�dge are not cleared ................................686
The pr�nter consumes a lot of �nk ............................................................................................686
Ink Level Detect�on ..................................................................................................................687
Error Message 689
Messages regard�ng paper ...........................................................................689
Med�aType M�smatch ..............................................................................................................689
The paper �s too small. ............................................................................................................690
The paper �s too small. ............................................................................................................691
PaprW�dth M�smatch ...............................................................................................................692
Paper s�ze not detected. ..........................................................................................................693
Insufcient paper for job ..........................................................................................................694
Th�s paper cannot be used. .....................................................................................................694
Roll pr�nt�ng �s selected. ..........................................................................................................694
Roll pr�nt�ng �s selected, but sheets are loaded. ......................................................................695
The roll �s empty. .....................................................................................................................695
Sheet pr�nt�ng �s selected. .......................................................................................................696
Regular pr�nt�ng �s selected, but a roll �s loaded. .....................................................................696
Paper jam ................................................................................................................................697
Paper �s crooked. ....................................................................................................................698
Paper not al�gned w�th r�ght gu�de. ..........................................................................................699
Cannot detect papr ..................................................................................................................699
Paper cutt�ng fa�led. .................................................................................................................700
End of paper feed. ...................................................................................................................700
Rel lever �s �n wrong pos�t�on. ..................................................................................................701
Borderless pr�ntng not poss�ble. ..............................................................................................701
Paper pos�t�on not su�table for borderless pr�nt�ng. .................................................................702
Roll paper �s not securely �n contact w�th roll holder. ...............................................................702
Messages regard�ng �nk ................................................................................703
Ink insufcient. .........................................................................................................................703
No �nk left. ...............................................................................................................................703
Contents
Contents x���
Rema�n�ng level of the �nk cannot be correctly detected. ........................................................703
Unable to detect �nk level correctly. .........................................................................................703
Close Ink Tank Cover ..............................................................................................................703
Ink tank �s empty. .....................................................................................................................704
Not much �nk �s left. .................................................................................................................704
No �nk tank loaded. ..................................................................................................................704
Wrong �nk tank. ........................................................................................................................704
Do not pull out �nk tank. ...........................................................................................................704
Messages regard�ng pr�nt�ng or adjustment ..................................................705
Cannot adjust pr�nthead. .........................................................................................................705
Cannot adjust paper feed. .......................................................................................................705
Check pr�nted document. ........................................................................................................706
Messages regard�ng pr�ntheads ...................................................................707
Cannot adjust pr�nthead. .........................................................................................................707
Wrong pr�nthead. .....................................................................................................................707
Pr�nthead error ........................................................................................................................707
No pr�nthead ............................................................................................................................708
Execute pr�nthead clean�ng. ....................................................................................................708
Messages regard�ng the ma�ntenance cartr�dge ...........................................709
Insert the ma�ntenance cartr�dge. ............................................................................................709
Wrong ma�ntenance cartr�dge. ................................................................................................709
Ma�nt. cart. The level �s low .....................................................................................................709
No Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge capac�ty.........................................................................................709
Ma�ntenance cartr�dge full. ......................................................................................................709
Ma�ntenance cartr�dge problem. ..............................................................................................709
Messages regard�ng HP-GL/2 ......................................................................710
Th�s type of paper �s not compat�ble w�th HP-GL/2. ................................................................710
GL2: Wxxxx The memory �s full. (xxxx �s 0501, 0903, or 0904) ..............................................710
GL2: W0502 The parameter �s out of range. ...........................................................................710
GL2: W0504 Th�s command �s not supported. ........................................................................710
Other Messages ........................................................................................... 711
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) ................................................................................... 711
ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) .............................................................. 711
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) ........................................... 711
Top cover �s open. ................................................................................................................... 711
Prepare for parts replacement. ................................................................................................712
Parts replacement t�me has passed. .......................................................................................712
Unknown le. ...........................................................................................................................712
Mult�-sensor error ....................................................................................................................712
Error �n cutter pos�t�on. ............................................................................................................712
x�v Contents
Contents
How to use this manual
Introduction
How to use this manual
About This User Manual
•Symbols
The following symbols are used in this User Manual to indicate safety information and explanations
on restrictions or precautions in use.
Important Indicates important information that must be followed when using the
printer . Be sure to read this information to prevent printer damage or
operating errors.
Caution Indicates caution items for which operating error poses a risk of injury or
damage to equipment or property . T o ensure safe use, always follow these
precautions.
Note Indicates helpful reference information and supplemental information on
particular topics.
•Button names and user interface elements
Key and button names on the control panel and user interface elements in software (such as menus and
buttons) are indicated as follows in this User Manual.
Control panel buttons Example: Press the OK button.
Control panel messages Example: Head Cleaning is displayed.
Software interface items
(Menus and Buttons)
Example: Click OK .
Keyboard keys Example: Press the T ab key .
•Part names
Names of printer parts are indicated as follows in this User Manual.
Printer part names Example: Open the T op Cover .
•Cross-reference
Other pages or manuals that provide related information are indicated as follows in this User Manual.
Cross-reference in the same user manual Example: see “T urning the Printer On and Of f”.
(→P .24)
Cross-reference in related manuals Example: See the Paper Reference Guide .
Other cross-reference Example: See the printer driver help.
Introduction 1
How to use this manual
•Figures and software screens
•Figures in this User Manual may be dif ferent from the actual appearance of the printer in some
cases.
•Screens depicted in this User Manual for the printer driver or other software may be dif ferent from
the actual screens because of subsequent updates.
•Windows XP screens are used in explanations of Windows operations in this User Manual.
•T rademarks
•Canon, the Canon logo, and imagePROGRAF are trademarks or registered trademarks of Canon
Inc.
•Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
•Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries.
•Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
owners.
•Copyright
© 2009 Canon Inc.
•Unauthorized reproduction of this User Manual in whole or part is prohibited.
•May we request
Thank you for understanding the following points.
•The information in this User Manual is subject to change without notice.
•W e strive to ensure accuracy of information in this User Manual, but if you notice errors or
omissions, please contact us.
2 Introduction
How to use this manual
Searching T opics
Y ou can nd information in topics of this User Manual by searching for relevant terms.
1. Enter a term and click the Search button.
Note
•T o search for multiple terms at once, enter a space between each term.
Search results are listed at left.
Introduction 3
How to use this manual
2. Click a topic you want to read.
The terms you searched for will be highlighted in the topic.
T o review multiple topics at once, select the check box of desired topics and click the Apply
button.
4 Introduction
How to use this manual
HTML V ersion of the Manual for Printing
Y ou can select a group of topics in the table of contents or individual topics in this manual for printing.
The following procedure describes how to do this, using the information in Basic Printing W orkow as an
example.
Printing a group of topics in the manual
When you access printable HTML versions of the content from section titles in the table of contents, you
can specify a group of topics to print.
1. Click a section title in the table of contents. Here, Basic Printing W orkow is used as an
example.
Introduction 5
How to use this manual
2. Click Access to the HTML for printing in the title area.
The topics in Basic Printing W orkow are displayed together in HTML format, ready for printing.
6 Introduction
How to use this manual
3. Clear the sections you will not print and click the Apply button.
Printing a group of individual topics in the manual
When you access printable HTML versions from subtitles in the table of contents, you can specify a group
of topics to print.
1. Click a section title in the table of contents. Here, Basic Printing W orkow is used as an
example.
Introduction 7
How to use this manual
2. Under Basic Printing W orkow , click Printing Procedure .
3. Click Access to the HTML for printing in the title area.
8 Introduction
How to use this manual
The topics in Printing Procedure are displayed together in HTML format, ready for printing.
4. Clear the topics you will not print and click the Apply button.
Introduction 9
How to use this manual
Printing selected topics
Print selected topics as follows.
1. Access the printing dialog box as follows, depending on your computer ’ s operating system.
•Windows
In Windows, right-click anywhere in the explanation area except on a gure or a link.In the shortcut
menu, click Print to display the Print dialog box.
10 Introduction
How to use this manual
•Macintosh
On a Macintosh computer , click anywhere in the explanation area except on a gure or a link while
holding the Ctrl key . In the shortcut menu, click Print Frame to display the Print dialog box.
2. Specify conditions as needed, and then click Print (Windows) or Print (Macintosh).
•Windows
Introduction 1 1
How to use this manual
•Macintosh
Note
•T o print only individual topics that are displayed, use this method.
12 Introduction
Printer parts
Printer Parts
Printer parts
Front
a. Roll Cover
Open this cover to load rolls. ( → P .17)
b. Paper Feed Slot
When loading paper , insert it here.
c. Roll Ledge
When loading rolls, rest the Roll Holder here before loading it in the Roll Holder Slot .
d. Release Lever
When releasing the Paper Retainer , push this lever back.
e. Control Panel
Use this panel to operate the printer and check the printer status. ( → P .20)
f. Ink T ank Cover
Open this cover to replace an Ink T ank . ( → P .18)
g. Paper Alignment Line
An orange line for alignment of paper .
h. Maintenance Cartridge Cover
Open this cover to replace the Maintenance Cartridge .
i. Maintenance Cartridge
Absorbs ink used for maintenance purposes such as head cleaning. (Replace the cartridge when it
is full.)
Printer Parts 13
Printer parts
j. Cutter Unit
A round-bladed cutter for automatic roll cutting.
k. Cutter Rail
The Cutter Unit passes over this rail to cut paper .
l. Output T ray
All printed documents are ejected from this slot.
m. Ejection Guide
Guides printed documents as they are ejected.
n. T op Cover
Open this cover to install the Printhead and remove any jammed paper from inside the printer ,
as needed. ( → P .16)
o. Width Guide
When loading the sheets , move the guide to match the paper size.
p. Stand
A stand that holds the printer . Equipped with casters to facilitate moving it. ( → P .19 )
14 Printer Parts
Printer parts
Side
a. Manual Pocket
Store printer manuals in this pocket.
b. Ethernet Port
Connect an Ethernet cable to this port. The lamp is lit if the Ethernet cable is connected correctly
and communication is possible between the computer and printer .
c. USB Port
Connect a USB cable to this port. The printer is compatible with Hi-Speed USB connections.
d. Carrying Handles
When carrying the printer , have three people hold it by these handles on the back at both ends.
e. Power Supply Connector
Connect the power cord to this connector .
Printer Parts 15
Printer parts
T op Cover (Inside)
a. Carriage
Moves the Printhead . The carriage serves a key role in printing. ( → P .17)
b. Carriage Shaft
The Carriage slides along this shaft.
c. Paper Retainer
Important in supplying the paper . This retainer holds paper as it is fed.
d. Platen
The Printhead moves across the platen to print. V acuum holes on the platen hold paper in place.
e. Borderless Printing Ink Grooves
For catching ink outside the edges of paper during borderless printing.
f. Linear Scale
The linear scale serves a key role in detecting the Carriage position. Be careful not to touch this
part when cleaning inside the T op Cover or clearing paper jams.
g. Cleaning Brush
When cleaning inside the printer under the T op Cover , use this brush to sweep away paper dust on
the Platen .
16 Printer Parts
Printer parts
Roll Cover (Inside)
a. Roll Holder
Load the roll on this holder .
b. Holder Stopper
Secure rolls on the Roll Holder with this part.
c. Roll Loading Slots
Slide the Roll Holder along these slots.
d. Roll Holder Slot
Load the Roll Holder into this holder slot.
Carriage
a. Angle Adjustment Lever
Use this lever to ne-tune the printer to correct misalignment of printed lines.
b. Printhead
The printhead is equipped with ink nozzles. The carriage serves a key role in printing.
c. Printhead Fixer Lever
Locks the Printhead Fixer Cover .
d. Printhead Fixer Cover
Holds the Printhead in place.
Printer Parts 17
Printer parts
Ink T ank Cover (Inside)
Left Side
Right Side
a. Ink T ank Lock Lever
A lever that locks the Ink T ank in place and protects it. Lift and press down
the lever when replacing an Ink T ank .
b. Ink Set Label
An Ink T ank that can be used in the printer is labeled with a white letter “J” in a black circle on the
side. When purchasing an Ink T ank , make sure a “J” is printed on the label. ( → P .622)
c. Ink Color Label
Load an Ink T ank that matches the color and name on this label.
d. Ink Lamp (Red)
Indicates the state of the Ink T ank as follows when the Ink T ank Cover is opened.
•On
The Ink T ank is installed correctly .
•Of f
No Ink T ank is installed, or the ink level detection function has been released.
•Flashing Slowly
Not much ink is left.
•Flashing Rapidly
There is no ink left.
e. Ink T ank
Cartridges of ink in various colors.
18 Printer Parts
Printer parts
Stand
a. Accessory Pocket
Stores printer accessories.
b. Output Stacker
Printed documents are ejected into the output tray .
c. Locking Caster
Lock to immobilize the caster .
Before moving the printer , always unlock all four casters. Moving the printer while casters are locked
may scratch the casters or the oor .
d. Adjustable Stopper
Pull out when using the output stacker in the extended position.
e. Paper Guide
Guides printed documents into the output stacker .
Printer Parts 19
Printer parts
Control Panel
a. Display Screen
Shows printer menus, as well as the printer status and messages.
b. Data Lamp (green)
•Flashing
During printing, the Data lamp ashes when the printer is receiving or processing print jobs.
Otherwise, this lamp ashes when the print job is paused or the printer is updating the rmware.
•Of f
There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is of f.
c. Message Lamp (orange)
•On
A warning message is displayed.
•Flashing
An error message is displayed.
•Of f
The printer is of f or is operating normally .
d. Power button (green)
T urns the printer on and of f. ( → P .24)
The Power button is lit when the printer is on or in Sleep mode.
e. Stop button
Cancels print jobs in progress and ends the ink drying period.
f. Navigate button
Enables you to check instructions for loading and removing paper or replacing ink tanks or
printheads, as well as other operations. ( → P .29)
g. Arrow buttons
•◄button
Press this button on the T ab Selection screen to move to another tab.
In menu items requiring numerical input, press this button to move to another digit.
•▲button
Press this button when viewing menus to display the next menu item or setting value.
•►button
Press this button on the T ab Selection screen to move to another tab.
In menu items requiring numerical input, press this button to move to another digit.
•▼button
Press this button when viewing menus to display the next menu item or setting value.
20 Printer Parts
Printer parts
h. OK button
Press this button on the T ab Selection screen to display the menu of the tab shown.
Pressing this button in menu items of each tab for which is displayed at left will move to the lower
level of the menu item, enabling you to execute menu commands or set menu values.
Also press this button if the Display Screen indicates to press the OK button.
i. Back button
Displays the screen before the current screen.
j. Menu button
Displays the T ab Selection screen . ( → P .49)
k. Load button
Press this button when loading or replacing paper .
( → P .106)
( → P .136)
l. Feed button
Pressing this button when rolls are loaded enables you to reposition the paper . ( → P .125)
m. Cut button
Pressing this button when rolls are loaded cuts the paper , if you have specied Automatic or Eject
in Cutting Mode in the Control Panel menu. ( → P .129)
n. Cut Sheet lamp (green)
Lit when sheets are selected as the paper source.
o. Roll Media lamp (green)
Lit when rolls are selected as the paper source.
Note
•T o recover from Sleep mode, any button can be pressed except the Power button.
Printer Parts 21
Control Panel
Control Panel
Control Panel
a. Display Screen
Shows printer menus, as well as the printer status and messages.
b. Data Lamp (green)
•Flashing
During printing, the Data lamp ashes when the printer is receiving or processing print jobs.
Otherwise, this lamp ashes when the print job is paused or the printer is updating the rmware.
•Of f
There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is of f.
c. Message Lamp (orange)
•On
A warning message is displayed.
•Flashing
An error message is displayed.
•Of f
The printer is of f or is operating normally .
d. Power button (green)
T urns the printer on and of f. ( → P .24)
The Power button is lit when the printer is on or in Sleep mode.
e. Stop button
Cancels print jobs in progress and ends the ink drying period.
f. Navigate button
Enables you to check instructions for loading and removing paper or replacing ink tanks or
printheads, as well as other operations. ( → P .29)
22 Printer Parts
Control Panel
g. Arrow buttons
•◄button
Press this button on the T ab Selection screen to move to another tab.
In menu items requiring numerical input, press this button to move to another digit.
•▲button
Press this button when viewing menus to display the next menu item or setting value.
•►button
Press this button on the T ab Selection screen to move to another tab.
In menu items requiring numerical input, press this button to move to another digit.
•▼button
Press this button when viewing menus to display the next menu item or setting value.
h. OK button
Press this button on the T ab Selection screen to display the menu of the tab shown.
Pressing this button in menu items of each tab for which is displayed at left will move to the lower
level of the menu item, enabling you to execute menu commands or set menu values.
Also press this button if the Display Screen indicates to press the OK button.
i. Back button
Displays the screen before the current screen.
j. Menu button
Displays the T ab Selection screen . ( → P .49)
k. Load button
Press this button when loading or replacing paper .
( → P .106)
( → P .136)
l. Feed button
Pressing this button when rolls are loaded enables you to reposition the paper . ( → P .125)
m. Cut button
Pressing this button when rolls are loaded cuts the paper , if you have specied Automatic or Eject
in Cutting Mode in the Control Panel menu. ( → P .129)
n. Cut Sheet lamp (green)
Lit when sheets are selected as the paper source.
o. Roll Media lamp (green)
Lit when rolls are selected as the paper source.
Note
•T o recover from Sleep mode, any button can be pressed except the Power button.
Printer Parts 23
Control Panel
T urning the Printer On and Off
T urning the printer on
1. Press the Power button to turn on the printer .
The printer will now start up.
After the Display Screen shows the Canon logo, Starting up... Please wait. is displayed.
2. The Power Lamp is lit when the printer nishes starting up, and the printer is now in Standby .
The printer will not go into Standby in the following situations. T ake the appropriate action.
•The T op Cover is open
Close the T op Cover .
•The Ink T ank Cover is open
Close the Ink T ank Cover .
•The Printhead is not installed
see “Replacing the Printhead”. (→P .633)
•An Ink T ank is not installed
see “Replacing Ink T anks”. (→P .623)
•If “ERROR” is shown on the Display Screen
(See "Error messages.")
•The Power Lamp and Message Lamp are not lit (even once), and nothing appears on the Display
Screen
Make sure the printer is plugged in correctly . Check the connection at the plug and electrical outlet.
•No paper is loaded
Load paper . ( → P .78) ( → P .81)
Important
•Starting the printer when it is connected via the USB cable to a Macintosh computer that is of f may
cause the computer to start up at the same time. T o prevent this, disconnect the USB cable before
starting the printer . Connecting the printer to the computer via a USB hub may solve this issue.
24 Printer Parts
Control Panel
T urning the printer off
Important
•Never disconnect the printer ’ s power supply or unplug it during a print job. This may damage the printer .
1. Make sure no print jobs are in progress.
If the Message Lamp is ashing, check the message on the Display Screen and take action as
necessary . (See "Error Messages.")
If the Data Lamp is ashing, the printer is receiving a print job. T urn of f the printer only after
printing is nished.
2. Hold down the Power button for more than a second.
After Shut Down.. Please W ait.. is shown on the Display Screen , the printer shuts of f.
Printer Parts 25
Control Panel
Control Panel Display
After the printer starts up, the T ab Selection screen is displayed.
Each of the four tabs presents status, menus, and error information related to the particular tab.
T ypes of tabs
The T ab Selection screen presents four tabs. Each tab is represented by an icon in the top row . Press
the ◄or ►button to access other tabs.
Paper tab A tab indicating status and showing menus related
to paper . Pressing the OK button when this tab is
highlighted will display the Paper Menu .
•T op line displayed
The paper icon is highlighted.
•Middle line displayed
Indicates the printer status and shows menu
names.
•Bottom line displayed
The rst and second lines display the paper type
and size.
Ink tab A tab indicating status and showing menus related
to ink. Pressing the OK button when this tab is
highlighted will display the Ink Menu .
•T op line displayed
The ink icon is highlighted.
•Middle line displayed
Indicates the printer status and shows menu
names.
•Bottom line displayed
Here, the remaining ink level is indicated.
( → P .628)
Job tab A tab indicating status and showing menus related to
print jobs. Pressing the OK button when this tab is
highlighted will display the Job Menu menu.
•T op line displayed
The job icon is highlighted.
•Middle line displayed
Indicates the printer status and shows menu
names.
Settings/Adj. tab A tab indicating status and showing menus related
to settings and adjustment. Pressing the OK button
when this tab is highlighted will display the Set./Adj.
Menu .
•T op line displayed
The settings/adjustment icon is highlighted.
•Middle line displayed
Indicates the printer status and shows menu
names.
•Bottom line displayed
Indicates the remaining maintenance cartridge
capacity .
26 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Printer status and modes
Printer status is classied according to the following ve modes.
Standby The printer is ready to receive jobs sent from the
computer . Jobs sent from the computer are printed
immediately .
Printing Paused Printing is paused on the printer . Any jobs sent from
the computer are held without being printed.
Printing Printing is in progress on the printer . Jobs sent from
the computer are printed after the current job. The
time left until printing is nished is indicated in the
upper-right corner of the screen. (V alues exceeding
10 hours are not shown.)
Sleep The printer is in power-saving mode. The printer
automatically enters Sleep mode to conserve power
when idle for a specic period (by default, ve
minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or
buttons are pressed while all covers are closed.
Y ou can specify the period before the printer enters
Sleep mode in the Sleep T imer menu. ( → P .49)
After entering Sleep mode from Standby mode,
the printer automatically recovers if print jobs are
received, and the jobs are printed.
Error The printer requires your attention. Any jobs sent
from the computer cannot be processed. The tab
related to the error is displayed.
For information about the display in the case of
multiple errors, see “Error message mode transition”.
Printer Parts 27
Control Panel
Mode transition
•Mode display
The printer mode is indicated as follows.
*1: The printer automatically enters Sleep mode when idle for a specic period (by default, ve
minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed.
However , it does not enter Sleep mode while error messages are displayed.
*2: In Sleep mode, any button can be pressed except the Power button to recover from Sleep mode.
Sleep mode is also terminated if a print job is received or a command is issued from RemoteUI.
•Error display
Mode transition during error display is as follows.
If multiple errors occur , tabs related to errors other than the error currently shown ash. Press the ◄
or ►button to access other tabs and check those errors. If multiple errors occur that are related to
the Job tab and Settings/Adj. tab , each error message is displayed for 4 seconds on each tab before
another message is shown.
28 Printer Parts
Control Panel
How to V iew Instructions W ith Navigate
Y ou can refer to instructions for loading paper , replacing ink tanks, and performing other operations on the
printer control panel.
1. Press the Navigate button.
2. Press ▲or ▼to select the desired navigation menu.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select V iew Op. Guide , and then press the OK button.
Instructions are now displayed.
■Example: Loading sheets
Printer Parts 29
Control Panel
Printer Menu Operations
The printer menu is classied into menu items available when no print job is in progress and menu items
only available during printing.
•Menu operations when no print job is in progress (→P .30)
•Menu operations during printing (→P .31)
Menu operations when no print job is in progress
T o view available menus organized on tabs, select a tab on the T ab Selection screen and press the OK
button.
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, pressing OK will not display menus.
Menus can be selected after you resolve the problem.
The following operations are available from the menu.
•Paper Menu
Paper menu settings
•Ink Menu
Ink menu operations
•Job Menu
Menu operations to manage print jobs
•Set./Adj. Menu
Menu operations for printer adjustment and maintenance
Settings related to HP-GL2 jobs
For a description of specic menu items available, see “Menu Settings”. (→P .49)
For instructions on selecting menu items, see “Menu Operations”. (→P .32)
Note
•By default, menu settings apply to all print jobs. However , for settings that are also available in the
printer driver , the values specied in the printer driver take priority .
30 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Menu operations during printing
T o display menus during printing, select a tab on the T ab Selection screen on the Control Panel , and then
press the OK button. Other menus are available after printing is nished.
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, pressing OK will not display menus.
Menus can be selected after you resolve the problem.
The following operations are available from the menu during printing.
•Ink Menu
Ink menu operations
•Job Menu
Menu operations to manage print jobs
•Set./Adj. Menu
Fine-tuning paper feeding
Display of printer-related information
For a description of specic menu items available during printing, see “Menu Settings (During Printing)”.
(→P .60)
For instructions on selecting menu items during printing, see “Menu Operations”. (→P .32)
Printer Parts 31
Control Panel
Menu Operations
T o view available menus organized on tabs, select a tab on the T ab Selection screen and press the OK
button. For details, see “Menu Settings”. (→P .49)
•Menus (when the Ink tab is selected and the OK button is pressed)
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, pressing OK will not display menus.
Menus can be selected after you resolve the problem.
Simply press buttons on the Control Panel to access menus on various tabs from the T ab Selection screen
and set or execute Menu items.
The following section describes menu operations and how they are presented in this User Manual .
•Accessing menus (→P .33)
•Specifying menu items (→P .34)
•Specifying numerical values (→P .34)
•Executing menu commands (→P .34)
32 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Accessing menus
Printer menus are grouped by function.
Menus are displayed with the upper line selected. Y ou can use the buttons on the Control Panel to access
each menu.
•Press Back to access a higher menu in the menu list, and press OK to access a lower one. If not all
menu items are displayed, hold down ▲or ▼to scroll through higher and lower menu items. Items you
select are highlighted.
The scroll bar at right indicates the current position in the overall menu.
•Lower menus are available if is displayed at right next to the second and subsequent rows. T o access
the lower menus, select the menu and press the OK button.
Printer Parts 33
Control Panel
Specifying menu items
Menu items can be set as follows.
1. Press ▲or ▼to select the desired setting, and then press the OK button.
After two seconds, the display reverts to the upper level menu.
Note
•If a conrmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, press the OK button. The
setting is applied, and the printer is now in Standby .
Specifying numerical values
Follow these steps to enter numbers. In this example, network settings items are entered.
1. Press the ◄or ►button to move to the next eld for input.
2. Press the ▲or ▼button to enter the value.
Note
•Hold down ▲or ▼to increase or decrease the value continuously .
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to complete the settings, and then press the OK button.
Note
•If a conrmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, press the OK button. The
setting is applied, and the printer is now in Standby .
Executing menu commands
Menu commands can be executed as follows.
1. Press ▲or ▼to select the action to execute, and then press the OK button.
The menu command is now executed.
34 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Menu Structure
The menu structure is organized by tabs, as follows. V alues at right indicated by an asterisk are the defaults.
•Paper Menu (→P .35)
•Ink Menu (→P .37)
•Job Menu (→P .38)
•Set./Adj. Menu (→P .39)
For instructions on menu operations, see “Menu Operations”. (→P .32)
For details on menu items, see “Menu Settings”. (→P .49)
Paper Menu
First Level
Second Level
Third Level Fourth Level
Load Paper Roll Paper (The type of paper is
displayed here.) ( *1 )
Cut Sheet (The type of paper is
displayed here.) ( *1 )
Eject Paper
Chg. Paper T ype ( *1 ) Roll Paper
Cut Sheet
Chg. Paper Size Sheet Size (The size of paper is
displayed here.) ( *2 )
Roll Length ( *3 )
Roll W idth ( *4 )
ManageRemainRoll Off *
On
Paper Details (The type of paper is
displayed here.) ( *1 )
Head Height Automatic *
Highest
High
Standard
Low
Lowest
Super Low
Skew Check Lv . High Accuracy
Standard *
Loose
Off
Cutting Mode Automatic
Eject
Manual
Cut Speed Fast
Printer Parts 35
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level Fourth Level
Standard
Slow
T rim Edge First Automatic
Off
On
CutDustReduct. Off
On
V acuumStrngth Automatic *
Strongest
Strong
Standard
W eak
W eakest
Scan W ait T ime Off
1 sec.
3 sec.
5 sec.
7 sec.
9 sec.
Roll DryingT ime Off
30 sec.
1 min.
3 min.
5 min.
10 min.
30 min.
60 min.
NearEnd RollMrgn 3mm
20mm
NearEnd Sht Mrgn 3mm
20mm
Bordless Margin Automatic
Fixed
W idth Detection Off
On *
36 Printer Parts
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level Fourth Level
Return Defaults
Paper Details
Keep Paper T ype Off *
On
*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide .
( → P .95) T ypes of paper in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) are
updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you update paper
information with the Media Conguration T ool . (See the Media Conguration T ool Guide (Windows) or
Media Conguration T ool Guide (Macintosh).)
*2: For information on the sizes of paper the printer supports, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P .100)
*3: A vailable only if ManageRemainRoll is On .
*4: A vailable only if W idth Detection is Off .
Ink Menu
First Level
Rep. Ink T ank
Head Cleaning A
Printer Parts 37
Control Panel
Job Menu
First Level
Second Level
Third Level Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Job Log (Choose from
information about
the latest three print
jobs.)
Document Name
User Name
Page Count
Job Status OK
CANCELED
Print Start T ime yyyy/mm/dd
hh:mm:ss
Print End T ime yyyy/mm/dd
hh:mm:ss
Print T ime xxxsec.
Print Size xxxxxxxxsq.mm
Media T ype
Interface USB
Network
Ink Consumed (The ink color is
displayed here.)
xxx.xxx ml
Print Job Log
Pause Print Off *
On
38 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Set./Adj. Menu
First Level
Second
Level
Third Level
Fourth
Level
Fifth Level Sixth Level
Seventh
Level
Eighth
Level
T est Print Nozzle
Check
Status
Print
Interface
Print
GL2 Set
Print
Paper
Details
Print Job
Log
Menu Map
Color
Palette
Adjust
Printer
Head Posi.
Adj.
Auto
(Standard)
Auto
(Advanced)
Manual ( *1 )
Head Inc.
Adj.
Feed
Priority
Adj.
Priority
Automatic
*
Print
Quality
Print
Length
Adj.
Quality ( *2 )
Auto
(Genuine
Ppr)
Auto
(Other
Paper)
Manual
Adjust
Length ( *3 )
Adjustment
Print
A:High
B:Standard/
Draft
Change
Settings
A:High
Printer Parts 39
Control Panel
First Level
Second
Level
Third Level
Fourth
Level
Fifth Level Sixth Level
Seventh
Level
Eighth
Level
B:Standard/
Draft
Adj. Fine
Feed ( *2 )
Mainte-
nance
Head
Cleaning
Head
Cleaning
A
Head
Cleaning
B
Nozzle
Check
Replace
P .head
Repl.
maint cart
Head Info Product
Name:
s/n:
Days
elapsed:
Count
[Mdot]:
GL2 Replot
GL2
BufferClear
GL2
Settings
Quality
Manager
Color
Mode
Monoch-
rome
Color
(CAD) 1 *
Color
(CAD) 2
Color
(CAD) 3
Color
(CAD) 4
Color
(CAD) 5
Print
Quality
Fast
Standard *
High
40 Printer Parts
Control Panel
First Level
Second
Level
Third Level
Fourth
Level
Fifth Level Sixth Level
Seventh
Level
Eighth
Level
Input
Resolution
600dpi *
300dpi
Print
(Economy)
Off *
On
Paper
Manager
Paper
Source
Automatic
*
Roll Paper
Cut Sheet
Margin 3mm
(Standard)
*
5mm
Conserve
Paper
Off *
On
Auto
Rotate
Off *
On
Line & Pen
Manager
Enable
merge
Off *
On
Pen Setup Select
Palette
Software *
Palette A
Palette B
Factory
Dene
Palette
Palette A (Select
the pen
number)
W idth (Indicates
the value of
W idth )
Color 0-255
Line
Attributes
No Setting
Circle
Setting
Printer Parts 41
Control Panel
First Level
Second
Level
Third Level
Fourth
Level
Fifth Level Sixth Level
Seventh
Level
Eighth
Level
Palette B (Select
the pen
number)
(Indicates
W idth ,
Color ,
and Line
Attributes )
(Specify
the values
of W idth ,
Color ,
and Line
Attributes )
Factory (Select
the pen
number)
(Indicates
W idth ,
Color ,
and Line
Attributes )
Reset
Palette
All Palette
Palette A
Palette B
Smoothing Software *
Smooth
Thicken
FineLines
Off *
On
Adjust
FaintLines
Off
On *
Processing
Option
W arning Off *
On
PageSize
Process1
Off *
On
PageSize
Process2
Off *
On
GL2 Set
Print
Interface
Setup
EOP T imer
( *8 )
10 sec.
30 sec.
1 min.
2 min.
5 min.
10 min. *
42 Printer Parts
Control Panel
First Level
Second
Level
Third Level
Fourth
Level
Fifth Level Sixth Level
Seventh
Level
Eighth
Level
30 min.
60 min.
TCP/IP ( *8 ) IPv4 IPv4 Mode Automatic
Manual *
Protocol
( *4 )
DHCP On
Off *
BOOTP On
Off *
RARP On
Off *
IPv4
Settings
( *9 )
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.
xxx
Subnet
Mask
xxx.xxx.xxx.
xxx
Default
G/W
xxx.xxx.xxx.
xxx
IPv6 IPv6
Support
On
Off *
IPv6 Stless
Addrs
On *
Off
DHCPv6 On
Off *
NetW are
( *8 )
NetW are On
Off *
Frame
T ype ( *5 )
Auto
Detect
Ethernet 2
Ethernet
802.2 *
Ethernet
802.3
Ethernet
SNAP
Printer Parts 43
Control Panel
First Level
Second
Level
Third Level
Fourth
Level
Fifth Level Sixth Level
Seventh
Level
Eighth
Level
Print
Service
( *5 )
Bindery
PServer
RPrinter
NDS
PServer *
NPrinter
AppleT alk
( *8 )
On
Off *
Ethernet
Driver ( *8 )
Auto
Detect
On *
Off
Comm.
Mode ( *6 )
Half Duplex
*
Full Duplex
Ethernet
T ype ( *6 )
10 Base-T *
100
Base-TX
1000
Base-T
Spanning
T ree
Not Use *
Use
MAC
Address
xxxxxxxxx
xxx
Interface
Print ( *8 )
Return
Defaults
( *8 )
System
Setup
Sleep
T imer
5 min. *
10 min.
15 min.
20 min.
30 min.
40 min.
50 min.
44 Printer Parts
Control Panel
First Level
Second
Level
Third Level
Fourth
Level
Fifth Level Sixth Level
Seventh
Level
Eighth
Level
60 min.
240 min.
Buzzer Off
On *
Contrast
Adj.
-4, -3, -2,
-1, 0*, +1,
+2, +3, +4
Date &
T ime ( *8 )
Date yyyy/mm/
dd ( *7 )
T ime hh:mm
Date
Format ( *8 )
yyyy/mm/
dd *
dd/mm/
yyyy
mm/dd/
yyyy
Language
*
T ime Zone
( *8 )
0:London
(GMT)
+1:Paris,
Rome
+2:Athens,
Cairo
+3:Moscow
+4:Eerevan,
Baku
Printer Parts 45
Control Panel
First Level
Second
Level
Third Level
Fourth
Level
Fifth Level Sixth Level
Seventh
Level
Eighth
Level
+5:
Islamabad
+6:Dacca
+7:Bangkok
+8:Hong
Kong
+9:T okyo,
Seoul
+10:
Canberra
+1 1New
Caledonia
+12:
W ellington
-12:
Eniwetok
-1 1:Midway
is.
-10:Hawaii
(AHST)
-9:Alaska
(AKST)
-8:Oregon
(PST)
-7:Arizona
(MST)
-6:T exas
(CST)
-5:NewY ork
(EST)
-4:Santiago
-3:Buenos
Aires
-2:
-1:Cape
V erde
Length
Unit
meter *
feet/inch
Detect
Mismatch
Pause
46 Printer Parts
Control Panel
First Level
Second
Level
Third Level
Fourth
Level
Fifth Level Sixth Level
Seventh
Level
Eighth
Level
W arning
None *
Paper Size
Basis
Roll
Selection
1
ISO A3
(297mm) *
300mm
Roll
Roll
Selection
2
10in.
(254mm) *
JIS B4
(257mm)
Keep
Paper Size
Off *
On
T rimEdge
Reload
Automatic
Off *
On
Rep.P .head
Print
Off
On *
Nozzle
Check
Frequency Standard *
1 page
W arning Off *
On
Use
RemoteUI
( *8 )
On *
Off
Reset
PaprSetngs
( *8 )
Prep.Move
Printer
Admin.
Menu ( *8 )
Change
Password
( *9 )
Init.Admin.
Pswd ( *9 )
Printer Parts 47
Control Panel
First Level
Second
Level
Third Level
Fourth
Level
Fifth Level Sixth Level
Seventh
Level
Eighth
Level
Printer Info Paper Info
Ink Info
Head Info
System
Info
Error Log
Other
Counter
*1: A vailable after you have used Auto(Advanced) in Head Posi. Adj. once.
*2: A vailable if Adj. Priority is Automatic or Print Quality .
*3: A vailable if Adj. Priority is Automatic or Print Length .
*4: Not displayed if IPv4 Mode is Manual .
*5: Not displayed if NetW are is Off .
*6: Not displayed if Auto Detect is On .
*7: Follows the setting in Date Format .
*8: V iewing and conguration is possible for administrators, and only viewing for other users.
*9: V iewing and conguration is possible for administrators only .
48 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Menu Settings
Menu items are as follows.
For instructions on selecting menu items, see “Menu Operations”. (→P .32)
For details on menu levels and values, see “Menu Structure”. (→P .35)
Paper Menu
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Load Paper Select sheets or rolls and load the paper .
Eject Paper Choose this item before removing loaded paper .
Chg. Paper T ype ( *1 ) Change the type of paper loaded. ( → P .1 10)
Chg. Paper Size Change the size of paper loaded. ( → P .1 12) ( → P .100)
ManageRemainRoll Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll
before you remove it. The printed barcode can
be used in managing the amount of roll paper left.
Choose Off if you prefer not to print the barcode.
( → P .126)
Head Height Adjust the Printhead height. ( → P .61 1)
Skew Check
Lv .
If you print on Japanese paper (washi) or other
handmade paper that has an irregular width, choose
Loose for a higher skew detection threshold, or
choose Off to disable skew detection. However , if
paper is loaded askew when detection is Off , note
that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur .
Cutting Mode Specify whether or not to cut with the standard
round-bladed cutter .
Choose Automatic to have the roll cut automatically
after printing. If you choose Manual , the paper will
not be cut after printing. Instead, a line will be printed
at the cut position.
Choose Eject if you prefer not to have documents
dropped immediately after printing, as when waiting
for ink to dry .
Cut Speed Choose the cutting speed. If you use adhesive paper ,
choosing Slow helps prevent adhesive from sticking
to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp.
T rim Edge First If a roll is loaded, the end of the paper will be cut.
Paper Details (The type
of paper is
displayed
here.)( *1 )
CutDustReduct. If you choose On , a line will be printed at the cut
position when paper cutting is selected. This option
reduces the amount of debris given of f after cutting.
It also helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the
cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you use adhesive
paper . ( → P .134)
Printer Parts 49
Control Panel
Setting Item Description, Instructions
V acuumStrngth Specify the level of suction that holds paper against
the Platen . ( → P .621)
Scan W ait T ime Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between
each scan in bidirectional printing, in consideration of
how quickly the ink dries. Note that printing will take
longer if you specify a wait time.
Roll
DryingT ime
Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each
sheet.
NearEnd
RollMrgn
Specify the minimum margin at the leading edge
of roll paper to ensure better printing quality at the
leading edge.
Note that if you choose 3mm , it may lower the
printing quality at the leading edge and af fect feeding
accuracy . The printed surface may be scratched,
and ink may adhere to the leading edge. It may also
cause the Platen to become soiled.
NearEnd Sht
Mrgn
Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to
ensure better printing quality at the leading edge.
Note that if you choose 3mm , it may lower the
printing quality at the leading edge and af fect feeding
accuracy . The printed surface may be scratched, and
ink may adhere to the leading edge.
Bordless
Margin
Adjust the margin during borderless printing.
Choose Automatic to have the printer automatically
detect the paper width and congure the margin
settings for borderless printing. If margins are
mistakenly created when Automatic is selected,
choose Fixed . In this case, the paper width is not
detected automatically , and the document is printed
without borders, using the margin settings required
by the printer .
W idth
Detection
Specify this option to print inside boundaries or in
other cases when specifying a particular starting
position for printing. ( → P .1 13)
Paper width and skew are not detected if you select
Off . If paper is loaded askew , note that paper jams or
Platen soiling may occur .
Paper Details (The type
of paper is
displayed
here.)( *1 )
Return
Defaults
Choose OK to restore Paper Details to the default
values.
Paper Details Print the paper settings as specied in Paper Details .
Keep Paper T ype Select On when printing on a particular type of paper
regularly . ( → P .1 10)
*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide . ( → P .95)
The types of paper indicated in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel )
are updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you update paper
information by using the Media Conguration T ool . (See Media Conguration T ool Guide (Windows) or
Media Conguration T ool Guide (Macintosh).)
50 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Ink Menu
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Rep. Ink T ank Replace the Ink T ank at this point. Follow the
instructions displayed to complete the required
procedure. ( → P .623)
Head Cleaning A Printhead cleaning options. ( → P .632)
Execute Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly
colored, or contains foreign substances.
Job Menu
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
Document
Name
Indicates the document name in the last print job.
User Name Indicates the name of the user who sent the print job.
Page Count Indicates the number of pages in the job.
Job Status Indicates the printing results.
Print Start T ime Indicates when the print job was started.
Print End T ime Indicates when the print job was nished.
Print T ime Indicates the time required to print the job.
Print Size Indicates the paper size in the print job.
Media T ype Indicates the type of paper in the print job.
Interface Indicates the interface used for the print job.
Job Log (Choose from
information
about the last
three print jobs.)
Ink Consumed Indicates a rough estimate of how much ink was
consumed per page.( *1 )
Print Job Log Print a record of print jobs, including the paper type
and size, amount of ink consumed, and so on. Ink
consumption indicates a rough estimate of how much
ink was consumed per page.( *1 )
Pause Print Choose On to stop printing.
*1: Indicates a rough estimate of how much ink was consumed per page. Actual ink consumption may
be dif ferent. The average margin of error for estimates calculated according to Canon measurement
conditions for ink costs is ±15%. Canon does not guarantee the accuracy of these estimates.
Estimates may vary depending on conditions of use. Calculation of these estimates does not include
ink consumed when cleaning printheads by forceful ejection of ink.
Printer Parts 51
Control Panel
Set./Adj. Menu
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Nozzle Check Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
Status Print Print information about the printer .
Interface Print Print interface settings information.
GL2 Set Print Print GL2 settings information.
Paper Details Print the paper settings as specied in Paper Details .
Print Job Log Print a record of print jobs, including the paper type
and size, amount of ink consumed, and so on. Ink
consumption indicates a rough estimate of how much
ink was consumed per page.( *1 )
Menu Map Print the menu structure.
T est
Print
Color Palette Print the GL2 color palette.
Auto(Standard) The printer prints and reads a test pattern for the
automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative
to the printing direction.
( → P .604)
Auto(Advanced) The printer prints and reads a test pattern for the
automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative
to the printing direction and spacing between nozzles
and colors.
( → P .604)
Head
Posi.
Adj.
Manual Print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead
alignment relative to the printing direction. Enter the
adjustment value manually based on the resulting
pattern.
( → P .606)
Head Inc. Adj. Print a test pattern for adjustment of the Printhead
orientation.
( → P .608)
Automatic
Print Quality
Adj.
Priority
Print Length
Specify exact paper feeding, if desired. Normally ,
select Automatic . Choose Print Quality for attractive
printing. Choosing Print Quality also makes banding
less noticeable. Choose Print Length if you prefer to
feed the paper an exact amount. However , note that
slight banding may occur in the direction of carriage
scanning when Print Length is selected.
Adjust
Printer
Feed
Priority
Adj.
Quality
Auto(GenuinePpr) Specify this mode with paper identied in the Paper
Reference Guide .
The printer prints and reads a test pattern for
automatic adjustment of the feed amount.
( → P .614)
52 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Auto(OtherPaper) Specify this mode with paper not in the Paper
Reference Guide .
The printer prints and reads a test pattern for
automatic adjustment of the feed amount. Note that
this function takes more time and consumes more ink
than Auto(GenuinePpr) .
( → P .614)
Adj.
Quality
Manual Use this mode with highly transparent media
or other paper for which Auto(GenuinePpr) or
Auto(OtherPaper) cannot be used.
Print a test pattern for adjustment of the feed amount
based on the type of paper .
( → P .616)
A:HighAdjust-
ment
Print
B:
Standard/
Draft
Print a test pattern for particular types of paper to
compensate for paper stretching or shrinkage, after
which you enter the amount of adjustment.
( → P .619)
A:High
Feed
Priority
Adjust
Length
Change
Settings
B:
Standard/
Draft
Displayed when you have selected Feed Priority >
Adj. Priority >Print Length .
Adjustment relative to the amount of stretching or
shrinkage of the current paper .
Enter either the adjustment results from
AdjustmentPrint or the discrepancy that you
measured (as a percentage).
For paper that tends to stretch, increase the feed
amount by choosing a higher adjustment value. For
paper that tends to shrink, decrease the feed amount
by choosing a lower adjustment value.
Adjust
Printer
Adj. Fine Feed Displayed when you have selected Feed Priority
>Adj. Priority >Automatic or Print Quality .
Fine-tune the feed amount manually during printing.
( → P .618)
Head Cleaning Clean the Printhead . ( → P .632)
Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly
colored, or contains foreign substances.
Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or
if printing is not improved by Head Cleaning A .
Nozzle Check Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
Replace P .head When replacing the Printhead , choose Y es and follow
the instructions on the screen.
( → P .633)
Not displayed during a warning message that the
remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low .
Repl. maint cart When replacing the Maintenance Cartridge , choose
Y es and follow the instructions on the screen.
( → P .639)
Mainte-
nance
Head Info Indicates information about the printhead.
GL2 Replot Print the previous GL2 print job again.
Printer Parts 53
Control Panel
Setting Item Description, Instructions
GL2 BufferClear Clear the print data in the replot buf fer .
Monochrome Print in monochrome.
Color (CAD) 1 Print in standard colors.
Color (CAD) 2 Print in brighter colors.
Color (CAD) 3 Print emulating the following printers, in colors
resembling colors produced by these printers: Canon
iPF500, iPF600, iPF700, iPF510, iPF610, iPF710,
iPF605, iPF720, iPF810, and iPF820.( *2 )
Color (CAD) 4 Print emulating the HP Designjet 500/800, in colors
resembling colors produced by these printers.( *2 )
Color
Mode
Color (CAD) 5 Print emulating the HP Designjet 1000, in colors
resembling colors produced by this printer .( *2 )
Print Quality Choose the print quality .
Input Resolution Choose the printer input resolution, 600dpi or 300dpi .
Quality
Manager
Print (Economy) Although printing quality is diminished, less ink is
consumed than in regular printing. Select On to
conserve ink.
Paper Source Choose the source of paper for HP-GL/2 printing.
Margin Specify the margin around paper . The margin for the
trailing edge of sheets is 23 mm (0.9 in).
However , if you have specied the leading margin in
Paper Details , the value in Paper Details has priority .
Conserve Paper Conserves paper when printing.
Paper
Manager
Auto Rotate If the long side of an original is shorter than the roll
width, the original is automatically rotated 90 degrees
to conserve paper . Similarly , if the long side of an
original in landscape orientation is longer than the roll
width and the short side is shorter than the roll width,
the original is repositioned to t on the paper .
HP R TL print jobs are not rotated. Because HP R TL
images are not rotated even if the paper is rotated 90
degrees, images may be cut of f or the blank paper
may be ejected. In this case, set Auto Rotate to Off .
Enable merge Specify whether to merge or print over colors where
lines overlap.
Choose Off to print the second line over the rst.
Choose On to merge all overlapping colors.
GL2
Settings
Line
& Pen
Manager
Pen
Setup
Select Palette As pen values, choose Software ,Palette A ,Palette
B, or Factory .
Choose Software to print according to software
settings. Choose Palette A or Palette B to print using
the value specied in Dene Palette .
54 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Dene Palette Specify the W idth ,Color , and Line Attributes in
the palette Pen no. . Choose Factory to conrm the
values when Factory is selected in Select Palette .
In Line Attributes , choose No Setting or Circle
Setting as the processing for the ends and junctions
of lines.
•If you choose No Setting
•If you choose Circle Setting
Pen
Setup
Reset Palette Restore Dene Palette to the default palette settings.
Smoothing Choose whether to print arcs as smooth curved lines
or as multiple connected line segments.
•If you choose Software
Operation is determined by the application. If
nothing is specied by the application, the result is
as shown in the gure.
Note: By default, this is a 72-sided gure
•If you choose Smooth
ThickenFineLines Select On to print ne lines more distinctly .
Line
& Pen
Manager
AdjustFaintLines If ne lines are printed in colors that do not match
the colors of other shapes, selecting Off may help
produce the expected results. However , lines in some
colors may appear broken.
W arning Select On to have any GL2-related warnings
displayed.
GL2
Settings
Process-
ing
Option
PageSizeProcess1 Normally , the area available for printing excludes
a margin required by the printer , and images are
positioned accordingly . Selecting On in this setting
eliminates any misalignment of the printing position if
the image itself includes a border .
Printer Parts 55
Control Panel
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Process-
ing
Option
PageSizeProcess2 Selecting On will determine the paper size based on
the image rendering area.
GL2
Settings
GL2 Set Print Print GL2 settings information.
EOP T imer Specify the timeout period before cancellation of print
jobs that cannot be received by the printer .
IPv4 Mode Choose whether the printer IP address is congured
automatically or a static IP address is entered
manually .
DHCP
BOOTP
Protocol
RARP
Specify the protocol used to congure the IP address
automatically .
IP
Address
Subnet
Mask
IPv4
IPv4
Settings
Default
G/W
Specify the printer network information when using
a static IP address.
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer , as well
as the network subnet mask and default gateway .
IPv6 Support Specify whether to connect via IPv6.
IPv6 StlessAddrs Specify whether a IPv6 stateless address is used.
TCP/IP
IPv6
DHCPv6 Specify whether DHCPv6 settings are used.
NetW are Specify the NetW are protocol. T o apply your changes,
choose Register Setting .
Frame T ype Specify the frame type to use.
NetW are
Print Service Choose the print service.
AppleT alk Specify whether to use the AppleT alk protocol. T o
apply your changes, choose Register Setting .
Auto Detect Specify the communication method. T o apply your
changes, choose Register Setting .
Choose On for automatic conguration of the LAN
communication protocol. Choose Off to use settings
values of Comm.Mode and Ethernet T ype .
Comm.Mode Choose the LAN communication method.
Ethernet T ype Choose the LAN transfer rate.
Spanning T ree Choose whether spanning-tree packets are supported
over the LAN.
Ethernet
Driver
MAC Address Indicates the MAC address.
Interface Print Print interface settings information.
Interface
Setup
Return Defaults Choose OK to restore Interface Setup settings to
the default values.
56 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Sleep T imer Specify the period before the printer enters sleep
mode.
Buzzer Choose On for the buzzer to sound in case of errors.
Contrast Adj. Adjust the Display Screen contrast level.
Date Set the current date.Date &
T ime
T ime Set the current time. A vailable only if the Date setting
is specied.
Date Format Specify the date format.
Language Specify the language used on the Display Screen .
T ime Zone Specify the time zone. T ime zone options indicate a
main city in this time zone and the dif ference from
Greenwich Mean T ime.
Length Unit Choose the unit of measurement when roll length
is displayed. Change the unit displayed for the
remaining amount of roll paper .
Detect Mismatch Specify printing behavior if the type and size of paper
specied in the printer menu does not match the type
and size in the printer driver .
Choose Pause to have printing paused under these
circumstances. Choose W arning to continue printing
after notication. Choose None to continue printing
without notication.
Roll Selection 1 If roll size detection is activated, choose whether ISO
A3 (297mm) or 300mm Roll is applied when a roll of
an intermediate width is detected.
Paper
Size
Basis
Roll Selection 2 If roll size detection is activated, choose whether
10in. (254mm) or JIS B4 (257mm) is applied when a
roll of an intermediate width is detected.
System
Setup
Keep Paper Size Choose On to use the paper size setting as the basis
for printing instead of other settings. The margin
setting of the printer menu will be used instead of
the margin setting of the printer driver if the latter
is smaller , which may prevent text or images in the
margin from being printed.
Printer Parts 57
Control Panel
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Keep Paper Size Choose Off to give priority to margin settings. The
larger value is used if the margin specied in the
printer driver does not match the margin in the printer
menu
T rimEdge Reload Specify whether to trim the leading edge of the
currently retracted roll when the roll is advanced. Cut
the edge if you are concerned about any marks left
on the roll when the roll is left in the retracted position.
Specify On to have rolls cut when printing begins after
Sleep mode or when the power is restored. Selecting
Automatic will trim the edge when the roll has been
in the retracted position for two days or more.
Rep.P .head Print Choose On to have the printer automatically execute
the Advanced Adj. operations after you replace the
Printhead .
( → P .604)
Nozzle Check In Frequency , specify the timing for automatic
checks of nozzle clogging. Choose Standard to have
the printer adjust the timing for checks based on the
frequency of nozzle use. Choose 1 page to check
once per page.
Select W arning >On to display warnings if the
nozzles clog during printing.
Use RemoteUI Choosing Off prohibits access from RemoteUI.
Settings can only be congured from the control
panel.
System
Setup
Reset PaprSetngs Restores settings that you have changed with Media
Conguration T ool to the default values.
Prep.MovePrinter Select this option when transferring the printer to
another location. Follow the instructions displayed to
complete the required procedure.
( → P .651)
Not displayed during a warning message that the
remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low .
Admin.
Menu
Change Password By setting a password, you can restrict menu display
and conguration as follows. Y ou can input between
0 and 9999999.
•V iewing and conguration by administrators only
IPv4 Settings
Change Password
Init.Admin.Pswd
58 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Change Password
•V iewing and conguration by administrators, and
only viewing by other users
Interface Setup settings (except IPv4 Settings )
Date & T ime
Date Format
T ime Zone
Use RemoteUI
Reset PaprSetngs
Admin.
Menu
Init.Admin.Pswd Choose OK to restore the Admin. Menu password to
the default values.
Paper Info Indicates the current paper size, type, and related
printer settings.
Ink Info Indicates ink levels and maintenance cartridge
capacity .
Head Info Indicates the model name, serial number , number of
days used, and dot count of the current printhead.
System Info Indicates the rmware version, serial number , and
interface information.
Error Log Indicates the most recent error messages (up to ve).
Printer
Info
Other Counter Indicates the total printing volume of the printer .
*1: Indicates a rough estimate of how much ink was consumed per page. Actual ink consumption may
be dif ferent. The average margin of error for estimates calculated according to Canon measurement
conditions for ink costs is ±15%. Canon does not guarantee the accuracy of these estimates.
Estimates may vary depending on conditions of use. Calculation of these estimates does not include
ink consumed when cleaning printheads by forceful ejection of ink.
*2: It is not possible to match the colors and image quality produced by the specied printer exactly .
Printer Parts 59
Control Panel
Menu Settings (During Printing)
Menu items are described in the following tables.
For instructions on selecting menu items, see “Menu Operations”. (→P .32)
For details on menu levels and values, see “Menu Structure”. (→P .35)
Ink Menu
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Rep. Ink T ank Replace the Ink T ank at this point. Follow the instructions displayed to
complete the required procedure. ( → P .623)
Head Cleaning A Clean the Printhead . ( → P .632)
Execute Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains
foreign substances.
Job Menu
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Document Name Indicates the document name in the last
print job.
User Name Indicates the name of the user who sent
the print job.
Page Count Indicates the number of pages in the job.
Job Status Indicates the printing results.
Print Start T ime Indicates when the print job was started.
Print End T ime Indicates when the print job was nished.
Print T ime Indicates the time required to print the job.
Print Size Indicates the paper size in the print job.
Media T ype Indicates the type of paper in the print job.
Interface Indicates the interface used for the print
job.
Job Log (Choose from
information about
the last three print
jobs.)
Ink Consumed Indicates a rough estimate of how much
ink was consumed per page.( *1 )
Print Job Log Print a record of print jobs, including
the paper type and size, amount of ink
consumed, and so on. Ink consumption
indicates a rough estimate of how much
ink was consumed per page.( *1 )
Pause Print Choose On to stop printing.
*1: Indicates a rough estimate of how much ink was consumed per page. Actual ink consumption may
be dif ferent. The average margin of error for estimates calculated according to Canon measurement
conditions for ink costs is ±15%. Canon does not guarantee the accuracy of these estimates.
Estimates may vary depending on conditions of use. Calculation of these estimates does not include
ink consumed when cleaning printheads by forceful ejection of ink.
60 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Set./Adj. Menu
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Adj. Fine Feed Displayed when you have selected Feed Priority
>Adj. Priority >Automatic or Print Quality .
Fine-tune the feed amount manually .
Paper Info Indicates the current paper size, type, and related
printer settings.
Ink Info Indicates ink levels and maintenance cartridge
capacity .
Head Info Indicates the model name, serial number , number of
days used, and dot count of the current printhead.
System Info Indicates the rmware version, serial number , and
interface information.
Error Log Indicates the most recent error messages (up to ve).
Printer Info
Other Counter Indicates the total printing volume of the printer .
Printer Parts 61
Control Panel
Status Print
Y ou can print a Status Print report indicating the current status of the printer .
With Status Print , information is printed regarding the printer rmware version, various settings, and the
status of consumables.
Printing Status Print reports
1. Load paper .
If using sheets, load paper of A4/Letter size. Y ou will need at least two sheets.
2. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select Settings/Adj. tab
( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select T est Print , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Status Print , and then press the OK button.
Checking the information in Status Print reports
The following information is included in Status Print reports.
Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxxx Status Print Printer model
Firm Firmware V ersion
Boot Boot ROM V ersion
MIT(DBF) MIT Database Format V ersion
MIT(DB) MIT Database V ersion
S/N Printer serial number
Date Indicates when the status print report was printed.
Paper Menu
Roll Media T ype
Cut Sheet T ype
ManageRemainRoll
Keep Paper T ype
Information on the loaded paper .
62 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Ink Menu Ink-related information.
MC Maintenance Cartridge capacity
(%)
C, M, Y , MBK, MBK2, BK Ink levels.
The remaining ink is displayed in a
ve-level scale.
Set./Adj. Menu
System Setup
System settings.
Sleep T imer
Buzzer
Contrast Adj.
Date Format
Language
T ime Zone
Length Unit
Detect Mismatch
Paper Size Basis
Roll Selection 1
Roll Selection 2
Printer system
settings, as well as
settings regarding
warnings and errors.
Keep Paper Size
T rimEdge Reload
Current
paper-related
settings.
Rep.P .head Print Settings after a
test pattern was
printed following
head replacement.
T imingNozzle Check
W arning
Nozzle-check
settings.
Use RemoteUI Settings used by
RemoteUI.
Printer Info
Error Log
The past ve error
codes.
HEAD LOT NUMBER
LOT
Printhead lot number .
P AR TS ST A TUS
COUNTER xx
Utilization status of
replacement parts that
require servicing.
Printer Parts 63
Control Panel
COUNTER
CUTTER
MEDIA
LIFE TTL
LIFE ROLL
LIFE CUTSHEET
MEDIA 1-7,OTHER
NAME
TTL
ROLL
CUTSHEET
AFTER INST ALLA TION
Utilization status of the
cutter , media, and other
items (indicating how
much they have been
used).
64 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Printing Interface Setting Reports
Y ou can print an Interface Print report indicating the current interface settings values of the printer .
Interface Print reports indicate settings values for TCP/IP , NetW are, and other settings.
Printing Interface Print reports
1. Load the paper .
If using sheets, load paper A4/Letter-sized, you will need at least three sheets.
2. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select T est Print , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Interface Print , and then press the OK button.
Conrming Interface Print information
The following information is included in the Interface Print report.
Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxxx Interface Print Printer model
Firm Firmware V ersion
Boot Boot ROM V ersion
MIT(DBF) MIT Database Format V ersion
MIT(DB) MIT Database V ersion
S/N Printer serial number
Date The date when the interface setup print report was
printed.
Printer Parts 65
Control Panel
EOP T imer Sets the elapsed time between
receiving last data and canceling
printing.
Frame T ype
Use DHCP
Use BOOTP
Use RARP
Enable DNS Dynamic Update
Use Zeroconf Function
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
LPD Printing
IPP Printing
IPP Printer URI
RA W Printing
Raw Mode Bi-direction
FTP Printing
Use Discovery
Scope
SMTP Server Address
Primary DNS Server Address
Secondary DNS Server Address
DNS Host Name
DNS Domain Name
MulticastDNS ServiceName
SNMPv1
TCP/IPv4
SNMPv3
IPv4 settings values.
66 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Use IPv6
Stateful Address
Prex Length
Primary DNS Server
Address
Use DHCPv6
Secondary DNS Server
Address
Stateless Address 1
Prex Length 1
Stateless Address 2
Prex Length 2
Stateless Address 3
Prex Length 3
Stateless Address 4
Prex Length 4
Stateless Address 5
Prex Length 5
Stateless Address 6
Use a stateless address
Prex Length 6
Link-Local AddressUse a link-local Address
Prex Length
IP Address
Prex Length
Default Router Address
Prex Length
Primary DNS Server
Address
Use a manual address
Secondary DNS Server
Address
DNS Host NameUse the same host name
and domain name as IPv4
DNS Domain Name
Perform dynamic updating of stateful addresses
Dynamically update the stateless address
TCP/IPv6
Dynamically update the manual address
IPv6 settings values.
Printer Parts 67
Control Panel
Frame T ype
IPX External Network Number
Node Number
Print Application
File Server Name
Print Server Name
Print Server Password
Bindery Pserver(*1)
Polling Interval
Print Server NameRPrinter(*1)
Printer Number
T ree Name
Context Name
Print Server Name
Print Server Password
NDS Pserver(*1)
Polling Interval
Print Server Name
NetW are
Nprinter(*1)
Printer Number
NetW are settings values.
Phase T ype
Name
Network Number
AppleT alk
Zone
AppleT alk settings
values.
Physical Interface
T ransmission Rate
MAC Address
Auto Detect
Communication
Ethernet T ype
Spanning T ree
Network Interface
Use the Jumbo Frame Function
Settings values regarding
the communication path
used for sending and
receiving messages.
*1: Only items congured in Print Application are printed.
68 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Checking Instructions During Printer Operations
Y ou can refer to instructions on the printer control panel when loading paper , replacing ink tanks, or performing
other operations.
How to view instructions
Once you complete an action described in the instructions, the printer detects the action and switches to the
next instruction screen.
In the case of actions the printer cannot detect, instruction screens are switched every four seconds, and
the sequence of operations is shown repeatedly .
When all actions in the sequence are nished, the instruction screen for the next step is displayed.
■Example: Ink tank replacement
Note
•During a continuous display of instructions, you can press the ◄button to pause the instructions
on the current screen.
Press the ◄or ►button to display the previous or next screens. If you do not press the ◄or ►button
within 30 seconds, continuous display is resumed.
Press the OK button to display the instruction screen for the next step.
Printer Parts 69
Optional accessories
Optional accessories
Roll Holder Set
Load a roll on the roll holder and then load the holder in the printer . The Roll Holder in the Roll Holder Set RH2-33 is
for use with both 2-inch and 3-inch paper cores. Use the correct attachment for the particular paper core. ( → P .103)
•Roll Holder Set RH2-33
•Roll Holder (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores)
•Attachments
Using the 2-Inch Paper
Core Attachment
Using the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment
2-Inch Paper Core Attachment 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment
L
3-Inch Paper Core Attachment
R
70 Printer Parts
Printer Specications
Printer Specications
Specications
Important
•This information is subject to change as the printer is updated.
•The following values may vary depending on the operating environment.
Printer
Power supply 100-120 V AC (50/60 Hz), 220-240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
During operation 140 W max.
Sleep mode 100-120 V : 5 W max.
220-240 V : 6 W max.
Power consumption
Of f 1 W max. ( *1 )
During operation (sound
pressure level/L W Ad)
Approx. 50 dB (A) (6.6 bels)Operating noise ( *2 )
Standby 35 dB (A) max.
T emperature 15-30°C (59-86°F)Operating environment
Humidity 10-80%, non-condensing
Dimensions (W × D × H) Printer and Stand (with
Output Stacker open)
1,304×870×1,062 mm (51.3×34.3×41.8 in)
W eight Printer and Stand (not
including the Printhead
and ink tanks)
Approx. 62.9 kg (138.7 lb)
Space for installation (W
× D × H)
Printer only 1,704×1,470×1,362 mm (67.1×57.9×53.6 in)
Applicable standards International Energy Star Program, Law on
Promoting Green Purchasing, Eco Mark, GPN,
RoHS, Eco Declaration, WEEE, U.S. presidential
directives
*1: The printer uses a trace amount of power even when turned of f. T o stop all power consumption,
turn of f the printer and unplug the power cord.
*2: Calculation based on ISO 7779. Operating conditions: On the Main sheet of the printer driver , Media
T ype > Plain Paper , Advanced Settings >Print Priority >Line Drawing/T ext , and Print Quality >
Standard .
Printing performance
Print method Bubblejet
Maximum resolution 2400 dpi horizontally ( *1 ) × 1200 dpi vertically
Printhead PF-04
Number of nozzles MBK: 5,120; others: 2,560 per color
*1: Prints with a minimum 1/2400 inch dot pitch between ink droplets.
Printer Parts 71
Printer Specications
Interface
Format Internal port
Mode Full-speed (12 Mbps), high-speed (480 Mbps), bulk transfer
USB 2.0 ( *1 )
Connector Series B (4-pin)
Format Internal port
Specication IEEE 802.3 10Base-T , IEEE 802.3u
100Base-TX/Auto-Negotiation, IEEE
802.3ab1000Base-T/Auto-Negotiation, IEEE 802.3x
Full Duplex
Ethernet
Protocols IPX/SPX (Netware 4.2, 5.1, 6.0), SNMP , TCP/IP , AppleT alk,
HTTP
*1: Use in USB 2.0 High Speed mode requires the following environment:
•Computer: USB 2.0 High-Speed-compatible
•Operating system: Windows V ista/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2003/Windows
XP/ Windows 2000 or Mac OS X ver . 10.3.9 or later
•USB 2.0 driver: Microsoft USB 2.0 driver (available from Windows Update or the Service Pack.)
•USB cable: Certied USB 2.0 cable
Ink
MBK Ink T ank ( Matte Black Ink , or
black ink for matte paper)
Pigment ink PFI-102MBK
BK Ink T ank ( Black Ink ) Dye ink PFI-102BK
C Ink T ank ( Cyan Ink ) Dye ink PFI-102C
M Ink T ank ( Magenta Ink ) Dye ink PFI-104M
Ink T ank
Y Ink T ank ( Y ellow Ink ) Dye ink PFI-102Y
Capacity 130 ml (4.4  oz) per
color ( *1 )
*1: The provided Starter Ink T anks contain 90 ml (3.0  oz) each.
72 Printer Parts
Printer Specications
Paper ( *1 )
Rolls 254.0-914.4 mm (10-36 in)Paper width
Sheets 203.2-917.0 mm (8-36.1 in)
Rolls 203.2( *2 )-18,000 mm (8-708.7 in)Length of one page
Sheets 279.4-1,600 mm (1 1-63 in)
Rolls 0.07-0.8 mm (0.0028-0.031 in)Thickness
Sheets 0.07-0.8 mm (0.0028-0.031 in)
Roll width 36-in. Roll (914.4mm) ,ISO A0/A1 Roll (841.0mm) ,30-in. Roll
(762.0mm) ,JIS B1/B2 Roll (728.0mm) ,24-in. Roll (609.6mm) ,
ISO A1/A2 Roll (594.0mm) ,JIS B2/B3 Roll (515.0mm) ,17-in.
Roll (431.8mm) ,ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm) ,16-in. Roll
(406.4mm) ,14-in. Roll (355.6mm) ,300mm Roll (300.0mm) ,
ISO A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm) ,JIS B4 Roll (257.0mm) , and 10-in.
Roll (254.0mm)
Paper Size
Sheets ISO A0 ,ISO A1 ,ISO A2+ ,ISO A2 ,ISO A3+ ,ISO A3 ,ISO A4 ,
ISO B1 ,ISO B2 ,ISO B3 ,ISO B4 ,JIS B1 ,JIS B2 ,JIS B3 ,
JIS B4 ,34"x44" (ANSI E) ,28"x40" (ANSI F) ,22"x34"(ANSI
D) ,17"x22"(ANSI C) ,13"x19" (Super B) ,1 1"x17" (Ledger) ,
Legal (8.5"x14") ,Letter (8.5"x1 1") ,36"x48" (ARCH E) ,
30"x42" (ARCH E1) ,26"x38" (ARCH E2) ,27"x39" (ARCH
E3) ,24"x36" (ARCH D) ,18"x24" (ARCH C) ,12"x18" (ARCH
B) ,9"x12" (ARCH A) ,DIN C0 ,DIN C1 ,DIN C2 ,DIN C3 ,DIN
C4 ,20"x24" ,18"x22" ,14"x17" ,12"x16" ,10"x12" ,10"x15" ,
US Photo 16"x20" ,Poster 20"x30" ,Poster 30"x40" ,13"x22" ,
and Poster 300x900mm
Normal size Printable area
•Rolls
3 mm (0.12 in) from each side
•Sheets
3 mm (0.12 in) from the top, 23 mm (0.91 in) from the bottom,
and 3mm (0.12 in) from the left and right sides
For information on the recommended print area, see “Print
Area”. (→P .75)
Print area
Borderless printing
( *3 )
Printable area (rolls)
0 mm from the top, 0 from the bottom, and 0 mm from the left
and right sides
Supported width for borderless printing 36-in. Roll (914.4mm) ,ISO A0/A1 Roll (841.0mm) ,JIS B1/B2
Roll (728.0mm) ,24-in. Roll (609.6mm) ,ISO A1/A2 Roll
(594.0mm) ,JIS B2/B3 Roll (515.0mm) ,17-in. Roll (431.8mm) ,
ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm) ,14-in. Roll (355.6mm) ,300mm
Roll (300.0mm) ,ISO A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm) ,JIS B4 Roll
(257.0mm) , and 10-in. Roll (254.0mm)
*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide ( → P .95)
*2: When supplying paper , use a roll approximately 1,000 mm (1,093.6 yd) or longer .
*3: Printing may not be possible in some cases, depending on the type and size of paper .
Printer Parts 73
Printer Specications
Output stacker capacity , in sheets
Regular position 1
Extended position ( *1 ) 20
*1: For information on types of paper you can use with the stacker in Extended position , refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . ( → P .95)
Options
Roll Holder Set RH2-33
74 Printer Parts
Printer Specications
Print Area
A margin required by the printer is added with respect to the size of paper loaded in the printer . Except in
borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to the paper size minus the space for this margin.
Note
•Printable Area: The area that can be printed.
•There is no margin (that is, a margin of 0 mm) during borderless printing on rolls.
•Recommended Print Area: W e recommend printing within this area.
•T o print so that your original matches the print area exactly , use an oversized paper size that includes
the required margin. ( → P .219)
Margins of Printable Area Margins of Recommended Print Area
T op Edge Bottom Edge
Sides
T op Edge Bottom Edge
Sides
Sheets 3 mm (0.12 in)
23 mm (0.91
in)
3 mm (0.12 in)
20 mm (0.79
in)
23 mm (0.91
in)
5 mm (0.20 in)
Rolls
0/3 mm (0/0.12
in)
0/3 mm (0/0.12
in)
0/3 mm (0/0.12
in)
20 mm (0.79
in)
5 mm (0.20 in) 5 mm (0.20 in)
Sheets
•Printable Area
a margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on top, 23 mm (0.91 in) on bottom, and 3 mm (0.12 in) on left and right
sides is required.
•Recommended Print Area
A margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) on top, 23 mm (0.91 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right
sides is required.
Rolls
•Printable Area
A margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on all sides is required. During borderless printing, the margin on all sides
is 0 mm. For information on paper compatible with borderless printing, see the Paper Reference
Guide . ( → P .95)
•Recommended Print Area
A margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) on top, 5 mm (0.20 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right
sides is required.
Printer Parts 75
Printing procedure
Basic Printing W orkow
Printing procedure
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets
The printer supports both rolls and sheets.
This section introduces the main features of each, as well as the main printing methods available. Select rolls
or sheets to suit your particular printing application.
Note
•For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. ( → P .95)
•A variety of other ways to print are available besides those introduced here. Choose the printing
method that suits your particular printing application, referring to "W orking With V arious Print Jobs" and
"Enhanced Printing Options" from the table of contents.
Roll printing
Media in spooled rolls is generally called Roll Media . Rolls are loaded on the Roll Holder , which are in
turn loaded in the printer .
Rolls can be used to print large photos or create posters or banners that cannot be printed on regular sheets.
•Large-format printing
Easily print vertical or horizontal banners from familiar applications such as Microsoft Of ce applications.
( → P .253)
•Borderless printing
Print without a margin (border) around posters or photos.
( → P .232)
( → P .239)
( → P .225)
•Banner printing
Y ou can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
( → P .275)
•90-degree rotation before printing
Originals in portrait orientation are rotated 90 degrees when possible to use paper more ef ciently .
( → P .301)
•Enlarged/reduced printing
Y ou can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing.
( → P .201)
( → P .207)
( → P .213)
•Free Layout function
Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet
programs, and so on) next to each other .
( → P .269)
76 Basic Printing W orkow
Printing procedure
Sheet printing
Sheets refer to individual sheets of paper .
Insert the sheet between the Platen and the Paper Retainer .
•Enlarged/reduced printing
Y ou can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing.
( → P .201)
( → P .213)
•Free Layout function
Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet
programs, and so on) next to each other .
( → P .269 )
Basic Printing W orkow 77
Printing procedure
Loading and Printing on Rolls
These are the basic steps for loading and printing on rolls.
Follow these steps to load and print on rolls.
Note
•For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see “Paper Sizes” or the Paper Reference Guide .
( → P .100) ( → P .95)
•If you prefer to wait for the ink to dry after printing and simply eject the document, you can deactivate
automatic cutting and cut the paper manually . ( → P .129)
1. T urn the printer on. ( → P .24)
2. Load the roll on the Roll Holder . ( → P .103)
78 Basic Printing W orkow
Printing procedure
3. Load the roll in the printer . ( → P .106)
4. Select the type of paper . ( → P .1 10)
Note
•If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On , specify
the roll length after the type of paper . ( → P .1 12)
Basic Printing W orkow 79
Printing procedure
5. Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.
•Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (→P .86)
•Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (→P .88)
6. Send the print job.
•Printing in Windows (→P .83)
•Printing in Mac OS X (→P .84)
The printer now starts printing the print job.
80 Basic Printing W orkow
Printing procedure
Loading and Printing on Sheets
These are the basic steps for loading sheets and then printing.
Follow the steps below to load and print on sheets.
Note
•For details on supported types and sizes of paper , see “Paper Sizes” or the Paper Reference Guide .
( → P .100) ( → P .95)
1. T urn the printer on. ( → P .24)
2. Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.
•Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (→P .86)
•Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (→P .88)
3. Send the print job.
•Printing in Windows (→P .83)
•Printing in Mac OS X (→P .84)
Basic Printing W orkow 81
Printing procedure
4. Load the sheet. ( → P .136)
The printer now starts printing the print job.
82 Basic Printing W orkow
Printing procedure
Printing in W indows
Print from the application menu.
Important
•The Windows printer driver can be used in the following versions of Windows.
•Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)
•Windows XP (Home Edition or Professional)
•Windows Server 2003 (Standard Edition)
•Windows V ista
•Windows Server 2008
•W e recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while
printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and af fect printing quality .
1. In the source application, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing
conditions.
2. After conrming that the printer is selected in the dialog box, click Print or OK to start printing.
Note
•The appearance of the dialog box varies depending on the software application. In most cases, the
dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer , specify the range of
pages, number of copies, and so on.
Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application
Note
•If another printer is selected, select the printer you want to use under Select Printer or in the dialog
box displayed after clicking Printer .
Settings for many printing methods (including enlarged or reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on) are
displayed in the printer driver dialog box. There are two ways to access the printer driver dialog box, as follows.
•From the application
( → P .346)
•From the operating system menu
( → P .348 )
Basic Printing W orkow 83
Printing procedure
Printing in Mac OS X
Print from the application menu after registering the printer .
Important
•The Macintosh printer driver can be used in the following versions of Mac OS.
•Mac OS X 10.3.9-10.5
•W e recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while
printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and af fect printing quality .
Registering the printer
Before printing, you must register the printer in imagePROGRAF PrinterSetup.app .
For instructions on registering the printer , see “Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)”.
(→P .596)
Important
•During this setup process, the printer will not be listed among available printers if it is of f or disconnected.
•By default, the AppleT alk protocol is disabled on the printer . In Mac OS X 10.4 and earlier , you
must enable AppleT alk protocol on the printer before using the printer in an AppleT alk network. For
instructions on activating AppleT alk protocol, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleT alk Networks
(Macintosh)”. (→P .598)
Printing from the source application
1. In the source application, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing
conditions.
Note
•This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer , specify the
range of pages, number of copies, and so on.
2. Select the printer in the Printer list.
84 Basic Printing W orkow
Printing procedure
3. Click Print to start printing.
As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete
settings for various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless
printing, and so on.
Basic Printing W orkow 85
Printing procedure
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (W indows)
If you have replaced the paper , you must complete the following settings in the printer driver .
Important
•Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver .
If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Note
•Click the BGet Information button to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box. On the
Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and
congure printer driver settings for the feed source and type of paper .
5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
86 Basic Printing W orkow
Printing procedure
6. In the APage Size list, select the size of the original as specied in the application.
7. In the LPaper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
8. If you have selected Roll Paper in LPaper Source , select the width of the loaded roll in MRoll
Paper W idth .
Note
•A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit dif ferent printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P .336)
Basic Printing W orkow 87
Printing procedure
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)
If you have replaced the paper , you must complete the following settings in the printer driver .
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. Choose the original size in the FPaper Size list.
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
88 Basic Printing W orkow
Printing procedure
7. Access the Page Setup pane.
8. In the APaper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
9. If you have selected Manual in APaper Source , make sure the size as selected in Page Setup
is displayed in CPage Size . If you have selected Roll Paper in APaper Source , make sure
the width of the loaded roll is displayed in BRoll W idth .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Note
•A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit dif ferent printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .454)
Basic Printing W orkow 89
Canceling print jobs
Canceling print jobs
Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel
T o cancel printing or reception of print jobs, press the Stop button on the Control Panel .
When you press the Stop button during printing, printer operation varies depending on the current status.
•If you press the Stop button before printing starts
Pressing the Stop button before printing starts will display a conrmation message. T o cancel the
print job, select Y es .
•If you press the Stop button during printing
Pressing the Stop button during printing will display a conrmation message. T o cancel the print job
immediately , select Y es .
90 Basic Printing W orkow
Canceling print jobs
Canceling Print Jobs from W indows
In the printer window , you can cancel jobs that are being sent to the printer .
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor , you can cancel print jobs that have already been received by the printer or
that are currently being printed.
1. Click the printer icon in the taskbar to display the printer window .
Note
•Y ou can also display this window by double-clicking the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or
Printers ) folder , accessible through the Windows start menu.
2. Right-click the job to cancel and select Cancel .
3. If the job to cancel is not shown in the printer window (that is, if the print data has already been
received by the printer), double-click the taskbar icon to display imagePROGRAF Status Monitor .
4. On the Printer Status sheet, click Cancel Job .
Basic Printing W orkow 91
Canceling print jobs
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X
In the printer window , you can cancel jobs that are being sent to the printer .
Otherwise, you can cancel jobs from imagePROGRAF Printmonitor if they have been received by the printer
or are currently being printed.
Note
•Print jobs are shown in the printer window while they are being sent from the computer . After
transmission, jobs are not displayed even during printing.
•Print jobs are displayed in the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor window from the moment the printer starts
receiving the print data until the moment printing is nished. They are not displayed before print data is
sent to the printer , even if the computer has started preparing the print data.
1. Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the printer window .
2. Click Stop Jobs to stop printing.
3. If there are no jobs in the printer window that can be canceled, (that is, if the print data has
already been sent to the printer), click Utility to display imagePROGRAF Printmonitor .
92 Basic Printing W orkow
Canceling print jobs
4. Select the print job to cancel and click to delete the print job.
The job sent to the printer is canceled.
5. Exit imagePROGRAF Printmonitor . In the printer window , click Start Jobs .
Important
•Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs from imagePROGRAF Printmonitor . If you do not
restart job processing, the next job cannot be printed.
Basic Printing W orkow 93
Pausing Printing
Pausing Printing
Pausing Printing
During printing, if you set Pause Print in the Control Panel menu to On , printing is stopped at that point and the
printer enters a state in which printing is paused. ( → P .26)
Printing from the job queue is not possible in this state.
T o restore normal operation after this state, set Pause Print to Off .
Note
•In the following cases, the status is cleared even if you do not set Pause Print to Off , and printing
from the job queue resumes.
•When paper is advanced
•When you execute Chg. Paper T ype in the Paper Menu
1. During printing, on the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the
Job tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Job Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Pause Print , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select On or Off , and then press the OK button.
94 Basic Printing W orkow
Paper
Handling Paper
Paper
T ypes of Paper
For information on the types of paper the printer supports (such as plain paper , coated paper , glossy photo
paper , proong paper , and CAD paper), refer to the Paper Reference Guide . The Paper Reference Guide
identies types of paper and gives specications, printer driver settings, and tips on handling paper . (See
Paper Reference Guide .)
By downloading the latest version of the Media Conguration T ool from the imagePROGRAF website, you
can make sure the paper information indicated in the Paper Reference Guide , on the printer Control Panel ,
and in the printer driver is up to date.
Accessing the Paper Reference Guide from imagePROGRAF Support
Information
The Paper Reference Guide can also be accessed from imagePROGRAF Support Information . Follow
these instructions, as appropriate for your operating system.
•Windows
1. Double-click the iPFxxxx Support desktop icon. (iPFxxxx indicates the printer model.)
The imagePROGRAF Support Information window is displayed.
2. Click the Paper Reference Guide button.
Handling Paper 95
Paper
The Paper Reference Guide is displayed.
•Mac OS X
1. Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock .
The imagePROGRAF Support Information window is displayed.
2. Click the Paper Reference Guide button.
96 Handling Paper
Paper
The Paper Reference Guide is displayed.
Handling Paper 97
Paper
Updating paper information
T o update the paper information in the Paper Reference Guide and on the printer , download the latest
version of the Media Conguration T ool from the imagePROGRAF website. For information about the Media
Conguration T ool , see Media Conguration T ool (Windows) or Media Conguration T ool (Macintosh).
The imagePROGRAF website is accessible from imagePROGRAF Support Information .
Important
•When you use the Media Conguration T ool to update information about paper , the types of paper on
the printer Control Panel , in the printer driver , and in related software are updated.
•Windows
1. Double-click the iPFxxxx Support desktop icon. (iPFxxxx indicates the printer model.)
The imagePROGRAF Support Information window is displayed.
2. Click V isit the imagePROGRAF webpage .
The default browser on your computer is started and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.
98 Handling Paper
Paper
•Mac OS X
1. Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock .
The imagePROGRAF Support Information window is displayed.
2. Click V isit the imagePROGRAF webpage .
The default browser on your computer is started and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.
Handling Paper 99
Paper
Paper Sizes
Rolls
Rolls that meet the following conditions are supported.
•Outer diameter: Up to 150 mm (6 in)
•Inner diameter of paper core: 2 or 3 inches
•Printing side out
Roll W idth
Roll Paper W idth Setting in
Printer Driver
Borderless Printing ( *1 )
914.4 mm (36.00 in) 36-in. Roll (914.4mm) Y es
841.0 mm (33.1 1 in) ISO A0/A1 Roll (841.0mm) Y es
762.0 mm (30.00 in) 30-in. Roll (762.0mm) No
728.0 mm (28.66 in) JIS B1/B2 Roll (728.0mm) Y es
609.6 mm (24.00 in) 24-in. Roll (609.6mm) Y es
594.0 mm (23.39 in) ISO A1/A2 Roll (594.0mm) Y es
515.0 mm (20.28 in) JIS B2/B3 Roll (515.0mm) Y es
431.8 mm (17.00 in) 17-in. Roll (431.8mm) Y es
420.0 mm (16.54 in) ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm) Y es
406.4 mm (16.00 in) 16-in. Roll (406.4mm) No
355.6 mm (14.00 in) 14-in. Roll (355.6mm) Y es
300.0 mm (1 1.81 in) 300mm Roll (300.0mm) Y es
297.0 mm (1 1.69 in) ISO A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm) Y es
257.0 mm (10.12 in) JIS B4 Roll (257.0mm) Y es
254.0 mm (10.00 in) 10-in. Roll (254.0mm) Y es
*1: For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference
Guide . ( → P .95)
100 Handling Paper
Paper
Sheets
Sheets of the following sizes are supported.
Paper Sizes
Dimensions
ISO A0 841.0 × 1 189.0 mm (33.1 1 × 46.81 in)
ISO A1 594.0 × 841.0 mm (23.39 × 33.1 1 in)
ISO A2+ 431.8 × 609.6 mm (17.00 × 24.00 in)
ISO A2 420.0 × 594.0 mm (16.54 × 23.39 in)
ISO A3+ 329.0 × 483.0 mm (12.95 × 19.02 in)
ISO A3 297.0 × 420.0 mm (1 1.69 × 16.54 in)
ISO A4 210.0 × 297.0 mm (8.27 × 1 1.69 in)
ISO B1 707.0 × 1000.0 mm (27.83 × 39.37 in)
ISO B2 500.0 × 707.0 mm (19.69 × 27.83 in)
ISO B3 353.0 × 500.0 mm (13.90 × 19.69 in)
ISO B4 250.0 × 353.0 mm (9.84 × 13.90 in)
JIS B1 728.0 × 1030.0 mm (28.66 × 40.55 in)
JIS B2 515.0 × 728.0 mm (20.28 × 28.66 in)
JIS B3 364.0 × 515.0 mm (14.33 × 20.28 in)
JIS B4 257.0 × 364.0 mm (10.12 × 14.33 in)
34"x44"(ANSI E) 863.6 × 1 1 17.6 mm (34.00 × 44.00 in)
28"x40"(ANSI F) 71 1.2 × 1016.0 mm (28.00 × 40.00 in)
22"x34"(ANSI D) 558.8 × 863.6 mm (22.00 × 34.00 in)
17"x22"(ANSI C) 431.8 × 558.8 mm (17.00 × 22.00 in)
1 1"x17"(Ledger) 279.4 × 431.8 mm (1 1.00 × 17.00 in)
13"x19"(Super B) 330.2 × 482.6 mm (13.00 × 19.00 in)
Letter(8.5"x1 1") 215.9 × 279.4 mm (8.50 × 1 1.00 in)
Legal(8.5"x14") 215.9 × 355.6 mm (8.50 × 14.00 in)
36"x48"(ARCH E) 914.4 × 1219.2 mm (36.00 × 48.00 in)
30"x42"(ARCH E1) 762.0 × 1066.8 mm (30.00 × 42.00 in)
26"x38"(ARCH E2) 660.4 × 965.2 mm (26.00 × 38.00 in)
27"x39"(ARCH E3) 685.8 × 990.6 mm (27.00 × 39.00 in)
24"x36"(ARCH D) 609.6 × 914.4 mm (24.00 × 36.00 in)
18"x24"(ARCH C) 457.2 × 609.6 mm (18.00 × 24.00 in)
12"x18"(ARCH B) 304.8 × 457.2 mm (12.00 × 18.00 in)
9"x12"(ARCH A) 228.6 × 304.8 mm (9.00 × 12.00 in)
DIN C0 917.0 × 1296.0 mm (36.10 × 51.02 in)
DIN C1 648.0 × 917.0 mm (25.51 × 36.10 in)
DIN C2 458.0 × 648.0 mm (18.03 × 25.51 in)
Handling Paper 101
Paper
Paper Sizes
Dimensions
DIN C3 324.0 × 458.0 mm (12.76 × 18.03 in)
DIN C4 229.0 × 324.0 mm (9.02 × 12.76 in)
20"x24" 508.0 × 609.6 mm (20.00 × 24.00 in)
18"x22" 457.2 × 558.8 mm (18.00 × 22.00 in)
14"x17" 355.6 × 431.8 mm (14.00 × 17.00 in)
12"x16" 304.8 × 406.4 mm (12.00 × 16.00 in)
10"x12" 254.0 × 304.8 mm (10.00 × 12.00 in)
10"x15" 254.0 × 381.0 mm (10.00 × 15.00 in)
US Photo 16"x20" 406.4 × 508.0 mm (16.00 × 20.00 in)
Poster 20"x30" 508.0 × 762.0 mm (20.00 × 30.00 in)
Poster 30"x40" 762.0 × 1016.0 mm (30.00 × 40.00 in)
13"x22" 329.0 × 558.0 mm (12.95 × 21.97 in)
Poster 300x900mm 300.0 × 900.0 mm (1 1.81 × 35.43 in)
Custom Paper Size 203.2 x 203.2 mm (8.00 x 8.00 in) to 917.0 x 1600.0
mm (36.10 x 62.99 in)
Note
•For details on non-standard paper sizes, see “Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes”. (→P .261)
•Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.
102 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Handling rolls
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls
When printing on rolls, attach the Roll Holder to the roll.
Rolls have a two- or three-inch paper core. Use the correct attachment for the paper core. The printer comes
equipped with the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment installed.
Using Rolls with a 2-Inch Paper Core Using Rolls with a 3-Inch Paper Core
Holder Stopper (Left Side) Roll Holder (Right Side) Holder Stopper (Left Side) Roll Holder (Right Side)
2-Inch Paper Core
Attachment
No Attachment Needed 3-Inch Paper Core
Attachment L
3-Inch Paper Core
Attachment R
Caution
•Set the roll on a table or other at surface so that it does not roll or fall. Rolls are heavy , and dropping a
roll may cause injury .
Important
•When handling the roll, be careful not to soil the printing surface. This may af fect the printing quality . W e
recommend wearing clean cloth gloves when handling rolls to protect the printing surface.
•Use scissors or a cutting tool to cut the edge of the roll paper if it is uneven, dirty , or has tape residue.
Otherwise, it may cause feeding problems and af fect the printing quality . Be careful not to cut through
any barcodes printed on the roll.
•Align the edges of the paper on both ends of the roll. Misalignment may cause feeding problems.
Note
•For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see “Paper Sizes” or the Paper Reference Guide .
( → P .100) ( → P .95)
•T o view instructions as you attach the Roll Holder , press the Navigate button. ( → P .29)
Handling Paper 103
Handling rolls
1. Lift the Holder Stopper lever (a) from the shaft side to unlock it. Holding the Holder Stopper at
the position indicated (b), remove it from the Roll Holder .
2. Insert the respective attachments for the roll paper core on the Roll Holder and Holder Stopper .
•Using rolls with a 2-inch paper core
Holder Stopper (Left Side) Roll Holder (Right Side)
Align the tips (a) of the 2-Inch Paper Core
Attachment with the holes (b) of the Holder
Stopper and insert it rmly .
No attachment is needed.
•Using rolls with a 3-inch paper core
Holder Stopper (Left Side) Roll Holder (Right Side)
Align the tips (a) of the 3-Inch Paper Core
Attachment L with the holes (b) of the Holder
Stopper and insert it rmly .
Align the tips (a) of 3-Inch Paper Core
Attachment R with the holes (b) of the Roll
Holder and insert it rmly .
104 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
3. With the edge of the roll paper facing forward as shown, insert the Roll Holder from the right of
the roll. Insert it rmly until the roll touches the ange (a) of the Roll Holder , leaving no gap.
4. Insert the Holder Stopper from the left in the Roll Holder as shown. Holding it at the position
shown (b), push it rmly in until the ange (a) of the Holder Stopper touches the roll. Lock the
Holder Stopper lever (c) by pushing it down toward the shaft side.
Handling Paper 105
Handling rolls
Loading Rolls in the Printer
Follow these steps to load rolls in the printer .
Note
•Before loading rolls, make sure the printer is clean inside the T op Cover and around the Ejection Guide .
If these areas are dirty , we recommend cleaning them in advance. ( → P .647)
1. Press the Load button.
2. Press ▲or ▼to select Load Roll Paper , and then press the OK button.
Note
•If any paper has been advanced that will not be used, a message is shown requesting you to
remove it.
Press ▲or ▼to select Y es , and then press the OK button. Remove the paper and go to the
next step.
3. Positioning your hands as shown, open the Roll Cover .
106 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
4. Holding the Roll Holder ange (a), rest the Roll Holder shaft on the Roll Ledge (b).
At this time, position the holder so that the “R” label (c) on the Roll Holder ange is aligned
with the “R” label (d) on the printer .
5. Holding the Roll Holder ange (a), guide the holder along the Roll Loading Slots (b) on both
ends, keeping the holder level as you load it in the Roll Holder Slot .
Caution
•Do not force the Roll Holder into the printer with the right and left ends reversed. This may damage
the printer and Roll Holder .
•Do not release the anges until the holder is loaded in the Roll Holder Slot .
•Be careful not to pinch your ngers between the Roll Loading Slots (b) and the Roll Holder shaft
(c) when loading rolls.
Handling Paper 107
Handling rolls
6. Advance the roll to insert the leading edge in the Paper Feed Slot (a) until you hear a tone.
Important
•Be careful not to soil the printing surface of roll paper as you insert it in the slot. This may af fect
the printing quality . W e recommend wearing clean cloth gloves when handling rolls to protect the
printing surface.
•If the paper is wrinkled or warped, straighten it out before loading it.
•Load paper straight so it is not fed askew .
7. Once paper feeding starts, you will need to do the following, based on the ManageRemainRoll
setting and the barcode printed on rolls. ( → P .126)
ManageRemainRoll
Barcodes
Printer Operation After the Paper is Fed
PrintedOff
Not printed
A menu for selection of the type of paper is automatically
shown on the Display Screen .
Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper , and then press
the OK button.
Printed The type and amount of paper left is automatically
detected based on the barcode printed on the roll.
There is no need to specify the type and length of the
paper .
On
Not printed A menu for selection of the paper type and length is
automatically shown on the Display Screen .
Press ▲or ▼to select the type and length of paper
loaded, and then press the OK button.
Note
•For details on types of paper to select, see the Paper Reference Guide . ( → P .95)
108 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
8. Holding it at the positions indicated, close the Roll Cover .
Note
•Cut the edge of the roll after the paper is advanced if it is soiled or if there are cuts from scissors or
the blade after removing creased edges. ( → P .129 )
Handling Paper 109
Handling rolls
Changing the T ype of Paper
Follow these steps to change the type of paper specied on the printer after you have loaded paper .
If you will continue using this type of paper later , selecting Keep Paper T ype >On will save the time and ef fort of
conguring the media type setting when you load the paper again. The current media type settings before you
select On will be automatically selected at that time. ( → P .1 1 1)
Important
•For best printing results, the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper . Be sure to select
the type of paper to use correctly before printing.
•Because the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper , the margins and the size of
printed images may vary depending on the type of paper used. If margins and the size of images are not
as you expected, adjust the paper feed amount.
( → P .612)
Changing the T ype of Paper
Note
•After you load a roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the type of paper on the
Display Screen . Select the type of paper and press the OK button.
If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On , specify the roll
length after the type of paper . ( → P .1 12)
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Chg. Paper T ype , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper loaded ( Roll Paper or Cut Sheet ), and then press
the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper loaded in the printer , and then press the OK button.
Note
•For details on types of paper , see the Paper Reference Guide . ( → P .95) By default, Plain Paper
is selected.
•If you move the Release Lever , the setting automatically reverts to the previously selected paper .
•Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper , it may
cause feed errors and af fect printing quality .
1 10 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Using the Same T ype of Paper Regularly
Congure this setting so that current media type settings will be automatically selected when you load the
same type of paper later .
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Keep Paper T ype , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select On , and then press the OK button.
Note
•The specied media type setting is updated in the following situations.
•When using sheets, if you send a print job before loading a sheet, the media type setting is
updated to match the type of paper specied by the print job.
•When you have selected ManageRemainRoll >On on the Control Panel and a barcode is printed
on the roll, the media type setting is updated to match the type of paper specied by the barcode.
•T o change the media type setting, see “Changing the T ype of Paper”. (→P .1 10)
Handling Paper 1 1 1
Handling rolls
Specifying the Paper Length
When changing the length of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the length as follows.
Note
•Specify the paper length when you have set ManageRemainRoll to On . ( → P .126)
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Chg. Paper Size , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select Roll Length , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select the length of paper loaded in the printer , and then press the OK button.
Specify the roll length as follows.
1. Press the ◄or ►button to move to the next eld for input.
2. Press the ▲or ▼button to enter the value.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to nish entering the value, and then press the OK button.
1 12 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Printing From a Desired Starting Point
When printing inside boundaries or in other situations when you want to specify a particular position to start
printing from, set W idth Detection to Off in the printer menu for the type of paper used.
Set W idth Detection to Off
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Paper Details , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select W idth Detection , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select Off , and then press the OK button.
Load paper in the desired position to start printing from
Follow these instructions to load paper at the desired starting position for printing when W idth Detection
is Off .
1. If you did not send a print job in advance, a menu for selection of the type of paper is displayed.
Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper , and then press the OK button.
Note
•If a print job was received before paper was advanced, the media type and size specied by the job
are shown on the Display Screen .
Thus, this screen is not displayed. Go to step 2.
2. W idth Detection OFF . OK to continue? is now shown on the Display Screen . Press ▲or ▼to
select Leave OFF , and then press the OK button.
3. After a menu for selection of the paper size is displayed, press ▲or ▼to select the paper
size, and then press the OK button.
Handling Paper 1 13
Handling rolls
4. Open the T op Cover and check the position where paper is loaded.
T o start printing from the current position, close the T op Cover .
T o reposition the paper , push the Release Lever back.
5. Keeping the right edge of the paper aligned with the extended line of the Paper Alignment Line
(a) to the right of the ejection guide and the leading edge aligned with the groove (b) at the far
end of the Platen , load the paper at the position from which to start printing.
1 14 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
6. Pull the Release Lever forward and close the T op Cover .
Handling Paper 1 15
Handling rolls
Removing the Roll from the Printer
Remove rolls from the printer as follows.
Note
•If you need to cut the roll, see “Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls”. (→P .129)
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Eject Paper , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select Y es , and then press the OK button.
The roll is now rewound and ejected.
Caution
•If you have selected ManageRemainRoll >On in the Control Panel menu, a barcode is printed on
the leading edge of the roll.
Do not remove the roll before the barcode is printed. Y ou will be unable to keep track of the amount
of roll paper left. ( → P .126)
5. Positioning your hands as shown, open the Roll Cover .
1 16 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
6. Using both hands, rotate the Roll Holder toward the back to rewind the roll.
7. Holding the Roll Holder ange (a), remove the holder from the Roll Holder Slot .
Note
•For instructions on removing the Roll Holder from rolls, see “Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls”.
(→P .1 18)
8. Holding it at the positions indicated, close the Roll Cover .
Note
•T o load new paper in the printer at this point, see “Loading Rolls in the Printer”. (→P .106)
Handling Paper 1 17
Handling rolls
Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls
1. Lift the Holder Stopper lever (a) from the shaft side to unlock it. Holding the Holder Stopper at
the position indicated (b), remove it from the Roll Holder .
2. Remove the Roll Holder from the roll.
3. When removing attachments, push the tips (a) in as you remove the attachment.
•3-Inch Paper Core Attachment R ( Roll Holder side)
•3-Inch Paper Core Attachment L ( Holder Stopper side)
1 18 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
•2-Inch Paper Core Attachment
Important
•Store the roll in the original bag or box, away from high temperature, humidity , and direct sunlight. If
paper is not stored properly , the printing surface may become scratched, which may af fect the printing
quality when you use it again.
Handling Paper 1 19
Handling rolls
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper
If paper from a roll becomes jammed, Paper jam. is shown on the Display Screen of the Control Panel .
Remove the jammed paper as follows.
1. Open the Roll Cover . Use a commercially available cutter or the like to cut the paper of the
loaded roll.
Caution
•When cutting paper , be careful to avoid injury or damage to the printer .
2. Push the Release Lever back.
3. Remove the jammed paper .
•If paper is jammed inside the T op Cover
1. Open the T op Cover and move the Carriage to the left or right side manually , away from the jam.
2. Clear any jammed paper from inside the T op Cover .
After removing the paper , make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer .
120 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
3. Close the T op Cover .
Important
•Do not move the Carriage over jammed paper . This may damage the Printhead .
•Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b). This may stain your hands and damage
the printer .
•If paper from a roll is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot
1. Open the Roll Cover .
2. Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot .
After removing the paper , make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer .
Handling Paper 121
Handling rolls
•If the paper is jammed by the Ejection Guide
Remove the jammed paper from the Output T ray .
After removing the paper , make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer .
4. Pull the Release Lever forward.
122 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)
Follow these steps to remove any scraps left in the Paper Feed Slot after you clear jammed sheets or roll paper .
1. T urn the printer of f. ( → P .24)
2. Push the Release Lever back.
3. Positioning your hands as shown, open the Roll Cover .
4. Fold an A4 sheet lengthwise four times and insert it through the gap of the Paper Feed Slot .
Push the scrap out toward the Platen .
5. Remove the scrap when it is pushed out onto the Platen .
6. If any scraps remain inside the paper feed slot, repeat steps 4 and 5.
Handling Paper 123
Handling rolls
7. Holding it at the positions indicated, close the Roll Cover .
8. Pull the Release Lever forward.
124 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Feeding Roll Paper Manually
After a roll has been advanced, you can press the Feed button to feed or retract the roll with the ▲and ▼buttons.
1. Press the Feed button.
2. Press the ▲or ▼button to advance or retract the roll.
Press ▲to retract the roll manually .
Press ▼to advance the roll manually .
Note
•If you hold down ▲or ▼for less than a second, the roll will move about 1 mm (0.04 in).
If you hold down ▲or ▼for more than a second, the roll will move until you release the button. Release
the button when the Display Screen indicates End of paper feed. Cannot feed paper more. .
Handling Paper 125
Handling rolls
Keeping T rack of the Amount of Roll Paper Left
Setting ManageRemainRoll to On in the Paper Menu of the Control Panel will print a barcode with text on the roll
when the roll is removed that identies the type of paper and amount left. When ManageRemainRoll is On and
you load rolls with printed barcodes, the type of paper and amount left are automatically detected after rolls are
loaded. The barcode will be cut of f after it has been read.
Important
•Because the ManageRemainRoll function is not compatible with clear lm, an error message may be
displayed ( The roll is empty . ) after you load clear lm. For this reason, set ManageRemainRoll to
Off before loading clear lm.
•If the barcode on the roll is not detected, enter the type and length of paper on the Control Panel .
Follow these steps to set ManageRemainRoll to On as follows.
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select ManageRemainRoll , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select On , and then press the OK button.
126 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Specifying the Ink Drying T ime for Rolls
When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere, if the Cutter touches printed surfaces that are still
wet, it may damage the paper or cause rough cut edges. Also, ink may be transferred onto the paper surface during
ejection, soiling it. Y ou can prevent problems by adjusting the drying time after printing before the paper is cut.
W indows
1. Display the printer driver dialog box.
( → P .348)
2. Select the Main sheet and click CAdvanced Settings in AMedia T ype .
3. In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select the desired settings values in B
Between Pages and CBetween Scans in ADrying T ime , and then click OK .
( → P .354)
Handling Paper 127
Handling rolls
Mac OS X
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the Main pane and click CSettings in AMedia T ype .
3. In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select the desired settings values in
CBetween Pages and DBetween Scans in BDrying T ime , and then click OK .
( → P .465)
Note
•By factory default, Drying T ime is deactivated ( Off ) for all paper types.
•T o have the printer wait for ink to dry immediately after printing without releasing paper , set Cutting
Mode to Eject in the printer menu.
( → P .129 )
128 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls
How rolls are cut after ejection varies depending on printer settings.
Cutting Method Printer Setting Driver Setting
Automatic The roll is automatically cut by the Cutter
Unit following printer driver settings.
Automatic Y es
Eject
(→P .130)
Choose this setting if you prefer not to
have documents dropped immediately after
printing, as when waiting for ink to dry .
T o cut the roll with the Cutter Unit , press the
Cut button.
Eject Y es
Manual
(→P .131)
Choose this setting when using media that
cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit .
Cut each page from the roll using scissors.
For continuous printing (if you will cut each
page later), select Auto Cut >Y es or select
Print Cut Guideline .
( → P .331)
Media
Menu >
Paper
Details >
(V arious
T ypes of
Paper) >
Cutting
Mode
Manual No Y es Print
Cut
Guideline
Paper
Cutting
(→P .132)
Choose this option if you want to cut pages
by pressing Cutter Unit buttons for manual
cutting after printing when Auto Cut >No is
selected or Print Cut Guideline is selected
in the printer driver .
Otherwise choose this option if you want to
cut the roll edge after loading a roll.
Cut button
pressed
Y es
Auto Cut
No Print
Cut
Guideline
Note
•Automatic and Eject are valid only when you have selected Auto Cut >Y es in the printer driver .
•With Eject, printing does not resume after a series of jobs have been printed continuously until the
roll is cut.
•Eject is the preset selection in Cutting Mode for some types of paper . For this paper , we recommend
keeping the preset cutting mode.
Cut rolls manually in the following cases:
Handling Paper 129
Handling rolls
Eject (waiting for ink to dry after printing)
Important
•When cutting wide printed documents after ejection, have two people support the documents. If the
paper drops, printed documents may be damaged.
•Do not lift the paper when holding printed documents before cutting. If the paper rises, it may af fect
the printing quality or cause rough cut edges.
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button. The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Paper Details , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Cutting Mode , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select Eject , and then press the OK button.
7. Starts printing.
When printing is nished, the printer will stop without cutting.
8. Holding the printed document to prevent it from dropping, press the Cut button to cut the roll.
130 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Manual (when using media that cannot be cut with the Cutter Unit )
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button. The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Paper Details , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Cutting Mode , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select Manual , and then press the OK button.
7. Starts printing.
The printer stops advancing the paper after printing.
8. Press the Feed button.
Roll paper is fed to the specied cut position and then automatically stopped.
9. Cut the roll paper manually with scissors or the like.
Handling Paper 131
Handling rolls
10. Press the OK button.
After the roll is rewound, it stops automatically .
Paper cutting (to have the roll cut at your specied position)
1. Press the Feed button.
2. Press the ▼button to advance the roll to the position for cutting.
3. Press the Cut button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select Y es , and then press the OK button.
After the roll paper is cut, it is rewound automatically .
Caution
•If paper would be short when cut at a particular position, the roll may automatically be advanced in
some cases before cutting.
132 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically
If the leading edge of a roll is crooked or warped, it may cause an error message or printing problems. In this
case, set T rim Edge First to Automatic or On in the Paper Menu on the Control Panel to have the printer cut the
leading edge to make the edge straight after you load a roll.
T rim Edge First of fers the following options.
•Automatic
If the left and right side of the leading edge of the roll ((a) and (b)) are uneven by 3 mm (0.12 in) or
more when you load the roll, the edge is cut an amount relative to the slant to ensure a straight edge,
and scraps are removed. The edge is not cut if the unevenness is less than 3 mm. However , paper
may sometimes be cut, depending on the state of the leading edge.
•Off
The edge is not cut and scraps are not removed. This setting is Off for most types of paper , by default.
For more information, see the Paper Reference Guide . ( → P .95)
•On
The leading edge is cut of f when you load a roll, and scraps are removed. The amount of paper cut
from the leading edge varies depending on the type of paper . For more information, see the Paper
Reference Guide . ( → P .95)
Follow these steps to change the T rim Edge First setting.
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Paper Details , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select T rim Edge First , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select the desired setting option, and then press the OK button.
This setting takes ef fect the next time you load a roll.
Handling Paper 133
Handling rolls
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls
For media such as Backlit Film that are more likely to generate debris when cut, select CutDustReduct. >On in
the Paper Menu of the Control Panel . This option reduces debris from cutting by printing black lines at the leading
and trailing edges of documents. It may help prevent Printhead damage. Y ou can specify for CutDustReduct. to
be activated for particular types of paper .
Important
•Do not set CutDustReduct. to On for paper that wrinkles easily , such as Plain Paper or lightweight
paper . This may impair cutting and cause paper jams.
•Borderless printing is not available when CutDustReduct. is set to On . T o use borderless printing,
select CutDustReduct. >Off .
Set CutDustReduct. to On as follows.
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Paper Details , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper loaded in the printer , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select CutDustReduct. , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select On , and then press the OK button.
134 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Roll Holder Set
Load a roll on the roll holder and then load the holder in the printer . The Roll Holder in the Roll Holder Set RH2-33 is
for use with both 2-inch and 3-inch paper cores. Use the correct attachment for the particular paper core. ( → P .103)
•Roll Holder Set RH2-33
•Roll Holder (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores)
•Attachments
Using the 2-Inch Paper
Core Attachment
Using the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment
2-Inch Paper Core Attachment 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment
L
3-Inch Paper Core Attachment
R
Handling Paper 135
Handling sheets
Handling sheets
Loading Sheets in the Printer
Follow these steps to load sheets in the printer .
Important
•One sheet of paper can be loaded in the Paper Feed Slot at a time. Do not load more than one sheet at
a time. This may cause paper jams.
•Before feeding paper or printing, make sure the sheet is at against the Roll Cover . The sheet may jam
if it curls before feeding or printing and the trailing edge drops toward the front.
Note
•Store unused paper in the original package, away from high temperature, humidity , and direct sunlight.
•Paper that is wrinkled or warped may jam. If necessary , straighten the paper and reload it.
•Load the paper straight. Loading paper askew will cause an error .
1. Select sheets as the paper source.
•If a print job was received
Sheets are automatically selected, and the media type and size specied by the print job are shown
on the Display Screen . Go to the next step.
•If no print job was received
1. Press the Load button.
2. Press ▲or ▼to select Load Cut Sheet , and then press the OK button.
Note
•If any paper has been advanced that will not be used, a message is shown requesting you to
remove it.
Press ▲or ▼to select Y es , and then press the OK button. Remove the paper and go to the
next step.
136 Handling Paper
Handling sheets
2. Slide the Width Guide (a) to align it with the mark for the size of paper you will load.
3. Load a single sheet printing-side up in the Paper Feed Slot , with the right edge aligned with the
Paper Alignment Guide (a) to the right of the Roll Cover .
Insert the paper until the leading edge makes contact and you hear a tone.
Handling Paper 137
Handling sheets
4. Move the Width Guide (a) carefully to match the size of paper loaded.
Set the Width Guide against the edge of the paper to prevent the paper from becoming crooked
or wrinkled.
5. Press the OK button.
•If a print job was received
The printer now starts printing the print job.
•If no print job was received
A menu for selection of the type of paper is automatically shown on the Display Screen .
Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper , and then press the OK button.
The printer now starts feeding the paper .
Note
•For details on types of paper to select, see the Paper Reference Guide . ( → P .95 )
138 Handling Paper
Handling sheets
Changing the T ype of Paper
Follow these steps to change the type of paper specied on the printer after you have loaded paper .
If you will continue using this type of paper later , selecting Keep Paper T ype >On will save the time and ef fort of
conguring the media type setting when you load the paper again. The current media type settings before you
select On will be automatically selected at that time. ( → P .1 1 1)
Important
•For best printing results, the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper . Be sure to select
the type of paper to use correctly before printing.
•Because the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper , the margins and the size of
printed images may vary depending on the type of paper used. If margins and the size of images are not
as you expected, adjust the paper feed amount.
( → P .612)
Changing the T ype of Paper
Note
•After you load a roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the type of paper on the
Display Screen . Select the type of paper and press the OK button.
If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On , specify the roll
length after the type of paper . ( → P .1 12)
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Chg. Paper T ype , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper loaded ( Roll Paper or Cut Sheet ), and then press
the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper loaded in the printer , and then press the OK button.
Note
•For details on types of paper , see the Paper Reference Guide . ( → P .95) By default, Plain Paper
is selected.
•If you move the Release Lever , the setting automatically reverts to the previously selected paper .
•Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper , it may
cause feed errors and af fect printing quality .
Handling Paper 139
Handling sheets
Using the Same T ype of Paper Regularly
Congure this setting so that current media type settings will be automatically selected when you load the
same type of paper later .
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Keep Paper T ype , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select On , and then press the OK button.
Note
•The specied media type setting is updated in the following situations.
•When using sheets, if you send a print job before loading a sheet, the media type setting is
updated to match the type of paper specied by the print job.
•When you have selected ManageRemainRoll >On on the Control Panel and a barcode is printed
on the roll, the media type setting is updated to match the type of paper specied by the barcode.
•T o change the media type setting, see “Changing the T ype of Paper”. (→P .139)
140 Handling Paper
Handling sheets
Printing From a Desired Starting Point
When printing inside boundaries or in other situations when you want to specify a particular position to start
printing from, set W idth Detection to Off in the printer menu for the type of paper used.
Set W idth Detection to Off
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Paper Details , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select W idth Detection , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select Off , and then press the OK button.
Handling Paper 141
Handling sheets
Load paper in the desired position to start printing from
Follow these instructions to load paper at the desired starting position for printing when W idth Detection
is Off .
1. If you did not send a print job in advance, a menu for selection of the type of paper is displayed.
Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper , and then press the OK button.
Note
•If a print job was received before paper was advanced, the media type and size specied by the job
are shown on the Display Screen .
Thus, this screen is not displayed. Go to step 2.
2. W idth Detection OFF . OK to continue? is now shown on the Display Screen . Press ▲or ▼to
select Leave OFF , and then press the OK button.
3. After a menu for selection of the paper size is displayed, press ▲or ▼to select the paper
size, and then press the OK button.
4. Open the T op Cover and check the position where paper is loaded.
T o start printing from the current position, close the T op Cover .
T o reposition the paper , push the Release Lever back.
142 Handling Paper
Handling sheets
5. Keeping the right edge of the paper aligned with the extended line of the Paper Alignment Line
(a) to the right of the ejection guide and the leading edge aligned with the groove (b) at the far
end of the Platen , load the paper at the position from which to start printing.
6. Pull the Release Lever forward and close the T op Cover .
Handling Paper 143
Handling sheets
Removing Sheets
Remove sheets from the printer as follows.
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Eject Paper , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select Y es , and then press the OK button.
The paper is ejected from the front of the printer .
5. Holding the paper , push the Release Lever back and remove the sheet.
6. Pull the Release Lever forward.
144 Handling Paper
Handling sheets
Clearing a Jammed Sheet
If a sheet becomes jammed, Paper jam. is shown on the Display Screen of the Control Panel . Remove
the jammed paper as follows.
1. Push the Release Lever back.
2. Remove the jammed paper .
•If paper is jammed inside the T op Cover
1. Open the T op Cover and move the Carriage to the left or right side manually , away from the jam.
2. Clear any jammed paper from inside the T op Cover .
After removing the paper , make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer .
3. Close the T op Cover .
Handling Paper 145
Handling sheets
Important
•Do not move the Carriage over jammed paper . This may damage the Printhead .
•Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b). This may stain your hands and damage
the printer .
•If the paper is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot
Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot .
After removing the paper , make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer .
•If the paper is jammed by the Ejection Guide
Remove the jammed paper from the Output T ray .
After removing the paper , make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer .
146 Handling Paper
Handling sheets
3. Pull the Release Lever forward.
Handling Paper 147
Handling sheets
Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)
Follow these steps to remove any scraps left in the Paper Feed Slot after you clear jammed sheets or roll paper .
1. T urn the printer of f. ( → P .24)
2. Push the Release Lever back.
3. Positioning your hands as shown, open the Roll Cover .
4. Fold an A4 sheet lengthwise four times and insert it through the gap of the Paper Feed Slot .
Push the scrap out toward the Platen .
5. Remove the scrap when it is pushed out onto the Platen .
6. If any scraps remain inside the paper feed slot, repeat steps 4 and 5.
148 Handling Paper
Handling sheets
7. Holding it at the positions indicated, close the Roll Cover .
8. Pull the Release Lever forward.
Handling Paper 149
Output Stacker
Output Stacker
Using the Output Stacker
The Output Stacker can be held at two positions, as shown.
•When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker
Use position (1).
•When the Output Stacker is not used, or when moving the printer
Use position (2).
When moving the printer , lift the Support Rod to the Extended position . ( → P .151)
Important
•When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker , always use it in position (1). If you do not, printed
documents may not be dropped into the Output Stacker , and the printed surface may become soiled.
•When moving the printer , always lift the Support Rod to the Extended position before use in position (2).
If the stacker is not used in position (2), the Basket Cloth may touch the oor and be soiled or damaged.
•The Output Stacker can hold one sheet. When printing multiple pages, remove each sheet after it
is printed.
150 Handling Paper
Output Stacker
Note regarding the Extended position
The Output Stacker can be used in the regular position and an Extended position for easy removal of printed
documents.
For information on types of paper you can use with the stacker in Extended position , refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . ( → P .95)
Regular position Extended position
Switch the stacker to Extended position as follows.
1. Lift the Support Rod to the position shown (a) and switch the stacker to Extended position .
2. When using rolls larger than A1 or 24 inches wide, pull out the Adjustable Stopper .
Handling Paper 151
Printing Photos and Images
W orking W ith V arious Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
Printing Photos and Images
Printing is easy when you simply choose the print target.
Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.
Print T arget
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Print targets for photos and images
Print T arget Description
Poster The best setting for posters. Prints using vivid and
high impact colors.
Photo (Color) Suitable for printing photographic images captured
with a digital camera.
Faithful Color
Reproduction
Prints by minimizing color dif ferences. Suitable
for when the printing results are too vivid or when
printing scanned images.
Caution
•Depending on the Media T ype setting, some Print T arget options may not be available.
Note
•Y ou can check the settings values for each print target by clicking V iew Settings .
•Y ou can also ne-tune these values as needed. ( Advanced Settings )
For details on Advanced Settings , see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing”. (→P .187)
152 W orking With V arious Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
Print Quality
Choose the print quality .
The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.
Print Quality Description
Highest A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is most
important. Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other
modes, but this mode of fers superior printing quality .
High Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality is most
important.
Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in “Standard” or “Draft”
modes, but this mode of fers exceptional printing quality .
Standard Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality and speed
are both important.
Printing takes less time than in “Highest” or “High” mode.
Draft Choose this setting to print faster .
Printing in draft mode can help you work more ef ciently when checking
layouts.
For instructions on printing photos and images, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
•Printing Photos and Images (Windows) (→P .154)
•Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) (→P .156)
W orking With V arious Print Jobs 153
Printing Photos and Images
Printing Photos and Images (W indows)
This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.
•Document: Photo image from a digital camera
•Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
•Paper: Roll
•Paper type: Premium Glossy Paper 200
•Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Premium
Glossy Paper 200 .
In the AMedia T ype , choose the type of paper used for printing, such as Glossy Paper , Coated
Paper , and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer .
Note
•The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel )
is updated when you install the Media Conguration T ool from the User Software CD-ROM or if
you change paper information by using the Media Conguration T ool . For details, see Media
Conguration T ool .
5. After conrming that DEasy Settings is selected, click Photo (Color) in the EPrint T arget list.
Note
•Y ou can check the settings values selected in the EPrint T arget list by clicking GV iew Settings .
154 W orking With V arious Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
7. In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click 10"x12" .
8. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
9. Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper W idth list. In this case, click 10-in.
Roll (254.0mm) , and then click OK .
10. Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P .336)
1 1. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
W orking With V arious Print Jobs 155
Printing Photos and Images
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.
•Document: Photo image from a digital camera
•Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Premium Glossy Paper 200
•Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In the FPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12" .
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
156 W orking With V arious Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Premium
Glossy Paper 200 .
Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer .
Note
•The types of paper indicated in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control
Panel ) are updated when you install the Media Conguration T ool from the User Software CD-ROM
or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration T ool . For details, see Media
Conguration T ool .
7. After conrming that DEasy Settings is selected, click Photo (Color) in the EPrint T arget list.
Note
•For information on settings optimized for printing photos and images, see “Printing Photos and
Images”. (→P .152)
•Y ou can check the settings values selected in the EPrint T arget list by clicking GV iew set. .
8. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.
10. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
W orking With V arious Print Jobs 157
Printing Photos and Images
1 1. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the BRoll W idth list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm) .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
12. Make sure CPage Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in C
Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" .
13. Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .454)
14. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
158 W orking With V arious Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing CAD Drawings
Using this printer , you can print ne lines and text clearly and sharply . It’ s easy to produce highly precise drawings
from CAD applications.
Note
•In Windows, you can print highly precise drawings using the provided imagePROGRAF HDI Driver for
AutoCAD/AutoCAD L T .
For details on the HDI driver , see the HDI Driver Guide .
For instructions on CAD printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating
system.
•Printing Line Drawings and T ext (Windows) (→P .162)
•Printing Line Drawings and T ext (Mac OS X) (→P .164)
W orking With V arious Print Jobs 159
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing Line Drawings and T ext
Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.
Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.
Print T arget
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Print targets for line drawings and text
Print T arget Description
CAD (Color Line
Drawing)
Settings optimized to print intricate lines in CAD
drawings clearly .
CAD (B/W Line
Drawing)
Settings optimized to print black lines in CAD
drawings clearly .
Perspective, GIS Settings optimized for printing 3D CAD drawings,
perspective drawings, and maps, including GIS
maps.
Note
•Y ou can check the settings values for each print target by clicking V iew Settings .
•Y ou can also ne-tune these values as needed. ( Advanced Settings )
For details on Advanced Settings , see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing”. (→P .187)
160 W orking With V arious Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
Print Quality
Choose the print quality .
The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.
Print Quality Description
Highest A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is most
important. Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other
modes, but this mode of fers superior printing quality .
High Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality is most
important.
Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in “Standard” or “Draft”
modes, but this mode of fers exceptional printing quality .
Standard Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality and speed
are both important.
Printing takes less time than in “Highest” or “High” mode.
Draft Choose this setting to print faster .
Printing in draft mode can help you work more ef ciently when checking
layouts.
For instructions on printing line drawings and text, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
•Printing Line Drawings and T ext (Windows) (→P .162)
•Printing Line Drawings and T ext (Mac OS X) (→P .164)
W orking With V arious Print Jobs 161
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing Line Drawings and T ext (W indows)
This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.
•Document: CAD drawing
•Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [1 1.7 × 16.5 in])
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
5. After conrming that DEasy Settings is selected, click CAD (Color Line Drawing) or CAD
(Monochrome Line Drawing) in the EPrint T arget list.
Note
•Y ou can check the settings values selected in the EPrint T arget list by clicking GV iew Settings .
6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
162 W orking With V arious Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
7. In APage Size , click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click
ISO A3 .
8. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
9. Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper W idth list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm) .
10. Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P .336)
1 1. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
W orking With V arious Print Jobs 163
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing Line Drawings and T ext (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.
•Document: CAD drawing
•Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [1 1.7 × 16.5 in])
•Paper: Roll
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In the FPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3 .
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
164 W orking With V arious Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
7. After conrming that DEasy Settings is selected, click CAD (Color Line Drawing) or CAD
(Monochrome Line Drawing) in the EPrint T arget list.
Note
•Y ou can check the settings values selected in the EPrint T arget list by clicking GV iew set. .
8. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.
10. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
W orking With V arious Print Jobs 165
Printing CAD Drawings
1 1. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the BRoll W idth list-in this case, ISO
A2/A3 (420.0mm) .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
12. Make sure CPage Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in C
Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A3 .
13. Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .454)
14. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
166 W orking With V arious Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings
Y ou can complete color settings when Color (CAD) is selected in Color Mode .
Colors can be adjusted before printing as follows when Color Compatibility is selected.
Note
•Color (CAD) is displayed when you select Advanced Settings on the Main sheet and set Print
Priority to Line Drawing/T ext .
Color Compatibility
Color Setting Item
Color Setting Description
Color (CAD) 1 Print in standard colors.
Color (CAD) 2 Print in brighter colors.
Color (CAD) 3 Print with approximate colors emulating Canon iPF500, iPF600, iPF700,
iPF510, iPF610, iPF710, iPF605, iPF720, iPF810, iPF820.
Color (CAD) 4 Print emulating the HP Designjet 500/800, in colors resembling colors
produced by these printers.
Color (CAD) 5 Print emulating the HP Designjet 1000, in colors resembling colors
produced by this printer .
Important
•If you have selected Color (CAD) 3 ,Color (CAD) 4 , or Color (CAD) 5 , it is not possible to match the
colors and image quality produced by the specied printer exactly .
For instructions on conguring Color Compatibility , refer to the following topics.
•Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows) (→P .168)
W orking With V arious Print Jobs 167
Printing CAD Drawings
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (W indows)
Y ou can complete color settings when Color (CAD) is selected in Color Mode .
Note
•Color (CAD) is displayed when you select Advanced Settings on the Main sheet and set Print
Priority to Line Drawing/T ext .
1. Click start >Printers and Faxes (or Printers ).
2. Select the printer , and then display the printer properties dialog box.
3. Click the Device Settings tab to display the Device Settings sheet.
4. Click AColor Compatibility to display the Color Compatibility dialog box.
168 W orking With V arious Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
5. Select the desired color settings in the AColor Compatibility list.
Note
•For details on color settings, see “Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings”. (→P .167)
For printing instructions, refer to the following topic.
•Choosing the Document T ype and Printing Conditions (Windows) (→P .190)
W orking With V arious Print Jobs 169
Printing CAD Drawings
HP-GL/2 Printing
This printer supports the original Canon GARO printer control language as well as HP-GL/2 and HP
R TL( *1 ) emulation.( *2 ) When printing from applications that support HP-GL/2 output, specify HP-GL/2 in
the application’ s plotter output settings.
Note
•For instructions on conguring these settings, refer to the software documentation.
The printer automatically switches to the corresponding processing depending on whether a GARO,
HP-GL/2, or HP R TL job is received. Congure the optional settings for HP-GL/2 emulation on the printer
control panel. ( → P .49)
This printer can emulate the following printers using HP-GL/2 emulation.
Emulated Printers
Canon iPF500, iPF600, iPF700, iPF510, iPF610, iPF710, iPF605, iPF720, iPF810
and iPF820
Hewlett-Packard Designjet 500, Designjet 800 and Designjet 1000
*1: HP-GL/2: Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language 2; HP R TL: Hewlett-Packard Raster T ransfer Language
*2: It may not be possible to print jobs with excessively large amounts of data correctly .
170 W orking With V arious Print Jobs
Printing Of ce Documents
Printing Ofce Documents
Printing Ofce Documents
Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.
Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.
Print T arget
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Print targets for ofce documents
Print T arget Description
Of ce Document Settings optimized for clear printing of of ce
documents such as handouts.
Note
•Y ou can check the settings values for each print target by clicking V iew Settings .
•Y ou can also ne-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)
For details on Advanced Settings, see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing”. (→P .187)
Print Quality
Choose the print quality .
The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.
Print Quality Description
Highest A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is most important. Printing
takes longer and consumes more ink than in other modes, but this mode of fers
superior printing quality .
High Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality is most important.
Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in “Standard” or “Draft” modes,
but this mode of fers exceptional printing quality .
Standard Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality and speed are both
important.
Printing takes less time than in “Highest” or “High” mode.
Draft Choose this setting to print faster .
Printing in draft mode can help you work more ef ciently when checking layouts.
For instructions on printing of ce documents, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
•Printing Of ce Documents (Windows) (→P .172)
•Printing Of ce Documents (Mac OS X) (→P .174)
W orking With V arious Print Jobs 171
Printing Of ce Documents
Printing Ofce Documents (W indows)
This topic describes how to print of ce documents based on the following example.
•Document: Of ce document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs
•Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 1 1.7 in])
•Paper: Sheets
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Paper size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 1 1.7 in])
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
5. After conrming that DEasy Settings is selected, click Ofce Document in the EPrint
T arget list.
Note
•Y ou can check the settings values selected in the EPrint T arget list by clicking GV iew Settings .
6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
172 W orking With V arious Print Jobs
Printing Of ce Documents
7. In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this
case, click ISO A4 .
8. Click Manual in the LPaper Source list.
9. Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P .336)
10. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Caution
•Depending on the AMedia T ype setting, some EPrint T arget options may not be available.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
W orking With V arious Print Jobs 173
Printing Of ce Documents
Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print of ce documents based on the following example.
•Document: Of ce document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs
•Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 1 1.7 in])
•Paper: Sheets
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Paper size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 1 1.7 in])
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In the FPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - for Paper
T ray (Large Margins) .
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
174 W orking With V arious Print Jobs
Printing Of ce Documents
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
7. After conrming that DEasy Settings is selected, click Ofce Document in the EPrint
T arget list.
Note
•Y ou can check the settings values selected in the EPrint T arget list by clicking GV iew set. .
8. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.
10. Click Manual in the APaper Source list.
1 1. Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 - for Paper T ray (Large Margins) .
W orking With V arious Print Jobs 175
Printing Of ce Documents
12. Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .454)
13. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
176 W orking With V arious Print Jobs
Adjusting Images
Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver
Color settings specied in the application for your documents are essentially given priority over other settings for
each print job, but further color adjustment is possible in the printer driver .
Color Mode
Choose how the printer driver processes color , as desired.
The available options vary depending on the color mode.
Color Mode
Description
Color Adjustment
Color Print in color . Y ou can adjust the color balance and
color-matching method.
Monochrome Print in grayscale. Y ou can adjust the color balance.
Color (CAD) A color mode optimized for line
drawings (2D-CAD). Lines in red,
yellow , and other colors are printed
especially clearly .
Y ou can adjust the color balance.
Monochrome (BK
ink)
A color mode for printing line
drawings. Only Black ink is used.
Y ou can adjust the color balance.
Monochrome
Bitmap
Print in a color mode for CAD,
using Color Ink , with all non-white
portions printed in black.
No color adjustment is supported.
Enhanced Printing Options 177
Adjusting Images
Color Adjustment
Y ou can adjust colors separately for images, graphics, and text documents.
Adjustment Item
Description
Cyan
Magenta
Y ellow
Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan ,Magenta , and Y ellow .
Gray T one Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of monochrome photos. Choose cool black
(tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged with red), and so on.
Select the color tone in the color region or from the list.
Brightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest
portions intact.
Contrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other .
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.
Saturation Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.
Note
•Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box, which allows you to select the
color adjustment target from Image ,Graphics , and T ext .
178 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Matching
Y ou can choose the color-matching mode and method.
By adjusting the color-matching mode and method, you can make printed colors match the colors of
on-screen images more closely .
Matching Mode Description Remarks
Driver Matching
Mode
Color adjustment based on the original
color prole of the printer driver .
This is the default color-matching
method. Normally , use Driver Matching
Mode .
ICC Matching
Mode
Color adjustment based on ICC color
proles (an international standard) using
the printer driver .
Y ou can select the Input Prole in the
Input Prole Settings .
Y ou can select the printer prole in the
Printer Prole Settings list.
Driver ICM Mode Color adjustment based on the standard
Windows ICM function. The printer
driver adjusts the colors.
Host ICM Mode Color adjustment based on the standard
Windows ICM function. Windows
adjusts the colors.
A vailable when using Windows 2000,
Windows XP , Windows Server 2003,
Windows V ista, or Windows Server
2008.
ColorSync Color adjustment based on the standard
Mac OS ColorSync function. Mac OS
adjusts the colors.
A vailable when using Mac OS X
10.3.9-10.4.
Off (No
Adjustment)
No color-matching Choose this option for color-matching by
the software application or with your own
color prole, when you want to disable
color-matching by the printer driver .
Matching Method Description Remarks
Auto Color-matching optimized for images,
graphics, or text.
Perceptual Color-matching optimized for photos.
Prints images with smooth gradations
and colors closer to those as displayed
on the screen.
Colorimetric Color-matching with adjustment to
remove color from white area. Colors in
data are reproduced accurately .
Colorimetric (No
Wht-pnt Corr)
Color-matching without white adjustment
to reect the prole of original data.
Colors in data are reproduced accurately .
Without white adjustment, colors are
added to white areas.
Saturation Color-matching optimized for graphics.
This option emphasizes color saturation.
The available options and their display
order vary depending on your selected
color-matching mode, as well as the
operating system.
Enhanced Printing Options 179
Adjusting Images
Note
•Be sure to calibrate your monitor colors correctly if you adjust the colors for printing. If monitor colors
are not calibrated correctly , you may not obtain the desired printing results. For instructions on monitor
calibration, refer to the documentation for your monitor and operating system.
For instructions on color adjustment, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and
operating system.
•Fine-T uning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) (→P .181)
•Fine-T uning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) (→P .184)
180 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Fine-T uning Colors of Photos and Images (W indows)
Y ou can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print T arget presets. This topic describes how
to ne-tune the color tone of photos before printing.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
5. Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode.
6. Click Color in the GColor Mode list.
Enhanced Printing Options 181
Adjusting Images
7. Click HColor Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
8. On the Color Adjustment sheet, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
Adjustment Item
Description
DCyan
EMagenta
FY ellow
Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan , Magenta , and
Y ellow .
GGray T one
Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of monochrome photos. Choose
cool black (tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged
with red), and so on. Select the color tone in the color region or from
the list.
HBrightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and
lightest portions intact.
IContrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each
other .
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase
the contrast.
JSaturation Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.
Note
•Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box, which allows you to select the
color adjustment target from Image ,Graphics , and T ext .
9. Close the Color Settings dialog box.
182 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
10. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
1 1. Conrm the settings of APage Size ,LPaper Source , and so on.
12. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Enhanced Printing Options 183
Adjusting Images
Fine-T uning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X)
Y ou can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print T arget presets. This topic describes how
to ne-tune the color tone of photos before printing.
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. Choose the original size in the FPaper Size list.
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
5. Access the Main pane.
184 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
7. Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode.
8. Click Color in the HColor Mode list.
9. Click ISet to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Enhanced Printing Options 185
Adjusting Images
10. On the Color Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
Adjustment Item
Description
DCyan
EMagenta
FY ellow
Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan , Magenta , and
Y ellow .
GGray T one
Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of monochrome photos. Choose
cool black (tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged
with red), and so on. Select the color tone in the color region or from
the list.
HBrightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and
lightest portions intact.
IContrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each
other .
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase
the contrast.
JSaturation Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.
Note
•Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box, which allows you to select the
color adjustment target from Image ,Graphics , and T ext .
1 1. Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
12. Access the Page Setup pane.
13. Conrm the settings of APaper Source and CPage Size .
14. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
186 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing
Y ou can specify detailed print settings as desired for the quality level, colors, and other criteria.
Advanced Settings
For printing results that appear just as expected for your original, you can specify which graphic elements and
colors to prioritize for printing.
Note
•Easy Settings are also available, providing convenient presets. T o use the presets, simply choose
the printing application.
For details on Easy Settings , refer to the following topics.
•Printing Photos and Images (→P .152)
•Printing Line Drawings and T ext (→P .160)
•Printing Of ce Documents (→P .171)
Print Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
Print Priority (*1) Description
Image A setting for posters or other documents made up mainly of photos or images, or for
emphasizing photos or images in printed documents.
Line Drawing/T ext Choose this setting for CAD drawings made up mainly of intricate lines, or wall
newspapers and other notices with a large amount of text. Suitable for emphasizing
detailed text in printed documents.
However , the quality may not be suf cient when printing photos or images that require
a lot of color coverage. In this case, choose “Image” instead.
Ofce Document Choose this setting for better legibility of documents combining text and graphics,
such as documents and presentation material created with typical of ce applications.
*1: Options suitable for the selected type of paper are listed under Print Priority .
Print Quality
Choose the print quality .
The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.
Print Quality (*1)
Description Print Priority
Highest A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality
is most important. Printing takes longer and consumes
more ink than in other modes, but this mode of fers
superior printing quality .
Image
High Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality
is most important.
Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than
in “Standard” or “Draft” modes, but this mode of fers
exceptional printing quality .
Image
Line Drawing/T ext
Enhanced Printing Options 187
Adjusting Images
Print Quality (*1)
Description Print Priority
Standard Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when
quality and speed are both important.
Printing takes less time than in “Highest” or “High” mode.
Image
Line Drawing/T ext
Ofce Document
Draft Choose this setting to print faster .
Printing in draft mode can help you work more ef ciently
when checking layouts.
Image
Line Drawing/T ext
*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Print Quality .
Color Settings
Setting Item Options
Description
Color Mode (*1) Color
Monochrome
Color (CAD)
Monochrome (BK ink)
Monochrome Bitmap
Choose whether to print in color or
monochrome.
( → P .177)
Color Adjustment Cyan
Magenta
Y ellow
Gray T one
Brightness
Contrast
Saturation
Y ou can adjust the levels of cyan,
magenta, and yellow as well as the
brightness, contrast, saturation, and gray
tones.
If you choose Monochrome or
Monochrome (BK ink) in Color Mode
only Brightness and Contrast can be
adjusted.
Image ,Graphics , and T ext are available
as Object Adjustment options. (In
Windows and Mac OS X 10.5 only .)
Color-Matching Modes Driver Matching Mode
ICC Matching Mode
Driver ICM Mode
Host ICM Mode
ColorSync (Mac OS
10.3.9-10.4)
Off (Windows)
No Correction (Max OS X)
Choose the color-matching mode. Other
color-matching modes may be provided
by the computer operating system, such
as ICM and ColorSync.
Color-Matching Method (*2) Auto
Perceptual
Colorimetric
Colorimetric (No Wht-pnt
Corr) (Max OS X)
Saturation
other
Choose the color-matching method. The
available options vary depending on your
selection in “Color-Matching Mode” .
*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Color Mode.
*2: The order of options displayed varies depending on the operating system.
188 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Enhancing printing quality
Setting Item Description
Unidirectional Printing Choosing unidirectional printing can improve printing results if lines are
printed crooked or images are uneven. However , this takes more time
than regular printing.
Thicken Fine Lines
(Windows)
Thicken Fine Lines (Mac OS
X)
Choose this option to make ne lines clearer in CAD drawings or similar
documents.
Sharpen T ext Choose this option to print intricate text more distinctly .
Reduce Print Unevenness
(*1)
Choose this option to counteract uneven printing.
Economy Printing When this mode is selected, less ink is consumed than in regular printing,
but the quality is diminished.
Select this mode if you want to conserve ink when checking drawings, for
example. Depending on the Media T ype and Print Quality settings, this
mode may not be available.
*1: Displayed in Mac OS X.
Note
•T o print at a higher level of quality , in the printer driver , choose High or Highest in Print Quality , and
choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.
For instructions on specifying the print quality and color settings before printing, refer to the following topics,
as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
•Choosing the Document T ype and Printing Conditions (Windows) (→P .190)
•Choosing the Document T ype and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X) (→P .192)
Enhanced Printing Options 189
Adjusting Images
Choosing the Document T ype and Printing Conditions
(W indows)
Y ou can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print T arget presets. As an example, this topic
describes how to print CAD drawings as clearly as possible, with sharp lines and text.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
5. Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode.
6. Click Line Drawing/T ext in the EPrint Priority list.
7. Click High (1200dpi) in the FPrint Quality list.
Note
•Options displayed in the FPrint Quality list vary depending on the paper type.
190 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
8. Click Color (CAD) in the GColor Mode list.
9. T o adjust the color , click HColor Settings .
Note
•For instructions on adjusting color , see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P .177)
10. Select the KSharpen T ext check box.
1 1. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
12. Conrm the settings of APage Size ,LPaper Source , and so on.
13. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Enhanced Printing Options 191
Adjusting Images
Choosing the Document T ype and Printing Conditions
(Mac OS X)
Y ou can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print T arget presets. As an example, this topic
describes how to print CAD drawings as clearly as possible, with sharp lines and text.
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. Choose the original size in the FPaper Size list.
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
192 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
7. Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode.
8. Click Line Drawing in the EPrint Priority list.
9. Click High(1200dpi) in the FPrint Quality list.
Note
•Options displayed in the FPrint Quality list vary depending on the type of paper .
10. Click Color (CAD) in the HColor Mode list.
1 1. T o adjust the color , click ISet .
Note
•For instructions on adjusting color , see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P .177)
12. Access the Page Setup pane.
13. Conrm the settings of APaper Source and CPage Size .
14. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
Enhanced Printing Options 193
Choosing Paper for Printing
Choosing Paper for Printing
Choosing a Paper for Printing
Choosing the right paper for your particular printing application will give you the best printing results.
Media T ype
The printer and printer driver of fer print settings optimized for various paper characteristics.
Note
•For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide . ( → P .95)
•The types of paper indicated in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control
Panel ) are updated when you install the Media Conguration T ool from the User Software CD-ROM
or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration T ool . For information about the
Media Conguration T ool , see the Media Conguration T ool (Windows) or Media Conguration T ool
(Macintosh).
•An error message may be displayed on the printer Control Panel if the type of paper as specied in
the printer driver does not match the type specied on the printer . Although you can print under these
conditions, the printing results may not be suitable.
If the paper type is not listed for selection
If the type of paper loaded is not listed among the options for selection, try printing on Special 1, Special 2,
and so on. Note that higher numbers in this setting enable more vivid colors but may also cause colors to
run together .
For instructions on specifying the paper type before printing, refer to the following topics.
•Changing the T ype of Paper (→P .195)
194 Enhanced Printing Options
Choosing Paper for Printing
Changing the T ype of Paper
Follow these steps to change the type of paper specied on the printer after you have loaded paper .
If you will continue using this type of paper later , selecting Keep Paper T ype >On will save the time and ef fort of
conguring the media type setting when you load the paper again. The current media type settings before you
select On will be automatically selected at that time. ( → P .1 1 1)
Important
•For best printing results, the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper . Be sure to select
the type of paper to use correctly before printing.
•Because the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper , the margins and the size of
printed images may vary depending on the type of paper used. If margins and the size of images are not
as you expected, adjust the paper feed amount.
( → P .612)
Changing the T ype of Paper
Note
•After you load a roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the type of paper on the
Display Screen . Select the type of paper and press the OK button.
If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On , specify the roll
length after the type of paper . ( → P .1 12)
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Chg. Paper T ype , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper loaded ( Roll Paper or Cut Sheet ), and then press
the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper loaded in the printer , and then press the OK button.
Note
•For details on types of paper , see the Paper Reference Guide . ( → P .95) By default, Plain Paper
is selected.
•If you move the Release Lever , the setting automatically reverts to the previously selected paper .
•Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper , it may
cause feed errors and af fect printing quality .
Enhanced Printing Options 195
Choosing Paper for Printing
Using the Same T ype of Paper Regularly
Congure this setting so that current media type settings will be automatically selected when you load the
same type of paper later .
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Keep Paper T ype , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select On , and then press the OK button.
Note
•The specied media type setting is updated in the following situations.
•When using sheets, if you send a print job before loading a sheet, the media type setting is
updated to match the type of paper specied by the print job.
•When you have selected ManageRemainRoll >On on the Control Panel and a barcode is printed
on the roll, the media type setting is updated to match the type of paper specied by the barcode.
•T o change the media type setting, see “Changing the T ype of Paper”. (→P .195)
196 Enhanced Printing Options
Choosing Paper for Printing
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
If you replace the paper , complete the printer driver settings for the paper type and size.
For instructions on conguring paper settings in the printer driver , refer to the following topics, as appropriate
for your computer and operating system.
•Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (→P .197)
•Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (→P .199)
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (W indows)
If you have replaced the paper , you must complete the following settings in the printer driver .
Important
•Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver .
If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Note
•Click the BGet Information button to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box. On the
Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and
congure printer driver settings for the feed source and type of paper .
Enhanced Printing Options 197
Choosing Paper for Printing
5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
6. In the APage Size list, select the size of the original as specied in the application.
7. In the LPaper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
8. If you have selected Roll Paper in LPaper Source , select the width of the loaded roll in MRoll
Paper W idth .
Note
•A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit dif ferent printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P .336)
198 Enhanced Printing Options
Choosing Paper for Printing
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)
If you have replaced the paper , you must complete the following settings in the printer driver .
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. Choose the original size in the FPaper Size list.
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Enhanced Printing Options 199
Choosing Paper for Printing
7. Access the Page Setup pane.
8. In the APaper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
9. If you have selected Manual in APaper Source , make sure the size as selected in Page Setup
is displayed in CPage Size . If you have selected Roll Paper in APaper Source , make sure
the width of the loaded roll is displayed in BRoll W idth .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Note
•A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit dif ferent printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .454)
200 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
Y ou can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver , as desired.
Fit Paper Size
Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.
For instructions on resizing originals to match the paper size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
•Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) (→P .202)
•Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) (→P .204)
Note
•For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use
an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of
150 dpi or more at actual size.
Enhanced Printing Options 201
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (W indows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following
example.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0mm)/Letter (8.3 × 1 1.7 in)
•Paper: Roll
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
5. Select the printing application in the EPrint T arget list.
6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
202 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
7. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
8. Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper W idth list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm) .
9. In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this
case, click ISO A4 .
10. Select the CEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
1 1. Select the DFit Paper Size check box.
12. Click ISO A3 in the GPaper Size list.
13. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Enhanced Printing Options 203
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following
example.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 1 1.7 in])
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In the FPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
204 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
7. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
8. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.
10. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
Enhanced Printing Options 205
Printing enlargements or reductions
1 1. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the BRoll W idth list-in this case, ISO
A2/A3 (420.0mm) .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
12. Make sure CPage Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in C
Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 .
13. Select the DEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
14. Make sure EFit Paper Size is selected.
15. Click ISO A3 in the IPaper Size list.
16. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
206 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll W idth
Y ou can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver , as desired.
Fit Roll Paper W idth
Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width, as desired.
For instructions on resizing originals to match the roll paper width, refer to the following topics, as appropriate
for your computer and operating system.
•Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) (→P .208)
•Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) (→P .210)
Note
•For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use
an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of
150 dpi or more at actual size.
Enhanced Printing Options 207
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll W idth (W indows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.
•Document: Any type
•Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 1 1.7 in)
•Paper: Roll
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
5. Select the printing application in the EPrint T arget list.
6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
7. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
8. In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x1 1") .
208 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
9. Select the CEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Note
•If the CEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the
BBorderless Printing check box.
10. Click EFit Roll Paper W idth .
Note
•After you click EFit Roll Paper W idth , the Information dialog box is displayed. Select the width of
the loaded roll in the Roll Paper W idth list and click OK .
•Make sure the roll paper width you specify matches the width of the loaded roll.
1 1. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Enhanced Printing Options 209
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll W idth (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 1 1.7 in])
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In the FPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
210 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
7. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
8. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.
10. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
1 1. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the BRoll W idth list-in this case, 16
in. (406.4mm) .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 21 1
Printing enlargements or reductions
12. Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 .
13. Select the DEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
14. Click FFit Roll Paper W idth .
15. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
212 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling V alue
Y ou can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver , as desired.
Scaling
Enlarge or reduce originals by a particular amount, as desired.
For instructions on entering a scaling value to resize originals, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
•Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling V alue (Windows) (→P .214)
•Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling V alue (Mac OS X) (→P .216)
Note
•For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use
an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of
150 dpi or more at actual size.
Enhanced Printing Options 213
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling V alue (W indows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following
example.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 1 1.7 in])
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
Important
•In borderless printing, you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling value.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
5. Select the printing application in the EPrint T arget list.
6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
214 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
7. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
8. Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper W idth list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm) .
9. In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this
case, click ISO A4 .
10. Select the CEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
1 1. Click ISO A4 in the GPaper Size list.
12. Click FScaling and enter “120” .
Note
•Y ou can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portions of f the bottom
and right edges of the paper will not be printed.
•If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is
printed in the upper-left corner . In this case, you can center originals by selecting EPrint Centered
on the Layout sheet.
13. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Enhanced Printing Options 215
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling V alue (Mac OS
X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following
example.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 1 1.7 in])
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In the FPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
216 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
7. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
8. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.
10. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
Enhanced Printing Options 217
Printing enlargements or reductions
1 1. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the BRoll W idth list-in this case, ISO
A2/A3 (420.0mm) .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
12. Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 .
13. Select the DEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
14. Click GScaling and enter “120” .
Note
•Y ou can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portion of f the edge of
the paper will not be printed.
•If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed
in the upper-left corner . In this case, you can center originals by selecting the JPrint Centered
check box.
15. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
218 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
Printing at full size
Printing on Oversized Paper
Except in borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to your selected paper size minus the space for
a margin. ( → P .75) T o print documents or images you prepare without a margin at actual size, use an oversized
paper size.
For example, to print a A4-sized original without a margin at A4 size, print it on paper larger than A4 size and
cut away the excess margin.
Note
•If you prepare an original for printing without a margin and print it on paper of regular size, the image
near the edge will not be printed.
Oversize
The margin required by the printer is added around the “outside” of a regular paper size. For example, when
printing a A4-sized original (210×297 mm), you have the following options.
•(a) Regular paper size: Gray area not printed
•(b) Page Size
•(c) Oversized paper size: Print area matches the page size (b)
Important
•When printing on oversize paper , load paper larger than the page size-a size that includes the margin
required by the printer .
•Sheets: Load paper that is at least 6 mm (0.24 in) wider and 26 mm (1 in) higher than the page size
•Rolls: Load paper that is at least 6 mm (0.24 in) wider and 6 mm (0.24 in) higher than the page size
Note
•Paper larger than the maximum size supported by the printer cannot be used as paper for oversized
printing. ( → P .100)
•Oversized printing (selecting Oversize in Page Size ) is only available in Windows. For oversized
printing on sheets, choose Manual as Paper Source .
•T o perform oversized printing on a Macintosh computer , you must specify a non-standard page size and
print on it.
•T o specify a non-standard paper size in oversized printing, register the paper size as a Custom Paper
Size . Oversized printing is not available with “Custom Size” . ( → P .261)
Enhanced Printing Options 219
Printing at full size
For instructions on oversized printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and
operating system.
•Printing at Full Size (Windows) (→P .220)
•Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) (→P .222)
Printing at Full Size (W indows)
This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)
•Document: Any T ype
•Page Size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 1 1.7 in)
•Paper: Roll
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
220 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
6. Click OSize Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.
7. In the Paper Size Options dialog box, select the Oversize check box in Display Series .
8. Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.
9. Click Oversize - ISO A4 in the APage Size list.
10. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
1 1. Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper W idth list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm) .
12. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Enhanced Printing Options 221
Printing at full size
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 1 1.7 in])
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In FPaper Size , click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - Oversize .
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
222 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
7. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
8. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.
10. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
Enhanced Printing Options 223
Printing at full size
1 1. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the BRoll W idth list-in this case, ISO
A2/A3 (420.0mm) .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
12. Make sure CPage Size shows the original size as specied in CPaper Size in the Page
Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 - Oversize .
13. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
224 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
T ake advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images)
without a surrounding margin, or border .
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you
can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper .
Important
•Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
•Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . ( → P .95)
•Paper incompatible with the printer ’ s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only .
•These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
•Y ou cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at
actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.
•When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality , specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver . In
this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only . After ejecting and
cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.
•By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper . When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of
use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
•On the Main sheet of the printer driver , click Settings in Media T ype .
•Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying T ime .
Borderless Printing Method
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
Enhanced Printing Options 225
Printing at full size
Print Image with Actual Size
Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that
exceeds the dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.
Note
•Not all page sizes are available.
•Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged
when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may
af fect image quality . When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side
than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
•Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) (→P .227)
•Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) (→P .229)
226 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (W indows)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
•Document: Any type
•Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
•Paper: Roll
•Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
•Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1. Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8
mm (10 × 12 in) -that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2 × 12.2 in)
Note
•If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft W ord, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
•The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it ts inside the
paper area to be printed on.
2. Choose Print in the application menu.
3. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
4. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
5. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper .
6. Select the print target in the EPrint T arget list.
Enhanced Printing Options 227
Printing at full size
7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8. In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the source application.
In this case, click 10"x12" .
9. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
10. Select the BBorderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.
1 1. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper W idth list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll
(254.0mm) .
12. Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
13. In CBorderless Printing Method , click FPrint Image with Actual Size .
14. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
228 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: 10 × 12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)-Borderless
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
•Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In the FPaper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click
10"x12" - Borderless .
Note
•Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by “-Borderless” .
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
Enhanced Printing Options 229
Printing at full size
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper .
7. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
8. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.
10. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
230 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
1 1. Conrm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the BRoll W idth list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm) .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
12. Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless .
13. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
Enhanced Printing Options 231
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size
T ake advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images)
without a surrounding margin, or border .
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you
can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper .
Important
•Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
•Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . ( → P .95)
•Paper incompatible with the printer ’ s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only .
•These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
•Y ou cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at
actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.
•When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality , specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver . In
this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only . After ejecting and
cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.
•By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper . When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of
use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
•On the Main sheet of the printer driver , click Settings in Media T ype .
•Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying T ime .
Borderless Printing Method
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
232 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Fit Paper Size
Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.
Note
•The printer driver automatically enlarges originals 3 mm (0.12 in) past the dimensions of the paper on
each side. The 3 mm portion beyond the edge on each side is not printed.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the paper size, refer
to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
•Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) (→P .234)
•Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) (→P .236)
Enhanced Printing Options 233
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the
Paper Size (W indows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the
following example.
•Document: Any type
•Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
•Paper: Roll
•Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
•Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1. In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Note
•If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft W ord, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
2. Choose Print in the application menu.
3. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
4. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
5. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper .
6. Select the print target in the EPrint T arget list.
234 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8. In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click 10"x12" .
9. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
10. Select the BBorderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.
1 1. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper W idth list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll
(254.0mm) .
12. Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
13. In CBorderless Printing Method , click DFit Paper Size .
14. Click Match Page Size in the GPaper Size list.
15. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Enhanced Printing Options 235
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the
Paper Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the
following example.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
•Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In the FPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12" .
Note
•All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to match the paper size.
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
236 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper .
7. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
8. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.
10. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
Enhanced Printing Options 237
Borderless Printing
1 1. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the BRoll W idth list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm) .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
12. Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" .
13. On the Page Setup pane, select the DEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
14. Select the HBorderless Printing check box.
15. Click EFit Paper Size under DEnlarged/Reduced Printing .
16. In IPaper Size , click the paper size. In this case, click 10"x12" - Borderless .
17. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
238 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll
W idth
T ake advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images)
without a surrounding margin, or border .
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you
can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper .
Important
•Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
•Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . ( → P .95)
•Paper incompatible with the printer ’ s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only .
•These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
•Y ou cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at
actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.
•When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality , specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver . In
this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only . After ejecting and
cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.
•By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper . When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of
use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
•On the Main sheet of the printer driver , click Settings in Media T ype .
•Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying T ime .
Borderless Printing Method
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
Enhanced Printing Options 239
Borderless Printing
Scale to t Roll Paper W idth
Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width.
Note
•Y ou can combine this function with rotating pages 90 degrees before printing so that the original width
(relative to portrait orientation) matches the roll paper width in borderless printing.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the roll paper width,
refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
•Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) (→P .241)
•Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) (→P .243)
240 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll
W idth (W indows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the
following example.
•Document: Any type
•Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 1 1.7 in)
•Paper: Roll
•Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
•Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1. In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Note
•If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft W ord, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
2. Choose Print in the application menu.
3. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
4. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
5. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper .
6. Select the print target in the EPrint T arget list.
Enhanced Printing Options 241
Borderless Printing
7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8. In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x1 1") .
9. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
10. Select the BBorderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.
1 1. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper W idth list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll
(254.0mm) .
12. Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
13. In CBorderless Printing Method , make sure EScale to t Roll Paper W idth is selected.
14. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
242 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll
W idth (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the
following example.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 1 1.7 in])
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
•Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In the FPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .
Note
•All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to t the roll width.
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
Enhanced Printing Options 243
Borderless Printing
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper .
7. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
8. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.
10. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
244 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
1 1. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the BRoll W idth list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm) .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
12. Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 .
13. Select the DEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
14. Select the HBorderless Printing check box.
This ensures that FFit Roll Paper W idth is automatically selected in DEnlarged/Reduced
Printing .
15. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
Enhanced Printing Options 245
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
T ake advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images)
without a surrounding margin, or border .
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you
can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper .
Important
•Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
•Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . ( → P .95)
•Paper incompatible with the printer ’ s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only .
•These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
•Y ou cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at
actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.
•When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality , specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver . In
this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only . After ejecting and
cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.
•By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper . When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of
use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
•On the Main sheet of the printer driver , click Settings in Media T ype .
•Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying T ime .
Borderless Printing Method
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
246 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Print Image with Actual Size
Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that
exceeds the dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.
Note
•Not all page sizes are available.
•Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged
when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may
af fect image quality . When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side
than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
•Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) (→P .248)
•Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) (→P .250)
Enhanced Printing Options 247
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (W indows)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
•Document: Any type
•Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
•Paper: Roll
•Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
•Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1. Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8
mm (10 × 12 in) -that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2 × 12.2 in)
Note
•If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft W ord, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
•The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it ts inside the
paper area to be printed on.
2. Choose Print in the application menu.
3. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
4. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
5. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper .
6. Select the print target in the EPrint T arget list.
248 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8. In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the source application.
In this case, click 10"x12" .
9. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
10. Select the BBorderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.
1 1. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper W idth list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll
(254.0mm) .
12. Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
13. In CBorderless Printing Method , click FPrint Image with Actual Size .
14. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Enhanced Printing Options 249
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: 10 × 12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)-Borderless
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
•Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In the FPaper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click
10"x12" - Borderless .
Note
•Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by “-Borderless” .
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
250 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper .
7. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
8. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.
10. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
Enhanced Printing Options 251
Borderless Printing
1 1. Conrm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the BRoll W idth list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm) .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
12. Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless .
13. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
252 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing banners or at other non-standard
sizes
Printing V ertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format
Printing)
Y ou can create vertical or horizontal banners by printing originals that are in banner format on rolls.
Originals created in Microsoft W ord or other applications in your preferred size can be enlarged to ll the width
of roll paper by completing simple printer driver settings.
Fit Roll Paper W idth
Y ou can easily create vertical or horizontal banners by automatically enlarging or reducing originals to t the
full width of rolls.
Note
•The maximum supported roll length is 18.0 m or 19.7 yd.
For instructions on printing vertical or horizontal banners, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
•Printing V ertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) (→P .254)
•Printing V ertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) (→P .258)
Important
•Before printing, check how much of the roll paper is left. If you have activated automatic detection of the
remaining roll paper , a warning message is displayed when there is not enough roll paper left.
•If not much ink is left, prepare replacement ink tanks.
•T o print at a higher level of quality , in the printer driver , choose High or Highest in Print Quality , and
choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.
Enhanced Printing Options 253
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing V ertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format
Printing; W indows)
This topic describes how to print a banner about ve times as long as the roll width based on the following example.
•Document: A horizontal banner created in Microsoft W ord
•Page size: Non-standard (100×500 mm [3.9×19.7 in])
•Paper: Roll
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: 16 in (406.4 mm)
Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.
1. Register a Custom Paper Size .
Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a Custom Paper Size . In this example, 100×500
mm (3.9×19.7 in) is registered.
2. In the application, create an original in the size you registered.
3. Print the banner , using the settings that correspond to banners.
Registering a Custom Paper Size
This example describes how to register a paper size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in
either horizontal or vertical format.
1. Display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .348)
2. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
3. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
4. Click OSize Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.
5. Enter a desired paper name in Custom Paper Size Name . “My Horizontal Banner” is used
in this example.
6. In Units , click mm .
7. Under Paper Size , enter “100” in W idth and “500” in Height .
8. Click Add to add the paper size of “My Horizontal Banner .”
9. Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.
254 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
10. Close the printer driver dialog box.
Note
•Y ou can also specify a Custom Size as the paper size. Note that Custom Size settings are not
available after you exit the application.
For more information, see “Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)”. (→P .262)
Creating the banner in the application
Follow the steps below to create the banner in Microsoft W ord using the Custom Paper Size you registered.
1. Start Microsoft W ord.
2. Choose Page Setup from the File menu to display the Page Setup dialog box.
3. Under Paper Size , click the Custom Paper Size you registered-"My Horizontal Banner" in this
example.
Important
•If "My Horizontal Banner" is not listed, make sure this printer is selected as the printer to use.
•In applications such as Microsoft PowerPoint that do not enable you to choose registered paper
sizes, use the custom paper size setting in “Custom” and specify 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in)
4. Set the printing orientation to horizontal.
5. Create the banner .
Printing the banner
Follow these steps to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.
1. Choose Print in the Microsoft W ord menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
5. After conrming that DEasy Settings is selected, click Poster in the EPrint T arget list.
Enhanced Printing Options 255
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
7. In the APage Size list, click the size you registered, “My Horizontal Banner” .
8. Select the CEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Note
•If the CEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the
BBorderless Printing check box.
9. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
10. After you click EFit Roll Paper W idth , the Information dialog box is displayed.
1 1. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper W idth list. In this case, click 16-in. Roll
(406.4mm) , and then click OK .
256 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
12. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
If printing is unsuccessful, you may be able to print after completing the following setting.
1. On the Layout sheet, click JSpecial Settings to display the Special Settings dialog box.
2. In the FineZoom Settings list, click Y es .
Enhanced Printing Options 257
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing V ertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format
Printing; Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print a banner about ve times as long as the roll width based on the following example.
•Document: An original designed for a horizontal banner
•Page Size: Non-standard (100×500 mm [3.9×19.7 in])
•Paper: Roll
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.
1. In the application, create an original in the format of a horizontal or vertical banner .
2. Register a Custom Page Sizes
Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a Custom Page Sizes in Page Setup . In this
example, 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in) is registered.
3. Print the banner , using the settings that correspond to banners.
Note
•The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of setting up non-standard paper
sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.
Register a Custom Page Sizes
This example describes how to register and print using a page size that is horizontally elongated and suitable
for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.
1. Create the document in the application.
2. Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
3. Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
4. Click Manage Custom Sizes in the CPaper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes
dialog box.
258 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
5. Double-click Untitled in the list at left, and then enter a name for the page size you want
to register . Here, enter “100*500.”
If the Untitled size is not listed at left, click +below the list.
6. Under Page Size , enter “10” in W idth and “50” in Height . Here, measurements are entered
in centimeters.
7. Specify the margins by entering “0.3” in Printer Margins . Here, too, measurements are entered
in centimeters.
8. Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.
9. In the CPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click "100*500", the size
you registered.
10. In DOrientation , click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.
1 1. Click FOK to close the dialog box.
Print the banner
Follow the steps below to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Access the Main pane.
3. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
4. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
5. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
6. Access the Page Setup pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 259
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
7. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
8. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the BRoll W idth list-in this case, 16
in. (406.4mm) .
Note
•If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information on the
Main pane and update the printer information.
9. In CPage Size , make sure "100*500" is displayed, as registered in Page Setup .
10. Select the DEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
1 1. Click FFit Roll Paper W idth .
12. Conrm the print settings, and click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
260 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
By specifying the paper size, you can print on non-standard sizes of paper .
There are two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes, as follows.
Registering non-standard paper size in the printer driver
After you register non-standard paper sizes, they are listed with standard sizes so that you can choose
them anytime as needed.
Note
•These non-standard paper sizes you register in the printer driver are called Custom Paper Size in
Windows and “Custom Sizes” in Mac OS X.
Specifying custom paper sizes for temporary use
Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the printer driver , the sizes will not be available after you
exit the application. If you want to set up a non-standard paper size so that it will always be available, we
recommend registering the paper size in the printer driver .
Note
•These temporary paper sizes you register on the printer are called “Custom Sizes” in Windows.
•This can only be congured in Windows.
For instructions on specifying non-standard paper sizes for printing, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
•Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) (→P .262)
•Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X) (→P .266)
Enhanced Printing Options 261
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (W indows)
This topic describes two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes.
•Printing by using Custom Size
•Printing by using Custom Paper Size
Printing by using Custom Size
This section describes how to print using Custom Size based on the following example.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: Square of non-standard dimensions (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])
•Paper: Sheets
•Paper type: Any type
•Paper Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
1. Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer .
2. Choose Print in the application menu.
3. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
4. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
5. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6. After conrming that DEasy Settings is selected, select from the EPrint T arget list.
262 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8. Click Manual in the LPaper Source list.
9. Click Custom Size in the APage Size list to display the Custom Size Settings dialog box.
10. Conrm that mm is selected in Units .
1 1. Enter “430” (16.9 in) in both W idth and Height .
12. Click OK to close the Custom Size Settings dialog box.
13. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Enhanced Printing Options 263
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing by using Custom Paper Size
This section describes how to print using Custom Paper Size based on the following example. First, register
a non-standard paper size called “430 mm Square” as a Custom Paper Size .
•Document: Any T ype
•Page Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
•Paper: Sheets
•Media T ype: Any type
•Paper Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
1. Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer .
2. Choose Print in the application menu.
3. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
4. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
5. In the AMedia T ype list, select the AMedia T ype that is loaded in the printer .
6. After conrming that DEasy Settings is selected, select the EPrint T arget from the EPrint
T arget list.
264 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8. Click OSize Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.
9. Enter a desired paper name in Custom Paper Size Name . “430 mm Square” is used in this
example.
10. Select mm in Units .
1 1. Enter “430” (16.9 in) in both W idth and Height .
Note
•If you select the Fix the Ratio of the W idth to Height check box, after you enter a value in either
W idth or Height , the other value will be automatically applied based on the original aspect ratio.
12. Click Add to register “430 mm Square” .
13. Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.
14. Click Manual in the LPaper Source list.
15. In the APage Size list, click the size you added, "430 mm Square".
16. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Enhanced Printing Options 265
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X)
This section describes how to register and print Custom Page Sizes based on the following example. Here, you
will register a non-standard paper size named “430*430” in Custom Page Sizes .
•Document: Any T ype
•Page Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
•Paper: Sheets
•Media T ype: Any type
•Paper Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
Note
•The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of setting up non-standard paper
sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.
1. Create the document in the application.
2. Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer .
3. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
4. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
266 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
5. Click Manage Custom Sizes in the CPaper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes
dialog box.
6. In Page Size , enter the height and width of the original. Here, enter “43.00 cm” in Height and
W idth .
7. In Printer Margins , enter “0.5” for the top and side margins and “2.3” for the bottom margin.
Here, measurements are entered in centimeters.
8. Double-click Untitled in the list at left in the Custom Page Sizes dialog box and enter the
paper name-in this case, “430*430” .
9. Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.
10. In the CPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click “430*430” , the size
you registered.
1 1. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
12. Access the Main pane.
13. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
14. After conrming that DEasy Settings is selected, select from the EPrint T arget list.
15. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
Enhanced Printing Options 267
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
16. Access the Page Setup pane.
17. Click Manual in the APaper Source list.
18. In CPage Size , make sure “430*430” is displayed, as registered in Page Setup .
19. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
268 Enhanced Printing Options
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
By arranging originals from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or web browser screen shots next to each
other on single sheets, you can create highly expressive presentation materials, easy-to-understand meeting
materials, and a variety of other printed documents.
Free Layout (W indows)
Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple les-even
multiple source applications-in a single-page layout.
Important
•Free Layout cannot be used in 64-bit version of Windows.
Enhanced Printing Options 269
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh)
Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple les-even
multiple source applications-in a single-page layout.
For instructions on arranging originals from multiple applications, refer to the following topics.
•Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) (→P .271)
•Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X) (→P .273)
270 Enhanced Printing Options
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (W indows)
This topic describes how to arrange multiple originals using the Free Layout function.
Important
•Free Layout cannot be used in 64-bit version of Windows.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
5. Select the APage Layout check box.
6. Click Free Layout in the APage Layout list.
Enhanced Printing Options 271
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
7. When you attempt to print, the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed. (At this
point, the document will not be printed yet.)
8. Edit and rearrange the image in the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.
Important
•Without closing the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window , repeat steps 1-7 to arrange originals
from multiple applications on the same page.
Note
•For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the imagePROGRAF Free Layout
help topic.
9. Print from the imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.
Note
•For details on imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout .
272 Enhanced Printing Options
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to use the Free Layout function to arrange multiple originals next to each other before
printing.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Access the Page Setup pane.
3. Select the NFree Layout check box.
4. Click MPrint .
5. The Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed.
6. Edit and rearrange the image in the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.
Note
•Without closing the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window , repeat steps 1 to 4 to arrange
originals from multiple applications on the same page.
•For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the Canon imagePROGRAF Free
Layout help topic.
Enhanced Printing Options 273
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
7. Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.
Note
•For details on Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout .
274 Enhanced Printing Options
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously
Y ou can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Roll paper (banner)
Important
•This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
•During banner printing, settings for conserving paper , number of copies, borderless printing,
enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
•Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) (→P .276)
•Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X) (→P .278)
Enhanced Printing Options 275
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (W indows)
This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Important
•This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
•During banner printing, settings for conserving paper , number of copies, borderless printing,
enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, click the type of paper that is loaded.
5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
6. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
276 Enhanced Printing Options
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
7. Click NRoll Paper Options to display the Roll Paper Options dialog box.
8. Select the BBanner Printing check box.
9. Click OK .
10. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Enhanced Printing Options 277
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Important
•This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
•During banner printing, settings for conserving paper , number of copies, borderless printing,
enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. Click the original size in the CPaper Size list.
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
278 Enhanced Printing Options
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, click the type of paper that is loaded.
7. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
8. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.
10. Click Roll Paper (Banner) in the APaper Source list.
1 1. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
Enhanced Printing Options 279
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet
T o conserve paper , you can print several pages of the original on a single sheet by reducing the original and
dividing the sheet into areas for each page.
Page Layout
Specify a number of pages of the original to print on a single sheet, in a layout of multiple pages per sheet.
Note
•Y ou can print up to 16 pages of the original on a single sheet.
•Y ou can also change the page layout order and print page boundary lines, as desired.
Important
•This function cannot be combined with the following options.
•Borderless Printing
•Scaling Originals (Windows)
•Banner Printing (Windows)
For instructions on printing multiple pages per sheet, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
•Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) (→P .281)
•Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) (→P .283)
280 Enhanced Printing Options
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (W indows)
This topic describes how to print four pages of originals together on a single sheet based on the following example.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [1 1.7×16.5 in])
•Paper: Roll
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
5. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
6. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Enhanced Printing Options 281
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
8. In APage Size , click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x1 1") .
9. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
10. Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper W idth list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm) .
1 1. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
12. Select the APage Layout check box.
13. Click 4 Pages/Sheet in the APage Layout list.
Note
•Y ou can select the layout order for placing four pages on a sheet and a frame border in the Page
Layout Printing dialog box by clicking BSet .
14. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
282 Enhanced Printing Options
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print four pages of an original on a single sheet, based on the following example.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [1 1.7 × 16.5 in])
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In the FPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3 .
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
5. Access the Layout pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 283
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
6. Click 4in the APages per Sheet list.
Note
•Y ou can choose the layout order and specify a boundary line for the four pages in BLayout
Direction and CBorder .
7. Access the Main pane.
8. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
9. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
10. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
1 1. Access the Page Setup pane.
12. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
284 Enhanced Printing Options
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
13. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the BRoll W idth list-in this case, ISO
A2/A3 (420.0mm) .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
14. Make sure CPage Size shows the original size as specied in CPaper Size in the Page
Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A3 .
15. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
Enhanced Printing Options 285
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Posters in Sections
Y ou can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can
create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer .
Page Layout
Choose poster printing.
For instructions on printing large posters, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
•Printing Large Posters (Windows) (→P .287)
Note
•This method of poster printing is supported in Windows.
286 Enhanced Printing Options
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Large Posters (W indows)
Y ou can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can
create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer . This topic describes how to enlarge
an A2 original for printing it in sections on four sheets, based on the following example.
•Document: Poster
•Page size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
•Paper: Sheets
•Paper Size: A2 (420.0 × 594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
5. Click Poster in the EPrint T arget list.
6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Enhanced Printing Options 287
T iling and multiple pages per sheet
7. In APage Size , click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click
ISO A2 .
8. Click Manual in the LPaper Source list.
9. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
10. Select the APage Layout check box.
1 1. Click Poster (2 x 2) in the APage Layout list.
Note
•Follow the steps below to print only a portion of the poster as divided for printing.
•Click BSet under APage Layout to display the Pages to Print dialog box.
•On the Pages to Print dialog box, clear the check boxes of the portion you do not want to print.
•Click OK to close the Pages to Print dialog box.
12. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
288 Enhanced Printing Options
Centering originals
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls
Y ou can print originals centered on a page-for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you are
reducing the original.
Centering originals relative to roll paper width
If you use originals smaller than the roll paper width, you can center them relative to the width when printing.
Print Centered
Aligns the center of the original with the center of the roll, relative to the width.
For instructions on centering originals when printing on rolls, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
•Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) (→P .290)
•Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) (→P .292)
Enhanced Printing Options 289
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (W indows)
This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.
•Document: Any type
•Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 1 1.7 in)
•Paper: Roll
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [1 1.7 in])
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
5. Select the print target in the EPrint T arget list.
6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
290 Enhanced Printing Options
Centering originals
7. In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x1 1") .
8. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
9. Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper W idth list-in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll
(297.0mm) .
10. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
1 1. Select the EPrint Centered check box.
12. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Enhanced Printing Options 291
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 1 1.7 in])
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [1 1.7 in])
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In the FPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
292 Enhanced Printing Options
Centering originals
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
7. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
8. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.
10. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
Enhanced Printing Options 293
Centering originals
1 1. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in BRoll W idth -in this case, ISO A3/A4
(297.0mm) .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
12. Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 .
13. Select the JPrint Centered check box.
14. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
294 Enhanced Printing Options
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets
Y ou can print originals centered on a page-for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you are
reducing the original.
Centering originals on sheets
If you use paper larger than the original size or print originals after reduction, the printed images may be
aligned in the upper-left corner of the paper . In this case, you can center originals on sheets when printing.
Print Centered
Aligns the center of the original with the center of the sheet.
For instructions on centering originals when printing on sheets, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
•Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows) (→P .296)
•Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) (→P .298)
Enhanced Printing Options 295
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (W indows)
This topic describes how to reduce an original 50% for printing centered on a sheet.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 1 1.7 in])
•Paper: Sheets
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Paper size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 1 1.7 in])
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
5. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
7. In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this
case, click ISO A4 .
296 Enhanced Printing Options
Centering originals
8. Select the CEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
9. Click Match Page Size in the GPaper Size list.
10. Click FScaling and enter “50” .
1 1. Click Manual in the LPaper Source list.
12. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
13. Select the EPrint Centered check box.
14. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Important
•If you have selected Manual as the paper source, follow the instructions on the printer control
panel to enter the paper size.
Enhanced Printing Options 297
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to center originals for printing on sheets, based on the following example.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: A4
•Paper: Sheets
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Paper size: Non-standard
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In the FPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - for Paper
T ray (Large Margins) .
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
298 Enhanced Printing Options
Centering originals
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
7. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
8. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
9. Access the Page Setup pane.
10. Click Manual in the APaper Source list.
1 1. Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 - for Paper T ray (Large Margins) .
Enhanced Printing Options 299
Centering originals
12. Select the JPrint Centered check box.
13. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
Important
•If you have selected Manual as the paper source, follow the instructions on the printer control panel to
enter the paper size.
300 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
Y ou can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.
Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)
When originals are printed in portrait orientation, the original is rotated 90 degrees before printing if it ts
within the roll width. This enables you to conserve paper .
Important
•If the page would exceed the roll paper width after rotation, use this function with Scale to t Roll
Paper Width to print rotated pages.
For tips on conserving roll paper , refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating
system.
•Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows) (→P .302)
•Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) (→P .304)
Enhanced Printing Options 301
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
(W indows)
This topic describes how to conserve paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the
following example.
•Document: Any type
•Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×1 1.7 in)
•Paper: Roll
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [1 1.7 in])
This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×1 1.7 in) original in portrait
orientation 90 degrees to t within the width of A3/A4 roll paper (297.0 mm [1 1.7 in]), which enables you to
conserve paper .
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
302 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
6. In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x1 1") .
7. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
8. Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper W idth list-in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll
(297.0mm) .
9. Select the KRotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) check box.
10. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Enhanced Printing Options 303
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
(Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the
following example.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 1 1.7 in])
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [1 1.7 in])
This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 1 1.7 in) original in portrait
orientation 90 degrees to t within the width of A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [1 1.7 in]), which enables you to conserve
paper .
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In the FPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
304 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
7. Access the Page Setup pane.
8. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
9. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in BRoll W idth -in this case, ISO A3/A4
(297.0mm) .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 305
Conserving roll paper
10. Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 .
1 1. Select the LRotate Page 90 degrees check box.
12. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
306 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals W ithout T op
and Bottom Margins
Y ou can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.
No Spaces at T op or Bottom (Conserve Paper)
Y ou can print without feeding the paper for blank portions of originals if there are top and bottom margins in
originals. This enables you to conserve as much paper as the size of the margins.
Important
•Printing without the top and bottom margins is not supported in the following cases.
•Banner printing
•If you have chosen poster as the type of page layout
Note
•Even during borderless printing, you can print without the top and bottom margins.
•Printing without the top and bottom margins may cause inconsistency in the size of printed documents,
depending on the layout of images or text in your originals.
For tips on conserving roll paper , refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating
system.
•Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without T op and Bottom Margins (Windows) (→P .308)
•Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without T op and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) (→P .310)
Enhanced Printing Options 307
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals W ithout T op
and Bottom Margins (W indows)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin,
based on the following example.
•Document: Any type
•Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0mm)/Letter (8.3 × 1 1.7 in)
•Paper: Roll
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [1 1.7 in])
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
308 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
6. In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x1 1") .
7. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
8. Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper W idth list-in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll
(297.0mm) .
9. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
10. Select the GNo Spaces at T op or Bottom (Conserve Paper) check box.
1 1. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Enhanced Printing Options 309
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals W ithout T op
and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin,
based on the following example.
•Document: Any T ype
•Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 1 1.7 in])
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [1 1.7 in])
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In the FPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
310 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
7. Access the Page Setup pane.
8. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
9. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in BRoll W idth -in this case, ISO A3/A4
(297.0mm) .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 31 1
Conserving roll paper
10. Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 .
1 1. Select the KNo Spaces at T op or Bottom check box.
12. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
312 Enhanced Printing Options
Checking Images Before Printing
Checking Images Before Printing
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
Y ou can check the print layout on the preview screen.
Open Preview When Print Job Starts (W indows)
While viewing the preview screen, you can also adjust orientation or other settings, and your changes will be
instantly applied on the preview screen.
Note
•Under some settings and in some environments, PageComposer may be started.
Enhanced Printing Options 313
Checking Images Before Printing
Preview (Macintosh)
While viewing the preview screen, you can also adjust layout or size settings, and your changes will be
instantly applied on the preview screen.
For instructions on how to check the layout before printing, refer to the following topics:
•Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Windows) (→P .315)
•Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac OS X) (→P .317)
314 Enhanced Printing Options
Checking Images Before Printing
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
(W indows)
This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. Select the LOpen Preview When Print Job Starts check box.
5. After you click OK , when you print a job, the imagePROGRAF Preview window will be displayed.
Note
•If PageComposer is running, access the Special Settings dialog box from the Layout sheet and
clear Enable Preview Switching .
Enhanced Printing Options 315
Checking Images Before Printing
6. On the main window , you can check the layout and change settings as needed.
7. T o print, click Start Printing in the File menu.
Note
•For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, see Preview .
316 Enhanced Printing Options
Checking Images Before Printing
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac
OS X)
This topic describes how to check the layout before printing using the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview function.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Access the Main pane.
3. Select the OPrint Preview check box.
4. Click MPrint .
5. The Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.
6. Check the layout and adjust settings in the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window as desired.
7. Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview menu.
Note
•For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, refer to Preview .
Enhanced Printing Options 317
Other useful settings
Other useful settings
Printing W ith W atermarks
Y ou can add watermarks (background images) to documents that require special handling.
W atermark
W atermarks are applied to all pages of your document.
Important
•W atermarks are not printed if you select poster as the type of page layout.
The following watermarks are provided:
•CONFIDENTIAL
•COPY
•DRAFT
•FILE COPY
•FINAL
•PRELIMINAR Y
•PROOF
•T OP SECRET
Y ou can also create your own watermarks. Specify the following options to customize your watermark.
•W atermark string: Specify the font, size, color , and so on. Surround the watermark with a frame,
if desired.
•W atermark position: Specify the position on the page, the angle, and so on.
•W atermark printing method: Specify whether to print the watermark superimposed or under the
document image. Y ou can also print the watermark only on the rst page, if desired.
Note
•W atermarks are supported in Windows.
•In addition to the provided watermarks, you can create up to 50 original watermarks in Windows.
For detailed instructions on printing with watermarks, refer to the following topics:
•Printing with W atermarks-COPY , FILE COPY , and so on (Windows) (→P .319)
318 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Printing with W atermarks-COPY , FILE COPY , and so on
(W indows)
This topic describes how to print with watermarks, based on the following example of printing with a “FILE COPY”
watermark.
•Document: CAD drawing
•Page size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in[)
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
5. After conrming that DEasy Settings is selected, click CAD (Color Line Drawing) in the
EPrint T arget list.
Note
•Y ou can check the settings values selected in the EPrint T arget list by clicking GV iew Settings .
Enhanced Printing Options 319
Other useful settings
6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
7. In APage Size , click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this
case, click ISO A2 .
8. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
9. Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper W idth list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm) .
10. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
1 1. Select the CW atermark check box.
12. Click FILE COPY in the W atermarks list.
Note
•Click DEdit W atermark to open the Edit W atermark dialog box. In the Edit W atermark dialog box,
you can create custom watermarks and change the position and angle of watermarks.
13. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
320 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation
Y ou can specify the original orientation to match the orientation of the paper for printing.
Orientation
Paper is usually loaded in the printer in portrait orientation. When you have an original in landscape
orientation, you can specify the printing orientation so that the original is printed in landscape orientation.
Rotate 180 degrees
The original is rotated 180 degrees to print it upside down.
Mirror
A mirror image of the original is printed.
For instructions on specifying the original orientation before printing, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
•Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) (→P .322)
•Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X) (→P .324)
Enhanced Printing Options 321
Other useful settings
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (W indows)
This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based
on the following example.
•Document: An original in landscape orientation
•Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 1 1.7 in)
•Paper: Roll
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
5. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
6. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
322 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
8. In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x1 1") .
9. In HOrientation , click JLandscape .
10. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
1 1. Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper W idth list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm) .
12. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Enhanced Printing Options 323
Other useful settings
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based
on the following example.
•Document: An original in landscape orientation
•Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 1 1.7 in])
•Paper: Roll paper
•Paper type: Plain Paper
•Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. In the FPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .
4. In DOrientation , click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.
5. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
324 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
6. Access the Main pane.
7. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper .
8. Make your selection in the EPrint T arget list.
9. Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
10. Access the Page Setup pane.
1 1. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
Enhanced Printing Options 325
Other useful settings
12. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the BRoll W idth list-in this case, ISO
A2/A3 (420.0mm) .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
13. Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 .
14. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
326 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Using Favorites
Y ou can register print settings as “favorites” to reuse settings from a particular job that met your expectations, or
settings for a particular page size that you will use repeatedly .
Favorites
Registering a favorite for later use. Y ou can choose the settings you have registered from a list before printing,
and you can check the settings details.
Note
•Y ou can also save the favorite settings as les. Using these les is a convenient way to print under the
same conditions on another computer . (In Windows.)
For instructions on using favorites to print, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
•Using Favorites (Windows) (→P .328)
•Using Favorites (Mac OS X) (→P .330)
Enhanced Printing Options 327
Other useful settings
Using Favorites (W indows)
This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.
Registering a favorite
Follow the steps below to save the current print settings as a favorite.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Complete the print settings.
4. Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.
5. Click HAdd to display the Add dialog box.
6. Enter a desired name in Name , such as “Photos for Presentations” or “Monthly Report.”
7. Choose a tting icon for these print settings in the Icon list.
8. In Comment , enter a description of the favorite to be added, as desired.
9. Click OK to close the Add dialog box.
The favorite you have added is now displayed in AFavorites .
Note
•T o save a favorite as a le, click JExport and specify the le to save.
328 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Printing using the favorite
Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.
4. In the AFavorites , choose the favorite you registered.
Note
•T o import a favorite, click IImport and specify the favorite le.
5. Click DApply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings.
6. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Enhanced Printing Options 329
Other useful settings
Using Favorites (Mac OS X)
Y ou can use the Presets function in Mac OS X for favorite-based printing.
Note
•In the printing dialog box, click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings. This is a
standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.
330 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing
Roll paper can be automatically cut after printing.
Note
•It may not be possible to cut certain types of paper , such as adhesive paper . For details on types of
paper that cannot be used with the auto cut feature, see the Paper Reference Guide ( → P .95)
Automatic Cutting
Roll paper is cut automatically after printing. If you prefer , you can print continuously without cutting the
roll, or you can print a cut line.
For instructions on cutting roll paper after printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
•Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) (→P .332)
•Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X) (→P .333)
Enhanced Printing Options 331
Other useful settings
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (W indows)
This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically after printing (using the auto cut function), as well as
how to print a cut line for manual cutting.
Note
•The auto cut function is activated on the printer by default and when the printer driver is installed.
Follow the steps below to reactivate the function if it is disabled, or to select the setting for printing a
cut line instead.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
4. Click Roll Paper in the LPaper Source list.
5. Click NRoll Paper Options to display the Roll Paper Options dialog box.
6. T o enable automatic cutting, click Y es in the AAutomatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the
paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline .
7. Click OK to close the Roll Paper Options dialog box.
8. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Roll paper will be automatically cut after printing.
332 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically after printing (using the auto cut function), as well as
how to print a cut line for manual cutting.
Note
•The auto cut function is activated on the printer by default and when the printer driver is installed.
Follow the steps below to reactivate the function if it is disabled, or to select the setting for printing a
cut line instead.
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. Choose the original size in the CPaper Size list.
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
Enhanced Printing Options 333
Other useful settings
5. Access the Page Setup pane.
6. Click Roll Paper in the APaper Source list.
7. Access the Main pane.
8. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
9. Click CSet to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box.
334 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
10. T o enable automatic cutting, click Printer Default in the HAutomatic Cutting list. If you prefer
to cut the paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline .
Important
•If the automatic cut function has been deactivated on the printer , change the auto cut setting on the
printer Control Panel .
1 1. Click OK to close the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box.
12. Conrm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .457)
Enhanced Printing Options 335
Printer Driver
W indows Software
Printer Driver
Printer Driver Settings (W indows)
For instructions on accessing the Windows printer driver , refer to the following topics.
•Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) (→P .346)
•Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows) (→P .348)
For information on the Windows printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.
•Main Sheet (Windows) (→P .350)
Y ou can specify the type of paper , color processing, print quality , print preview , and other settings.
Choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced
Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.
•Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (→P .354)
•V iew Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Windows) (→P .355)
•Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (Windows) (→P .356)
•Matching Sheet (Windows) (→P .359)
•Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome (Windows) (→P .361)
•Page Setup Sheet (Windows) (→P .364)
Y ou can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the
orientation, the paper size and feed source, and automatic cutting.
•Paper Size Options Dialog Box (Windows) (→P .367)
•Layout Sheet (Windows) (→P .368)
Y ou can specify the page layout, watermarks, the orientation, the number of copies, and print processing
options.
•Page Options Dialog Box (Windows) (→P .370)
•Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (→P .371)
336 Windows Software
Printer Driver
•Favorites Sheet (Windows) (→P .372)
Groups of print settings you select on each sheet can be saved as a favorite. Favorites you have added
can be edited or used at the time of printing as desired.
•Utility Sheet (Windows) (→P .374)
Y ou can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings
for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
•Support Sheet (Windows) (→P .375)
Y ou can view support information and the user manual.
•Device Settings Sheet (Windows) (→P .377)
Y ou can display settings for optional equipment installed on the printer and see the version information
for the printer driver .
imagePROGRAF Free Layout is a feature for freely arranging originals from various source applications on a
single page as desired before printing. For details, see Free Layout .
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is a feature for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned
originals from a Color imageRUNNER . For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
Important
•Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and imagePROGRAF Free Layout cannot be used on
64-bit version of Windows.
Windows Software 337
Printer Driver
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (W indows)
If you have replaced the paper , you must complete the following settings in the printer driver .
Important
•Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver .
If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Note
•Click the BGet Information button to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box. On the
Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and
congure printer driver settings for the feed source and type of paper .
5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
338 Windows Software
Printer Driver
6. In the APage Size list, select the size of the original as specied in the application.
7. In the LPaper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
8. If you have selected Roll Paper in LPaper Source , select the width of the loaded roll in MRoll
Paper W idth .
Note
•A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit dif ferent printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P .336)
Windows Software 339
Printer Driver
Conrming Print Settings (W indows)
There are two ways to conrm the print settings, as follows.
•Checking a preview of the settings
•Checking a print preview
Checking a preview of the settings
A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main ,Page Setup , and Layout sheets. By
checking illustrations and numerical values in the preview , you can conrm current settings for the page
size, orientation, paper source, layout, and so on.
Display Area
Information Displayed
PT op illustrations Illustrations indicate the orientation, page layout, borderless printing
selection, color mode, and other settings information.
QMiddle, bordered area
The page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement
or reduction are indicated.
RBottom illustrations Illustrations indicate the feed source, orientation, borderless printing
selection, and other settings information.
340 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Note
•T o conrm the Print T arget specied in Easy Settings , click GV iew Settings on the Main sheet to
display the V iew Settings dialog box.
Checking a print preview
Y ou can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.
When you activate this feature, imagePROGRAF Preview or PageComposer is started before printing.
Conrming how documents will be printed this way helps prevent printing errors.
For details on print previews, see “Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing”. (→P .313)
Windows Software 341
Printer Driver
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
(W indows)
This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. Select the LOpen Preview When Print Job Starts check box.
5. After you click OK , when you print a job, the imagePROGRAF Preview window will be displayed.
Note
•If PageComposer is running, access the Special Settings dialog box from the Layout sheet and
clear Enable Preview Switching .
342 Windows Software
Printer Driver
6. On the main window , you can check the layout and change settings as needed.
7. T o print, click Start Printing in the File menu.
Note
•For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, see Preview .
Windows Software 343
Printer Driver
Using Favorites (W indows)
This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.
Registering a favorite
Follow the steps below to save the current print settings as a favorite.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Complete the print settings.
4. Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.
5. Click HAdd to display the Add dialog box.
6. Enter a desired name in Name , such as “Photos for Presentations” or “Monthly Report.”
7. Choose a tting icon for these print settings in the Icon list.
8. In Comment , enter a description of the favorite to be added, as desired.
9. Click OK to close the Add dialog box.
The favorite you have added is now displayed in AFavorites .
Note
•T o save a favorite as a le, click JExport and specify the le to save.
344 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Printing using the favorite
Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.
4. In the AFavorites , choose the favorite you registered.
Note
•T o import a favorite, click IImport and specify the favorite le.
5. Click DApply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings.
6. Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P .340)
Windows Software 345
Printer Driver
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (W indows)
1. Choose Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.
2. Select the printer , and then display the printer driver dialog box.
Note
•The dialog box for specifying printing conditions varies depending on the source application. In some
cases, when you select the printer , a sheet for conguring the printer driver is added to the dialog box.
In the following case, click Preferences .
•Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software
Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main ,Page Setup ,Layout ,
Favorites ,Utility , and Support .
Note
•The titles of dialog boxes may vary depending on the application, and sheets other than these
six sheets may be displayed.
346 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Important
•If you access the printer driver dialog box from the source application, changes you make to the settings
will only apply temporarily to that application. Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the
printer driver , the sizes will not be available after you exit the application.
•Y ou can also access the printer driver dialog box from the Windows system menu.
T o use the settings continuously in all applications, open the printer driver from the system menu
to make the settings.
see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows)”. (→P .348)
Windows Software 347
Printer Driver
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the
Operating System Menu (W indows)
1. Click start >Printers and Faxes (or Printers ).
2. Select the printer , and then display the printer properties dialog box.
3. Click Printing Preferences to display the Printing Preferences dialog box, titled with the
name of this printer .
Note
•The Device Settings sheet is also an extension of the printer driver . ( → P .377)
348 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main ,Page Setup ,Layout ,
Favorites ,Utility , and Support .
Important
•If you access the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu, changes you make to the
settings will apply to all applications you use for printing.
•Y ou can also access the printer driver dialog box from applications.
see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows)”. (→P .346)
Windows Software 349
Printer Driver
Main Sheet (W indows)
The following settings are available on the Main sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver
help le.
Note
•On the Main sheet, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the particular printing
application, or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.
Common Items
AMedia T ype
Select the type of paper .
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide . ( → P .95)
BGet Information
Displays Paper Information on Printer . Y ou can update the printer driver settings for the feed source, media
type, and roll width by selecting the feed source.
•Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Windows) (→P .353)
CAdvanced Settings
Displays Paper Detailed Settings . Y ou can congure the printing settings to match the type of media, such
as the ink drying time.
•Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (→P .354)
LOpen Preview When Print Job Starts
If you turn this on, imagePROGRAF Preview starts before printing.
This allows you to check on-screen previews of documents before printing.
•Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (→P .313)
MStatus Monitor
Starts imagePROGRAF Status Monitor .
Y ou can check the printer status, job status, and other conditions.
Y ou can also set up email notication if printer errors occur by completing the Email Notice settings.
For details, refer to the Status Monitor help le.
350 Windows Software
Printer Driver
NAbout
Displays version information for the printer driver .
SDefaults
Restores all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Conguration using Easy Settings
EPrint T arget
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
•Printing Photos and Images (→P .152)
•Printing Line Drawings and T ext (→P .160)
•Printing Of ce Documents (→P .171)
Depending on the AMedia T ype setting, some EPrint T arget options may not be available.
FPrint Quality
Choose the level of print quality .
•Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing (→P .187)
GV iew Settings
Displays the Print T arget setting values.
Y ou can view and change the order of Print T arget setting values.
•V iew Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Windows) (→P .355)
Windows Software 351
Printer Driver
Conguration using Advanced Settings
EPrint Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
•Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing (→P .187)
FPrint Quality
Choose the level of print quality .
•Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing (→P .187)
GColor Mode
Choose the color mode.
•Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing (→P .187)
Depending on the AMedia T ype setting, some GColor Mode options may not be available.
HColor Settings
Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings.
•Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P .177)
IThicken Fine Lines
Activate this option to print ne lines more distinctly .
JUnidirectional Printing
Select this checkbox to prevent problems such as misaligned lines and improve the print quality . However , the
printing speed becomes slower .
KSharpen T ext
Activate this option to print text more sharply .
TEconomy Printing
Select this checkbox to reduce the amount of ink consumed during printing. However , the print quality is
worse than for normal printing.
Select this mode if you want to conserve ink when checking drawings, for example. Depending on the A
Media T ype and FPrint Quality settings, this mode may not be available.
352 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (W indows)
On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and
congure printer driver settings for the paper source and media type.
Note
•T o display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main sheet, click Get Information by
Media T ype . ( → P .350)
APaper Source
Shows the Paper Source supported by the printer , as well as information about the loaded paper . T o
update the Paper Source and media type settings in the printer driver , select the desired Paper Source
option and click OK .
Windows Software 353
Printer Driver
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (W indows)
The Paper Detailed Settings dialog box of fers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to the
printer driver help.
Note
•T o display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main sheet, click Settings by Media
T ype . ( → P .350)
ADrying T ime
Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry , as needed. The Drying T ime setting is only valid for rolls.
•( → P .127)
BBetween Pages
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the paper , as needed.
CBetween Scans
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until printing the next line, as needed.
DRoll Paper Margin for Safety
Y ou can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to
curling is held rmly against the Platen .
ENear End Margin
Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the roll, as needed.
FCut Speed
Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. Y ou can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when
automatic cutting is used.
GMirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or
image with the left and right sides inverted.
354 Windows Software
Printer Driver
V iew Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(W indows)
In the V iew Settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.
Note
•T o display the V iew Settings dialog box, on the Main sheet, click V iew Settings by Print T arget .
( → P .350)
APrint T arget
Shows all Print T arget options (settings items for the printing application).
BName
Identies the item selected in Print T arget by its name and an icon.
CDetails
Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each listed item for the selected Print T arget .
Windows Software 355
Printer Driver
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (W indows)
If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment sheet.
Note
•T o display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in
Advanced Settings . ( → P .350)
ASample T ype
Choose a sample image from Standard ,Portrait ,Landscape , or Graphics .
BV iew Color Pattern
Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.
CApply to Sample
Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.
DCyan / EMagenta / FY ellow
Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of each color .
GGray T one
Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with blue) or W arm Black (tinged
with red).
HBrightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. Y ou can adjust the brightness if the printed document is
lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic
as it appears on the computer screen).
IContrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other , as desired. Increasing the
Contrast makes images sharper , and reducing the Contrast softens images.
356 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Saturation
Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting makes colors more vivid, and reducing
the Saturation makes colors more subdued.
KObject Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to
color adjustment.
SDefaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Note
•For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P .177)
Windows Software 357
Printer Driver
Object Adjustment dialog box: Color
In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If
an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.
Note
•T o display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.
AImage
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.
BGraphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.
CT ext
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.
358 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Matching Sheet (W indows)
On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching to compensate for dif ferences in the appearance of
colors on various devices.
Driver Matching Mode
The following options are available when you select Driver Matching Mode in the AMatching Mode list.
Note
•T o display the Matching sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced
Settings , and then click the Matching sheet. ( → P .350)
AMatching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
Normally , select Driver Matching Mode . For color matching based on ICC proles, select ICC Matching
Mode ,Driver ICM Mode , or Host ICM Mode , depending on your color matching system. If you prefer not to
use the printer driver for color matching, select No .
BMatching Method
Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed. V arious Matching Method options
are available depending on your selection in Matching Mode .
Note
•For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P .177)
Windows Software 359
Printer Driver
ICC Matching Mode , Driver ICM Mode and Host ICM Mode
On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching to compensate for dif ferences in the appearance of
colors on various devices. The following options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode ,Driver
ICM Mode , or Host ICM Mode on the AMatching Mode sheet.
Note
•T o display the Matching sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced
Settings , and then click the Matching sheet. ( → P .350)
AMatching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
BInput Prole Settings
Y ou can select Image ,Graphics , or T ext . Y ou can choose Matching Method and Input Prole .
V arious options are available depending on your selected Matching Mode .
T o apply the same input prole automatically for Graphics and T ext , select Use the Same Prole for All
Objects . T o apply separate input proles to Graphics and T ext , clear Use the Same Prole for All Objects
and specify the individual settings.
CPrinter Prole Settings
Specify the printer prole as desired. Normally , select Auto Settings .
Note
•For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P .177)
360 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome (W indows)
On the Color Adjustment sheet for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.
Note
•T o display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in
Advanced Settings . ( → P .350)
ASample T ype
Choose a sample image from Standard ,Portrait ,Landscape , or Graphics .
BV iew Color Pattern
Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.
CApply to Sample
Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.
DCyan / EMagenta / FY ellow
Not available.
GGray T one
Not available.
HBrightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. Y ou can adjust the brightness if the printed document is
lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic
as it appears on the computer screen).
IContrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other , as desired. Increasing the
Contrast makes images sharper , and reducing the Contrast softens images.
Windows Software 361
Printer Driver
JSaturation
Not available.
KObject Adjustment
Select this option to display the KObject Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to
color adjustment.
SDefaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Note
•For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P .177)
362 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome
In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If
an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.
Note
•T o display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.
AImage
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.
BGraphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.
CT ext
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.
Windows Software 363
Printer Driver
Page Setup Sheet (W indows)
The following settings are available on the Page Setup sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help le.
APage Size
Select the page size as specied in the source application.
For details on available page sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P .100)
BBorderless Printing
Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected in the LPaper Source list. Choose from the following
options when this setting is activated.
•Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (→P .232)
•Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P .239)
•Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P .225)
DFit Paper Size
Scales the document image to match the paper size.
EScale to t Roll Paper W idth
Scales the document image to match the roll width.
FPrint Image with Actual Size
Prints documents at their actual size. This function is available when you have selected the size same as the
width of Roll Paper for either the length or width of the document from the APage Size list.
GPaper Size
A vailable when DFit Paper Size is selected.
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
For details on available paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P .100)
Paper sizes compatible with borderless printing are shown in the list.
364 Windows Software
Printer Driver
CEnlarged/Reduced Printing
Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.
•Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (→P .201)
•Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P .207)
•Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling V alue (→P .213)
DFit Paper Size
Scales the document image to match the paper size.
EFit Roll Paper W idth
Scales the document image to match the roll width.
FScaling
Resizes the document image based on a specied scaling value. Enter a value in a range of “5-600.”
GPaper Size
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
For details on available paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P .100)
HOrientation
Choose the printing orientation.
•Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (→P .321)
KRotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)
Activate this setting to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before printing.
•Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P .301)
LPaper Source
Choose the feed source, as desired.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in Media T ype on the Main sheet.
MRoll Paper W idth
Choose the roll width.
For details on available roll widths, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P .100)
NRoll Paper Options
Complete optional roll paper settings. Click to display the Roll Paper Options dialog box.
Under AAutomatic Cutting , you can specify Y es or No and Print Cut Guideline .
•Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (→P .331)
Select BBanner Printing when printing multiple pages continuously .
•Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (→P .275)
Windows Software 365
Printer Driver
POutput Method
Click to display the Output Method dialog box, which enables you to complete the Output Method and Name
of data to be saved settings.
OSize Options
Click to display the Paper Size Options dialog box, which enables you to register additional paper sizes or
select the size system for use.
SDefaults
Restores all settings on the sheet to the default values.
366 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Paper Size Options Dialog Box (W indows)
In the Paper Size Options dialog box, you can create and register your own Custom Paper Size . The sizes you
dene are listed with standard paper sizes for selection later as needed.
Note
•T o display the Paper Size Options dialog box, on the Page Setup sheet, click Paper Size Options .
( → P .364)
APaper Size List
Shows the names and sizes of paper that can be used with the printer driver .
BDelete
Custom paper sizes created by users can be deleted from the APaper Size List , as needed.
However , they cannot be deleted in the following situations.
•If a standard paper size of the printer driver is selected.
•If an oversized paper size is selected.
•If a paper size in a red box is selected.
CCustom Paper Size Name
Y ou can name Custom Paper Size as desired.
DUnits
Specify the desired unit of measure for the Custom Paper Size height and width.
EPaper Size
Specify the desired W idth and Height . Y ou can make your selection from sizes that are compatible with
Borderless Printing by selecting Borderless Printing Size . T o maintain the aspect ratio of the W idth and
Height as you resize the paper , select Fix the Ratio of the W idth to Height .
FAdd
Enables you to register the custom paper size you have specied or overwrite an existing custom paper size.
Windows Software 367
Printer Driver
Layout Sheet (W indows)
The following settings are available on the Layout sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help.
APage Layout
Activate this setting to select a particular page layout.
•Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (→P .280)
•Printing Posters in Sections (→P .286)
•Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (→P .269)
•Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (→P .450)
BSet
Click to display one of the following dialog boxes depending on the selection in APage Layout . In these
dialog boxes, you can specify layout details and which pages to print, as well as other settings.
•Page Layout Printing
•Pages to Print
•Free Layout Settings
CW atermark
Activating this option makes two settings available, W atermarks and DEdit W atermark .
•Printing With W atermarks (→P .318)
W atermarks
Lists the provided watermarks. Choose the watermark to print.
DEdit W atermark
Click to display the Edit W atermark dialog box for creating your own, original watermark.
EPrint Centered
Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper .
•Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (→P .289)
•Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (→P .295)
FRotate 180 degrees
Activate this option to rotate document images by 180 degrees before printing.
368 Windows Software
Printer Driver
GNo Spaces at T op or Bottom (Conserve Paper)
Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents,
which enables you to conserve the paper .
•Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without T op and Bottom Margins (→P .307)
HCopies
Enter the number of copies to print, in a range of “1-999.”
Reverse Order
Activate this option to print pages in reverse order .
IPage Options
Click to display the Page Options dialog box, which enables you to complete settings for printing the user
name, date, or page number in the header or footer .
JSpecial Settings
If the printing results are not as you expected, click this option to change how printing is processed.
SDefaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Windows Software 369
Printer Driver
Page Options Dialog Box (W indows)
The Page Options dialog box of fers the following settings.
Note
•T o display the Page Options dialog box, on the Layout sheet, click Page Options . ( → P .368)
APrint Date
Select where the date is printed, as desired. T o print the time as well, select BPrint T ime Also .
CPrint User Name
Select where the user name is printed, as desired.
DPrint Page Number
Select where the page number is printed, as desired.
EFormat Settings
Click to display the Format Settings dialog box, which enables you to complete format-related settings.
Note
•If you specify the same position for multiple items, the items are printed from left to right in this order:
date, user name, and page number .
•When you print multiple pages per sheet using Page Layout Printing or similar functions, these items
will be printed for each page.
370 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Special Settings Dialog Box (W indows)
If the printing results are not as you expected, you can change how printing is processed in the Special Settings
dialog box.
Note
•T o display the Special Settings dialog box, on the Layout sheet, click Special Settings . ( → P .368)
AFineZoom Settings
This function is used in large-format printing. Normally , choose Auto . If documents are not printed correctly
on large-format paper , it may help to select Y es , and if ne lines are not visible or if images are distorted
when printed, it may help to select No .
BApplication Color Matching Priority
Y ou can give applications priority in color management.
CEnable Preview Switching
When this option is selected, PageComposer starts if you print with Open Preview When Print Job Starts
selected on the Main sheet.
DFast Graphic Process
If image colors are inconsistent in printed documents or if lines are printed in varying thicknesses, clearing
this option may help produce the expected results.
Important
•This function cannot be used on 64-bit version of Windows.
EReduce Print Unevenness
If you are concerned about print unevenness, the printing results can be improved by selecting this option.
However , printing may take longer for some images.
FAdjust faint lines
If ne lines are printed in colors that do not match the colors of other shapes, clearing this option may help
produce the expected results. However , lines in some colors may appear broken.
Windows Software 371
Printer Driver
Favorites Sheet (W indows)
The following settings are available on the Favorites sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help.
AFavorites
Printing favorites you have created are listed with Default Settings favorites.
•Using Favorites (→P .327)
BSettings Details
Displays details of the favorite selected in the AFavorites .
CComment
Displays notes registered in the favorite.
DApply Favorite
Click to change the current print settings to those of the favorite selected in the AFavorites .
EApplication Settings Priority
Activate this setting to use settings values specied in the source application in preference to favorite settings
selected in the AFavorites , when clicking DApply Favorite . For details on the settings items used in
preference, refer to the printer driver help.
FDelete
Click to delete the selected favorite from the AFavorites list.
GEdit
Click to display the Edit dialog box, which enables you to change the name and icon for the favorite selected
in the AFavorites list.
372 Windows Software
Printer Driver
HAdd
Click to display the Add dialog box, which enables you to add the current print settings as a favorite.
IImport
Click to display the Open dialog box, which enables you to import favorite settings saved as a le.
JExport
Click to display the Save As dialog box, which enables you to save the favorite settings as a le.
KUp
Click to move the selected favorite up in the AFavorites list.
LDown
Click to move the selected favorite down in the AFavorites list.
Windows Software 373
Printer Driver
Utility Sheet (W indows)
The following items can be executed on the Utility sheet. For details on the utilities, refer to the relevant utility help.
AMaintenance
Click to start the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor , which of fers the following maintenance for the printer .
•Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) check
•Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning
•Head alignment adjustment
•Feed amount adjustment
BColor imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Click to launch Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (*1) (iR enlargement copy), which enables you to
create hot folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and assign print settings to hot folders.
•Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows) (→P .432)
*1: For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
374 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Support Sheet (W indows)
On the Support sheet, you can view support information and the user ’ s manual.
ASupport Information
Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can nd the latest information on the printer and
consumables, check for printer driver updates, and browse other information.
BUser Manual
Click to view the printer user ’ s manual. This function requires the user ’ s manual to be installed on your
computer .
CSettings Summaries
Click to display the V iew Settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm the settings for the Main ,Page
Setup ,Layout , and Favorites sheets.
Windows Software 375
Printer Driver
Settings Summaries Dialog Box (W indows)
The Settings Summaries dialog box enables you to conrm the settings for the Main ,Page Setup ,Layout ,
and Favorites sheets.
ACopy
Click to copy the settings information to the clipboard. Y ou can paste the settings information into a le
created with a text editor or similar application.
376 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Device Settings Sheet (W indows)
Many settings items on the printer properties sheets are controlled by Windows applications. However , the Device
Settings sheet is for conguring the printer , and it is an extension of the printer driver .
The following settings are available on the Device Settings sheet.
AColor Compatibility
Click to display the Color Compatibility dialog box, which enables you to adjust colors if you have selected
Color Mode >Color (CAD) .
•For details on color settings, see Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings . (→P .167)
BAbout
Y ou can display version information for the printer driver .
Windows Software 377
Preview
Preview
The Features of Preview
The main features of Preview are as follows.
•While viewing this screen, you can adjust layout settings of a document created with application software.
•Y ou can not only adjust layout settings but also your changes will be instantly applied on the preview
screen, and you can print the preview screen as it is seen.
Note
•The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual
print output to dif fer from the Preview settings.
Operating Environment
Y ou can use the Preview in the following environments.
•Compatible Operating System
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/V ista/Server 2008
•Software that requires installation
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver
378 Windows Software
Preview
Starting Preview
Follow the procedure below to start the Preview .
1. Start the apllication software which you use.
2. From the application software’ s File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print
dialog box.
Note
•Normally , select Print from the File menu.
3. On the Main sheet, click on the Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box.
Click the OK button to save the settings.
4. On the Print dialog box in the apllication software, click the Print button.
5. Preview main window is displayed.
Windows Software 379
Preview
Preview Main W indow
The Preview main window consists of the menu and tool bars, preview and dialog area and status bar .
Note
•Y ou can use the V iew menu to show or hide the tool bar .
Menu Bar
This allows you to select menus required for operations.
T ool Bar
This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.
380 Windows Software
Preview
Preview Area
Y ou can check the settings you made in this area.
Dialog Area
This allows you to set the print conditions and perform a print job.
For more information about Dialog Area, see “Dialog Area”. (→P .382)
Status Bar
This shows the message, Pages and Output Size .
Windows Software 381
Preview
Dialog Area
Y ou can select the layout and print on the center .
Media T ype / Paper Source /Paper Size
Y ou can conrm the information that is set.
Layout Selection
Y ou can print which conserves paper by selecting the layout.
For more information about Layout Selection , see “Printing with Selecting the Layout”. (→P .387)
Center Originals Across Roll
Y ou can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer .
For more information about Center Originals Across Roll , see “Print on the Center”. (→P .384)
Note
•Y ou cannot select this if Cut Sheet is selected in Paper Source .
“No Spaces at T op or Bottom”
Y ou can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at
the top or bottom.
For more information about “No Spaces at T op or Bottom” , see “Not Print Spaces at the T op/Bottom”. (→P .385)
Note
•A vailable only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .
“Print” Button
Click the button to start printing.
“Cancel” Button
Click the button to stop printing.
382 Windows Software
Preview
Printer Information
Y ou can conrm the information acquired from the printer .
Update Printer Information Button
Click the button to update the printer information with connecting to the printer .
Status Monitor Button
Click the button to start Status Monitor .
Windows Software 383
Preview
Print on the Center
Y ou can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer .
1. Click the Center Originals Across Roll check box on.
2. Click the “Print” button
Printing on the center begins.
Note
•Y ou cannot select this if Cut Sheet is selected in Paper Source .
384 Windows Software
Preview
Not Print Spaces at the T op/Bottom
Y ou can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the
top or bottom.
1. Click the “No Spaces at T op or Bottom” check box on.
2. Click the “Print” button.
Printing on the settings with no spaces at top or bottom begins.
Windows Software 385
Preview
Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees
Y ou can select Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible or Use Driver Settings from the Options menu.
Setting
Details
Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible Rotates pages in portrait orientation 90 degrees before printing. Pages are
only rotated if they can t lengthwise across the roll.
Use Driver Settings Follows printer driver settings when determining whether to rotate pages.
Selecting Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible or Placing a checkmark for Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve
Paper) on the printer driver
Selecting Use Driver Settings
386 Windows Software
Preview
Printing with Selecting the Layout
Y ou can print which conserves paper by selecting the layout.
1. In Layout Selection , click the layout button to use.
Button Details
Upper Button
T urn at the position of .
Right Button
T urn at the position of .
Left Button
T urn at the position of .
Lower Button
T urn at the position of .
Windows Software 387
Preview
Note
•Right Button or Left Button can be selected only when the rotated pages can t lengthwise
across the roll.
•By clicking Right Button or Left Button , you can save paper by printing in landscape orientation on
roll paper .
•Y ou can select only Upper Button or Lower Button if Cut Sheet is selected.
Button Details
The button is selected currently .
The button can be selected.
The button can not be selected.
2. Click the Start Printing button.
Printing on the selected layout begins.
388 Windows Software
Preview
Enlarge/Reduce the screen display
Y ou can enlarge or reduce the screen display when you select Zoom from the V iew menu.
Setting
Details
Fit Screen Display all.
Fit to W idth Display to the width of the paper .
Reduce Display at half of the standard size.
Standard Display at the standard size.
Enlarge Display with the double of the standard size.
Enlarge More Display with the triple of the standard size.
Note
•Y ou can also select the setting by clicking the ▼button on the tool bar .
Moving a Page
Y ou can move a page to display when you select Go to Page from the V iew menu.
Setting
Details
First Page Go to the rst page.
Previous Page Go to the previous page.
Next Page Go to the next page.
Last Page Go to the last page.
Go to Page Go to the specied page.
Note
•Y ou can also move a page by clicking on the tool bar .
Using the ruler
Y ou can conrm the layout with using the ruler .
•Switching the ruler Show/Hide
In the V iew menu, select Ruler to switch the ruler Show/Hide.
•Changing the ruler unit
Y ou can set the ruler unit when you select Units from the V iew menu.
Setting
Details
mm Use mm as the ruler unit.
inch Use inches as the ruler unit.
Windows Software 389
Free Layout
Free Layout
The Features of Free Layout
The main features of Free Layout are as follows.
•Allows you to lay out at will and print a document created with application software.
•Y ou can not only lay out multiple pages on one page but also lay out and print a multiple-le document
on one page, or lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.
Note
•The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print
output to dif fer from the Free Layout settings.
Operating Environment
Y ou can use the Free Layout in the following environments.
•Compatible Operating System
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/V ista/Server 2008
•Software that requires installation
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver
Note
•This function is not available on 64-bit version of Windows.
390 Windows Software
Free Layout
Starting Free Layout
Follow the procedure below to start the Free Layout.
1. Start the apllication software which you use.
2. From the application software’ s “File” menu, select the printer setup menu to open the “Print”
dialog box.
Note
•Normally , select “Print” from the “File” menu.
3. From the list, select the printer and select the “Layout” sheet.
Note
•Y our printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.
4. In the “Layout” sheet, click on the “Page Layout” check box and select “Free Layout” from the list.
Click the “OK” button to save the settings.
Note
•When you select “Free Layout” , all other setting items will be disabled.
Windows Software 391
Free Layout
5. On the Print dialog box in the apllication software, click the Print button.
Free Layout main window is displayed.
392 Windows Software
Free Layout
Free Layout Main W indow
The Free Layout main window consists of the menu and tool bars, layout area and status bar .
Note
•Y ou can use the “V iew” menu to show or hide the tool and status bar .
Menu Bar
This allows you to select menus required for operations.
T ool Bar
This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.
Layout Area
This allows you to lay out objects and edit the object size and orientation.
Windows Software 393
Free Layout
Status Bar
This shows the paper size, unit of length, and number of objects.
Detailed Settings
The printer driver opens when you select “Detailed Settings” from the “File” menu. The printer driver is used to
congure basic settings to match the type of media loaded in the printer .
Refer to Printer Driver for details on the printer driver .
Note
•When you select the “Detailed Settings” , the only three sheets displayed are the “Main” sheet, the “Page
Setup” sheet, and the “Layout” sheet. Some of the printer driver settings may be disabled.
394 Windows Software
Free Layout
Preferences Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select “Preferences” from the “File” menu. This allows you to congure
the preferences of Free Layout.
“Units”
Set the unit for paper length, margins, and so on.
“Gridlines”
Y ou can input a grid line width value in numerical characters so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.
Note
•Y ou can input between 10.0 and 200.0(mm) (between 0.39 and 7.88(inch)).
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
“Divisions”
Y ou can change the number of divisions of grid lines so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.
Note
•Y ou can input between 1 and 10.
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
“Grid Color”
Select the grid line color .
Auto Arrange Spacing
Change the object-to-object spacing to be applied in the operation of laying out objects automatically .
Note
•Y ou can input between 0.0 and 100.0(mm) (between 0.00 and 3.94(inch)).
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
Windows Software 395
Free Layout
“Object Frame Style”
Y ou can select the object frame style for printing.
The following settings are available for the object frame style.
Setting
Details
“None” Y ou can print with no frame style.
“Solid Line” Y ou can print the solid line as the frame style.
“Dotted Line” Y ou can print the dotted line as the frame style.
“Dashed Line” Y ou can print the dashed line as the frame style.
“Crop Marks” Y ou can print with the crop marks.
396 Windows Software
Free Layout
Page Options Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select “Page Options” from the “File” menu. This allows you to congure the roll
paper length, object layout order , and margins of Free Layout.
“Roll Paper Length”
Set the length of one page to print on roll paper .
The following settings are available for roll paper length.
Setting
Details
“Auto Settings” The one-page length to be printed on roll paper is automatically set so that
the laid-out objects are printed on one page.
“Manual Settings” Y ou can input the length of one page to print on roll paper in numerical
characters.
Note
•A vailable only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .
•Y ou can input between 203.2 and 18000.0(mm) (between 8.00 and 708.66(inch)).
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
“Order”
Set the object layout order .
The following settings are available for order .
Setting
Details
“Upper Left to Right” The objects are laid out from upper left to right.
“Upper Left to Bottom” The objects are laid out from upper left to bottom.
“Upper Right to Left” The objects are laid out from upper right to left.
“Lower Left to T op” The objects are laid out from lower left to top.
Note
•When you have selected “Roll Paper Length” > “Auto Settings” and “Paper Orientation” > “V ertical” , you
can choose “Upper Left to Right” or “Upper Right to Left” .
•When you have selected “Roll Paper Length” > “Auto Settings” and “Paper Orientation” > “Horizontal” ,
you can choose “Upper Left to Bottom” or “Lower Left to T op” .
Windows Software 397
Free Layout
“Margins”
Y ou can input the paper margins in numerical characters.
Note
•Y ou can input between 0.0 and 50.0(mm) (between 0.00 and 1.97(inch)).
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
Zoom Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select “Zoom” from the “V iew” menu. Y ou can enlarge or reduce the screen
display .
Scaling
Set the magnication for enlargement or reduction of the screen display .
Note
•Y ou can input between 25 and 400.
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking “▼” button.
398 Windows Software
Free Layout
Format Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select “Format” from the “Object” menu after you select an object.
“Size” Sheet
Y ou can rotate, enlarge, or reduce an object.
Note
•When the objects are not selected, you can not select “Format” .
“Rotate”
When you place a checkmark here, you can select “Rotate Right” or “Rotate Left” .
Setting
Details
“Rotate Right” Rotates the object 90 degrees clockwise.
“Rotate Left” Rotates the object 90 degrees counterclockwise.
Note
•When several objects are selected, you cannot select “Rotate” .
“Enl./Red.”
When you place a checkmark here, you can select “Scaling” , “Fit Paper Size” , or “Fit Photo Size” .
Setting
Details
“Scaling” Allows you to input the value of the enlargement or reduction ratio of an
object.
“Fit Paper Size” Prints by enlarging or reducing each object to match the paper size. If you
are using roll paper , objects are enlarged or reduced so that the width of
each object matches the width of the roll paper .
“Fit Photo Size” Prints all of the objects at the specied photo size.
Note
•Y ou can input between 25 and 600.
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
Windows Software 399
Free Layout
“Position” Sheet
Y ou can rotate, enlarge, or reduce an object.
Note
•When the objects are not selected, you can not select “Format” .
“Object Position”
Y ou can move the object position by changing the values.
Setting
Details
“V ertical Pos” Y ou can input the number of the vertical position in numerical characters.
“Horizontal Pos” Y ou can input the number of the horizontal position in numerical characters.
“Page Pos” Y ou can input the number of the page position in numerical characters.
“Object Size”
Y ou can conrm the object size.
Note
•When several objects are selected, you cannot display “Object Size” .
400 Windows Software
Free Layout
Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page
Y ou can lay out and print a multiple-le document on one page.
1. From the application software’ s “File” menu, select the printer setup menu to open the “Print”
dialog box.
Note
•Normally , select “Print” from the “File” menu.
2. Click “Properties” to open the “Properties” dialog box.
3. In the “Page Setup” sheet, select Paper Source .
Windows Software 401
Free Layout
4. In the “Layout” sheet, click on the “Page Layout” check box and select “Free Layout” from the list.
Note
•When you select “Free Layout” , all other setting items will be disabled.
5. Click the “OK” button to save the settings.
6. In the “Print” dialog box, select the pages to print and the number of copies, and click the “OK”
button.
402 Windows Software
Free Layout
Free Layout starts, laying out the document created with application software in the layout
area as an object.
7. Leaving Free Layout running, open other les with the application software and repeat the
above steps.
Windows Software 403
Free Layout
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application
Programs on One Page
Y ou can lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.
1. From the application software’ s “File” menu, select the printer setup menu to open the “Print”
dialog box.
Note
•Normally , select “Print” from the “File” menu.
2. Click “Properties” to open the “Properties” dialog box.
3. In the “Page Setup” sheet, select Paper Source .
404 Windows Software
Free Layout
4. In the “Layout” sheet, click on the “Page Layout” check box and select “Free Layout” from the list.
Note
•When you select “Free Layout” , all other setting items will be disabled.
5. Click the “OK” button to save the settings.
6. In the “Print” dialog box, select the pages to print and the number of copies, and click the “OK”
button.
Windows Software 405
Free Layout
Free Layout starts, laying out the document created with application software in the layout
area as an object.
7. Leaving Free Layout running, open other les with other application software and repeat the
above steps.
406 Windows Software
Free Layout
Selecting an Object
When an object is selected, a select box (blue border) appears around the object.
Note
•T o select an object, click that object.
•T o select multiple successive objects, click them while holding down the Shift key .
•T o select multiple arbitrary objects, click them while holding down the Ctrl key .
•T o select all objects, select “Select All” from the “Edit” menu.
When you specify the area with dragging the mouse, the object in the area is selected.
Windows Software 407
Free Layout
Changing the Object Size
Y ou can change the object size by means of mouse operation or by specifying a scaling value.
Note
•The vertical-to-horizontal ratio remains unchanged when the object is enlarged or reduced.
Resizing by means of mouse operation
1. Select an object.
2. Place the pointer at a corner of the selection box around the object to show the arrow handle,
and drag this handle to change the object size.
Resizing by specifying a scaling value
1. Select an object.
Click on the “Enl./Red.” checkbox in the Format Dialog Box (→P .399) and select “Scaling” .
2. Y ou either enter numbers directly .
Note
•Y ou can input between 25 and 600.
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
3. Click the “OK” button.
408 Windows Software
Free Layout
Moving an Object
Y ou can move the object position.
1. Select an object.
2. Place the pointer inside the selection box of the object to show the crosshair handle, and drag it
to move the object.
Alternatively , you can move the “Object Position” by changing the values in “V ertical Pos” ,
“Horizontal Pos” and “Page Pos” in the Format Dialog Box . (→P .399)
Rotating an Object
Y ou can rotate the object.
1. Select an object.
2. Select “Rotate Left 90 Degrees” or “Rotate Right 90 Degrees” from the toolbar .
Alternatively , you may click on the “Rotate” check box in the Format Dialog Box (→P .399) then
select “Rotate Right” or “Rotate Left” , and click the “OK” button.
Windows Software 409
Free Layout
Laying out Objects Automatically
Click “Auto Arrange Object” in the tool bar . This automatically lays out objects. Alternatively , you may select “Auto
Arrange Object” from the “Object” menu.
Note
•The object layout order varies depending on the “Order” setting in the Page Options Dialog Box
(→P .397) dialog box.
410 Windows Software
Free Layout
Aligning Objects
Y ou can align objects systematically .
1. Select multiple objects.
2. Click the align button from the toolbar .
Alternatively , you may select the align menu from the “Object” menu.
“Align T op”
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the top.
“Center V ertically”
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the vertical center .
“Align Bottom”
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the bottom.
Windows Software 41 1
Free Layout
“Align Left”
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the left.
“Center Horizontally”
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the horizontal center .
“Align Right”
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the right.
412 Windows Software
Free Layout
Changing the Object Overlapping Order
Y ou can change the object overlapping order .
1. Select an object.
2. Select the Overlapping Order menu from the “Object” menu.
Note
•The order of overlapping af fects the order of objects automatically laid out.
•Y ou can also select by clicking the right button of the mouse on an object.
“Bring to Front”
Moves the object to the frontmost position.
“Send to Back”
Moves the object to the backmost position.
“Bring Forward”
Moves the object one position to the front.
Windows Software 413
Free Layout
“Send Backward”
Moves the object one position to the back.
414 Windows Software
Free Layout
Pasting a Copied or Cut Object
1. Click “Copy” or “Cut” from the toolbar .
Alternatively , you may select “Copy” or “Cut” from the “Edit” menu.
2. Click “Paste” from the toolbar .
Alternatively , you may select “Paste” from the “Edit” menu.
Note
•The copied or cut object is laid out at the end of the page.
•Y ou can also select by clicking the right button of the mouse on an object.
•In order to paste an object on any position that you like, you can paste the object with “Pointed Paste” by
clicking the right button of the mouse on any position that you want.
Windows Software 415
Free Layout
Folded Duplex W indow
This window is displayed if you select “Folded Duplex” from the “Edit” menu after selecting an object. Using the
“Folded Duplex” function allows you to print with fold lines added.
The Folded Duplex window consists of the menu and tool bars, layout area and status bar .
Note
•The toolbar and status bar can be toggled between hidden and displayed from the “V iew” menu.
Menu Bar
This allows you to select menus required for operations.
T ool Bar
This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.
416 Windows Software
Free Layout
Layout Area
This allows you to check the arrangement and orientation of objects.
Status Bar
This shows the paper source, roll paper width, and output size.
Windows Software 417
Free Layout
Prints using Folded Duplex
Allows you to produce duplex printing by combining two pages and folding them.
“Folded Duplex”
Any two pages can be arranged and printed in a layout that becomes duplex on folding.
This can be used such as for advertising posters that are suspended from the ceiling.
1. Select two objects from the layout area of Free Layout.
2. Select Folded Duplex from the “Edit” menu of Free Layout.
Open the Folded Duplex window and arrange the selected objects in the layout area.
3. Open the “Finished Size Settings” dialog box from the “Edit” menu.
4. Select “Fit Roll Paper Width” or “Specify Folded Size” in “Finished Size” .
Note
•“Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)” is also available when “Specify Folded Size” is selected.
5. Click “OK” to save the settings.
6. Open the “Binding Settings” dialog box from the “Edit” menu.
7. Select “Bottom” or “T op” in “Binding Edge” .
8. Specify the “Binding” width in “Binding” .
9. Congure the Fold Line Color and Fold Line T ype from Print Fold Lines .
Note
•When the Only Print Center and Edges checkbox is selected, fold lines are only printed at the
three locations of the center and both edges.
10. Click “OK” to save the settings.
1 1. Conrm the print setting and begin printing.
418 Windows Software
Free Layout
Finished Size Settings Dialog Box
This dialog box is displayed when you select “Finished Size Settings” from the “Edit” menu. This allows you to
congure nished size settings.
“Finished Size”
Selects the method for setting the nished size.
The following settings are available for the nished size.
Setting
Details
“Fit Roll Paper Width” Prints by automatically enlarging or reducing the entire document so that
the width of the document matches the roll paper width.
“Specify Folded Size” Prints by automatically enlarging or reducing the entire document to match
the size of the paper . Select the actual size of the paper you want to print
on in “Fit Paper Size” .
“Rotate Page 90 degrees
(Conserve Paper)”
Prints by rotating pages by 90 degrees. Pages are automatically rotated if
they will t within the roll paper width when rotated, and are not rotated if
they will not t within the roll paper width.
Windows Software 419
Free Layout
Binding Settings Dialog Box
This is displayed when you select “Binding Settings” from the “Edit” menu. This allows you to congure the
binding edge settings.
“Binding Edge”
Congures the binding edge when folding paper .
The following settings are available for the binding edge.
Setting
Details
“Bottom” Prints by placing the binding margin (gutter) at the bottom of the document.
“T op” Prints by placing the binding margin (gutter) at the top of the document.
“Binding”
Congures the binding margin (gutter).
Prints by creating a binding margin (gutter) of the specied size. Enter the margin size as a number .
Note
•The values that can be entered are 0 to 50 (mm).
“Print Fold Lines”
Congures the color and type of fold lines.
Note
•T o not print fold lines, clear the “Print Fold Lines” checkbox.
“Fold Line Color”
Y ou can select the fold lines.
“Fold Line T ype”
Y ou can select the fold lines.
The following settings are available for the fold line type.
Setting
Details
“Solid Line” Y ou can print the solid line as the frame style.
“Dotted Line” Y ou can print the dotted line as the frame style.
“Dashed Line” Y ou can print the dashed line as the frame style.
“Only Print Center and Edges”
T o print fold lines at the center and both edges, select the Only Print Center and Edges checkbox.
420 Windows Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
The main features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy are as follows.
•Allows the document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER to be automatically enlarged and printed.
•Y ou can perform basic printer settings such as printer selection, media type and output prole selection,
and matching methods, in addition to borderless printing and enlargement/reduction process without
growing through the printer driver .
Note
•The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print
output to dif fer from the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy settings.
Operating Environment
Y ou can use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy in the following environments.
•Compatible Operating System
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/V ista/Server 2008
•Software that requires installation
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver
Note
•This function is not available on 64-bit version of Windows.
Windows Software 421
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Follow the procedure below to start the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
T o start by selecting “Printers and Faxes” from the “start” button
1. From the Windows “start” button, select “Printers and Faxes” to open the “Printers and Faxes”
dialog box.
2. Right-click the Printers icon and select “Print Settings” to open the “Printing Preferences”
dialog box.
In the “Utility” sheet, click the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” button.
3. The “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” dialog box displays.
Note
•If you click on the “Add to Startup folder” check box in the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy”
dialog box, the icon of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility will appear on the task bar when
starting Windows thereafter .
422 Windows Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
T o start by selecting “imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” from the
“start” button
1. From the Windows “start” button, select “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” .
2. The “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” dialog box displays.
Windows Software 423
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box
The explanation below is on the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” dialog box.
Note
•For the step to open the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” dialog box, see “Starting Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy”. (→P .422)
“Hot Folder”
The hot folder list appears.
“Add” Button
Click the button to open the “Easy Setup Wizard” dialog box so that you can add a hot folder .
“Edit” Button
From the “Hot Folder” list, select a hot folder and click the button to open the “Add/Edit Hot Folder” dialog
box that allows you to edit the hot folder .
“Delete” Button
From the “Hot Folder” list, select a hot folder and click the button to delete the hot folder .
“Start” Button
Clicking the button changes the status of the selected “inactive” Hot Folder to “active” .
“Stop” Button
Clicking the button changes the status of the selected “active” Hot Folder to “inactive” .
“Add to Startup folder”
Register the application in the Windows startup menu.
“Save Printed Data”
Automatically saves printed data.
“About” Button
Click the button to display the name and the version number of the utility .
“Operation Guide” Button
Click the button to display the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual” .
424 Windows Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Hot Folder
Hot folder refers to a folder used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
•When transferred to the PC’ s hot folder , the document data scanned with the Color imageRUNNER is
printed in enlarged size from the printer according to the print conditions set in the hot folder .
•Y ou can create a new hot folder , edit or delete an existing one, and set print conditions at will.
Note
•Y ou can create up to 20 hot folders.
Windows Software 425
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Creating a New Hot Folder
1. Open the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” dialog box, and then click the “Add” button.
Note
•For the step to open the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” dialog box, see “Starting Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy”. (→P .422)
2. The “Easy Setup Wizard” dialog box displays.
Click the “Next” button.
3. Select the type of printer to use.
Click the “Next” button.
426 Windows Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
4. Select the media type to print.
Note
•If the “Borderless Printing” checkbox is checked, only media types that can be used for borderless
printing are displayed in the list.
Click the “Next” button.
5. Select roll paper or cut sheet to print. Also, select the media size to print.
Click the “Next” button.
6. Select the color matching method.
Click the “Next” button.
Windows Software 427
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
7. T o receive a document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER, you need to share a folder .
Enter the folder shared name in Shared Name .
Click the “Next” button.
Note
•This shared name is used as the name of the hot folder .
•Y ou cannot use the “Back” button, after clicking the “Next” button here.
8. Click “Finish” button to close the “Easy Setup Wizard” dialog box.
The hot folder you have created appears in the “Hot Folder” list in the “Color imageRUNNER
Enlargement Copy” dialog box.
428 Windows Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder
1. Share the folder you want to specify as a hot folder .
2. Open the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” dialog box, and then click the “Add” button.
Note
•For the step to open the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” dialog box, see “Starting Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy”. (→P .422)
3. The “Easy Setup Wizard” dialog box displays.
Click the “Manual Settings” button.
4. The “Add/Edit Hot Folder” dialog box displays.
Enter the hot folder name in “Name” .
Click the “Browse” botton, with selecting “Specify a folder” , to set the existing shared folder .
Windows Software 429
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
5. The location of the folders will appear .
Select the folder to specify a hot folder , and click the “OK” button.
6. As necessary , set the print conditions in the hot folder . ( → P .431)
Click the “OK” button to close the “Add/Edit Hot Folder” dialog box.
The hot folder you have created appears in the “Hot Folder” list in the “Color imageRUNNER
Enlargement Copy” dialog box.
430 Windows Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Setting the Print Parameters
The printer driver opens when you click the “Properties” button in the “Add/Edit Hot Folder” dialog box. The printer
driver is used to congure basic settings to match the type of media loaded in the printer .
Refer to Printer Driver for details on the printer driver .
Note
•The only three sheets displayed are the “Main” sheet, the “Page Setup” sheet, and the “Layout” sheet.
Some of the printer driver settings may be disabled.
“Apply Sharpness”
Place a checkmark here to set the sharpness.
Drag the slider bar to the left or right to adjust. Y ou can also adjust by directly entering a number in the
numeric input eld.
Note
•Y ou can input between 0 and 500.
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
•Y ou cannot be applied to PDF les.
Windows Software 431
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (W indows)
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically .
Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed
automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder .
This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.
T o use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy , rst complete these settings in the following order .
1. Register a hot folder on your computer .
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER
and complete the settings for enlargement copy .
2. Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder .
After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color
imageRUNNER.
Registering a hot folder on your computer
Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. Y ou can
specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to
the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.
1. Display the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .348)
2. Click the Utility tab to display the Utility sheet.
3. Click Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy to start the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy utility .
4. Use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility to register or modify hot folders.
For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility .
432 Windows Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder . It is easy to send scanned
originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the
Color imageRUNNER.
For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting
manual, displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility , or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
Scanning the original and print an enlargement
Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer .
For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
1. Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.
2. Press Send to display the screen for transmission.
3. Press Favorites , and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder .
4. Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all
originals, press Done on the touch-panel display .
Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the
conditions you specied for the folder .
Note
•For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy , refer to Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy .
Windows Software 433
Status Monitor
Status Monitor
The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.
T wo screens are available in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor : “Printer List” shows a list of printers, and
“Status Monitor” shows details for each printer .
•Y ou can view a list of the printers for which printer drivers have been installed on your computer , printers
connected to your computer , and printers found on the network.
•If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately .
•Images of Ink T anks are shown, with dif ferent images for various types of ink. An icon and warning
message will notify you when ink levels are low .
•The type of paper loaded in each media source is identied. Y ou can also check to see if paper has
run out.
•This way , the utility enables you to check printer information and take care of printer maintenance
for optimal printing results.
•Y ou can also set up automatic email notication of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you
designate in advance.
•Y ou can use the Accounting Manager to collect the print job logs for the printers and check information
such as the printing costs.
For details of the Accounting Manager , see Accounting Manager . (→P .437)
434 Windows Software
Status Monitor
Note
•For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
Windows Software 435
Status Monitor
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
Y ou can use the “Job” sheet in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor for operations such as pausing and canceling
print jobs.
Preempting Other Jobs
If you select a print job and click the “Preempt” button, the selected job is printed ahead of the job that
currently precedes it in the print queue.
Pausing/Resuming Print Jobs
Selecting a print job and clicking the “Pause” button pauses printing of the selected job.
T o resume printing of a paused print job, select the print job and click the “Resume” button.
Note
•Once all the print data for a print job has been sent to the printer , the job can no longer be
paused/resumed.
Canceling Print Jobs
Selecting a print job and clicking the “Cancel Job” button cancels printing of the selected job.
Note
•Y ou cannot cancel other users’ print jobs.
Printing Held Jobs
Printing of the job with a “Status” of “Holding” is paused because the paper specied by the driver does
not match the paper currently loaded in the printer .
Use the procedure below to print the held job.
1. Select the held job and click the “Replace Paper” button.
2. Replace the paper in the printer with the correct paper .
Note
•T o continue printing without changing the paper in the printer , select the held job and click “Continue
to print” button.
436 Windows Software
Accounting
Accounting
Accounting Manager
The Accounting Manager stores the printer ’ s print job logs so that you can use the information for checking
printing costs, etc.
The benets of using the Accounting Manager are outlined below .
•Print Job Log Collection
This allows you to check which documents were printed from each printer , who printed them and when.
•Calculation of the T otal Pages Used and the T otal Cost
This allows you to use the collected print job logs to calculate totals for items such as the number of
pages printed, the amount of paper used and the printing costs incurred.
•Regular Data Acquisition for Print Jobs
This automatically logs print jobs at regular intervals.
•Exporting Print Job Data
This allows you to export collected print job data as a CSV le.
Important
•The Accounting Manager in Status Monitor displays approximate estimates of the amount of paper
consumed and the ink consumed per printed page. Canon cannot guarantee the accuracy of these
estimates. These estimates will also vary depending on the conditions of printer use.
Launching the Accounting Manager
The procedure for launching the Accounting Manager is shown below .
1. Open the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor window .
2. Select “Accounting” in the “Accounting” menu.
Or , open the “Accounting” sheet and click the “Accounting” button.
Windows Software 437
Accounting
Accounting Manager Main W indow
The Accounting Manager main window consists of a title bar , menu bar , toolbars, listed job selection area, job list
area, totals area and status bar .
T itle Bar
This displays the printer model, its serial number and the port number it is using.
Menu Bar
Allows you to select the menu options required for operation.
T oolbars
Provide tool buttons and pull-down menus for the main operations.
Note
•Y ou can opt to either show or hide the toolbars in the “V iew” menu.
438 Windows Software
Accounting
Listed Job Selection Area
Y ou can use this area to select which job log is displayed.
If you are using regular data acquisition, this area allows you to view the collective job logs for each specied
period.
For more information on how to select the job logs displayed, see Switching Between Displaying Jobs on
Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs . (→P .447)
Job List Area
This area lists the details of acquired jobs.
It displays a list of either the print jobs on the printers or the regularly acquired print jobs. The displayed
information includes the amounts of paper and ink consumed, the costs, the media type and the time taken
for printing.
Windows Software 439
Accounting
T otals Area
Displays the total costs for the selected job and the amounts of paper and ink consumed.
Note
•If you are viewing regularly acquired print jobs, selecting a period on the left side of the window displays
the total costs for that period and the amounts of paper and ink consumed.
Status Bar
Displays messages and other information.
440 Windows Software
Accounting
Accounting Manager Basic Procedures
The rst time you use the Accounting Manager , use the following procedures to congure the settings.
1. Congure unit costs, including the costs of ink and paper .
For details of the unit cost settings, see Conguring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager . (→P .441)
2. Set options such as the units displayed.
For details of the unit settings, see Conguring Units and Display Settings in Accounting
Manager . (→P .445)
3. If you are using Regular Data Acquisition, congure the Regular Data Acquisition settings.
For details of the Regular Data Acquisition settings, see Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs
at Regular Intervals . (→P .446)
4. Specify the jobs to be listed.
For details of how to select the job logs displayed, see Switching Between Displaying Jobs on
Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs . (→P .447)
This displays the required print job logs and lists the details.
Conguring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager
Select “Unit Costs” in the “Settings” menu to open the “Unit Costs” dialog box. Congure the unit cost settings
in this dialog box.
Note
•When you select a job and then open the “Unit Costs” dialog box, items with unit costs that have not yet
been congured for that job are shown highlighted.
•Setting the Unit Cost for Ink (→P .442)
•Setting the Unit Cost for Paper (→P .443)
•Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper (→P .444)
Windows Software 441
Accounting
Setting the Unit Cost for Ink
Open the “Ink” sheet. Set the unit cost for ink in this sheet.
T o set the same unit cost for all the inks
1. Select the “Use same price for all ink” checkbox.
2. Enter the “T ank Capacity” and “Price” .
3. Click the “OK” button.
Important
•Y our settings are not applied until you click the “OK” button.
T o set different unit costs for each ink color
1. Select the ink color to be costed.
2. Enter the “T ank Capacity” and “Price” .
3. Click the “Overwrite” button.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the inks.
5. Click the “OK” button.
Important
•Y our settings are not applied until you click the “OK” button.
442 Windows Software
Accounting
Setting the Unit Cost for Paper
Open the “Paper” sheet. Set the unit cost for paper in this sheet.
1. Select a media type from the “Media T ype” list.
2. Enter the “Width” , “Length” and “Price” .
3. Click the “Add” button. T o change the unit cost for a media type you have already set, click
the “Overwrite” button.
4. Click the “OK” button.
Important
•Y our settings are not applied until you click the “OK” button.
Windows Software 443
Accounting
Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper
Open the “Other” sheet. Use this sheet to set any price for items other than inks and paper .
1. Enter any name in the “Name” eld.
2. Enter a value in “Unit Cost” .
3. Use “Allocated” to specify whether the costs are allocated as being incurred by the print job.
4. Click the “Add” button. T o change the unit cost for a media type you have already set, click
the “Overwrite” button.
5. Click the “OK” button.
Note
•Y ou can set unit costs for up to 5 items.
Important
•Y our settings are not applied until you click the “OK” button.
444 Windows Software
Accounting
Conguring Units and Display Settings in Accounting
Manager
Select “Units and Display” in the “Settings” menu to open the “Units and Display” dialog box. Use this dialog box to
congure the display settings.
“Date Display Format”
Use this option to select the display format for dates. "YYYY" indicates the year , "MM" the month and "DD"
the day .
“Currency Unit”
Enter the currency unit. Enter a text string up to 3 characters long.
“1000 Separator”
Use this option to select the symbol used as a separator in numbers. The symbol is inserted every 3 digits.
“Decimal Symbol”
Use this option to select the symbol used as a decimal point.
“Ink Consumed”
Use this option to select the unit used for ink consumption.
“Paper W idth”
Use this to select the unit used for paper width.
“Paper Length”
Use this to select the unit used for paper length.
“Area Display Format”
Use this to select the unit used for paper area.
Windows Software 445
Accounting
Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular
Intervals
This feature collects print job logs from the printer at regular intervals and saves the logs on your computer .
1. Select “Regular Data Acquisition” in the “Settings” menu.
2. Select “Acquire print job logs regularly” .
3. Click the “OK” button to close the dialog box.
Note
•Immediately after you congure Regular Data Acquisition, no print jobs are displayed. W ait a few
moments and then select “Refresh” in the “V iew” menu to display the print jobs.
•A maximum of 10,000 records are saved in a print job log. If this number is exceeded, jobs are deleted
from the log starting from the oldest record. T o save old data, it is recommended that you export
the data as a CSV le.
For details of how to export print job logs as CSV les, see Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File .
(→P .447)
Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition
Y ou can use this procedure to cancel the regular acquisition of print job logs from printers.
1. Select “Regular Data Acquisition” in the “Settings” menu.
2. Uncheck the “Acquire print job logs regularly” option.
3. Click the “OK” button to close the dialog box.
446 Windows Software
Accounting
Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and
Regularly Acquired Jobs
The print job logs displayed by the Status Monitor Accounting Manager contain two types of job: Jobs on Printer
and Regularly Acquired Jobs.
Y ou can select whether to display Jobs on Printer or Regularly Acquired Jobs in the Listed Job Selection Area
on the left side of the window .
“Jobs on Printer”
This shows a list of the print jobs currently held on printers.
Y ou can change the number of jobs displayed per page using the “Print Jobs Shown Per Page” setting in
the “V iew” menu or the toolbar .
Y ou can skip to a particular page using the “Go to” option in the “V iew” menu or the toolbar .
Note
•For printers with built-in hard disks, you can view up to 500 print jobs per printer .
•For printers without built-in hard disks, you can view up to 32 print jobs per printer . However , only 10
jobs can be displayed if the printer is switched of f.
“Regularly Acquired Jobs”
This shows a list of regularly acquired print jobs.
T o view all the jobs in a set period, specify the period using “Period” and then “Starting Date” (or “Starting
Day of W eek” or “Starting Month” ) in the “V iew” menu or the toolbar .
For example, to view monthly job logs starting on the 1st of each month, set “Period” to “Monthly” and set
“Starting Date” to “1” .
Note
•Up to 10,000 regularly acquired jobs are displayed for each printer .
Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File
Y ou can export the collected print job data in the form of a CSV le by selecting “Export Job Cost Data” in the
“File” menu.
Note
•Y ou can also select “Export Job Cost Data” using the icon in the toolbar .
“Selected Jobs”
Exports the data for the selected print jobs in the job list as a CSV le.
Note
•Y ou can select multiple jobs by holding down the Shift key or Ctrl key as you click the job names.
“Listed Jobs”
Exports the data for the print jobs currently displayed in the list as a CSV le.
Windows Software 447
Accounting
Showing Job Properties
If you select a job in the job list and then select “Show Job Properties” in the “File” menu, the “Job Properties”
dialog box appears, allowing you to check information such as detailed cost data.
Y ou can copy text-based information in this dialog box to the clipboard by clicking the “Copy” button.
Note
•Y ou can also open this dialog box by right-clicking the selected job and selecting “Show Job Properties” .
Or you can also use the toolbar icon to open the dialog box.
•If you select multiple jobs and open the “Job Properties” dialog box, the total costs for the selected
jobs are displayed.
Showing, Saving and Loading Selected Unit Cost Data
“Show Unit Cost Data”
Select “Show Unit Cost Data” in the “File” menu to open the “Unit Cost Data” dialog box. This lists the unit
costs for items such as the selected ink and paper .
Y ou can copy text-based information in this dialog box to the clipboard by clicking the “Copy” button.
“Save Unit Cost Data”
Select a destination folder using “Save Unit Cost Data” in the “File” menu. The unit cost data for items such
as the selected ink and paper is saved as a le.
“Load Unit Cost Data”
Selecting “Load Unit Cost Data” in the “File” menu loads saved unit cost data.
Showing the T otal Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed
Select “Show Ink and Paper Consumed” in the “File” menu to open the “Show Ink and Paper Consumed”
dialog box.
This lists the total amounts of ink and paper consumed by the printer so far .
Y ou can copy text-based information in this dialog box to the clipboard by clicking the “Copy” button.
Note
•Up to 7 types of media are listed in order of the amount consumed. The total consumption for other
media types is shown as “Other” .
448 Windows Software
Digital Photo Front-Access
Digital Photo Front-Access
Digital Photo Front-Access
Digital Photo Front-Access is an application that links photos from Canon digital cameras and other image
les on your computer with various other applications.
•Simply select an image and click the icon of the application you want to start to launch the application.
•Y ou can also print from Digital Photo Front-Access . In short, Digital Photo Front-Access can help you
manage images in many ways from editing to printing as an ef fective way to work with other applications.
•Digital Photo Front-Access also enables image retouching. For automatic retouching, select an image
for retouching and click Image Adjustment .
•Because this application automates the workow from retouching to display for all of your images, it
can save time and work in retouching.
Note
•For details, refer to the Digital Photo Front-Access help.
Windows Software 449
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals
Y ou can print a variety of source documents from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or screen shots from
web browsers after composing an original with them using PosterArtist.
This topic describes how to use PosterArtist to compose originals from multiple applications, creating a
poster layout for printing.
Important
•This function is only supported in Windows.
•PosterArtist (sold separately) must be installed to use this function.
1. Choose “Print” in the application menu.
2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. ( → P .346)
3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
450 Windows Software
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals
5. Select the APage Layout check box.
6. Click in the Edit Using PosterArtist in the APage Layout list.
7. When you attempt to print, PosterArtist starts up and the PageCapture window is displayed. (At
this point, the document will not be printed yet.)
8. Choose the page to load in PosterArtist.
9. Edit and rearrange the image in the PosterArtist window as desired.
Important
•Without closing the PosterArtist window , repeat steps 1-8 to arrange originals from multiple
applications on the same page.
Note
•For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the PosterArtist Manual.
10. Print from the PosterArtist menu.
Windows Software 451
Device Setup Utility
Device Setup Utility
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility is a utility to establish communication between the printer and
your computer by completing relevant settings. After the printer is installed, for example, you can use
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility to complete the network settings initially .
•Starting imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility will show a list of printers found on the network. In this
list, select the printer (specically , the printer ’ s MAC address) that you want to set up, and then congure
the basic settings from your computer , such as the printer ’ s IP address and the network frame type.
•Y ou can see which printers are online in the network by checking the printer list. Communication
between your computer and these printers is possible.
Note
•W e recommend that your network or printer administrator complete the setup work using
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .
•For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility help.
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer
as follows:
Important
•In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows V ista/Windows Server 2008, you must
log on with administrative rights equivalent to the “Administrator” account.
1. Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
2. On the Setup Menu window , click Install Individual Software .
3. Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.
452 Windows Software
Device Setup Utility
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility
On a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the
printer to congure the printer ’ s IP address. This topic describes how to congure the IP address using
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .
Important
•T o congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator”
account. W e recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.
•For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility , see “Installing imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility”. (→P .452)
When specifying an IPv4 IP address
1. Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.
2. In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to congure.
3. Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
4. Select the IPv4 tab.
5. In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual .
6. Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.
7. Click OK after the Conrmation message is displayed.
8. Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .
Note
•T o congure the IP address automatically , choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select
DHCP ,BOOTP , or RARP .
•Y ou can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway .
When specifying an IPv6 IP address
1. Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.
2. In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to congure.
3. Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
4. Select the IPv6 tab.
5. In IPv6 , select On .
6. When there is an IPv6-compatible router in the network environment, select On in Stateless
Address .
Additionally , when there is an DHCPv6-compatible server in the network environment, select
On in DHCPv6 .
Note
•When there is no IPv6-compatible router or DHCPv6-compatible server , select On in Manual and
enter the IPv6 Address and Prex Length .
7. Click Set .
8. Click OK after the Conrmation message is displayed.
9. Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .
Windows Software 453
Printer Driver
Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)
For instructions on accessing the Mac OS X printer driver , refer to the following topics.
•Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Mac OS X) (→P .460)
For information on the Mac OS X printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.
•Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P .461)
Y ou can specify the media type, color processing, print quality , print preview , and other settings. Choose
Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings
to complete more detailed settings as desired.
•Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X) (→P .465)
•V iew settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Mac OS X) (→P .466)
•Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X) (→P .467)
•Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X) (→P .469)
•Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X) (→P .471)
Y ou can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the
orientation, the paper size and source, and automatic cutting.
•Utility Pane (Mac OS X) (→P .473)
Y ou can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings
for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
•Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X) (→P .474)
Y ou can specify settings for how print jobs are sent to the printer .
•Support Pane (Mac OS X) (→P .475)
Y ou can view support information and the user ’ s manual.
With the imagePROGRAF Free Layout feature, you can arrange originals from various source applications
on a single page before printing. For details, see Free Layout .
With the imagePROGRAF Preview feature, you can check the layout before printing and adjust layout or
size settings while viewing a preview screen. For details, see Preview .
With the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy feature, you can automatically enlarge and print scanned
originals from a Color imageRUNNER . For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
454 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)
If you have replaced the paper , you must complete the following settings in the printer driver .
1. This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size .
Note
•The conguration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are congured by opening the
Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup .
If it is not displayed, the settings are congured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when
you select Print from the application software menu.
2. Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3. Choose the original size in the FPaper Size list.
4. If you congured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the
dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.
5. Access the Main pane.
6. In the AMedia T ype list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Mac OS X Software 455
Printer Driver
7. Access the Page Setup pane.
8. In the APaper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
9. If you have selected Manual in APaper Source , make sure the size as selected in Page Setup
is displayed in CPage Size . If you have selected Roll Paper in APaper Source , make sure
the width of the loaded roll is displayed in BRoll W idth .
Note
•If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll W idth , click LPrinter Information
on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Note
•A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit dif ferent printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P .454)
456 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)
There are two ways to conrm what printing conditions have been specied, as follows.
•Checking a preview of the settings
•Checking a print preview
Checking a preview of the settings
A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main ,Page Setup ,Utility , and Additional
Settings panes.By checking images and numerical values in the preview , you can conrm current settings for
the page size, orientation, paper source, and so on.
Display Area
Information Displayed
Pane displayed when the H
Images tab is clicked
On top, illustrations indicate the page size of the original, the paper size,
orientation, layout, borderless printing selection, color mode, and other
settings information.
Under this, the page size, paper size, and method and percentage of
enlargement or reduction is displayed.
Pane displayed when the I
Size tab is clicked
Paper size details are indicated numerically .
Pane with printer and paper
illustrations
Illustrations indicate the paper source, orientation, borderless printing
selection, and other settings information.
Note
•T o conrm the Print T arget specied in Easy Settings , click GV iew set. on the Main pane to display
the V iew settings dialog box.
Mac OS X Software 457
Printer Driver
Checking a print preview
Y ou can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.
Conrming the image of print jobs beforehand helps prevent printing errors.
For details on print previews, see “Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing”. (→P .313)
458 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac
OS X)
This topic describes how to check the layout before printing using the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview function.
1. Choose Print in the application menu.
2. Access the Main pane.
3. Select the OPrint Preview check box.
4. Click MPrint .
5. The Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.
6. Check the layout and adjust settings in the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window as desired.
7. Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview menu.
Note
•For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, refer to Preview .
Mac OS X Software 459
Printer Driver
Using Favorites (Mac OS X)
Y ou can use the Presets function in Mac OS X for favorite-based printing.
Note
•In the printing dialog box, click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings. This is a
standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Mac OS X)
1. In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing
conditions.
Note
•This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer , specify the
range of pages, number of copies, and so on.
2. Select the printer in the Printer list.
3. Click Print to start printing.
As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete
settings for various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless
printing, and so on.
460 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Main Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Main pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.
Note
•On the Main pane, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the print target, or
switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.
Common Items
AMedia T ype
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide . ( → P .95)
BGet Information
Displays Paper Information on Printer . Y ou can update the printer driver settings for the feed source, media
type, and roll width by selecting the feed source.
•Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Mac OS X) (→P .464)
CSet
Displays Paper Detailed Settings . Y ou can congure the printing settings to match the type of media, such
as the ink drying time.
•Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X) (→P .465)
OPrint Preview
If you turn this on, imagePROGRAF Preview starts before printing.
This allows you to check on-screen previews of documents before printing.
Important
•This cannot be selected if Free Layout is enabled in the Page Setup panel.
•Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (→P .313)
LPrinter
Displays Printer . Y ou can display printer information such as the remaining ink levels.
Mac OS X Software 461
Printer Driver
Conguration using Easy Settings
EPrint T arget
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
•Printing Photos and Images (→P .152)
•Printing Line Drawings and T ext (→P .160)
•Printing Of ce Documents (→P .171)
FPrint Quality
Choose the level of print quality .
GV iew set.
Click to display the V iew settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm the settings for the selected item
from the EPrint T arget list or change the order of items listed in EPrint T arget .
462 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Conguration using Advanced Settings
EPrint Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
•Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing (→P .187)
FPrint Quality
Choose the level of print quality .
•Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing (→P .187)
HColor Mode
Choose the color mode.
•Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing (→P .187)
ISet
Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings.
•Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P .177)
JUnidirectional Printing
Select this checkbox to prevent problems such as misaligned lines and improve the print quality . However , the
printing speed becomes slower .
QThicken Fine Lines
Activate this option to print ne lines more distinctly .
PSharpen T ext
Activate this option to print text more sharply .
KReduce Print Unevenness
Select this checkbox for two-pass printing to reduce color shading.
This option is displayed if you have selected Plain Paper in Media T ype and Ofce Document in Print
Priority .
NEconomy Printing
Select this checkbox to reduce the amount of ink consumed during printing. However , the print quality is
worse than for normal printing.
Select this mode if you want to conserve ink when checking drawings, for example. Depending on the Media
T ype and Print Quality settings, this mode may not be available.
Mac OS X Software 463
Printer Driver
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Mac OS X)
On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and
congure printer driver media type setting.
Note
•T o display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main pane, click Get Information by
Media T ype . ( → P .461)
APaper Source
Shows the Paper Source supported by the printer , as well as the type of paper loaded. T o update the media
type setting in the printer driver , select the desired Paper Source option and click OK .
464 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X)
The Paper Detailed Settings dialog box of fers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to the
printer driver help.
Note
•T o display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main pane, click Set by Media T ype .
( → P .461)
AMedia T ype
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide . ( → P .95)
BDrying T ime
Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry , as needed. The Drying T ime setting is only valid for rolls.
•( → P .127)
CBetween Pages
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the paper , as needed.
DBetween Scans
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until printing the next line, as needed.
ERoll Paper Margin for Safety
Y ou can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to
curling is held rmly against the Platen .
FNear End Margin
Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the roll, as needed.
GCut Speed
Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. Y ou can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when
automatic cutting is used.
HAutomatic Cutting
Y ou can activate or deactivate automatic cutting and printing of cut lines, as desired. In this list, specify
Printer Default ,None , or Print Cut Guideline .
Mac OS X Software 465
Printer Driver
JMirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or
image with the left and right sides inverted.
V iew settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Mac OS X)
In the V iew settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.
Note
•T o display the V iew settings dialog box, on the Main pane, click V iew settings by Print T arget .
( → P .461)
APrint T arget
Shows all Print T arget options (settings items for the printing application).
BName
Identies the item selected in Print T arget by its name and an icon.
CDetails
Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each item selected in the Print T arget list.
466 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X)
In general, make any needed adjustments to the color of documents in the application used to create them.
However , if the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can also adjust the color in the printer driver .
Color Adjustment pane: color
If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment pane.
Note
•T o display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main pane click Color Settings by Color Mode in
Advanced Settings . ( → P .461)
ASample T ype
Choose a sample image from Standard ,Portrait ,Landscape , or Graphics .
BV iew Color Pattern
Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.
CApply to Sample
Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.
DCyan / EMagenta / FY ellow
Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of each color .
GGray T one
Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool (tinged with blue) or W arm (tinged with red).
HBrightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. Y ou can adjust the brightness if the printed document is
lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic
as it appears on the computer screen).
IContrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other , as desired. Increasing the
Contrast makes images sharper , and reducing the Contrast softens images.
Mac OS X Software 467
Printer Driver
JSaturation
Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting makes colors more vivid, and reducing
the Saturation makes colors more subdued.
Note
•For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P .177)
KObject Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to
color adjustment.
Matching pane
On the Matching pane, you can specify color matching to compensate for dif ferences in the appearance
of colors on various devices.
Note
•T o display the Matching pane, on the Main pane click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced
Settings , and then click Matching . ( → P .461)
AMatching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
BMatching Method
Select the matching method that suits the document to be printed. V arious Matching Method options are
available depending on your selection in Matching Mode .
Note
•For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P .177)
468 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Color Settings pane for monochrome printing.
Color Adjustment pane: Monochrome
On the Color Adjustment pane for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.
Note
•T o display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main pane, click Color Settings in Advanced Settings .
( → P .461)
ASample T ype
Choose a sample image from Standard ,Portrait ,Landscape , or Graphics .
BV iew Color Pattern
Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.
CApply to Sample
Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.
DCyan / EMagenta / FY ellow
Not available.
GGray T one
Not available.
HBrightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. Y ou can adjust the brightness if the printed document is
lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic
as it appears on the computer screen).
IContrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other , as desired. Increasing the I
Contrast makes images sharper , and reducing the IContrast softens images.
Mac OS X Software 469
Printer Driver
JSaturation
Not available.
Note
•For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P .177)
KObject Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to
color adjustment.
470 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Page Setup pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help.
APaper Source
Choose how paper is supplied.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in AMedia T ype in the Main pane.
BRoll W idth
Displays the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer . Unknown is displayed if the printer cannot detect the
roll paper width.
CPage Size
Displays the size of the original, as specied in the page settings of the application.
For details on page sizes available in the application. see “Paper Sizes”. (→P .100)
DEnlarged/Reduced Printing
Select this checkbox to choose the following options.
•Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (→P .201)
•Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P .207)
•Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling V alue (→P .213)
EFit Paper Size
Resizes the document image to match the paper size.
FFit Roll Paper W idth
Resizes the document image to match the roll width.
GScaling
Resizes the document image based on a specied scaling value. Enter a value in a range of “5-600.”
HBorderless Printing
Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected in the APaper Source list.
Activate this setting for borderless printing to match the size and width of the paper .
•Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (→P .232)
•Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P .239)
•Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P .225)
Mac OS X Software 471
Printer Driver
IPaper Size
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
Click Display all selections for Paper Size to list available sizes.
For details on available paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P .100)
JPrint Centered
Select this checkbox to print document images in the center of the paper .
•Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (→P .289)
•Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (→P .295)
KNo Spaces at T op or Bottom
Select this checkbox to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in
documents, which enables you to conserve the paper .
•Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without T op and Bottom Margins (→P .307)
LRotate Page 90 degrees
Select this checkbox to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before printing.
•Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P .301)
NFree Layout
Select this checkbox to start imagePROGRAF Free Layout before printing.
This allows you to print multiple documents next to each other .
Important
•This cannot be selected if Print Preview is enabled in the Main panel.
•Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (→P .269)
472 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Utility Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Utility pane.
ASet
Click to display the Printer dialog box, which of fers the following maintenance for the printer .
•Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning
•Head alignment adjustment
•Feed amount adjustment
BV iew
Click to start imagePROGRAF Printmonitor , which enables you to view the status of print jobs.
CSet
Click to complete the settings for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy).
*1: For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
Mac OS X Software 473
Printer Driver
Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Additional Settings pane.
AData Send Method
Choose how print data is sent to the printer .
•BSend Print Data Immediately to Printer
•CSend All Print Data as Batch to Printer
474 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Support Pane (Mac OS X)
On the Support pane, you can view support information and the user ’ s manual.
ASupport Information
Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can nd the latest information on the printer and
consumables, check for printer driver updates, and browse other information.
BUser Manual
Click to view the printer user ’ s manual. This function requires the user ’ s manual to be installed on your
computer .
CSettings
The settings can be saved as a le. Click to display the Export dialog box, which enables you to specify
where to save the le.
DAbout
Y ou can display version information for the printer driver .
Mac OS X Software 475
Preview
Preview
The Features of Preview
The main features of Preview are as follows.
•While viewing this screen, you can adjust layout settings of a document created with application software.
•Y ou can not only adjust layout settings but also your changes will be instantly applied on the preview
screen, and you can print the preview screen as it is seen.
Note
•The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual
print output to dif fer from the Preview settings.
Operating Environment
Y ou can use the Preview in the following environments.
•Compatible Operating System
Mac OS X (10.3.9 to 10.5)
•Software that requires installation
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver
476 Mac OS X Software
Preview
Starting Preview
Follow the procedure below to start the Preview .
1. Start the apllication software which you use.
2. From the application software’ s “File” menu, select the printer setup menu to open the “Print”
dialog box.
Note
•Normally , select “Print” from the “File” menu.
3. Click “Print Preview” in the “Main” panel to attach a checkmark.
4. Click the “Print” button in the “Print” dialog box.
5. Preview main window is displayed.
Mac OS X Software 477
Preview
Preview Main W indow
The Preview main window consists of the menu and tool bars, and preview , dialog , drawer and status area.
Note
•Y ou can use the “V iew” menu to show or hide the tool bar .
Menu Bar
This allows you to select menus required for operations.
T ool Bar
This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.
Preview Area
Y ou can check the settings you made in this area.
478 Mac OS X Software
Preview
Dialog Area
This allows you to set the print conditions and perform a print job.
Drawer Area
This allows you to display the thumbnails of a document.
This area appears when you click “Drawer” from the tool bar .
Alternatively , you may select “Drawer” from the “V iew” menu.
Status Area
This shows “Input Size” and “Output Size” .
Mac OS X Software 479
Preview
Paper Settings Panel
This panel appears when you select Paper Settings in the dialog area.
“Media T ype”
This allows you to select the media type.
Note
•Always select media type that is actually set in the printer . When the media you chose is dif ferent from
the media set in the printer , you may not receive the desired print results.
“Easy Settings” / “Advanced Settings”
T wo modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs.
The settings available on each mode are as follows.
•Easy Settings (→P .482)
•Advanced Settings (→P .484)
Paper Source
Y ou can select the paper source.
The following settings are available for paper source.
Setting
Details
“Manual” Select for manual paper feed printing.
“Roll Paper” Select to print on roll paper .
“Roll Paper W idth”
This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer .
Note
•A vailable only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .
480 Mac OS X Software
Preview
“Copies”
Y ou can input the number of print copies in numerical characters.
Note
•The maximum value is 999.
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
“Restore Defaults” Button
Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview .
“Print” Button
Click the button to begin printing.
“Update Printer Info.” Button
Click the button to acquire printer information.
Mac OS X Software 481
Preview
Easy Settings
Y ou can easily select the best settings for the print job by just selecting an item from the print target list that
matches the content of the document.
“Print T arget”
Y ou can easily select the best settings for the print job simply .
If you select each “Print T arget” item the corresponding comment for that item is displayed below the list.
Setting
Details
“Default Settings” Suitable for printing normal documents that contain a mixture of text,
photographs, and graphics.
“Of ce Document” Suitable for printing handouts as well as general of ce documents for
which print clarity is key .
“Poster” The best setting for posters.Prints using vivid and high impact colors.
“CAD (Color Line Drawing)” Prints the ne lines of CAD drawings and other such documents sharp
and clear .
CAD (B/W Line Drawing) Suitable for printing CAD drawings with sharp, dark lines.
“Perspective, GIS” Suitable for attractive printing of 3D-CAD drawings, perspective drawings,
and GIS drawings including maps.
“Photo (Color)” Suitable for printing photographic images captured with a digital camera.
“Faithful Color Reproduction” Prints by faithfully reproducing the colors of the original image.
“Custom Settings” Suitable for printing documents for which Advanced Settings have been
specied.
Note
•The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.
482 Mac OS X Software
Preview
“Print Quality”
Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.
The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.
Setting
Details
Print Quality “Highest” / “High” / “Standard” / “Draft”
Resolution “1200dpi” / “600dpi” / “300dpi”
Note
•The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.
•Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft , however , print quality is
higher .
•Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High , however , print quality is lower .
Mac OS X Software 483
Preview
Advanced Settings
Presents detailed settings for the print quality , the color mode, and other items so you can select the values for
these settings yourself.
“Print Priority”
Select a print quality mode that is appropriate for the print job.
Setting
Details
“Image” This mode achieves the best results for printing photographic images and
illustrations.
“Line Drawing” This mode is best for printing CAD drawings with ne lines or wall
newssheet or other documents that contain large amounts of text.
However , you may not achieve the quality you expect with printing
photographs or other images with many lled areas. For these types of
jobs, select “Image” .
“Of ce Document” Prints common of ce documents, such as proposals, memos for
distribution, etc., so they are easy to read.
Note
•The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.
“Print Quality”
Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.
The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.
Setting
Details
Print Quality “Highest” / “High” / “Standard” / “Draft”
Resolution “1200dpi” / “600dpi” / “300dpi”
Note
•The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.
•Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft , however , print quality is
higher .
•Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High , however , print quality is lower .
484 Mac OS X Software
Preview
Output Settings Panel
This panel appears when you select Output Settings in the dialog area.
“Enlarged/Reduced Printing”
Select the method for enlarged/reduced printing.
The following settings are available for enlarged/reduced printing.
Setting
Details
Fit Paper Size Enlarges/reduces the whole page automatically to t the media size
selected for output. Select the media size to print from Paper Size .
“Fit Roll Paper Width” Enlarges/reduces the whole page automatically to t the width of the roll
paper with the page width.
*Make sure that the width of the roll paper in the printer is set correctly for
“Roll Paper Width” in the Paper Settings panel.
*Displayed only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .
Scaling Enlarges/reduces the whole page by the scaling rate as specied. Input the
scaling value in numerical characters. Y ou can specify a range between 5
and 600%.
*Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
*Although Scaling can be set to make the image larger than the media
size, the part that does not t in the media cannot be printed.
*This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in “Borderless Printing” .
“Borderless Printing”
Y ou can print the media without margins on all sides when the roll paper with the specic width and the
specic media type is used.
For more information about “Borderless Printing” , see “Print with No Borders”. (→P .496)
Note
•A vailable only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .
•This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in “Print Centered” .
Mac OS X Software 485
Preview
Paper Size
Y ou can select the size of the print media.
Note
•This is not displayed when “Fit Roll Paper Width” is set in “Enlarged/Reduced Printing” .
“Print Centered”
Y ou can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer .
For more information about “Print Centered” , see “Print on the Center”. (→P .497)
Note
•This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in “Borderless Printing” .
“No Spaces at T op or Bottom”
Y ou can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at
the top or bottom.
For more information about “No Spaces at T op or Bottom” , see “Not Print Spaces at the T op/Bottom”. (→P .498)
Note
•A vailable only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .
“Rotate Page”
Select the method for rotating page.
The following settings are available for rotating page.
Setting
Details
“Rotate Right 90 Degrees” Rotates the portrait page right 90 degrees and print in landscape
orientation. When the rotated page can t in the width of roll paper , the
page is rotated automatically , and when it can not t in the width of roll
paper , the page is not rotated.
“Rotate Left 90 Degrees” Rotates the portrait page left 90 degrees and print in landscape orientation.
When the rotated page can t in the width of roll paper , the page is rotated
automatically , and when it can not t in the width of roll paper , the page is
not rotated.
“Rotate 180 degrees” Allows you to rotate the image 180 degrees from the vertical to the right.
“Restore Defaults” Button
Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview .
“Print” Button
Click the button to begin printing.
“Update Printer Info.” Button
Click the button to acquire printer information.
486 Mac OS X Software
Preview
Color Settings Panel
This panel appears when you select Color Settings in the dialog area.
“Color Mode”
Y ou can select a color mode to suit the print job.
Setting
Details
“Color” Enables color printing.
“Monochrome” Disables color printing and converts image from continuous color to
grayscaled monochrome.
“Color (CAD)” Prints lines in the best color possible so they are easy to see.
“Monochrome Bitmap” Prints all colors other than white in black.
“Monochrome (BK ink)” Select to print all lines with black ink.
Note
•The availability of settings depends on the print priority and media type selections.
“Color Adjustment” / “Matching”
Y ou can set the color adjustment and matching.
•Color Adjustment (→P .488)
•Matching (→P .490)
“Restore Defaults” Button
Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview .
“Print” Button
Click the button to begin printing.
“Update Printer Info.” Button
Click the button to acquire printer information.
Mac OS X Software 487
Preview
Color Adjustment
Y ou can set the color adjustment.
Adjusting Color
Normally colors should be adjusted in the software application, but if you see colors in the printout that do
not match colors on the screen, you can perform color adjustments.
1. Select “Color” on “Color Mode” in the Color Settings panel.
2. Select “Color Adjustment” .
3. Drag each slider to the left or right to adjust.
Setting
Details
“Cyan” Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.
“Magenta” Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.
“Y ellow” Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.
“Brightness” Adjusts the brightness of the entire image. When the results of the
printout are brighter than the original images such as the original photo
before scanning and graphics created on the display , or when you want
to print in dif ferent degrees of brightness, use this feature.
“Contrast” Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest
portions of the image.
*For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase
the contrast.
“Saturation” Adjusts the hues for vivid color or dark color .
“Gray T one” Adjusts gray from cool black (bluish tones) to warm black (reddish tones).
Note
•Y ou can also click the up or down arrow , or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the
value.
488 Mac OS X Software
Preview
Adjusting Monochrome
Use the monochrome setting to print monochrome images of color photographs captured with a scanner
or digital camera or other color images.
1. Select “Monochrome” on “Color Mode” in the Color Settings panel.
2. Select “Color Adjustment” .
3. Drag each slider to the left or right to adjust.
Setting
Details
“Brightness” Adjusts the brightness of the entire image. When the results of the
printout are brighter than the original images such as the original photo
before scanning and graphics created on the display , or when you want
to print in dif ferent degrees of brightness, use this feature.
“Contrast” Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest
portions of the image.
*For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase
the contrast.
Note
•Y ou can also click the up or down arrow , or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the
value.
Mac OS X Software 489
Preview
Matching
Y ou can set the matching.
“Matching Mode”
Y ou can select a matching mode to suit the print job.
Setting
Details
Driver Matching Mode
(→P .492)
Independent driver color matching is performed.
ICC Matching Mode (→P .493) Color matching using ColorGear is performed.
ColorSync (→P .494) Color matching using CMM from Mac OS is performed.
“No Correction” No color matching is performed. Select this option when you want to
perform color matching in the software application.
Note
•Y ou need to set each correction on the printer driver .
“Matching Method”
Y ou can select a matching method to suit the print job.
“Input Prole”
Select the input prole.
Note
•Y ou can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in “Matching Mode” .
“Printer Prole”
Select the printer prole.
Note
•Y ou can select only after ICC Matching Mode or “ColorSync” has been selected in “Mode” .
490 Mac OS X Software
Preview
“Soft Proof”
When you place a checkmark here, “ColorSync” applies to the preview area.
Note
•Y ou can select only after “ColorSync” has been selected in “Matching Mode” .
Mac OS X Software 491
Preview
Driver Matching Mode
1. Under “Mode” , select Driver Matching Mode .
2. Click “Matching Method” list, and then select a setting.
Setting
Details
“Auto” Automatically selects the best color matching method for each Image,
Graphics, T ext.
“Perceptual” Gives priority to color hue in color matching suitable for output of
photographic images.
Saturation Gives priority to vividness in color matching.
Colorimetric Gives priority to reducing the dif ferences in color between the original as
it appears on the screen and the printed output.
492 Mac OS X Software
Preview
ICC Matching Mode
1. Under “Matching Mode” on the “Matching” , select ICC Matching Mode .
2. Click the “Matching Method” list, and then select a setting.
Setting
Details
“Perceptual” Gives priority to color hue in color matching suitable for output of
photographic images.
Colorimetric Gives priority to reducing the dif ferences in color between the original as
it appears on the screen and the printed output.
Colorimetric (No
White-Point Correction)
Performs Colorimetric color matching but without white point correction.
“Saturation” Gives priority to vividness in color matching.
3. Click the “Input Prole” list and select an input prole.
4. Click the “Printer Prole” list and select a printer prole.
Mac OS X Software 493
Preview
ColorSync
1. Place a checkmark on “Soft Proof” to simulate the output product in Layout Area.
494 Mac OS X Software
Preview
Preferences Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select “Preferences” from the “imagePROGRAF Advanced Preview” menu.
Y ou can set the preferences for Preview .
“Units”
Set the unit for paper length, margins, and so on.
Zoom Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select “Zoom” from the “V iew” menu. Y ou can enlarge or reduce the screen
display .
Scaling
Set the magnication for enlargement or reduction of the screen display .
Note
•Y ou can input between 10 and 400.
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking “▼” button.
Go to Page Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select “Go to Page” from the “V iew” menu.
Note
•Y ou can not select “Go to Page” if the document is only one page.
“Page”
Input the page number in numerical characters to display in the preview area.
Note
•Y ou can change the numbers in the range of the page of the documents.
Mac OS X Software 495
Preview
Print with No Borders
Y ou can use the borderless printing function to print without margins surrounding the image.
Note
•With some media borderless printing can be performed only between two edges.
•T o use the borderless printing function, the specied media must be set to the printer .
1. On the Paper Settings Panel (→P .480) , select “Roll Paper” in Paper Source .
2. On the Output Settings panel, click the “Enlarged/Reduced Printing” check box on.
3. Select “Fit Roll Paper Width” .
4. Click the “Borderless Printing” check box on.
5. Click the “Print” button.
Borderless printing begins.
496 Mac OS X Software
Preview
Print on the Center
Y ou can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer .
Note
•This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in “Borderless Printing” .
1. On the Output Settings panel, click the “Print Centered” check box on.
2. Click the “Print” button.
Printing on the center begins.
Mac OS X Software 497
Preview
Not Print Spaces at the T op/Bottom
Y ou can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the
top or bottom.
Note
•This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in “Borderless Printing” .
1. On the Paper Settings Panel (→P .480) , select “Roll Paper” in Paper Source .
2. On the Output Settings panel, click the “No Spaces at T op or Bottom” check box on.
3. Click the “Print” button.
Printing on the settings with no spaces at top or bottom begins.
498 Mac OS X Software
Preview
Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees
Y ou can save paper by printing in landscape orientation on roll paper .
1. On the Paper Settings Panel (→P .480) , select “Roll Paper” in Paper Source .
2. On the Output Settings panel, click the “Rotate Page” check box on.
3. Select “Rotate Right 90 Degrees” or “Rotate Left 90 Degrees” .
4. Click the “Print” button.
Printing on rotating 90 degrees begins.
Mac OS X Software 499
Preview
Display with Fitting to the W idth of the Paper
In the preview area, you can display to the width of the paper .
1. Select “Fit to Width” from the tool bar .
2. Fitting to the width of the paper , it is displayed.
500 Mac OS X Software
Preview
Display with All
In the preview area, you can display all.
1. Select “Fit Screen” from the tool bar .
2. All is displayed.
Mac OS X Software 501
Preview
Display with Actual Size
In the preview area, you can display the actual size.
1. Select “Actual Size” from the tool bar .
2. Actual size is displayed.
502 Mac OS X Software
Preview
Moving a Page
Y ou can move a page to display in the preview area.
1. Select each button in “Go to Page” on the tool bar .
Setting
Details
Go to the rst page.
Go to the previous page.
Go to the next page.
Go to the last page.
2. The target page appears.
Note
•Y ou can also move a page by clicking the page on the thumbnails.
Mac OS X Software 503
Free Layout
Free Layout
The Features of Free Layout
The main features of Free Layout are as follows.
•Allows you to lay out at will and print a document created with application software.
•Y ou can not only lay out multiple pages on one page but also lay out and print a multiple-le document
on one page, or lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.
Note
•The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print
output to dif fer from the Free Layout settings.
Operating Environment
Y ou can use the Free Layout in the following environments.
•Compatible Operating System
Mac OS X (10.3.9 to 10.5)
•Software that requires installation
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver
504 Mac OS X Software
Free Layout
Starting Free Layout
Follow the procedure below to start the Free Layout.
1. Start the apllication software which you use.
2. From the application software’ s “File” menu, select the printer setup menu to open the “Print”
dialog box.
Note
•Normally , select “Print” from the “File” menu.
3. Click on “Free Layout” in the “Page Setup” panel to attach a checkmark.
4. Click the “Print” button in the “Print” dialog box.
5. Free Layout main window is displayed.
Mac OS X Software 505
Free Layout
Free Layout Main W indow
The Free Layout main window consists of the menu and tool bars, layout area and dialog areas.
Note
•Y ou can use the “V iew” menu to show or hide the tool.
Menu Bar
This allows you to select menus required for operations.
T ool Bar
This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.
Layout Area
This allows you to lay out objects and edit the object size and orientation.
506 Mac OS X Software
Free Layout
Dialog Area
This allows you to set the print conditions and perform a print job.
Mac OS X Software 507
Free Layout
Paper Settings Panel
This panel appears when you select Paper Settings in the dialog area.
“Media T ype”
This allows you to select the media type.
Note
•Always select media type that is actually set in the printer . When the media you chose is dif ferent from
the media set in the printer , you may not receive the desired print results.
“Easy Settings” / “Advanced Settings”
T wo modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs.
The settings available on each mode are as follows.
•Easy Settings (→P .510)
•Advanced Settings (→P .512)
Paper Source
Y ou can select the paper source.
The following settings are available for paper source.
Setting
Details
“Manual” Select for manual paper feed printing.
“Roll Paper” Select to print on roll paper .
“Roll Paper W idth”
This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer .
Note
•A vailable only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .
508 Mac OS X Software
Free Layout
“Copies”
Y ou can input the number of print copies in numerical characters.
Note
•The maximum value is 999.
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
“Restore Defaults” Button
Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Free Layout.
“Print” Button
Click the button to begin printing.
“Update Printer Info.” Button
Click the button to acquire printer information.
Mac OS X Software 509
Free Layout
Easy Settings
Y ou can easily select the best settings for the print job by just selecting an item from the print target list that
matches the content of the document.
“Print T arget”
Y ou can easily select the best settings for the print job simply .
If you select each “Print T arget” item the corresponding comment for that item is displayed below the list.
Setting
Details
“Default Settings” Suitable for printing normal documents that contain a mixture of text,
photographs, and graphics.
“Of ce Document” Suitable for printing handouts as well as general of ce documents for
which print clarity is key .
“Poster” The best setting for posters.Prints using vivid and high impact colors.
“CAD (Color Line Drawing)” Prints the ne lines of CAD drawings and other such documents sharp
and clear .
CAD (B/W Line Drawing) Suitable for printing CAD drawings with sharp, dark lines.
“Perspective, GIS” Suitable for attractive printing of 3D-CAD drawings, perspective drawings,
and GIS drawings including maps.
“Photo (Color)” Suitable for printing photographic images captured with a digital camera.
“Faithful Color Reproduction” Prints by faithfully reproducing the colors of the original image.
“Custom Settings” Suitable for printing documents for which Advanced Settings have been
specied.
Note
•The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.
510 Mac OS X Software
Free Layout
“Print Quality”
Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.
The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.
Setting
Details
Print Quality “Highest” / “High” / “Standard” / “Draft”
Resolution “1200dpi” / “600dpi” / “300dpi”
Note
•The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.
•Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft , however , print quality is
higher .
•Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High , however , print quality is lower .
Mac OS X Software 51 1
Free Layout
Advanced Settings
Presents detailed settings for the print priority , the print quality , and other items so you can select the values for
these settings yourself.
“Print Priority”
Select a print quality mode that is appropriate for the print job.
Setting
Details
“Image” This mode achieves the best results for printing photographic images and
illustrations.
“Line Drawing” This mode is best for printing CAD drawings with ne lines or wall
newssheet or other documents that contain large amounts of text.
However , you may not achieve the quality you expect with printing
photographs or other images with many lled areas. For these types of
jobs, select “Image” .
“Of ce Document” Prints common of ce documents, such as proposals, memos for
distribution, etc., so they are easy to read.
Note
•The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.
“Print Quality”
Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.
The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.
Setting
Details
Print Quality “Highest” / “High” / “Standard” / “Draft”
Resolution “1200dpi” / “600dpi” / “300dpi”
Note
•The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.
•Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft , however , print quality is
higher .
•Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High , however , print quality is lower .
512 Mac OS X Software
Free Layout
Color Settings Panel
This panel appears when you select Color Settings in the dialog area.
“Color Mode”
Y ou can select a color mode to suit the print job.
Setting
Details
“Color” Enables color printing.
“Monochrome” Disables color printing and converts image from continuous color to
grayscaled monochrome.
“Color (CAD)” Prints lines in the best color possible so they are easy to see.
“Monochrome Bitmap” Prints all colors other than white in black.
“Monochrome (BK ink)” Select to print all lines with black ink.
Note
•The availability of settings depends on the print priority and media type selections.
“Color Adjustment” / “Matching”
Y ou can set the color adjustment and matching.
•Color Adjustment (→P .514)
•Matching (→P .516)
“Restore Defaults” Button
Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Free Layout.
“Print” Button
Click the button to begin printing.
“Update Printer Info.” Button
Click the button to acquire printer information.
Mac OS X Software 513
Free Layout
Color Adjustment
Y ou can set the color adjustment.
Adjusting Color
Normally colors should be adjusted in the software application, but if you see colors in the printout that do
not match colors on the screen, you can perform color adjustments.
1. Select “Color” on “Color Mode” in the Color Settings panel.
2. Select “Color Adjustment” .
3. Drag each slider to the left or right to adjust.
Setting
Details
“Cyan” Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.
“Magenta” Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.
“Y ellow” Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.
“Brightness” Adjusts the brightness of the entire image. When the results of the
printout are brighter than the original images such as the original photo
before scanning and graphics created on the display , or when you want
to print in dif ferent degrees of brightness, use this feature.
“Contrast” Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest
portions of the image.
*For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase
the contrast.
“Saturation” Adjusts the hues for vivid color or dark color .
“Gray T one” Adjusts gray from cool black (bluish tones) to warm black (reddish tones).
Note
•Y ou can also click the up or down arrow , or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the
value.
514 Mac OS X Software
Free Layout
Adjusting Monochrome
Use the monochrome setting to print monochrome images of color photographs captured with a scanner
or digital camera or other color images.
1. Select “Monochrome” on “Color Mode” in the Color Settings panel.
2. Select “Color Adjustment” .
3. Drag each slider to the left or right to adjust.
Setting
Details
“Brightness” Adjusts the brightness of the entire image. When the results of the
printout are brighter than the original images such as the original photo
before scanning and graphics created on the display , or when you want
to print in dif ferent degrees of brightness, use this feature.
“Contrast” Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest
portions of the image.
*For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase
the contrast.
Note
•Y ou can also click the up or down arrow , or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the
value.
Mac OS X Software 515
Free Layout
Matching
Y ou can set the matching.
“Matching Mode”
Y ou can select a matching mode to suit the print job.
Setting
Details
Driver Matching Mode
(→P .518)
Independent driver color matching is performed.
ICC Matching Mode (→P .519) Color matching using ColorGear is performed.
ColorSync (→P .520) Color matching using CMM from Mac OS is performed.
“No Correction” No color matching is performed. Select this option when you want to
perform color matching in the software application.
Note
•Y ou need to set each correction on the printer driver .
“Matching Method”
Y ou can select a matching method to suit the print job.
“Input Prole”
Select the input prole.
Note
•Y ou can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in “Matching Mode” .
“Printer Prole”
Select the printer prole.
Note
•Y ou can select only after ICC Matching Mode or “ColorSync” has been selected in “Mode” .
516 Mac OS X Software
Free Layout
“Soft Proof”
When you place a checkmark here, “ColorSync” applies to the layout area.
Note
•Y ou can select only after “ColorSync” has been selected in “Matching Mode” .
Mac OS X Software 517
Free Layout
Driver Matching Mode
1. Under “Matching Mode” , select Driver Matching Mode .
2. Click the “Matching Method” list, and then select a setting.
Setting
Details
“Auto” Automatically selects the best color matching method for each Image,
Graphics, T ext.
“Perceptual” Gives priority to color hue in color matching suitable for output of
photographic images.
Saturation Gives priority to vividness in color matching.
Colorimetric Gives priority to reducing the dif ferences in color between the original as
it appears on the screen and the printed output.
518 Mac OS X Software
Free Layout
ICC Matching Mode
1. Under “Matching Mode” , select ICC Matching Mode .
2. Click the “Matching Method” list, and then select a setting.
Setting
Details
“Perceptual” Gives priority to color hue in color matching suitable for output of
photographic images.
Saturation Gives priority to vividness in color matching.
Colorimetric Gives priority to reducing the dif ferences in color between the original as
it appears on the screen and the printed output.
Colorimetric (No
White-Point Correction)
Performs Colorimetric color matching but without white point correction.
3. Click the “Input Prole” list and select an input prole.
4. Click the “Printer Prole” list and select a printer prole.
Mac OS X Software 519
Free Layout
ColorSync
1. Check that “ColorSync” is selected in “Matching Mode” .
2. Place a checkmark on “Soft Proof” to simulate the output product in Layout Area.
520 Mac OS X Software
Free Layout
Preferences Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select “Preferences” from the “imagePROGRAF Advanced Preview” menu.
Y ou can set the preferences for Free Layout.
“Units”
Set the unit for paper length, margins, and so on.
“Gridlines”
Y ou can input a grid line width value in numerical characters so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.
Note
•Y ou can input between 10.0 and 200.0(mm) (between 0.39 and 7.87(inch)).
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
“Divisions”
Y ou can change the number of divisions of grid lines so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.
Note
•Y ou can input between 1 and 10.
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
“Grid Color”
Select the grid line color .
“Print Object Frames”
Y ou can print the object border .
Note
•If you do not want to print the object border , deselect the “Print Object Frames” check box.
“Object Frame Style”
Y ou can select the object frame style for printing.
The following settings are available for the object frame style.
Setting
Details
“Solid Line” Y ou can print the solid line as the frame style.
“Dotted Line” Y ou can print the dotted line as the frame style.
“Dashed Line” Y ou can print the dashed line as the frame style.
Mac OS X Software 521
Free Layout
Auto Arrange Spacing
Change the object-to-object spacing to be applied in the operation of laying out objects automatically .
Note
•Y ou can input between 0.0 and 100.0(mm) (between 0.00 and 3.94(inch)).
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
522 Mac OS X Software
Free Layout
Page Setup Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select “Page Setup” from the “File” menu.This dialog box provides selections
for setting the media size, orientation and other important features.
“Paper Orientation”
This selects the paper orientation.
The following settings are available for orientation.
Setting
Details
“V ertical” Prints the image and text created with the application software in the
orientation as it is.
“Horizontal” Prints the image and text by rotating sideways 90 degrees from the
orientation as specied in the application.
“Roll Paper Length”
Set the length of one page to print on roll paper .
When you place a checkmark on “Auto Settings” , the one-page length to be printed on roll paper is
automatically set so that the laid-out objects are printed on one page.
Note
•A vailable only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .
•Y ou can input between 203.2 and 18000.0(mm) (between 8.00 and 708.66(inch)).
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
“Order”
Set the object layout order .
The following settings are available for order .
Setting
Details
“Upper Left to Right” The objects are laid out from upper left to right.
“Upper Left to Bottom” The objects are laid out from upper left to bottom.
Note
•When you have selected “Roll Paper Length” > “Auto Settings” and “Paper Orientation” > “V ertical” , you
can choose only “Upper Left to Right” .
•When you have selected “Roll Paper Length” > “Auto Settings” and “Paper Orientation” > “Horizontal” ,
you can choose only “Upper Left to Bottom” .
Mac OS X Software 523
Free Layout
Paper Size
Y ou can select the size of the print media.
Note
•Y ou cannot display this if “Roll Paper” is selected in Paper Source .
Zoom Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select “Zoom” from the “V iew” menu. Y ou can enlarge or reduce the screen
display .
Scaling
Set the magnication for enlargement or reduction of the screen display .
Note
•Y ou can input between 10 and 400.
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking “▼” button.
524 Mac OS X Software
Free Layout
Format Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select “Format” from the “Object” menu after you select an object. Y ou can
rotate, enlarge, or reduce an object.
Note
•When the objects are not selected, you can not select “Format” .
“Rotate”
When you place a checkmark here, you can select “Rotate Right” or “Rotate Left” .
Setting
Details
“Rotate Right” Rotates the object 90 degrees clockwise.
“Rotate Left” Rotates the object 90 degrees counterclockwise.
Note
•When several objects are selected, you cannot select “Rotate” .
Scaling
Y ou can input the value for enlargement or reduction of the obeject in numerical characters.
Note
•Y ou can input between 25 and 400.
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
“Object Size”
Y ou can conrm the object size.
Note
•When several objects are selected, you cannot display “Object Size” .
Mac OS X Software 525
Free Layout
Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page
Y ou can lay out and print a multiple-le document on one page.
1. From the application software’ s “File” menu, select the printer setup menu to open the “Print”
dialog box.
Note
•Normally , select “Print” from the “File” menu.
2. Click on “Free Layout” in the “Page Setup” panel to attach a checkmark.
3. In the “Print” dialog box, select the pages to print and the number of copies, and click the “Print”
button.
Free Layout starts, laying out the document created with application software in the layout
area as an object.
4. Leaving Free Layout running, open other les with the application software and repeat the
above steps.
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application
Programs on One Page
Y ou can lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.
1. From the application software’ s “File” menu, select the printer setup menu to open the “Print”
dialog box.
Note
•Normally , select “Print” from the “File” menu.
2. Click on “Free Layout” in the “Page Setup” panel to attach a checkmark.
3. In the “Print” dialog box, select the pages to print and the number of copies, and click the “Print”
button.
Free Layout starts, laying out the document created with application software in the layout
area as an object.
4. Leaving Free Layout running, open the les with other application software and repeat the
above steps.
526 Mac OS X Software
Free Layout
Selecting an Object
When an object is selected, a select box (blue border) appears around the object.
Note
•T o select an object, click that object.
•T o select multiple successive objects, click them while holding down the shift key .
•T o select multiple arbitrary objects, click them while holding down the command key .
•T o select all objects, select “Select All” from the “Edit” menu.
Mac OS X Software 527
Free Layout
Changing the Object Size
Y ou can change the object size by means of mouse operation or by specifying a scaling value.
Note
•The vertical-to-horizontal ratio remains unchanged when the object is enlarged or reduced.
Resizing by means of mouse operation
1. Select an object.
2. Place the pointer at a corner of the selection box around the object to show the arrow handle,
and drag this handle to change the object size.
Resizing by specifying a scaling value
1. Select an object.
2. Open the Format Dialog Box . (→P .525)
3. Use Scaling to set the magnication for enlargement or reduction. Y ou either enter numbers
directly .
Note
•Y ou can input between 25 and 400.
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
4. Click the “OK” button.
528 Mac OS X Software
Free Layout
Moving an Object
Y ou can move the object position.
1. Select an object.
2. Place the pointer inside the selection box of the object to show the crosshair handle, and drag it
to move the object.
Rotating an Object
Y ou can rotate the object.
1. Select an object.
2. Select “Rotate Left” or “Rotate Right” from the toolbar .
Alternatively , you may click on the “Rotate” check box in the Format Dialog Box (→P .525) then
select “Rotate Right” or “Rotate Left” , and click the “OK” button.
Note
•When several objects are selected, you cannot select “Rotate” .
Mac OS X Software 529
Free Layout
Laying out Objects Automatically
Click “Auto Arrange” in the tool bar . This automatically lays out objects. Alternatively , you may select “Auto
Arrange Object” from the “Object” menu.
Note
•The object layout order varies depending on the “Order” setting on the Page Setup Dialog Box . (→P .523)
530 Mac OS X Software
Free Layout
Aligning Objects
Y ou can align objects systematically .
1. Select multiple objects.
2. Select the align menu from the “Object” menu.
“Align T op”
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the top.
“Center V ertically”
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the vertical center .
“Align Bottom”
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the bottom.
Mac OS X Software 531
Free Layout
“Align Left”
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the left.
“Center Horizontally”
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the horizontal center .
“Align Right”
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the right.
532 Mac OS X Software
Free Layout
Changing the Object Overlapping Order
Y ou can change the object overlapping order .
1. Select an object.
2. Select the overlapping order menu from the “Object” menu.
“Bring to Front”
Moves the object to the frontmost position.
“Send to Back”
Moves the object to the backmost position.
Mac OS X Software 533
Free Layout
“Bring Forward”
Moves the object one position to the front.
“Send Backward”
Moves the object one position to the back.
534 Mac OS X Software
Free Layout
Pasting a Copied or Cut Object
1. Click “Copy” or “Cut” from the toolbar .
Alternatively , you may select “Copy” or “Cut” from the “Edit” menu.
2. Click “Paste” from the toolbar .
Alternatively , you may select “Paste” from the “Edit” menu.
Note
•The copied or cut object is laid out at the end of the page.
Mac OS X Software 535
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
The main features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy are as follows.
•Allows the document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER to be automatically enlarged and printed.
•Y ou can perform basic printer settings such as printer selection, media type and output prole selection,
and matching methods, in addition to borderless printing and enlargement/reduction process without
growing through the printer driver .
Note
•The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print
output to dif fer from the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy settings.
Operating Environment
Y ou can use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy in the following environments.
•Compatible Operating System
Mac OS X (10.3.9 to 10.5)
•Software that requires installation
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver
536 Mac OS X Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Follow the procedure below to start the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
1. Open the “Utility” panel of the “Print” dialog box.
Note
•Y our printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.
2. Click the “Set” button in “Congure Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” to open the “Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” dialog box.
Note
•If you click on the “Monitor Hot Folder Constantly” check box in the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy” dialog box, the icon of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility will appear on the Dock
when starting OS X thereafter .
•Y ou can also start the utility directly by clicking on the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .app”
icon in “Applications” > “Canon Utilities” > “iR Enlargement Copy” .
Mac OS X Software 537
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box
The explanation below is on the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” dialog box.
Note
•For the step to open the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” dialog box, see “Starting Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy”. (→P .537)
“Delete les in the folder”
From the Hot Folder list, select a hot folder and click the “Delete” button to delete only les in the hot folder .
“Delete the entire folders, as well as items in the list above”
From the Hot Folder list, select a hot folder and click the “Delete” button to delete the hot folder .
“Delete” Button
Select “Delete les in the folder” or “Delete the entire folders, as well as items in the list above” and click this
button to delete the hot folder or only les in the hot folder .
“Add” Button
Click the button to open the “Destination Selection” dialog box so that you can add a hot folder .
“Edit” Button
From the Hot Folder list, select a hot folder and click this button to open the “Add/Edit Hot Folder” dialog
box that allows you to edit the hot folder .
“Monitor Hot Folder Constantly”
If you click on the check box, the icon of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility will appear on
the Dock when starting OS X thereafter .
538 Mac OS X Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Hot Folder
Hot folder refers to a folder used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
•When transferred to the PC’ s hot folder , the document data scanned with the Color imageRUNNER is
printed in enlarged size from the printer according to the print conditions set in the hot folder .
•Y ou can create a new hot folder , edit or delete an existing one, and set print conditions at will.
Note
•Y ou can create up to 10 hot folders.
Creating a New Hot Folder
1. Open the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” dialog box.
Note
•For the step to open the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” dialog box, see “Starting Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy”. (→P .537)
2. Click the “Add” button in “Enlarged Copy Settings” to open the “Destination Selection” dialog box.
3. From the printer list in “Destination” , select the printer of destination.
Mac OS X Software 539
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
4. Click the “OK” button to open the “Add/Edit Hot Folder” dialog box.
5. In “Name” , enter the name to display in the Hot Folder list.
6. In “Hot Folder” , enter the Hot Folder name.
7. Click the “OK” button. The created Hot Folder is listed in the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy” dialog box.
8. Click the “Close” button to close the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” dialog box.
9. From the “Apple” Menu, open the “Sharing” dialog box for “System Preferences” .
10. Select the check box labeled “File Sharing” , and click the “Options” button.
1 1. Select the check box labeled “Share les and folders using FTP” and “Share les and folders
using SMB” to make shared settings.
Note
•Y ou can create up to 10 hot folders.
540 Mac OS X Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Editing a Hot Folder (Setting Print Conditions)
1. Open the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” dialog box.
2. Select the Hot Folder from the Hot Folder list.
3. From “Enlarged Copy Settings” , click “Edit” button to open the “Add/Edit Hot Folder” dialog box.
4. Make the necessary settings in the Paper Settings Panel . (→P .544)
Mac OS X Software 541
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
5. Make the necessary settings in the Output Settings Panel . (→P .549)
6. Make the necessary settings in the Color Settings Panel . (→P .551)
7. Click the “OK” button to close the “Add/Edit Hot Folder” dialog box.
8. From the “Apple” Menu, open the “Sharing” dialog box for “System Preferences” .
9. Select the check box labeled “File Sharing” , and click the “Options” button.
10. Select the check box labeled “Share les and folders using FTP” and “Share les and folders
using SMB” to make shared settings.
Note
•If you’ve made shared settings when you created a new Hot Folder , you do not need to execute
steps 8 to 10.
542 Mac OS X Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Deleting a Hot Folder
1. Open the “Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy” dialog box.
2. Select the Hot Folder you want to delete from the Hot Folder list.
3. Select “Delete the entire folders, as well as items in the list above” , and then click the “Delete”
button.
4. Read the messag,e and then click the “OK” button.
Note
•Select “Delete les in the folder” to delete only les in the hot folder .
Mac OS X Software 543
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Setting the Print Parameters
Y ou can set the print conditions in the setting panels within the “Add/Edit Hot Folder” dialog box.
The settings available on each panel are as follows.
•Paper Settings Panel (→P .544)
•Output Settings Panel (→P .549)
•Color Settings Panel (→P .551)
Paper Settings Panel
“Easy Settings” / “Advanced Settings”
T wo modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs.
The settings available on each mode are as follows.
•Easy Settings (→P .546)
•Advanced Settings (→P .548)
“Media T ype”
This allows you to select the media type.
Note
•Always select media type that is actually set in the printer . When the media you chose is dif ferent from
the media set in the printer , you may not receive the desired print results.
Paper Source
Y ou can select the paper source.
The following settings are available for paper source.
Setting
Details
“Manual” Select for manual paper feed printing.
“Roll Paper” Select to print on roll paper .
544 Mac OS X Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
“Roll Paper W idth”
This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer .
Note
•A vailable only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .
Automatic Cutting
Y ou can set the printer to cut roll paper automatically or print a guideline for cutting.
The following settings are available for automatic cutting.
Setting
Details
“Printer Default” The value set on the printer operation panel takes priority .
“None” Each page is not cut after it is printed and printing continues without
interruption.
Print Cut Guideline A print cut guideline is printed after each page and printing continues
without interruption.
Note
•A vailable only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .
“Copies”
Y ou can input the number of print copies in numerical characters.
Note
•The maximum value is 999.
•Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
Mac OS X Software 545
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Easy Settings
Y ou can easily select the best settings for the print job by just selecting an item from the print target list that
matches the content of the document.
“Print T arget”
Y ou can easily select the best settings for the print job simply .
If you select each “Print T arget” item the corresponding comment for that item is displayed below the list.
Setting
Details
“Default Settings” Suitable for printing normal documents that contain a mixture of text,
photographs, and graphics.
“Of ce Document” Suitable for printing handouts as well as general of ce documents for
which print clarity is key .
“Poster” The best setting for posters.Prints using vivid and high impact colors.
“CAD (Color Line Drawing)” Prints the ne lines of CAD drawings and other such documents sharp
and clear .
CAD (B/W Line Drawing) Suitable for printing CAD drawings with sharp, dark lines.
“Perspective, GIS” Suitable for attractive printing of 3D-CAD drawings, perspective drawings,
and GIS drawings including maps.
“Photo (Color)” Suitable for printing photographic images captured with a digital camera.
“Faithful Color Reproduction” Prints by faithfully reproducing the colors of the original image.
“Custom Settings” Suitable for printing documents for which Advanced Settings have been
specied.
Note
•The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.
546 Mac OS X Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
“Print Quality”
Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.
The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.
Setting
Details
Print Quality “Highest” / “High” / “Standard” / “Draft”
Resolution “1200dpi” / “600dpi” / “300dpi”
Note
•The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.
•Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft , however , print quality is
higher .
•Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High , however , print quality is lower .
Mac OS X Software 547
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Advanced Settings
Presents detailed settings for the print priority , the print quality , and other items so you can select the values for
these settings yourself.
“Print Priority”
Select a print quality mode that is appropriate for the print job.
Setting
Details
“Image” This mode achieves the best results for printing photographic images and
illustrations.
“Line Drawing” This mode is best for printing CAD drawings with ne lines or wall
newssheet or other documents that contain large amounts of text.
However , you may not achieve the quality you expect with printing
photographs or other images with many lled areas. For these types of
jobs, select “Image” .
“Of ce Document” Prints common of ce documents, such as proposals, memos for
distribution, etc., so they are easy to read.
Note
•The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.
“Print Quality”
Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.
The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.
Setting
Details
Print Quality “Highest” / “High” / “Standard” / “Draft”
Resolution “1200dpi” / “600dpi” / “300dpi”
Note
•The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.
•Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft , however , print quality is
higher .
•Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High , however , print quality is lower .
548 Mac OS X Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Output Settings Panel
“Enlarged/Reduced Printing”
Select the method for enlarged/reduced printing.
The following settings are available for enlarged/reduced printing.
Setting
Details
Fit Paper Size Enlarges/reduces the whole page automatically to t the media size
selected for output. Select the media size to print from Paper Size .
“Fit Roll Paper Width” Enlarges/reduces the whole page automatically to t the width of the roll
paper with the page width.
*Make sure that the width of the roll paper in the printer is set correctly for
“Roll Paper Width” in the Paper Settings panel.
*Displayed only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .
Scaling Enlarges/reduces the whole page by the scaling rate as specied. Input the
scaling value in numerical characters. Y ou can specify a range between 5
and 600%.
*Y ou can change the numbers by clicking either “▲” button or “▼” button.
*Although Scaling can be set to make the image larger than the media
size, the part that does not t in the media cannot be printed.
*This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in “Borderless Printing” .
“Borderless Printing”
Y ou can print the media without margins on all sides when the roll paper with the specic width and the
specic media type is used.
Note
•A vailable only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .
Paper Size
Y ou can select the size of the print media.
Note
•This is not displayed when “Fit Roll Paper Width” is set in “Enlarged/Reduced Printing” .
Mac OS X Software 549
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
“Print Centered”
Select this feature to print the image in the center of a cut sheet or to print left and right margins evenly
from the edges of roll paper .
Note
•This feature is useful when you print the document enlarged or reduced with Scaling as well. When an
image is scaled, it is always enlarged or reduced in reference to a starting point in the upper left corner
of the page. If the image is reduced, the bottom and right margins are enlarged and the top and left
margins remain unchanged. At that point, you can set all margins evenly with this feature.
“No Spaces at T op or Bottom”
Y ou can set the printer to print without any empty area when the print data contains empty area at the top or
bottom. Since the printer does not feed paper over the empty area, you can save paper .
Note
•A vailable only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .
“Rotate Page”
Select the method for rotating page.
The following settings are available for rotating page.
Setting
Details
“Rotate Right 90 Degrees” Rotates the portrait page right 90 degrees and print in landscape
orientation. When the rotated page can t in the width of roll paper , the
page is rotated automatically , and when it can not t in the width of roll
paper , the page is not rotated.
*When “Fit Roll Paper Width” is selected under “Enlarged/Reduced
Printing” , then the image is enlarged or reduced after rotating to t the
width of the roll paper .
“Rotate Left 90 Degrees” Rotates the portrait page left 90 degrees and print in landscape orientation.
When the rotated page can t in the width of roll paper , the page is rotated
automatically , and when it can not t in the width of roll paper , the page is
not rotated.
*When “Fit Roll Paper Width” is selected under “Enlarged/Reduced
Printing” , then the image is enlarged or reduced after rotating to t the
width of the roll paper .
“Rotate 180 degrees” Allows you to rotate the image 180 degrees from the vertical to the right.
Note
•A vailable only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .
“Output Method” Button
Click the button to open the “Output Method” dialog box.
In this dialog box, you can specify the object output method.
Note
•T o print after saving jobs in the temporary storage space, select “Save data before printing” .
550 Mac OS X Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Color Settings Panel
“Color Mode”
Y ou can select a color mode to suit the print job.
Setting
Details
“Color” Enables color printing.
“Monochrome” Disables color printing and converts image from continuous color to
grayscaled monochrome.
“Color (CAD)” Prints lines in the best color possible so they are easy to see.
“Monochrome Bitmap” Prints all colors other than white in black.
“Monochrome (BK ink)” Select to print all lines with black ink.
Note
•The availability of settings depends on the print priority and media type selections.
“Mode”
Under “Mode” , select the matching mode.
Setting
Details
Driver Matching Mode
(→P .552)
Independent driver color matching is performed.
ICC Matching Mode (→P .553) Color matching using ColorGear is performed.
ColorSync (→P .554) Color matching using CMM from Mac OS is performed.
“No Correction” No color matching is performed. Select this option when you want to
perform color matching in the software application.
Mac OS X Software 551
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Driver Matching Mode
1. Under “Mode” , select Driver Matching Mode .
2. Click “Matching Method” list, and then select a setting.
Setting
Details
“Auto” Automatically selects the best color matching method for each Image,
Graphics, T ext.
“Perceptual” Gives priority to color hue in color matching suitable for output of
photographic images.
Saturation Gives priority to vividness in color matching.
Colorimetric Gives priority to reducing the dif ferences in color between the original as
it appears on the screen and the printed output.
552 Mac OS X Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
ICC Matching Mode
1. Under “Mode” , select ICC Matching Mode .
2. Click “Method” list, and then select a setting.
Setting
Details
“Perceptual” Gives priority to color hue in color matching suitable for output of
photographic images.
“Saturation” Gives priority to vividness in color matching.
Colorimetric Gives priority to reducing the dif ferences in color between the original as
it appears on the screen and the printed output.
Colorimetric (No
White-Point Correction)
Performs Colorimetric color matching but without white point correction.
3. Click the “Input Prole” list, and then select an input prole.
Note
•T o match the color on the printing, select the input prole for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy of the Color imageRUNNER type in use.
4. Click the “Printer Prole” list, and then select a printer prole.
Mac OS X Software 553
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
ColorSync
1. Under “Mode” , select “ColorSync” .
2. Click the “Printer Prole” list, and then select a printer prole.
Note
•A vailable when using Mac OS X 10.3.9-10.4.
554 Mac OS X Software
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (Mac OS X)
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically .
Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed
automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder .
This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.
T o use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy , rst complete these settings in the following order .
1. Register a hot folder on your computer .
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER
and complete the settings for enlargement copy .
2. Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder .
After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color
imageRUNNER.
Registering a hot folder on your computer
Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. Y ou can
specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to
the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.
1. T o display the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, either double-click the
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .app icon after navigating to Canon Utilities - “iR
Enlargement Copy” in the Applications folder or click CSet in the Utility pane
2. In Enlarged Copy Settings , click Add or Edit and either create or modify the hot folder .
For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
Mac OS X Software 555
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder . It is easy to send scanned
originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the
Color imageRUNNER.
For instructions on assigning scanning and sending settings to the Favorites button, refer to the Color
imageRUNNER manual.
Scanning the original and print an enlargement
Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer .
For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
1. Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.
2. Press Send to display the screen for transmission.
3. Press Favorites , and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder .
4. Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all
originals, press Done on the touch-panel display .
Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the
conditions you specied for the folder .
Note
•For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy , see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
556 Mac OS X Software
Printmonitor
Printmonitor
The Features of imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
“imagePROGRAF Printmonitor” is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.
•Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor .
•Y ou can check the status of print jobs, cancel jobs, and manage them as needed.
•If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately .
•Y ou can also set up automatic email notication of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you
designate in advance.
Note
•If the status of the desired printer is not shown in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor , select the printer
again as follows.
1. Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network or to a local port.
2. In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer . After the printer is detected, the
printer status is shown.
3. If information about the printer is not shown in step 2, choose Search Printer in the Printer menu.
Printer names listed in the Printer menu are updated with the printers that are now detected.
4. In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer . After the printer is detected, the
printer status is shown.
Mac OS X Software 557
Printmonitor
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
Y ou can use the Driver Panel in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor for operations such as pausing and canceling
print jobs.
Preempting Other Jobs
If you select a print job and click the button, the selected job is printed ahead of the job that currently
precedes it in the print queue.
Pausing/Resuming Print Jobs
Selecting a print job and clicking the button pauses printing of the selected job.
T o resume printing of a paused print job, select the print job and click the button.
Note
•Once all the print data for a print job has been sent to the printer , the job can no longer be
paused/resumed.
Canceling Print Jobs
Selecting a print job and clicking the button cancels printing of the selected job.
Note
•Y ou cannot cancel other users’ print jobs.
558 Mac OS X Software
Printmonitor
Printing Held Jobs
Printing of the job with a “Status” of “Holding” is paused because the paper specied by the driver does
not match the paper currently loaded in the printer .
Use the procedure below to print the held job.
1. Select the held job and click the “Replace Paper” button.
2. Replace the paper in the printer with the correct paper .
Note
•T o continue printing without changing the paper in the printer , select the held job and click “Continue
to print” button.
Mac OS X Software 559
Network Setting
Network Setting
Network Setting
Network Environment
System requirements
The system requirements, which vary depending on your network, are as follows.
•Printing over a TCP/IP network (when using IPv4)
•Compatible operating systems
•Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)
•Windows XP (Home Edition or Professional)
•Windows Server 2003 (Standard Edition)
•Windows V ista (Home Basic/Business/Ultimate)
•Windows Server 2008 (Standard Edition or Enterprise Edition)
•Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
•Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
•Windows V ista x64
•Windows Server 2008 x64
•Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later
•Unix (Solaris 9)
•Unix (Red Hat 9)
•Compatible computer
•A computer that runs one of the above operating systems
•Printing over a TCP/IP network (when using IPv6)
•Compatible operating systems
•Windows V ista (Home Basic/Business/Ultimate)
•Windows Server 2008 (Standard Edition or Enterprise Edition)
•Windows V ista x64
•Windows Server 2008 x64
•Mac OS X 10.3.9 or later
Note
•When using IPv6, you must specify IPv6 on the Control Panel or in RemoteUI . For instructions, see
“Conguring TCP/IPv6 Network Settings”. (→P .568) or see “Conguring the Printer ’ s TCP/IP Network
Settings”. (→P .570)
•The imagePROGRAF printer driver is supported in Mac OS X 10.3.9 or later .
560 Network Setting
Network Setting
•Printing over an AppleT alk network
•Compatible operating systems
•Mac OS X 10.2.8-10.4
•Compatible computer
•A computer that runs one of the above operating systems
Note
•The printer cannot be used over a LocalT alk network.
•Compatible with EtherT alk Phase 2.
•The imagePROGRAF printer driver is not compatible with AppleT alk.
•Printing over a NetW are network
•Compatible servers
•Novell NetW are 4.2/5.1/6.0
•Compatible clients
•Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)
•Windows XP (Professional)
•Compatible computer
•A computer that runs one of the above operating systems
Note
•In NetW are 6.0, iPrint is not supported.
Network Setting 561
Network Setting
Network Environment
After conrming what type of network environment you will connect the printer to, set up the printer and
computers as needed.
•Example of a Windows network
In Windows networks, print over TCP/IP .
Note
•NetBIOS is not supported.
•Example of a Macintosh network
In Macintosh networks, print over AppleT alk (EtherT alk) or TCP/IP , using Bonjour (Zeroconf) functions.
Note
•The imagePROGRAF printer driver is not compatible with AppleT alk.
•Example of a NetW are network
Note
•Even if there is a NetW are server in your network environment, you can use it in conjunction with TCP/IP
or AppleT alk. In this case, complete the settings for each protocol you will use.
562 Network Setting
Network Setting
Conguring the IP Address on the Printer
Y ou must congure the printer ’ s IP address before using the printer in a TCP/IP network.
The printer ’ s IP address is congured automatically when you install the printer driver following the
instructions in the Setup Guide .
Congure the IP address by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility , the printer Control Panel , or ARP or
PING commands, if the IP address is changed, or if you change the printer connection mode to a network
connection. For details on conguring the IP address, refer to the following topics.
•Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (→P .564)
•Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel (→P .565)
•Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands (→P .567)
Important
•If you use a DHCP server for automatic assignment of the printer ’ s IP address, printing may no longer
be possible after the printer is turned of f and on. This is because an IP address dif ferent from before
has been assigned. Thus, when using DHCP server functions, consult your network administrator and
congure the settings in one of the following ways.
•Congure the setting for dynamic DNS updating
In RemoteUI , activate the setting Enable DNS Dynamic Update . ( → P .570)
•Congure the setting for assignment of the same IP address each time the printer starts up
Note
•W e recommend conguring the printer ’ s IP address even if you will use the printer in networks other
than TCP/IP networks. Conguring the printer ’ s IP address enables you to use RemoteUI to congure
the network settings and manage the printer with a web browser .
For details on RemoteUI , see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P .569)
Network Setting 563
Network Setting
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility
On a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the
printer to congure the printer ’ s IP address. This topic describes how to congure the IP address using
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .
Important
•T o congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator”
account. W e recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.
•For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility , see “Installing imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility”. (→P .452)
When specifying an IPv4 IP address
1. Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.
2. In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to congure.
3. Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
4. Select the IPv4 tab.
5. In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual .
6. Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.
7. Click OK after the Conrmation message is displayed.
8. Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .
Note
•T o congure the IP address automatically , choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select
DHCP ,BOOTP , or RARP .
•Y ou can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway .
When specifying an IPv6 IP address
1. Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.
2. In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to congure.
3. Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
4. Select the IPv6 tab.
5. In IPv6 , select On .
6. When there is an IPv6-compatible router in the network environment, select On in Stateless
Address .
Additionally , when there is an DHCPv6-compatible server in the network environment, select
On in DHCPv6 .
Note
•When there is no IPv6-compatible router or DHCPv6-compatible server , select On in Manual and
enter the IPv6 Address and Prex Length .
7. Click Set .
8. Click OK after the Conrmation message is displayed.
9. Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .
564 Network Setting
Network Setting
Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control
Panel
This topic describes how to congure the printer ’ s IP address on the Control Panel .
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Interface Setup , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select TCP/IP , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select IPv4 , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select IPv4 Settings , and then press the OK button.
7. Press ▲or ▼to select IP Address , and then press the OK button.
8. After you press ◄or ►to select the input eld, numerical input is possible.
9. Press the ▲or ▼button to enter the value.
Note
•Pressing the ▲button increases the number by 1. The maximum value is “9,” after which “0” is
displayed.
•Pressing the ▼button decreases the number by 1. The minimum value is “0,” after which “9” is
displayed.
•Hold down ▲or ▼to increase or decrease the value continuously .
•Make sure the IP address you enter for the printer is not the same as any computer IP address
in your network.
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 to complete the settings, and then press the OK button.
1 1. Press the Menu button.
If you have changed the settings, a conrmation message is displayed. Press ▲or ▼to select
Y es , and then press the OK button.
Network Setting 565
Network Setting
Important
•Be sure to complete step 1 1. This will activate the values you have entered.
•Y ou can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway on the Control Panel .
Note
•If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.
566 Network Setting
Network Setting
Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING
Commands
This topic describes how to congure the IP address using ARP and PING commands.
T o use the ARP and PING commands, you will need to know the printer ’ s MAC address. Y ou can conrm
the MAC address on the Control Panel .
1. Check the printer ’ s MAC address.
Y ou can conrm the MAC address on the Control Panel as follows:
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj. tab
( ).
2. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Interface Setup , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select Ethernet Driver , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select MAC Address , and then press the OK button.
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
•Y ou can investigate the MAC address by printing an interface setting report.
( → P .65)
2. In Windows, open a command prompt, or in Mac OS X, start T erminal.
3. Execute the following command to add entries to the ARP table for managing IP addresses
and corresponding MAC addresses.
arp -s [IP address] [the printer ’ s MAC address you have veried]
Example: arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 00-1E-8F-xx-xx-xx
Note
•In Mac OS X when using T erminal, enter the arp command in the format “arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
00:1E:8F:xx:xx:xx.” For details, refer to the help le for the command line.
4. Execute the following command to send the IP address to the printer and congure it.
ping [IP address as specied in the ARP command] -l 479
Example: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx -l 479
Note
•In “-l,” the “l” is the letter “l” .
•In Mac OS X when using T erminal, enter the ping command in the format “ping -s 479
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.” For details, refer to the help le for the command line.
Network Setting 567
Network Setting
Note
•The subnet mask and default gateway are set to “0.0.0.0.” Use RemoteUI to change the subnet mask
and default gateway to match your network settings.
For details on RemoteUI , see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P .569)
Conguring TCP/IPv6 Network Settings
When printing in a TCP/IPv6 network, you must congure the TCP/IPv6 settings on the Control Panel .
Follow the steps below to congure the TCP/IPv6 network settings.
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Interface Setup , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select TCP/IP , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select IPv6 , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select IPv6 Support , and then press the OK button.
7. Press ▲or ▼to select On , and then press the OK button.
Important
•Once you set IPv6 Support to On , the IPv6 StlessAddrs setting takes ef fect.
•Y ou can also congure IPv6 StlessAddrs and DHCPv6 from the printer Control Panel .
568 Network Setting
Network Setting
Using RemoteUI
Enter the printer ’ s IP address in a web browser to display the RemoteUI page. After you log on to RemoteUI from
the page, you can check and change the status of the printer and print jobs, and congure network settings.
T o access RemoteUI , start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to
display the RemoteUI page.
http:// “printer IP address or name” /
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
For details on conguring printer settings for networks, refer to the following topics.
•Conguring the Printer ’ s TCP/IP Network Settings (→P .570)
•Conguring the Printer ’ s AppleT alk Network Settings (→P .574)
•Conguring the Printer ’ s NetW are Network Settings (→P .575)
•Specifying Printer-Related Information (→P .577)
Note
•RemoteUI also of fers many other features. Y ou can display the ink levels, check error messages and
other status information, and cancel print jobs.
•By factory default, the English screen is displayed. T o change the display language, select the desired
language under Language before logging on in administrator mode.
Important
•Use Netscape Navigator 6.0 or later , Internet Explorer 5.01 or later , or Firefox 1.5 or later as a web
browser . In Mac OS X, you can also use Safari 1.32 or later or Safari 2.03 or later .
•Access is not possible via a proxy server . In environments where a proxy server is used, add the
printer ’ s IP address to Exceptions (addresses accessed without a proxy server) in the web browser
proxy server settings. (Settings may vary depending on the network environment.)
•Enable JavaScript and cookies in the web browser .
•If you access RemoteUI with the printer name instead of its IP address, make sure the DNS settings are
correctly congured.
Network Setting 569
Network Setting
Conguring the Printer ’ s TCP/IP Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the TCP/IP network settings.
When using an IPv4 IP address
1. Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http:// “printer IP address or name” /
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2. Select Administrator Mode and click Logon .
3. If a password has been set on the printer , enter the password.
4. Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
5. Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the TCP/IPv4 group to display the Edit TCP/IP Protocol
Settings page.
6. Refer to the TCP/IP Settings Items table to complete the settings.
TCP/IP Settings Items
Item Details
Default Setting
Use DHCP Activate this setting to use DHCP for
conguring the IP address.
Of f
Use BOOTP Activate this setting to use BOOTP for
conguring the IP address.
Of f
Use RARP Activate this setting to use RARP for
conguring the IP address.
Of f
Enable DNS Dynamic Update Activate this setting to perform DNS
server registration automatically .
Of f
Use Zeroconf Function Activate this setting to use Bonjour . On
IP Address Specify the printer ’ s IP address. 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask Specify the printer ’ s subnet mask. 0.0.0.0
Gateway Address Specify the printer ’ s default gateway . 0.0.0.0
LPD Printing Activate this setting to use LDP Printing. On
IPP Printing Activate this setting to use IPP Printing. On
IPP Printer URI Specify the URI of the printer used for
IPP printing using up to 252 characters.
When using a standard Windows port for
IPP printing, enter an URL which should
not exceed 255 bytes for all characters
for “http://"IP address"/IPP-URI.”
printer
RA W Printing Activate this setting to use Raw Printing. On
RA W Mode Bi-direction Activate this setting to use Raw mode
bidirectional communication.
Of f
FTP Printing Activate this setting to use FTP Printing. On
Use Discovery Activate this setting to use Discovery . On
Scope Enter the search range. default
570 Network Setting
Network Setting
Item Details
Default Setting
SMTP Server Address Specify the SMTP server ’ s IP address.
Y ou can also specify the SMTP server
domain name, if desired.
0.0.0.0
Primary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the primary
DNS server .
0.0.0.0
Secondary DNS Server
Address
Specify the IP address of the secondary
DNS server .
0.0.0.0
DNS Host Name Specify the printer host name, up to
63 characters (1-63 characters). Use
single-byte letters, numbers, and “-”
(hyphens). Do not use numbers or “-”
for the rst character or “-” for the last
character .
NB-18GBxxxxxxxxxxxx
DNS Domain Name Specify the printer domain name, up
to 63 characters. Use single-byte
letters, numbers, “-” (hyphens), and “.”
(periods). Do not use numbers, “-” , or
“.” for the rst character , or “-” or “.” for
the last character .
blank
Multicast DNS Service Name Specify the printer ’ s Multicast DNS
service name. (1-63 characters)
This name will be displayed when
Bonjour functions are used.
Canon iPFxxxx (xxxxxx)
7. Click OK to display the Network page.
Note
•If you specify to congure the IP address using DHCP , BOOTP , or RARP , there must be a server that
supports such protocol running in the network.
•If you specify to congure the IP address using DHCP , BOOTP , or RARP , the IP address obtained by this
method is used rst. If you cannot obtain the IP address, the address specied in IP Address is used.
•It takes up to two minutes to determine whether DHCP , BOOTP , or RARP are available. W e recommend
clearing check boxes of options you will not use.
•If you are using a DNS server , select Enable DNS Dynamic Update and enter the IP Address for DNS
servers, DNS host name, and DNS domain name in Primary DNS Server Address ,Secondary DNS
Server Address ,DNS Host Name , and DNS Domain Name , respectively .
Network Setting 571
Network Setting
When using an IPv6 IP address
1. Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http:// “printer IP address or name” /
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2. Select Administrator Mode and click Logon .
3. If a password has been set on the printer , enter the password.
4. Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
5. Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the TCP/IPv6 group to display the Edit TCP/IP Protocol
Settings page.
6. Refer to the TCP/IP Settings Items table to complete the settings.
TCP/IP Settings Items
Item Details
Default Setting
Use IPv6 Activate to enable IPv6. Of f
Use a stateful address Activate when using a DHCP server to
acquire the IP address.
Of f
Use a stateless address Activate when using an IPv6-compatible
router to acquire the IP address.
On
Use a manual address Activate when conguring the IP
address manually .
Of f
IP Address Enter the printer ’ s IP address. blank
Prex Length Enter the IP address prex length. blank
Default Router
Address
Enter the default router address. blank
Prex Length Enter the prex length of the default
router address.
blank
Primary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the primary
DNS server .
blank
Secondary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the secondary
DNS server .
blank
Use the same host name and
domain name as IPv4
Activate when using the same DNS host
and domain names as for IPv4.
Of f
DNS Host Name Specify the printer host name, up to
63 characters (1-4 characters). Use
single-byte letters, numbers, and “-”
(hyphens). Do not use numbers or “-”
for the rst character or “-” for the last
character .
NB-18GBip6xxxxxx
DNS Domain
Name
Specify the printer domain name, up
to 63 characters. Use single-byte
letters, numbers, “-” (hyphens), and “.”
(periods). Do not use numbers, “-” , or
“.” for the rst character , or “-” or “.” for
the last character .
blank
572 Network Setting
Network Setting
Item Details
Default Setting
Perform dynamic updating of
stateful addresses
Activate when assigning a stateful
address dynamically .
Of f
Dynamically update the stateless
address
Activate when assigning a stateless
address dynamically .
Of f
Dynamically update the manual
address
Activate when assigning a manual
address dynamically .
Of f
7. Click OK to display the Network page.
Network Setting 573
Network Setting
Conguring the Printer ’ s AppleT alk Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the AppleT alk network settings.
1. Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http:// “printer IP address or name” /
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2. Select Administrator Mode and click Logon .
3. If a password has been set on the printer , enter the password.
4. Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
5. Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the AppleT alk group to display the Edit AppleT alk
Protocol Settings page.
6. Refer to the AppleT alk Settings Items table to complete the settings.
AppleT alk Settings Items
Item Details
Default Setting
Phase T ype Specify whether to use AppleT alk.
If you will use AppleT alk, choose
Phase 2 .
If you will not use AppleT alk,
choose Disabled .
Disabled
Name (*1) Specify the object name used by
AppleT alk (in up to 31 single-byte
or 15 double-byte characters).
However , do not use the following
single-byte characters: @, *, :,
and =.
Canon NB-18GB (xxxxxx)
Zone (*2) Specify the printer zone name, up
to 31 single-byte characters.
However , do not use the following
single-byte characters: Also avoid
using “*” (which represents the
default zone) in the middle of a
string.
*
*1: The object name you have specied in Name is displayed in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center )
in Mac OS X 10.2.8-10.4. If you use multiple printers in the same zone, assign a unique name to
each printer . By default, the network interface name is “Canon NB-18GB (xxxxxx).” (Here, xxxxxx is
the last six digits of the printer ’ s MAC address.)
*2: If zones have been created on the network, enter the name of the printer ’ s zone. If there are
no zones, leave the asterisk “*” entry (for the default zone) as it is. If you enter a network zone
name that does not match created zones, the printer will not be detected by Macintosh computers.
Consult your network administrator for information on zone names.
7. Click OK to display the Network page.
574 Network Setting
Network Setting
Conguring the Printer ’ s NetW are Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the NetW are network settings.
1. Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http:// “printer IP address or name” /
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2. Select Administrator Mode and click Logon .
3. If a password has been set on the printer , enter the password.
4. Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
5. Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetW are group to display the Edit NetW are Protocol
Settings page.
6. Refer to the NetW are Settings Items table to complete the settings.
NetW are Settings Items
Item Details
Default Setting
Frame T ype Specify the type of frame to
use in NetW are.
Disabled
NCP Burst Mode Activate this setting to use
NCP Burst Mode.
This mode supports fast data
transfer when printing in queue
server mode. Normally , leave
the setting On.
On
Print Application Choose the print service.
•Bindery PServer
•RPrinter
•NDS PServer
•NPrinter
NDS PServer
Packet Signature Select If Requested by Server
to use packet signature.
If Requested by Server
Bindery
PServer
File Server Name Specify the name of a le
server that has a NetW are print
server .
(0-47 characters)
-
Print Server Name Specify the name of a NetW are
print server .
(0-47 characters)
-
Print Server Password Set a password for the print
server .
(0-20 characters)
-
Polling Interval Specify the interval to conrm
jobs.
(1-15 seconds)
5
RPrinter Print Server Name Specify the name of a NetW are
print server .
(0-47 characters)
-
Network Setting 575
Network Setting
Item Details
Default Setting
Printer Number Specify the number of the
printer connected to the
NetW are print server .
(0-15)
0
NDS
PServer
T ree Name Specify the name of an NDS
tree that has a NetW are print
server .
(0-32 characters)
-
Context Name Specify the name of a context
that has a NetW are print server .
(0-255 characters)
-
Print Server Name Specify the name of a NetW are
print server .
(0-64 characters)
-
Print Server Password Set a password for the print
server .
(0-20 characters)
-
Polling Interval Specify the interval to conrm
jobs.
(1-255 seconds)
5
NPrinter Print Server Name Specify the name of a NetW are
print server .
(0-47 characters)
-
Printer Number Specify the number of the
printer connected to the
NetW are print server .
(0-254)
0
7. Click OK to display the Network page.
576 Network Setting
Network Setting
Specifying Printer-Related Information
Specify device information, security , and email notication settings as follows.
1. Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http:// “printer IP address or name” /
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2. Select Administrator Mode and click Logon .
3. If a password has been set on the printer , enter the password.
4. Click Information in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Information page.
5. T o display the relevant settings page, click Edit in the upper-right corner of Device Information
or Security , depending on what information you want to specify .
T o change the administrator password, click the Change Password button in the Security group.
6. Refer to the table of settings for device information, security , and email notication as you
complete these settings.
Security setting items are displayed when you click the Change Password button in the
Security group.
Device Information Settings
Item Details
Default Setting
Device Name Enter a device name.
(0-32 characters)
blank
Location Enter the location where the
device is installed.
(0-32 characters)
blank
Administrator Enter the administrator ’ s name.
(0-32 characters)
blank
Phone Enter the administrator ’ s contact
information.
(0-32 characters)
blank
Comments(E-mail) Enter any comments regarding
the administrator .
(0-32 characters)
blank
Security Settings
Item Details
Default Setting
New Password Enter the new password.
(0-9999999)
blank
Conrm Enter the new password again to
conrm it.
(0-9999999)
blank
On the Security settings screen, besides entering a password, you can specify other security-related
information, such as IP address-based SNMP or TCP usage restrictions, MAC address-based
access restrictions, or IPP and FTP authentication settings.
7. Click OK to activate the settings.
Network Setting 577
Network Setting
Conguring the Communication Mode Manually
This topic gives instructions for conguring the communication mode manually .
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Interface Setup , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select Ethernet Driver , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Auto Detect , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select Off , and then press the OK button.
The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu.
7. Press ▲or ▼to select Comm.Mode , and then press the OK button.
8. Press ▲or ▼to select the communication mode, and then press the OK button.
The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu.
9. Press ▲or ▼to select Ethernet T ype , and then press the OK button.
10. Press ▲or ▼to select the Ethernet type, and then press the OK button.
The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu.
1 1. Press ▲or ▼to select Spanning T ree , and then press the OK button.
12. Press ▲or ▼to enable or disable spanning tree support, and then press the OK button.
The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu.
13. Press the Menu button.
After the conrmation message is displayed, press the OK button.
The new settings will take ef fect after the printer restarts.
578 Network Setting
Network Setting
Email Notication When Printing is Finished or Errors
Occur
The printer can notify you of the printer status by email. Even when you are away from the printer , you can know
when printing is nished or if errors occur . Receive notication via email on your mobile phone or at your computer .
Use the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) function to set up email recipients and message timing.
Besides being informed of nished print jobs or errors, you can also complete settings for email notication
when service is needed or it’ s time to replace consumables. For detailed instructions, see “Specifying
Printer-Related Information”. (→P .577)
Note
•For details on email notication using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (in Windows), refer to the
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
•Mail server authentication is only supported with imagePROGRAF Status Monitor .
Network Setting 579
Network Setting
Initializing the Network Settings
Use RemoteUI to restore the network settings to the default values as follows.
Important
•Initializing the network settings will also restore the default value of the printer ’ s IP address. As a result,
the RemoteUI page cannot be displayed in the web browser after this procedure.
•For instructions on reconguring the IP address, see “Conguring the IP Address on the Printer”.
(→P .563)
•For details on RemoteUI , see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P .569)
1. Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http:// “printer IP address or name” /
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2. Select Administrator Mode and click Logon .
3. If a password has been set on the printer , enter the password.
4. Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
5. Click Reset to Default settings in the lower-right corner of the Network Interface group.
6. After conrming the message, click OK to restore the network settings to the default values.
Note
•Y ou can also use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the Control Panel to restore the default
network settings.
580 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Network Setting (W indows)
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (W indows)
This topic describes how to specify the printer driver destination if the printer ’ s IP address is changed, or if you
will use the printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.
The procedure described below is the conguration based on the LPR or Raw protocol using the standard
TCP/IP port in Windows ( Standard TCP/IP Port ).
Important
•If you will use the printer in a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer ’ s IP address is congured correctly .
•Conguring the IP Address on the Printer (→P .563)
1. Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window .
2. Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Properties to open the printer properties window .
3. Click the Port tab to display the Port sheet.
4. Click Add Port to display the Printer Ports dialog box.
5. In the A vailable Port list, select Standard TCP/IP Port .
6. Click New Port .
After the wizard starts, a window is displayed for the W elcome to the Add Standard TCP/IP
Printer Port W izard .
7. Click Next .
8. In Printer Name or IP Address , enter the printer ’ s IP address.
9. Follow the instructions on the screen to add a printer port.
10. Click Close to close the Printer Ports dialog box.
1 1. Make sure the printer port you added is displayed under Ports , and that the port is selected.
12. Click Close to close the printer properties window .
Network Setting 581
Network Setting (Windows)
Sharing the Printer in W indows
If you set up a computer as a print server in Windows 2000, Windows XP , Windows Server 2003, Windows
V ista, or Windows Server 2008, the computer can receive print jobs sent from other computers (clients)
connected to it for printing. This topic describes how to share the printer in Windows.
Important
•W e recommend that your network administrator congure your network for printer sharing.
1. Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window .
2. Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Sharing to open the printer properties window .
582 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
3. On the Sharing sheet, click Share this printer and enter the shared name.
4. T o print jobs from clients running other versions of Windows, click Additional Drivers and follow
the instructions to install the printer driver of the corresponding version.
If you are prompted to choose the location of the printer driver le, insert the provided User
Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and specify the folder where the printer driver is located.
5. Click OK .
Important
•When installing the printer driver on client computers, select "Network Printer" on the connection type
screen in the printer wizard, and then select the printer shared from the computer set up as the print
server .
Network Setting 583
Network Setting (Windows)
Conguring the Printer ’ s NetW are Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the NetW are network settings.
1. Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http:// “printer IP address or name” /
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2. Select Administrator Mode and click Logon .
3. If a password has been set on the printer , enter the password.
4. Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
5. Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetW are group to display the Edit NetW are Protocol
Settings page.
6. Refer to the NetW are Settings Items table to complete the settings.
NetW are Settings Items
Item Details
Default Setting
Frame T ype Specify the type of frame to
use in NetW are.
Disabled
NCP Burst Mode Activate this setting to use
NCP Burst Mode.
This mode supports fast data
transfer when printing in queue
server mode. Normally , leave
the setting On.
On
Print Application Choose the print service.
•Bindery PServer
•RPrinter
•NDS PServer
•NPrinter
NDS PServer
Packet Signature Select If Requested by Server
to use packet signature.
If Requested by Server
Bindery
PServer
File Server Name Specify the name of a le
server that has a NetW are print
server .
(0-47 characters)
-
Print Server Name Specify the name of a NetW are
print server .
(0-47 characters)
-
Print Server Password Set a password for the print
server .
(0-20 characters)
-
Polling Interval Specify the interval to conrm
jobs.
(1-15 seconds)
5
RPrinter Print Server Name Specify the name of a NetW are
print server .
(0-47 characters)
-
584 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Item Details
Default Setting
Printer Number Specify the number of the
printer connected to the
NetW are print server .
(0-15)
0
NDS
PServer
T ree Name Specify the name of an NDS
tree that has a NetW are print
server .
(0-32 characters)
-
Context Name Specify the name of a context
that has a NetW are print server .
(0-255 characters)
-
Print Server Name Specify the name of a NetW are
print server .
(0-64 characters)
-
Print Server Password Set a password for the print
server .
(0-20 characters)
-
Polling Interval Specify the interval to conrm
jobs.
(1-255 seconds)
5
NPrinter Print Server Name Specify the name of a NetW are
print server .
(0-47 characters)
-
Printer Number Specify the number of the
printer connected to the
NetW are print server .
(0-254)
0
7. Click OK to display the Network page.
Network Setting 585
Network Setting (Windows)
Specifying the Printer ’ s Frame T ype
T o enable communication between the printer and computers on your network, specify the Ethernet frame
type in your NetW are environment.
Follow these steps to specify the frame type by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the printer
Control Panel .
Note
•Y ou can specify the frame type by using RemoteUI if the printer ’ s IP address is congured.
Important
•Before specifying the frame type, make sure the printer is on and connected to the network.
•For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility , see “Installing imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility”. (→P .452)
Specifying the frame type using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
1. Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .
2. In the list of printers, select the printer to congure.
3. Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
4. Click the NetW are tab and select the frame type in the NetW are Frame T ype list.
5. Click the IPv4 tab and select ETHERNET II in the Frame T ype list.
6. In IP Address , enter the IP address assigned to the printer , and then enter the subnet mask in
Subnet Mask and the default gateway in Gateway Address .
Important
•Y ou must specify the IP address here to be able to congure NetW are protocol settings using
RemoteUI .
7. Click Set .
8. Click OK after the Conrmation message is displayed.
9. Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .
586 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Specifying the frame type using the printer Control Panel
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Interface Setup , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select NetW are , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select NetW are , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select On , and then press the OK button.
The display reverts to the NetW are menu.
7. Press ▲or ▼to select Frame T ype , and then press the OK button.
8. Press ▲or ▼to select the frame type to use, and then press the OK button.
The display reverts to the NetW are menu.
9. Press ▲or ▼to select Print Service , and then press the OK button.
10. Press ▲or ▼to select the desired print service, and then press the OK button.
The display reverts to the NetW are menu.
1 1. Press the Menu button.
If any of the settings is changed, a conrmation message is displayed. In this case, press
the OK button.
Important
•Be sure to complete step 1 1. This will activate the values you have entered.
Note
•If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.
•T o cancel this process, press the Stop button.
Network Setting 587
Network Setting (Windows)
Specifying NetW are Print Services
Before printing in a NetW are network, you must congure print services such as print servers, print queues, and
so on. Y ou can congure the print service settings from a computer using any of the following Novell software
provided with NetW are.
•NW ADMIN
•PCONSOLE
Important
•If you use NW ADMIN to congure the print service settings, Novell Client (the Novell NetW are client
software) must be installed as the client software application.
•NetW are networking is unsupported in Windows V ista and Windows Server 2008.
This topic gives instructions for conguring NetW are print services. The order of this procedure may vary
depending on the environment.
Choosing the type of print services
Before completing print service settings, choose the type of print service. Refer to the following descriptions
as needed.
Note
•In NetW are 5.1 or 6.0, NDPS may also be used as the print service. If you use NDPS, use the Novell
printer gateway included with NetW are. For details on conguring NDPS, refer to the NetW are
documentation.
•NDS (Novell Directory Service) and bindery
NDS and bindery are both supported. Use the mode that is compatible with your network environment.
•Queue server mode and remote printer mode
Queue server mode and remote printer mode are both supported.
•Queue server mode
When using queue server mode, all print server functions are supported, so there is no need for
other print server software or hardware. In NDS queue server mode (NDS PServer), the NDS
print server is used for printing. In bindery queue server mode (Bindery PServer), the bindery print
server is used for printing. Note that if you use queue server mode, a NetW are user license is
required for each network interface.
•Remote printer mode
In remote printer mode, the printer is controlled by the NetW are print server . Thus, a NetW are
print server is required. In NDS remote printer mode (NPrinter), the NDS print server is used for
printing, and in bindery remote printer mode (RPrinter), the bindery print server is used for printing.
588 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Using NW ADMIN or PCONSOLE to set up the print server
Use NW ADMIN to set up the print server if NDS queue server mode or remote printer mode is used.
1. Log into NetW are as Administrator or with equivalent rights, and then start NW ADMIN.
2. Run Quick Setup.
1. Choose Print Services Quick Setup in the T ools menu.
2. Enter a desired name in Print Server Name . T o use an existing print server , click the button at right
and choose the name from the list.
3. Enter a desired printer name in Name .
4. T o use the printer in queue server mode, choose Other/Unknown in T ype . T o use the printer in
remote printer mode, choose Parallel in T ype , click Communications , and set Ports to LPT1 and
Connection T ype to Manual Load .
5. Enter a desired queue name in Name .
6. In V olume , enter the volume object (that is, the object representing the physical volume on the
network) where the print queue will be created. Click the button at right to choose from a list.
7. Complete other settings as needed and click OK .
Note
•The print server name will be required when conguring the printer ’ s protocol settings. W rite down
the print server name for future reference.
•When running Quick Setup, the printer is assigned printer number “0.” When using the printer in
queue server mode, do not change the printer number from “0.”
3. Set a password.
1. Right-click the print server created in step 2 and choose Details .
2. Click Change Password to open the password input dialog box. Enter the password.
3. Click OK to close the password input dialog box.
4. Click OK or Cancel to close the details dialog box.
4. T o use the printer in remote printer mode, start the print server .
T o use the NetW are le server as the print server , enter “LOAD PSER VER.NLM” at the le
server and press the Enter key .
Note
•This procedure is not required when using queue server mode.
Network Setting 589
Network Setting (Windows)
Use PCONSOLE to set up the print server if bindery queue server mode or remote printer mode is used.
1. Log into NetW are as Admin and start PCONSOLE.
2. Switch to bindery mode.
3. If the print server has not been created, create it.
1. In A vailable Options , select Quick Setup , and press the Enter key .
2. Enter the name of the new print server , the new printer , and the queue.
Note
•The print server name will be required when conguring the printer ’ s protocol settings. W rite down
the print server name for future reference.
4. Specify the printer type.
1. T o use the printer in queue server mode, choose Other/Unknown in T ype . T o use remote printer
mode, set Printer T ype to Parallel and Position to Manual Load .
2. Press the Esc key .
3. After the conrmation message is displayed, choose Y es and press the Enter key .
5. Set a password.
1. In A vailable Options , select Print Servers and press the Enter key .
2. Select the print server created in step 2 and press the Enter key .
3. Select Password , and press the Enter key to display the password input dialog box.
4. Enter the password and press the Enter key .
6. Press the Esc key several times to display the dialog box for conrming that PCONSOLE
is nished.
7. Click Y es to exit PCONSOLE.
590 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Specifying NetW are Protocols
Follow the steps below to congure NetW are protocol settings other than the frame type by using RemoteUI .
Note
•For details on RemoteUI , see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P .569)
1. Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http:// “printer IP address or name” /
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2. Select Administrator Mode and click Logon .
3. If a password has been set on the printer , enter the password.
4. Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
5. Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetW are group to display the Edit NetW are Protocol
Settings page.
6. Make sure the Frame T ype indicates the frame type used on the NetW are network.
7. T o use burst mode, choose On for NCP Burst Mode .
Note
•Burst mode supports fast data transfer when printing in queue server mode. Normally , choose On .
8. In Print Application , click the print service to be used.
Note
•Only one print service selected here will be enabled. Multiple print services are not available at
the same time.
9. For packet signature, click If Requested by Server in Packet Signature .
10. Complete the following settings based on the selected service.
•If you have selected Bindery PServer: Queue Server Mode (Using a Bindery Print Server)
1. In File Server Name , enter the le server name.
2. In Print Server Name , enter the name of the print server created in " Specifying NetW are
Print Services . (→P .588)"
3. In Print Server Password , enter the password of the print server created in " Specifying
NetW are Print Services . (→P .588)"
4. In Polling Interval , specify the interval at which the printer checks the NetW are print queue.
•If you have selected RPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (Using a Bindery Print Server)
1. In Print Server Name , enter the advertising name of the print server created in " Specifying
NetW are Print Services . (→P .588)"
2. In Printer Number , enter the same printer number specied in " Specifying NetW are Print
Services . (→P .588)"
Network Setting 591
Network Setting (Windows)
•If you have selected NDS PServer: Queue Server Mode (Using an NDS Print Server)
1. In T ree Name and Context Name , enter the tree and context name of the print server .
2. In Print Server Name , enter the name of the print server created in " Specifying NetW are
Print Services . (→P .588)"
3. In Print Server Password , enter the password of the print server created in " Specifying
NetW are Print Services . (→P .588)"
4. In Polling Interval , specify the interval at which the printer checks the NetW are print queue.
•If you have selected NPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (Using a NDS Print Server)
1. In Print Server Name , enter the advertising name of the print server created in " Specifying
NetW are Print Services . (→P .588)" Usually , the advertising name is the same as the name of
the print server .
2. In Printer Number , enter the same printer number specied in " Specifying NetW are Print
Services . (→P .588)"
1 1. Click OK to display the Network page.
For a list of NetW are protocol settings items, see “Conguring the Printer ’ s NetW are Network Settings”.
(→P .575)
592 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Conguring NetW are Network Settings
T o print over a NetW are network, congure the network environment as follows.
Important
•T o congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator”
account. W e recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.
1. Specify the Ethernet frame type for communication between the printer and computers.
For instructions, see “Specifying the Printer ’ s Frame T ype”. (→P .586)
2. Specify the NetW are print services, including the print server and queue.
For instructions, see “Specifying NetW are Print Services”. (→P .588)
3. Specify NetW are protocol details besides the frame type.
For instructions, see “Specifying NetW are Protocols”. (→P .591)
After you have completed the steps above, congure each computer for printing over the
NetW are network.
4. Connect to the NetW are network.
Install NetW are client software on each computer to be used for printing over the network, and
log in to the NetW are server or tree. For instructions on connection, refer to the NetW are and
operating system documentation.
5. Install the printer driver .
Follow the instructions of your network administrator to install the printer driver on each computer
to be used for printing. When installing the printer driver , choose Network Printer as the printer
destination, and then choose the print queue created from the NetW are print service settings.
6. Follow these steps to congure the printer port. This step is not necessary if you specied the
printer destination during installation of the printer driver .
1. Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window .
2. Right-click the printer icon and choose Properties .
3. Click the Port (or Advanced ) tab to display the Port (or Advanced ) sheet.
4. As the destination port, specify the print queue created by conguring the NetW are print service
settings.
Network Setting 593
Network Setting (Windows)
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer
as follows:
Important
•In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows V ista/Windows Server 2008, you must
log on with administrative rights equivalent to the “Administrator” account.
1. Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
2. On the Setup Menu window , click Install Individual Software .
3. Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.
594 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility
On a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the
printer to congure the printer ’ s IP address. This topic describes how to congure the IP address using
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .
Important
•T o congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator”
account. W e recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.
•For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility , see “Installing imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility”. (→P .452)
When specifying an IPv4 IP address
1. Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.
2. In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to congure.
3. Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
4. Select the IPv4 tab.
5. In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual .
6. Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.
7. Click OK after the Conrmation message is displayed.
8. Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .
Note
•T o congure the IP address automatically , choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select
DHCP ,BOOTP , or RARP .
•Y ou can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway .
When specifying an IPv6 IP address
1. Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.
2. In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to congure.
3. Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
4. Select the IPv6 tab.
5. In IPv6 , select On .
6. When there is an IPv6-compatible router in the network environment, select On in Stateless
Address .
Additionally , when there is an DHCPv6-compatible server in the network environment, select
On in DHCPv6 .
Note
•When there is no IPv6-compatible router or DHCPv6-compatible server , select On in Manual and
enter the IPv6 Address and Prex Length .
7. Click Set .
8. Click OK after the Conrmation message is displayed.
9. Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .
Network Setting 595
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)
Specify the printer driver destination as follows if the printer ’ s IP address is changed, or if you will use the
printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.
•If you switch to printing in an AppleT alk network, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleT alk
Networks (Macintosh)”. (→P .598)
•If you switch to printing in a TCP/IP network, or if the printer ’ s IP address is changed, see “Conguring
the Destination in TCP/IP Networks (Macintosh)”. (→P .600)
•If you switch to printing in a Bonjour network, see “Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network
(Macintosh)”. (→P .602)
596 Network Setting
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the Printer ’ s AppleT alk Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the AppleT alk network settings.
1. Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http:// “printer IP address or name” /
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2. Select Administrator Mode and click Logon .
3. If a password has been set on the printer , enter the password.
4. Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
5. Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the AppleT alk group to display the Edit AppleT alk
Protocol Settings page.
6. Refer to the AppleT alk Settings Items table to complete the settings.
AppleT alk Settings Items
Item Details
Default Setting
Phase T ype Specify whether to use AppleT alk.
If you will use AppleT alk, choose
Phase 2 .
If you will not use AppleT alk,
choose Disabled .
Disabled
Name (*1) Specify the object name used by
AppleT alk (in up to 31 single-byte
or 15 double-byte characters).
However , do not use the following
single-byte characters: @, *, :,
and =.
Canon NB-18GB (xxxxxx)
Zone (*2) Specify the printer zone name, up
to 31 single-byte characters.
However , do not use the following
single-byte characters: Also avoid
using “*” (which represents the
default zone) in the middle of a
string.
*
*1: The object name you have specied in Name is displayed in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center )
in Mac OS X 10.2.8-10.4. If you use multiple printers in the same zone, assign a unique name to
each printer . By default, the network interface name is “Canon NB-18GB (xxxxxx).” (Here, xxxxxx is
the last six digits of the printer ’ s MAC address.)
*2: If zones have been created on the network, enter the name of the printer ’ s zone. If there are
no zones, leave the asterisk “*” entry (for the default zone) as it is. If you enter a network zone
name that does not match created zones, the printer will not be detected by Macintosh computers.
Consult your network administrator for information on zone names.
7. Click OK to display the Network page.
Network Setting 597
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the Destination for AppleT alk Networks
(Macintosh)
T o print over an AppleT alk network, activate the AppleT alk protocol and congure the destination as follows.
Activating AppleT alk on the printer
Important
•By factory default, the AppleT alk protocol is disabled on the printer .
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Interface Setup , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select AppleT alk , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select On , and then press the OK button.
6. Press the Menu button.
If any of the settings is changed, a conrmation message is displayed. In this case, press
the OK button.
Important
•Be sure to complete step 6. This will activate the values you have entered.
Note
•By using RemoteUI , you can also specify the object name used for AppleT alk, as well as the printer
zone name.
For details on RemoteUI , see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P .569)
598 Network Setting
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the destination (Mac OS X)
Important
•AppleT alk is supported in Mac OS X 10.2.8-10.4.
Note
•The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of conguring the destination
varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.
1. In System Preferences , click Network to display the Network window .
2. In Show , choose Built-in Ethernet . Next, click AppleT alk , select Make AppleT alk Active ,
and click Apply now .
3. Close the Network window and save the settings.
Network Setting 599
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the Destination in TCP/IP Networks
(Macintosh)
Follow these steps to congure the destination when using the printer in a TCP/IP network.
Important
•If you use the printer in a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer ’ s IP address is congured correctly .
( → P .565)
Conguring the Destination (Mac OS X)
1. Navigate to Applications >Canon Utilities >imagePROGRAF PrinterSetup and double-click
imagePROGRAF PrinterSetup.app .
2. Click Next .
3. Select the printer to register and click Next .
Note
•When specifying an IP address, click Registering IP Address .
Enter the IP address of the printer to set up in IP Address and click Next .
600 Network Setting
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
4. Complete Printer Name and Location as desired and click Register .
5. Click Finish .
Network Setting 601
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network
(Macintosh)
In Mac OS X 10.2.8 and later , use Bonjour functions to easily connect the printer to the network. Follow the
steps below to congure the destination if you use the printer on TCP/IP network.
Important
•Bonjour and IP Print (Auto) do not support printing to a printer on other network groups that require a
router for connection. Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network. For information
about network settings, ask your network administrator .
•By default, Bonjour is activated on the printer . The printer name as displayed in Printer Setup Utility
(or Print Center ) in Mac OS X is predened as the Multicast DNS Service Name . Y ou can activate
or deactivate the Bonjour function or change the printer name by using RemoteUI . For instructions on
changing it, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P .569)
1. Choose Utilities (or Applications ) in the Go menu of Finder .
2. Click Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ) in the Utilities folder .
3. If the printer name is not displayed in Printer List , click Add .
4. Select the printer from the list in the Printer Browser window and click Add .
602 Network Setting
Adjusting the Printhead
Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the Printhead
Adjusting the Printhead
If printed documents are af fected by the following problems, try adjusting the printhead.
•Printing is faint or af fected by banding in dif ferent colors
Execute Nozzle Check to check for printhead nozzle clogging.
For instructions, see “Checking for Nozzle Clogging”. (→P .630)
•Printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment
Execute Head Posi. Adj. to adjust the printhead position.
Normally , execute Auto(Standard) or Auto(Advanced) . However , when using special paper or if
printing is not improved after executing Auto(Advanced) , try Manual .
( → P .604)
( → P .606)
•Printed lines are misaligned
Execute Head Inc. Adj. to adjust the angle of inclination of the printhead.
Even slight misalignment can be corrected.
( → P .608)
•Paper rubs against the printhead, or image edges are blurred
Executing Head Height to adjust the printhead height may improve printing results.
( → P .61 1 )
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 603
Adjusting the Printhead
Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors
(Head Posi. Adj.)
If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, execute Head Posi. Adj. to adjust the Printhead
alignment.
There are two modes for automatic Printhead adjustment: Auto(Standard) and Auto(Advanced) .
Auto(Standard) will x most slight image distortion or color misalignment, but if not, try Auto(Advanced) .
Use Auto(Standard) or Auto(Advanced) to have the printer print and read a test pattern for automatic
adjustment of the Printhead .
Important
•Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specied on the printer . Adjustment
cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.
•This function is not available with CAD T racing Paper , CAD T ranslucent Matte Film , or CAD Clear Film .
If adjustment is not possible as expected using highly transparent lm or similar media, try another type
of paper , or try Manual adjustment.
( → P .606)
Note
•When printing on special paper , or if printing is not improved after Auto(Advanced) , try Manual .
( → P .606)
•Use Auto(Standard) if you have switched to another type of paper or if you want the boundaries
between colors to appear as clear as possible.
•Use Auto(Advanced) to ne-tune the space between nozzles or colors if you have switched the
printhead or if clearer printing is required. W e recommend Auto(Advanced) for printing at the highest
level of quality .
•W e recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.
Paper to Prepare
Rolls An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
Sheets Auto(Standard) : One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
Auto(Advanced) : Five sheets of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size (or one
sheet when using A2 or larger)
Perform adjustment as follows.
1. Load the paper .
•Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (→P .103)
•Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P .106)
•Loading Sheets in the Printer (→P .136)
604 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the Printhead
2. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select Adjust Printer , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Head Posi. Adj. , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select Auto(Standard) or Auto(Advanced) , and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for adjustment.
Adjustment is now nished if you have printed on a roll or a sheet of A2 size or larger .
7. If you are printing on sheets smaller than A2 size for Auto(Advanced) , a conrmation message
is displayed requesting you to continue printing. Press the OK button and follow the instructions
displayed.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 605
Adjusting the Printhead
Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors (Head
Posi. Adj.)
If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, execute Head Posi. Adj. to adjust the Printhead
alignment.
Normally , execute Auto(Standard) or Auto(Advanced) .
( → P .604)
However , when printing on special paper , or if printing is not improved after Auto(Advanced) , try Manual .
Manual adjustment requires you to examine the printed test pattern and enter an adjustment value.
Note
•Manual may be unavailable in some cases, even if it is displayed in the menu.
If so, execute Auto(Advanced) once.
•Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specied on the printer . Adjustment
cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.
•W e recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.
Paper to Prepare
Rolls An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
Sheets One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
Perform adjustment as follows.
1. Load the paper .
•Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (→P .103)
•Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P .106)
•Loading Sheets in the Printer (→P .136)
2. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select Adjust Printer , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Head Posi. Adj. , and then press the OK button.
606 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the Printhead
6. Press ▲or ▼to select Manual , and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for adjustment.
7. Press ▲or ▼to select D, and then press the OK button.
8. Press ▲or ▼to select D-1 , and then press the OK button.
9. Examine adjustment test pattern D-1 and determine the number with straight lines.
Note
•If two patterns seem equally good and you cannot decide which one is better , choose an intermediate
value.
For example, choose 1 1 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better .
10. Press ▲or ▼to select the pattern number you have decided, and then press the OK button.
1 1. Repeat steps 8-10 to specify the adjustment value for D-2 to D-5 and D-7 to D-1 1 .
12. Press the Back button.
13. Press ▲or ▼to select Register Setting , and then press the OK button.
14. Press ▲or ▼to select Y es , and then press the OK button.
The adjustment value is now registered, and adjustment is complete.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 607
Adjusting the Printhead
Adjusting Line Misalignment (Head Inc. Adj.)
If printed lines are misaligned, execute Head Inc. Adj. to adjust the angle of inclination of the Printhead . Executing
Head Inc. Adj. requires you to examine a printed test pattern and enter an adjustment value.
Paper to Prepare
Rolls An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
Sheets One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
Perform adjustment as follows.
1. Load the paper .
•Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (→P .103)
•Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P .106)
•Loading Sheets in the Printer (→P .136)
Note
•When loading paper , specify the type of paper correctly . Using paper that you have not specied on
the printer may cause feeding problems and af fect the printing quality .
•W e recommend loading a type of paper that you use often.
2. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select Adjust Printer , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Head Inc. Adj. , and then press the OK button.
After the Carriage is moved, a message is displayed requesting you to open the T op Cover .
6. Open the T op Cover .
608 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the Printhead
7. Align the Angle Adjustment Lever with the red square and close the T op Cover .
A test pattern is printed for adjustment.
Important
•Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b). T ouching these parts may damage them.
•If you accidentally move the Carriage , you will hear a warning tone. In this case, close the T op Cover .
8. Examine the test pattern for adjustment. Determine the straightest set of lines.
9. Open the T op Cover and move the Angle Adjustment Lever to match the number (or the square)
of the straightest set of lines.
If no single set of lines is perfectly straight, move the Angle Adjustment Lever to a position
between the numbers (or between the number and the square) of the two sets of lines that
are least misaligned.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 609
Adjusting the Printhead
10. Close the T op Cover .
The Printhead is now straight, and adjustment is complete.
610 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the Printhead
T roubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images
(Head Height)
If the Printhead rubs against paper during printing, adjusting the Printhead height may improve results.
If image edges are blurred, it may help to lower the Printhead .
Note
•Raise or lower the printhead, depending on the nature of the problem.
( → P .670)
( → P .671)
( → P .676)
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Paper Details , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Head Height , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select the desired setting value, and then press the OK button.
Note
•Depending on the type of paper , some setting values may not be available.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 61 1
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the Feed Amount
If printed documents are af fected by the following problems, try adjusting the feed amount.
•Banding in dif ferent colors
•Line length is not accurate in the direction paper is fed
T o adjust the feed amount, do the following, in this order .
1. Depending on the issue, adjust Adj. Priority to suit the particular type of paper .
( → P .613)
2. Execute Adj. Quality or Adjust Length , depending on the selection in Adj. Priority .
( → P .614)
( → P .616)
( → P .619)
3. After executing Adj. Quality , execute Adj. Fine Feed for further adjustment as needed.
( → P .618 )
612 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the feed amount
Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method (Feed
Priority)
Methods of adjusting the amount paper is fed are set in Adj. Priority .
Adjust Adj. Priority to suit your particular printing application.
•Print Quality : Adjusts the feed amount to reduce banding across the sheet in printed documents.
Adj. Quality settings are applied. When Adj. Fine Feed is executed, the Adj. Fine Feed settings are
applied in addition to the Adj. Quality settings.
•Print Length : Adjusts the feed amount for better accuracy of lines in printed documents.
The settings of A:High or B:Standard/Draft in Adjust Length are applied.
•Automatic :Print Quality or Print Length is selected, depending on Print Priority as selected in the
printer driver at the time of printing.
Image or Ofce Document :Print Quality is selected.
Line Drawing/T ext :Print Length is selected.
Note
•Either B:Standard/Draft or A:High in the Adjust Length menu is applied, depending on printer driver
settings at the time of printing.
•If you have selected Easy Settings in the printer driver , follow these steps to conrm the Print Priority
setting.
•Windows: Click V iew Settings on the Main tab to display the V iew Settings dialog box.
•Mac OS X: Click V iew set. on the Main pane to display the V iew settings dialog box.
Follow these steps to congure the settings.
1. Load the paper .
•Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (→P .103)
•Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P .106)
•Loading Sheets in the Printer (→P .136)
2. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select Adjust Printer , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Feed Priority , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select Adj. Priority , and then press the OK button.
7. Press ▲or ▼to select Automatic ,Print Quality , or Print Length , and then press the OK
button.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 613
Adjusting the feed amount
Automatic Banding Adjustment (Adj. Quality)
If printed images are af fected by banding in dif ferent colors across the sheet, execute Adj. Quality for automatic
adjustment of the paper feed amount.
There are two modes of automatic adjustment to correct banding: Auto(GenuinePpr) and Auto(OtherPaper) .
In either mode, the printer prints and reads a test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount.
•Auto(GenuinePpr)
Use this mode with paper identied in the Paper Reference Guide .
( → P .95)
•Auto(OtherPaper)
Use this mode with paper not in the Paper Reference Guide , or if Auto(GenuinePpr) does not eliminate
banding.
( → P .95)
Note
•Always check the Adj. Priority values before using Auto(GenuinePpr) or Auto(OtherPaper) .
( → P .613)
•Adjustment is not possible with Auto(GenuinePpr) and Auto(OtherPaper) when using highly
transparent media.
In this case, use Manual adjustment.
( → P .616)
•If additional ne-tuning is necessary after Auto(GenuinePpr) and Auto(OtherPaper) , execute Adj.
Fine Feed .
( → P .618)
•Use Adjust Length to ensure that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length.
( → P .619)
•This may take some time, depending on the type of paper .
•Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.
Paper to Prepare
Rolls An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
Sheets Auto(GenuinePpr) : One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
Auto(OtherPaper) : T wo sheets of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size (or one
sheet when using A2 or larger)
Perform adjustment as follows.
1. Load the paper .
•Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (→P .103)
•Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P .106)
•Loading Sheets in the Printer (→P .136)
Note
•Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specied. Adjustment cannot be
completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.
614 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the feed amount
2. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select Adjust Printer , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Feed Priority , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select Adj. Quality , and then press the OK button.
7. Press ▲or ▼to select Auto(GenuinePpr) or Auto(OtherPaper) , and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for adjustment.
Adjustment is now nished if you have printed on a roll or a sheet of A2 size or larger .
8. If you are printing on sheets smaller than A2 size for Auto(GenuinePpr) , a conrmation
message is shown on the Display Screen requesting you to continue printing.
Press the OK button and follow the instructions on the Display Screen .
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 615
Adjusting the feed amount
Manual Banding Adjustment (Adj. Quality)
If printed images are af fected by banding in dif ferent colors, execute Adj. Quality for adjustment of the paper
feed amount.
Use Manual adjustment with highly transparent media or other paper for which Auto(GenuinePpr) or
Auto(OtherPaper) cannot be used.
( → P .614)
Manual adjustment requires you to enter an adjustment value after a test pattern is printed.
Note
•Always check the Adj. Priority values before using Manual adjustment.
( → P .613)
•If additional ne-tuning is necessary after Manual adjustment, use Adj. Fine Feed
( → P .618)
•Use Adjust Length to ensure that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length.
( → P .619)
•Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.
Paper to Prepare
Rolls An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
Sheets T wo sheets of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
Perform adjustment as follows.
1. Load the paper .
•Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (→P .103)
•Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P .106)
•Loading Sheets in the Printer (→P .136)
Note
•Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specied. Adjustment cannot be
completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.
2. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select Adjust Printer , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Feed Priority , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select Adj. Quality , and then press the OK button.
616 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the feed amount
7. Press ▲or ▼to select Manual , and then press the OK button.
T est pattern A is printed for manual adjustment.
Note
•When printing on sheets, follow the instructions on the Display Screen and remove the sheet.
8. Examine test pattern A for adjustment. Determine the pattern in which banding is least noticeable.
Note
•If banding seems least noticeable in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better , choose
an intermediate value.
For example, choose 1 1 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better .
9. Press ▲or ▼to select the pattern number you have decided, and then press the OK button.
T est pattern B is printed for adjustment.
Note
•If you printed test pattern A on a sheet, follow the instructions on the Display Screen and use another
sheet of the same type of paper .
Additionally , after test pattern B is printed, follow the instructions on the Display Screen and remove
the sheet.
10. Examine test pattern B for adjustment. Determine the pattern in which banding is least noticeable.
1 1. Press ▲or ▼to select the pattern number you have decided, and then press the OK button.
The adjustment value is now registered, and adjustment is complete.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 617
Adjusting the feed amount
Fine-T uning the Paper Feed Amount (Adj. Fine Feed)
If the contrast is uneven or banding in dif ferent colors appears at 50 mm (2.0 in) intervals in printed documents, try
executing Adj. Fine Feed during printing to ne-tune the feed amount.
Note
•Always execute Adj. Quality before Adj. Fine Feed .
Once you execute Adj. Quality , the Adj. Fine Feed value will revert to 0.
( → P .614)
( → P .616)
Perform adjustment as follows.
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Adj. Fine Feed , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select a setting value in the range -5 to +5, and then press the OK button.
The setting is now applied.
618 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting Line Length (Adjust Length)
T o ensure that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length, use Adjust Length to adjust the
amount that paper is advanced.
There are two options in Adjust Length :AdjustmentPrint and Change Settings .
•AdjustmentPrint
After a test pattern is printed, you will measure the discrepancy based on the results of printing.
•Change Settings
No test pattern is printed. Instead, you will measure a document already printed to determine the
discrepancy .
Additionally , two modes are available in both AdjustmentPrint and Change Settings :A:High or
B:Standard/Draft . Choose the mode that suits your particular printing application.
•A:High
This setting is applied when Highest or High is selected in Print Quality in the printer driver .
•B:Standard/Draft
This setting is applied when Standard or Draft is selected in Print Quality in the printer driver .
Note
•Always check the Adj. Priority values before using Adjust Length . ( → P .613)
•Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.
Paper to Prepare
Rolls
•An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
•High-precision ruler
Sheets
•One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
•High-precision ruler
Perform adjustment as follows.
1. Load the paper .
•Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (→P .103)
•Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P .106)
•Loading Sheets in the Printer (→P .136)
Note
•Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specied. Adjustment cannot be
completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.
2. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 619
Adjusting the feed amount
3. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select Adjust Printer , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Feed Priority , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select Adjust Length , and then press the OK button.
7. Press ▲or ▼to select AdjustmentPrint or Change Settings , and then press the OK button.
When you select AdjustmentPrint , a test pattern is printed for you to measure the scale and
calculate the discrepancy . The scale bar shows “Millimeter” in 50 mm units and “Inch” in 1
inch units.
Note
•A test pattern is printed in black when you choose A:High or in magenta if you choose
B:Standard/Draft .
•T o cancel printing the test pattern for adjustment, hold down the Stop button. When Stop printing?
is displayed, press ▲or ▼to select Y es , and then press the OK button.
8. Press ▲or ▼to enter the amount of discrepancy , and then press the OK button.
If the scale is shorter than the actual size, use a positive setting value. If it is longer , use a
negative value.
The feed amount can be adjusted in 0.02% increments.
620 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the V acuum Strength (V acuumStrngth)
When printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily , if the Printhead rubs against paper ,
adjusting the level of suction against paper on the Platen may improve results.
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Paper Details , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select the type of paper , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select V acuumStrngth , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select the desired setting value, and then press the OK button.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 621
Ink T anks
Maintenance
Ink T anks
Ink T anks
Ink tanks that can be used in the printer are labeled with a white letter “J” in a black circle on the side. When
purchasing ink tanks, make sure a “J” is printed on the label, along with the following Ink T ank serial numbers.
•130 ml (4.4  oz) per color
•BK Ink T ank PFI-102BK
•MBK Ink T ank PFI-102MBK
•C Ink T ank PFI-102C
•M Ink T ank PFI-104M
•Y Ink T ank PFI-102Y
Note
•For instructions on ink tank replacement, see “Replacing Ink T anks”. (→P .623)
•Y ou can also use ink tanks other than M Ink T ank PFI-104M that are simply labeled “A.”
622 Maintenance
Ink T anks
Replacing Ink T anks
Compatible ink tanks
Ink tanks that can be used in the printer are labeled with a white letter “J” in a black circle on the side. Request
ink tanks with the same label when you purchase new ones. For details, see “Ink T anks”. (→P .622)
Precautions when handling ink tanks
T ake the following precautions when handling ink tanks.
Caution
•For safety , keep ink tanks out of the reach of children.
•If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately .
•There may be ink around the ink supply section of ink tanks you removed. Handle ink tanks carefully
during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.
Important
•Do not install used ink tanks in another model of printer .
This will prevent correct ink level detection, which may damage the printer or cause other problems.
•W e recommend using up an Ink T ank in the course of printing within six months after breaking the seal.
Printing quality may be af fected if you use older ink tanks.
•Do not leave the printer without ink tanks installed for extended periods (a month or more). Residual ink
may become clogged inside the printer and af fect printing quality .
Make sure the printer is ready for Ink T ank replacement
Y ou can replace ink tanks if the Display Screen advises you to check the amount of ink left or replace ink tanks.
If a message requests you to replace an Ink T ank , press the OK button. In this case, you can skip the step
“Access the menu for ink tank replacement.” Follow the instructions in “Remove the ink tanks.”
Important
•Do not remove an Ink T ank during initialization immediately after turning on the printer , or during
printhead cleaning.
Note
•Ink T ank replacement is possible even during printing, when print jobs are being canceled, or when
paper is being advanced.
Maintenance 623
Ink T anks
Access the menu for Ink T ank replacement
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Ink tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Ink Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Rep. Ink T ank , and then press the OK button.
A message on the Display Screen requests you to open the Ink T ank Cover . Remove the Ink
T ank at this point.
Remove the Ink T ank
1. Open the Ink T ank Cover and check the ink lamps.
Ink lamps ash when there is little ink left.
2. Press the tip of the Ink T ank Lock Lever of the color for replacement horizontally and pull the
Ink T ank Lock Lever up to open it.
624 Maintenance
Ink T anks
3. Hold the Ink T ank by the grips and remove it. Press the OK button.
Caution
•If there is still ink in the Ink T ank you removed, store it with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink
may leak and cause stains. Put the Ink T ank in a plastic bag and seal it.
Note
•Dispose of used ink tanks according to local regulations.
Install the ink tanks
1. Before opening the pouch, gently agitate the Ink T ank once or twice. Agitate the ink in the Ink
T ank by slowly rotating the Ink T ank upside-down and right side up repeatedly .
Caution
•Do not remove and agitate ink tanks that have already been installed in the printer . Ink may leak out.
Important
•If you do not agitate the Ink T ank , the ink may settle, which may af fect printing quality .
Maintenance 625
Ink T anks
2. Open the pouch and remove the Ink T ank .
Caution
•Never touch the ink holes or electrical contacts. This may cause stains, damage the Ink T ank ,
and af fect printing quality .
3. Press the OK button and insert the Ink T ank into the holder facing as shown, with the ink holes
down.
Important
•Ink tanks cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is incorrect.
If the Ink T ank does not t in the holder , do not force it into the holder . Make sure the color of the
Ink T ank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink T ank and check the orientation of the Ink T ank
before reloading it.
4. Push the Ink T ank Lock Lever closed until it clicks into place.
626 Maintenance
Ink T anks
5. Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red.
Note
•If the Ink Lamp is not lit, reload the tank.
6. Close the Ink T ank Cover .
Maintenance 627
Ink T anks
Checking Ink T ank Levels
On the Display Screen , you can check how much ink is left in the ink tanks.
T o check remaining Ink T ank levels, access the T ab Selection screen on the Control Panel and press ◄or
►to select the Ink tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
•If an error has occurred and the T ab Selection screen cannot be displayed, display Ink Info as follows.
1. Press the OK button to display Printer Info .
2. Press the ▲or ▼button to select Ink Info .
3. Press the OK button.
The remaining ink levels shown on the Display Screen correspond to the inks identied by the Color Label on
the bottom of the Display Screen .
These symbols may be displayed above the ink level: “!” if ink is low , “×” if no ink is left, and “?” if you have
deactivated ink level detection.
The remaining ink level is indicated as shown below .
If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Ink T ank , replace the Ink T ank . If a message is displayed
indicating to check the remaining ink levels, or after tasks that consume a lot of ink such as large-format
printing or head cleaning, check the remaining levels and replace Ink T ank as needed. ( → P .623 )
628 Maintenance
Ink T anks
When to Replace Ink T anks
Replace or prepare to replace ink tanks in the following situations.
If a message for checking the ink is shown on the Display Screen
When there is little ink left, the Message Lamp is lit and Not much ink is left. is shown on the Display
Screen . Y ou can continue to print, but prepare to replace the Ink T ank . ( → P .628)
Before print jobs and maintenance that consume a lot of ink
If little ink is left, there may not be enough for large-format printing, head cleaning, and maintenance, which
require a lot of ink. In this case, replace or prepare to replace the Ink T ank before maintenance.
If a message for ink replacement is shown on the Display Screen
When ink runs out, the Message Lamp ashes, a message regarding Ink T ank replacement is shown on the
Display Screen , and printing is disabled. Replace the Ink T ank at this point.
Maintenance 629
Printheads
Printheads
Printhead
A replacement Printhead .
•Printhead PF-04
Note
•For instructions on replacing the Printhead , see “Replacing the Printhead”. (→P .633)
Checking for Nozzle Clogging
If printing is faint or af fected by banding in dif ferent colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a
test pattern to check the nozzles.
Note
•Nozzles are periodically checked to ensure they are clear . Congure the settings on the Control Panel
menu in Nozzle Check . ( → P .49)
1. Load unused paper .
•Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (→P .103)
•Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P .106)
•Loading Sheets in the Printer (→P .136)
2. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select T est Print , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Nozzle Check , and then press the OK button.
The printer now prints a test pattern for checking the nozzles.
630 Maintenance
Printheads
6. Check the printing results.
If the horizontal lines are not faint or incomplete, the nozzles are clear .
If some sections of the horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, the nozzles for those colors
are clogged.
If horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, follow the steps below and check again for nozzle
clogging.
1. Clean the Printhead . ( → P .632)
2. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
Note
•If you repeat these steps several times but the horizontal lines are still faint or incomplete, contact
your Canon dealer .
Maintenance 631
Printheads
Cleaning the Printhead
If printing is faint, cleaning the Printhead may improve results.
Choose one of two Printhead cleaning modes ( Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B ), depending on
the problem to resolve.
•Head Cleaning A
Use this mode if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning consumes
the least amount of ink.
It takes about three minutes to complete.
•Head Cleaning B
Use this mode if no ink is ejected at all, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the problem.
It takes about three and a half minutes to complete.
Caution
•Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or ink tanks during either Head Cleaning A or Head
Cleaning B .
Note
•If printing does not improve after Head Cleaning B , try repeating Head Cleaning B once or twice. If this
still does not improve printing, the Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your
Canon dealer for assistance.
•Nozzles are periodically checked to ensure they are clear . Congure the settings on the Control Panel
menu in Nozzle Check . ( → P .49)
Perform cleaning as follows.
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Maintenance , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select Head Cleaning , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B , and then press the OK button.
Head cleaning is now executed.
6. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the
nozzles. ( → P .630 )
632 Maintenance
Printheads
Replacing the Printhead
When to replace the Printhead
Replace the Printhead in the following situations.
•If the printing quality does not improve even after one or two cycles of Head Cleaning B from the
printer menu
•If the Display Screen indicates Open top cover and replace the printhead.
•If your Canon dealer has advised you to replace the Printhead
Compatible printheads
For information on compatible printheads, see “Printhead”. (→P .630)
Precautions when handling the Printhead
T ake the following precautions when handling the Printhead .
Caution
•For safety , keep the Printhead out of the reach of children.
•If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately .
•Do not touch the Printhead immediately after printing. The Printhead becomes extremely hot, and
there is a risk of burns.
Important
•There may be ink around the nozzles of the Printhead you remove. Handle the Printhead carefully
during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.
•Do not open the Printhead pouch until immediately before installation. After removing the Printhead
from the pouch, install it right away . If the Printhead is left after the pouch is opened, the nozzles
may dry out, which may af fect printing quality .
Maintenance 633
Printheads
Access the menu for Printhead replacement
Caution
•When replacing the Printhead immediately after printing, wait a few minutes before replacing it. The
metal parts of the Printhead become hot during printing, and there is a risk of burns from touching
these parts.
Note
•Prepare a new Ink T ank when ink levels are low .
•Y our hands may become dirty during Printhead replacement. Use the gloves provided with the new
Printhead for replacement.
1. If the roll is not ejected because of the cutting method selected, cut it manually and remove it.
( → P .331)
2. Clean inside the T op Cover . ( → P .647)
3. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
4. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Maintenance , and then press the OK button.
6. Press ▲or ▼to select Replace P .head , and then press the OK button.
Ink is now lled.
After about two minutes, a message is shown on the Display Screen instructing you to open
the T op Cover .
634 Maintenance
Printheads
Replace the Printhead
1. Open the T op Cover .
Instructions are now shown on the Display Screen regarding Printhead replacement.
Important
•During Printhead replacement, do not move the Carriage from the position indicated. If you
accidentally move the Carriage , you will hear a warning tone, and Printhead replacement is no
longer possible.
If you move the Carriage by mistake, close the T op Cover . The Carriage will be moved to the
position as indicated.
2. If the Printhead Fixer Cover or Printhead Fixer Lever is dirty , use a damp cloth that you have
wrung out completely to wipe it clean.
Maintenance 635
Printheads
Important
•Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b). T ouching these parts may damage them.
•Never touch the metal contacts of the Carriage . This may damage the printer .
3. Pull the Printhead Fixer Lever forward all the way to open it completely .
4. Pull up the Printhead Fixer Cover to open it completely .
5. Remove the Printhead and press the OK button.
Note
•Dispose of the used Printhead in accordance with local regulations.
636 Maintenance
Printheads
6. Holding the new Printhead by the grips (a), remove it from the pouch.
Important
•When handling the Printhead , always hold it by the grips (a). Never touch the nozzles (b) or metal
contacts (c). This may damage the Printhead and af fect printing quality .
•Never touch the ink supply section (d). This may cause printing problems.
•If you need to put a Printhead somewhere temporarily before installation, do not keep the nozzles
and metal contacts facing down. If the nozzles or metal contacts are damaged, it may af fect the
printing quality .
7. While rmly holding the Printhead you have removed, use your other hand to remove the orange
Protective Part (a). Squeeze the grips (c) of Protective Part (b) and pull it down to remove it.
Important
•The inside surface of the Protective Part (a) and Protective Part (b) is coated with ink to protect the
nozzles. Be careful not to touch these surfaces when removing the caps.
•The Printhead contains ink to protect the nozzles. W e recommend removing Protective Part (b) as
you hold it over the Printhead package or safely out of the way to avoid spilling ink and staining your
clothes or the surrounding area. If ink accidentally spills, wipe of f the ink with a dry cloth.
•Do not reattach the Protective Part or protective material. Dispose of these materials in accordance
with local regulations.
Maintenance 637
Printheads
8. With the nozzles facing down and the metal contacts toward the back, insert the Printhead into
the Carriage . Carefully push the printhead rmly into the Carriage , ensuring that the nozzles
and metal contacts do not touch the carriage.
9. Pull the Printhead Fixer Cover down toward the front to lock the Printhead in place.
10. Push the Printhead Fixer Lever toward the back of the printer until it clicks.
1 1. Close the T op Cover .
Ink now lls the system. It takes about six minutes for ink to ll the system.
Important
•Never remove an Ink T ank while the system is lling with ink.
•After Printhead has been replaced and lled with ink, Head Posi. Adj. (Auto(Advanced) ) is
performed if you have selected Rep.P .head Print >On in the Control Panel menu. ( → P .49)
In this case, follow the instructions on the Display Screen for Printhead adjustment.
If Rep.P .head Print is Off , perform Head Posi. Adj. (Auto(Advanced) ) yourself. ( → P .604 )
638 Maintenance
Maintenance Cartridge
Maintenance Cartridge
Maintenance Cartridge
A replacement Maintenance Cartridge .
•Maintenance Cartridge MC-10
Note
•For instructions on replacing the Maintenance Cartridge , see “Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge”.
(→P .639)
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
Compatible maintenance cartridges
For information on compatible maintenance cartridges, see “Maintenance Cartridge”. (→P .639)
Precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge
T ake the following precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge .
Caution
•For safety , keep the Maintenance Cartridge out of the reach of children.
•If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately .
•T o prevent ink from leaking from a used Maintenance Cartridge , avoid dropping the cartridge or storing it
at an angle. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
•Ink adheres to the top of the Maintenance Cartridge after it has been used. Handle the Maintenance
Cartridge carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.
Important
•Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge except to replace it.
•Do not install a used Maintenance Cartridge in another printer .
Maintenance 639
Maintenance Cartridge
Make sure the printer is ready for Maintenance Cartridge replacement
Y ou can replace Maintenance Cartridge if the Display Screen advises you to check the remaining capacity
or replace the Maintenance Cartridge .
If a message is displayed requesting Maintenance Cartridge replacement, you can skip the step “Access the
menu for Maintenance Cartridge replacement.” Follow the instructions in “Replace the Maintenance Cartridge .”
Caution
•Do not replace the Maintenance Cartridge during initialization immediately after turning on the printer ,
during Printhead cleaning, or when ink is being absorbed. Ink may leak out.
Access the menu for Maintenance Cartridge replacement
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Maintenance , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select Repl. maint cart , and then press the OK button.
A message on the Display Screen advises you to open the Maintenance Cartridge Cover .
640 Maintenance
Maintenance Cartridge
Replace the Maintenance Cartridge
1. Open the box, remove the plastic bag and packaging material, and take out the Maintenance
Cartridge .
Important
•Never touch the metal contacts (a). This may damage the Maintenance Cartridge .
2. At this point, open the Maintenance Cartridge Cover .
3. Hold the used Maintenance Cartridge by the grip (a) with one hand and put your other hand
under the Maintenance Cartridge to hold it rmly on the bottom, keeping it level as you pull it out.
Caution
•Used maintenance cartridges are heavy . Always grasp the cartridge rmly and keep the cartridge
level during removal and storage. If you drop a used Maintenance Cartridge or store it at an angle,
ink may leak and cause stains.
Maintenance 641
Maintenance Cartridge
Important
•The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is recorded on each printer . Do not install a used
Maintenance Cartridge in another printer .
4. Keep the used Maintenance Cartridge level as you put it in the plastic bag. Expel excess air from
the plastic bag and seal the zipper .
5. Conrm the Maintenance Cartridge is right-side up, put it in the box with the packaging material
attached, and store it so that it stays level.
Caution
•Always put the used Maintenance Cartridge back in the box and store the box on a at surface.
Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
Note
•In accordance with active and ongoing environmental programs, Canon supports recycling of used
maintenance cartridges. Follow the instructions provided with the new Maintenance Cartridge that
describe how to process the used Maintenance Cartridge .
6. Keeping the new Maintenance Cartridge level, insert it all the way in.
642 Maintenance
Maintenance Cartridge
7. Close the Maintenance Cartridge Cover .
8. Press the OK button.
The printer now initializes the Maintenance Cartridge .
Maintenance 643
Maintenance Cartridge
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity
The Maintenance Cartridge absorbs excess ink from borderless printing, printhead cleaning, and other processes.
Y ou can conrm the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge by checking the Maintenance Cartridge
capacity shown on the Display Screen .
T o check remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity , access the T ab Selection screen on the Control Panel
and press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Maintenance Cartridge , replace the Maintenance Cartridge . If a
message is displayed indicating to check the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge , or before
tasks that deplete much of the capacity such as head cleaning or preparations to move the printer , check the
remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and replace the Maintenance Cartridge as needed. ( → P .639 )
644 Maintenance
Maintenance Cartridge
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge
Replace or prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge in the following situations.
If a message for checking the Maintenance Cartridge is shown on
the Display Screen
When the Maintenance Cartridge is almost full, the Message Lamp is lit and The level is low is shown on
the Display Screen . Y ou can continue to print, but check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and
prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one. ( → P .644)
When much of the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is depleted
Printhead cleaning, Printhead replacement, and preparations to transfer the printer deplete much of the
Maintenance Cartridge capacity . (In particular , preparing to move the printer depletes a lot of the capacity .)
Check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity before this maintenance and replace the Maintenance
Cartridge if necessary .
If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge replacement is shown on
the Display Screen
When the Maintenance Cartridge is full, the Message Lamp ashes and a message to replace the
Maintenance Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen . Printing is disabled, and you cannot replace the
Printhead or transfer the printer . Replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one.
Maintenance 645
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Printer Exterior
Clean the printer regularly to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.
T o ensure a comfortable working environment, clean the printer exterior about once a month.
1. T urn the printer of f. ( → P .24)
2. Unplug the power cord from the outlet.
Caution
•Always turn of f the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning or maintenance. Accidentally
leaving the printer on poses a risk of injury if you touch moving parts inside the printer .
3. Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely , wipe the exterior surfaces of the printer .
Dry the surfaces with a dry cloth.
Caution
•Never use ammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner . If these substances come into
contact with electrical components inside the printer , there is a risk of re or electrical shock.
Important
•If the Ejection Guide is dirty , it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. W e recommend
cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty , because it may actually be covered
with paper dust.
4. Plug the power cord into the outlet.
646 Maintenance
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning Inside the T op Cover
Clean inside the T op Cover about once a month to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.
Also clean inside the T op Cover in the following situations to ensure optimal operation.
•If the printed surface or the underside of paper is dirty after printing
•After you have used up a roll
•After borderless printing
•After printing on small paper
•After printing on paper that generates a lot of cutting debris
•If you have replaced the roll
•After printing on paper that generates a lot of paper dust
•After printing on adhesive paper
Important
•If the Platen inside the T op Cover becomes dirty , it may soil the underside of paper . W e recommend
cleaning the Platen after borderless printing or printing on small paper .
•If the Ejection Guide is dirty , it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. W e recommend
cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty , because it may actually be covered with
paper dust.
•Printing on adhesive paper may leave adhesive on the Platen , Paper Retainer , or other parts. T o
prevent paper jams, we recommend cleaning inside the T op Cover after printing.
1. Open the T op Cover .
2. If paper dust has accumulated in the V acuum holes (a) on the Platen or in the Borderless Printing
Ink Grooves (b), use the Cleaning Brush (c), provided with the printer , to wipe it away .
Note
•If the Cleaning Brush is dirty , rinse it in water .
Maintenance 647
Cleaning the Printer
3. Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely , wipe inside the T op Cover to clean it.
Wipe away any ink residue on the Platen as a whole (a), the Paper Retainer (b), Borderless
Printing Ink Grooves (c), and Ejection Guide (d).
Important
•Do not use a dry cloth to wipe inside the T op Cover . This may create a static charge, which may
attract dust and af fect the printing quality .
•Never use ammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner . If these substances come into
contact with electrical components inside the printer , there is a risk of re or electrical shock.
•Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).
648 Maintenance
Cleaning the Printer
Note
•When cleaning between the Platen and Ejection Guide , use a damp cloth that you have wrung out
completely to wipe over the Output T ray and along grooves.
4. Close the T op Cover .
Maintenance 649
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Printhead
If printing is faint, cleaning the Printhead may improve results.
Choose one of two Printhead cleaning modes ( Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B ), depending on
the problem to resolve.
•Head Cleaning A
Use this mode if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning consumes
the least amount of ink.
It takes about three minutes to complete.
•Head Cleaning B
Use this mode if no ink is ejected at all, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the problem.
It takes about three and a half minutes to complete.
Caution
•Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or ink tanks during either Head Cleaning A or Head
Cleaning B .
Note
•If printing does not improve after Head Cleaning B , try repeating Head Cleaning B once or twice. If this
still does not improve printing, the Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your
Canon dealer for assistance.
•Nozzles are periodically checked to ensure they are clear . Congure the settings on the Control Panel
menu in Nozzle Check . ( → P .49)
Perform cleaning as follows.
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Maintenance , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select Head Cleaning , and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B , and then press the OK button.
Head cleaning is now executed.
6. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the
nozzles. ( → P .630 )
650 Maintenance
Other Maintenance
Other Maintenance
Preparing to T ransfer the Printer
T o protect the internal parts in transit, always follow these steps before transferring the printer to a new location.
Refer to the Setup Guide for details on packing the printer and installing it after transfer .
Important
•Be sure to contact your Canon dealer before transferring the printer to a new location. Ink may leak and
damage the printer if you do not prepare the printer correctly and it is tipped or stood on end in transit.
Note
•It is not possible to prepare the printer for transfer if the Display Screen requests you to replace the
Maintenance Cartridge or check the remaining capacity . Replace the Maintenance Cartridge before
transfer preparations. In this case, you will need one new Maintenance Cartridge . ( → P .639)
•Depending on the state of the printer , part replacement may be necessary when preparing to transfer
the printer (that is, when you execute the printer menu item to prepare for transfer).
Remove paper
1. Remove the paper .
•Rolls ( → P .1 16)
•Sheets ( → P .144)
Access the Move Printer menu
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Prep.MovePrinter , and then press the OK button.
Once preparations are nished, a message on the Display Screen requests you to open the
Ink T ank Cover .
Important
•If consumables must be replaced, the message Consumables must be replaced. Call for service.
is shown on the Display Screen and preparation is not possible. If this message is displayed, press
the OK button and contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Maintenance 651
Other Maintenance
Remove the Ink T ank
1. Open the Ink T ank Cover .
2. Pressing the tip of the Ink T ank Lock Lever horizontally , lift the Ink T ank Lock Lever to release the
lock.
3. Holding the ink tanks by the grips, remove them.
Note
•Store the ink tanks you removed with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and
cause stains.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to remove all ink tanks.
5. Push all ink tank lock levers closed until they click into place.
652 Maintenance
Other Maintenance
6. Close the Ink T ank Cover .
At this point, ink is drawn out from inside the tubes.
Important
•Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge during this process.
When the process is nished, Completed! T urn Power Off!! is displayed.
Pack the printer
1. Press the Power button and turn of f the printer .
Important
•T urn of f the printer before you unplug it. It may damage the printer if you unplug it before it is of f
and transfer it in that state. If you accidentally unplug the printer , plug it in again, reinstall the ink
tanks, and follow this procedure again.
2. Disconnect the power cord and interface cable.
3. T ape down printer covers to secure them, in the reverse order of tape removal during installation.
4. Remove the Stand by reversing the installation procedure, when it was attached to the printer .
5. Disassemble and repackage the Stand by following the installation procedure in reverse.
6. Repack the Roll Holder , Holder Stopper , and printer in shipping materials, and then package
them in a shipping box.
Maintenance 653
Other Maintenance
Updating the Firmware
Update the printer rmware to take advantage of new and improved printer functions.
Conrming the rmware version
1. On the T ab Selection screen of the Control Panel , press ◄or ►to select the Settings/Adj.
tab ( ).
Note
•If the T ab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2. Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3. Press ▲or ▼to select Printer Info , and then press the OK button.
4. Press ▲or ▼to select System Info , and then press the OK button.
The rmware version is displayed.
Updating the Firmware
T o obtain the latest rmware, visit the Canon website. If the rmware available online is newer than the
installed rmware, update the printer rmware. For details on downloading and updating the rmware,
visit the Canon website.
654 Maintenance
Frequently Asked Questions
T roubleshooting
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked Questions
This section presents frequently asked questions and answers. T o view more detailed explanations, click the
hyperlinks in the answer column.
Question
Answer
How do I print on a roll? When printing on rolls, after loading the roll, specify the paper type and
length, both on the Control Panel and in the printer driver .
Þ" Loading and Printing on Rolls (→P .78) "
How do I print on a sheet? When printing on sheets, specify the paper type and size in the printer
driver before loading the paper .
Þ" Loading and Printing on Sheets (→P .81) "
How do I switch between
printing on rolls and sheets?
When you complete operations on the Control Panel to load or replace
paper , the paper source is automatically switched to the selected paper .
Þ" Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P .106) "
Þ" Loading Sheets in the Printer (→P .136) "
How do I change the paper
type or size?
Specify the type and size of paper , both on the Control Panel and in the
printer driver .
•Specifying it in the printer driver
Þ" Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (→P .197) "
•Specifying it on the Control Panel
Selecting the paper type
Þ" Changing the T ype of Paper (→P .1 10) "
Selecting the paper size
Þ" Specifying the Paper Length (→P .1 12) "
How do I cut the roll paper after
printing?
Y ou can wait until ink dries before cutting the roll, and you can cut rolls
at a desired position.
Þ" Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls (→P .129) "
How do I print without borders? Borderless printing is possible on rolls. Y ou can also specify borderless
printing in the printer driver by adjusting the original size to match the
paper size.
Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.
Þ" Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (→P .232) "
Þ" Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P .239) "
Þ" Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P .225) "
How do I print an A4 original
enlarged on A2 paper?
In the printer driver , you can adjust the original image to match the paper
size or width, or you can specify enlargement or reduction before printing
as desired.
Þ" Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (→P .201) "
Þ" Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P .207) "
Þ" Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling V alue (→P .213) "
T roubleshooting 655
Frequently Asked Questions
Question
Answer
How do I print without wasting
paper?
T o conserve paper , you can specify in the printer driver to rotate originals
90 degrees or to print without top and bottom margins.
Þ" Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P .301) "
Þ" Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without T op and Bottom
Margins (→P .307) "
How do I print without wasting
all the blank space on the right
side when printing an A4-sized
original at A3 size?
By specifying to rotate originals 90 degrees in the printer driver , you can
print at A4 size to ll the width of A3 paper .
Þ" Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P .301) "
How do I print in landscape (or
portrait) orientation?
Y ou can print originals that are in landscape (or portrait) orientation
automatically enlarged to t the roll width. This is an easy way to create
vertical or horizontal banners.
Þ" Printing V ertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing) (→P .253)
"
How do I print on a custom
paper size?
Y ou can specify custom sizes temporarily in the printer driver .
Þ" Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (→P .261) "
How do I register custom paper
sizes?
Y ou can add desired sizes (Custom Media Sizes) in the Size Options
dialog box of the printer driver .
Þ" Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (→P .261) "
How do I print lines thicker? By specifying Thicken Fine Lines in the printer driver , you can print ne
lines thicker to make them easier to see.
Þ" Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P .187) "
How do I modify how colors are
printed?
Y ou can adjust colors as desired in the printer driver before printing.
Þ" Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P .177) "
How do I use printer driver
settings again in subsequent
jobs?
By saving settings information in a favorite, you can apply the settings
again before printing anytime as needed.
Þ" Using Favorites (→P .327) "
Can I use the printer in
combination with a Color
imageRUNNER ?
The printer can be used for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned
originals from a Color imageRUNNER .
Þ" Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (Windows) (→P .432) "
Þ" Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (Mac OS X) (→P .555) "
How do I print enlargements of
scanned originals from a Color
imageRUNNER ?
By using Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy),
you can automatically print enlargements of scanned originals from a
Color imageRUNNER .
Þ" Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (Windows) (→P .432) "
Þ" Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (Mac OS X) (→P .555) "
656 T roubleshooting
Problems Regarding Paper
Problems Regarding Paper
Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)
Follow these steps to remove any scraps left in the Paper Feed Slot after you clear jammed sheets or roll paper .
1. T urn the printer of f. ( → P .24)
2. Push the Release Lever back.
3. Positioning your hands as shown, open the Roll Cover .
4. Fold an A4 sheet lengthwise four times and insert it through the gap of the Paper Feed Slot .
Push the scrap out toward the Platen .
5. Remove the scrap when it is pushed out onto the Platen .
6. If any scraps remain inside the paper feed slot, repeat steps 4 and 5.
T roubleshooting 657
Problems Regarding Paper
7. Holding it at the positions indicated, close the Roll Cover .
8. Pull the Release Lever forward.
658 T roubleshooting
Problems Regarding Paper
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper
If paper from a roll becomes jammed, Paper jam. is shown on the Display Screen of the Control Panel .
Remove the jammed paper as follows.
1. Open the Roll Cover . Use a commercially available cutter or the like to cut the paper of the
loaded roll.
Caution
•When cutting paper , be careful to avoid injury or damage to the printer .
2. Push the Release Lever back.
3. Remove the jammed paper .
•If paper is jammed inside the T op Cover
1. Open the T op Cover and move the Carriage to the left or right side manually , away from the jam.
2. Clear any jammed paper from inside the T op Cover .
After removing the paper , make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer .
T roubleshooting 659
Problems Regarding Paper
3. Close the T op Cover .
Important
•Do not move the Carriage over jammed paper . This may damage the Printhead .
•Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b). This may stain your hands and damage
the printer .
•If paper from a roll is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot
1. Open the Roll Cover .
2. Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot .
After removing the paper , make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer .
660 T roubleshooting
Problems Regarding Paper
•If the paper is jammed by the Ejection Guide
Remove the jammed paper from the Output T ray .
After removing the paper , make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer .
4. Pull the Release Lever forward.
T roubleshooting 661
Problems Regarding Paper
Clearing a Jammed Sheet
If a sheet becomes jammed, Paper jam. is shown on the Display Screen of the Control Panel . Remove
the jammed paper as follows.
1. Push the Release Lever back.
2. Remove the jammed paper .
•If paper is jammed inside the T op Cover
1. Open the T op Cover and move the Carriage to the left or right side manually , away from the jam.
2. Clear any jammed paper from inside the T op Cover .
After removing the paper , make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer .
3. Close the T op Cover .
662 T roubleshooting
Problems Regarding Paper
Important
•Do not move the Carriage over jammed paper . This may damage the Printhead .
•Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b). This may stain your hands and damage
the printer .
•If the paper is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot
Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot .
After removing the paper , make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer .
•If the paper is jammed by the Ejection Guide
Remove the jammed paper from the Output T ray .
After removing the paper , make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer .
T roubleshooting 663
Problems Regarding Paper
3. Pull the Release Lever forward.
664 T roubleshooting
Problems Regarding Paper
Roll Paper Cannot be Inserted into the Paper Feed Slot
Cause Corrective Action
The roll paper is warped. Straighten out curls and reload the roll.
Paper is jammed by the paper feed slot. Remove the jammed paper .
( → P .120)
( → P .145)
Cannot load sheets
Cause Corrective Action
The paper source selection is incorrect. Press the Load button and select the paper source.
Paper is not cut straight
Cause Corrective Action
The paper is bent or curled at the cut position. Straighten out any curling by the edges of the paper .
Paper rises by the ends of the cut position before
it is cut.
Reload the paper correctly .
Y ou are using paper that cannot be cut with the
Cutter Unit .
Specify Manual in Cutting Mode in the Control
Panel menu and use scissors or a cutting tool to cut
the roll after printing.
( → P .129)
Paper is not cut
Cause Corrective Action
In the printer driver , No or Print Cut Guideline is
specied in Auto Cut .
Specify Y es in Auto Cut in the printer driver .
In the Control Panel menu, Cutting Mode is set to
Eject or Manual .
If the Cutting Mode is Eject , press the Cut button to
cut the paper .
If the Cutting Mode is Manual , cut rolls with scissors
or the like.
Depression on the leading edge is left
Cause Corrective Action
Keeping a roll in the printer for a long time without
printing on it may leave a depression on the leading
edge.
When printing quality is most important, we
recommend setting T rimEdge Reload to On or
Automatic so that the paper edge is automatically
cut before printing.
( → P .35)
The size of clear lm cannot be detected
Cause Corrective Action
The Platen is soiled with ink or other substances. Open the T op Cover and clean the entire Platen .
( → P .647)
T roubleshooting 665
Problems Regarding Paper
Roll Paper is Continuously Ejected
Cause Corrective Action
Although sheets are selected as the paper source, a
roll was advanced.
After roll ejection stops, follow these steps to reload
the roll.
1. Push the Release Lever back.
2. Open the Roll Cover .
3. Using both hands, rotate the Roll Holder toward
the back to rewind the roll. At this time, ensure
that both ends of the roll are rewound evenly .
4. Pull the Release Lever forward.
5. Load the roll. At this time, be sure to press the
Load button and select Load Roll Paper .
( → P .106)
666 T roubleshooting
Printing does not start
Printing does not start
The Data Reception Lamp on the Control Panel does
not light up
Cause Corrective Action
The printer is not on. Make sure the power cord is securely plugged in, all the way . Press the
Power button to turn on the printer .
In Windows, select the printer by clicking Select Printer or Printer in
the printing dialog box and try printing again.
The printer is not selected in the
printer driver . (The printer is in
Sleep mode.)
In Mac OS X, select the printer by clicking Printer Setup Utility (or
Print Center ) and try printing again.
In Windows, restart the print job as follows.
1. Select the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or Printers )
window .
2. Clear Pause Printing in the File menu to restart the print job.
The print job is paused. (The
printer is in Sleep mode.)
In Mac OS X, restart the print job as follows.
1. Click Print & Fax . (This is identied as Printer Setup Utility in some
versions of Mac OS X.)
2. Select the printer , and then Start Jobs in the Printers menu to
restart the print job.
The printer does not respond even if print jobs are sent
Cause Corrective Action
In the Control Panel menu, Pause Print is On . Set Pause Print to Off .
( → P .94)
Ink Filling.. is displayed
Cause Corrective Action
The printer was forced of f during operation. W ait until the system has been lled with ink. This
process may take about seven and a half minutes.
The display screen indicates Agitating
Cause Corrective Action
Ink agitation is in progress. Please wait until ink agitation is nished.
The time for agitation varies depending on how long
the printer has been of f. (Between about 30 seconds
and two minutes.)
T roubleshooting 667
The printer stops during a print job
The printer stops during a print job
An error message is shown on the Display Screen
Status Corrective Action
An error message is displayed during printing. Check the error message and take action as
necessary .
(See "Error Messages.")
The last portion of roll paper was used during a print
job, and paper could not be advanced because the
trailing edge is taped to the roll.
Remove the used roll and insert a new roll.
( → P .1 16)
( → P .1 18)
( → P .78)
The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper
Status Corrective Action
The leading edge of the roll paper was cut to
straighten it.
The leading edge of rolls may be cut to straighten
it if you have selected T rim Edge First >On or
Automatic in the Control Panel menu.
( → P .133)
The Printhead nozzles are clogged. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and make
sure the Printhead is in good condition for printing.
( → P .630)
A print job was received from an incompatible printer
driver .
Use the correct imagePROGRAF printer driver for
the printer and try printing again.
The printer has received print data that includes HP
R TL commands when Auto Rotate is On in the
Control Panel menu.
In the Control Panel , set Auto Rotate to Off and
print again.
( → P .49)
The printer is damaged. Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the
carriage stops moving)
Cause Corrective Action
The printer is analyzing the print job. Please wait a while until printing is nished.
A job was printed when Input Resolution in the
Control Panel menu was set to 600dpi .
In the Control Panel menu, set Input Resolution to
300dpi and print again.
( → P .49)
668 T roubleshooting
Problems with the printing quality
Problems with the printing quality
Printing is faint
Cause Corrective Action
Y ou may be printing on the wrong side of the paper . Print on the printing surface.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if
they are clogged.
( → P .630)
Because the printer was left without ink tanks
installed for some time, ink has become clogged in
the ink supply system.
After the ink tanks have been installed for 24 hours,
run Head Cleaning B from the Control Panel .
( → P .632)
Paper is jammed inside the T op Cover . Follow the steps below to remove the jammed piece
of paper inside the T op Cover .
1. Open the T op Cover and make sure the Carriage
is not over the Platen .
2. Remove any scraps of paper inside the T op Cover .
( → P .120)
( → P .145)
3. Close the T op Cover .
The ink was not dry when paper was cut. Specify a longer drying period in the Control Panel
menu, in Paper Details >Roll DryingT ime .
( → P .49)
Printing may be faint if Print Quality in Advanced
Settings in the printer driver is set to Standard or
Draft .
In Advanced Settings of the printer driver , choose
Highest or High in Print Quality .
Printing in Draft or Standard mode is faster and
consumes less ink than in Highest or High modes,
but the printing quality is lower .
( → P .187)
T roubleshooting 669
Problems with the printing quality
Paper rubs against the Printhead
Cause Corrective Action
Load paper of the same type as you have specied
in the printer driver .
( → P .106)
( → P .136)
The type of paper specied in the printer driver does
not match the type loaded in the printer .
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer .
1. Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
Paper has been loaded incorrectly , causing it to
wrinkle.
Reload the paper .
( → P .106)
( → P .136)
The Printhead is set too low in the Control Panel
menu.
In the Control Panel menu, set Head Height to
Automatic .
( → P .61 1)
When printing on Heavyweight Coated Paper or
other paper-based media, choose a V acuumStrngth
setting of Strong or Strongest in the Control Panel
menu. If the paper still rubs, set Head Height to
Highest in the Control Panel menu.
( → P .621)
( → P .61 1)
When printing on CAD T racing Paper or other
lm-based media, choose a V acuumStrngth setting
of Standard ,Strong , or Strongest in the Control
Panel menu. If the paper still rubs, set Head Height
to Highest in the Control Panel menu.
( → P .621)
( → P .61 1)
Y ou are printing on heavyweight paper or paper that
curls or wrinkles easily after absorbing ink.
When printing on paper 0.1 mm (0.004 in) thick or
less, choose a V acuumStrngth setting of W eakest
in the Control Panel menu. If the paper still rubs, set
Head Height to Highest in the Control Panel menu.
( → P .621)
( → P .61 1)
When you have loaded paper , the paper you have
loaded does not match the type selected on the
Control Panel .
Be sure to select the correct type of paper in the
Control Panel menu when loading paper .
( → P .106)
( → P .136)
670 T roubleshooting
Problems with the printing quality
The edges of the paper are dirty
Cause Corrective Action
The Platen has become dirty after borderless printing
or printing on small paper .
Open the T op Cover and clean the Platen .
( → P .647)
Make sure the same type of paper is specied on the
printer as in the printer driver .
( → P .1 10)
The type of paper as specied on the printer does not
match the type specied in the printer driver .
Make sure the same paper type is specied in the
printer driver as on the printer .
1. Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
The paper is wrinkled or warped. Straighten out the wrinkles or curls and reload the
paper . Do not use paper that has been printed on
previously .
( → P .106)
( → P .136)
A cut line is printed because CutDustReduct. is On
in the Control Panel menu to reduce cutting dust.
If this function is not needed, set CutDustReduct. to
Off in the Control Panel menu.
( → P .49)
The Printhead is set too low in the Control Panel
menu.
In the Control Panel menu, set Head Height to
Automatic .
( → P .61 1)
When printing on Heavyweight Coated Paper or
other paper-based media, choose a V acuumStrngth
setting of Strong or Strongest in the Control Panel
menu. If the paper still rubs, set Head Height to
Highest in the Control Panel menu.
( → P .621)
( → P .61 1)
Y ou are printing on heavyweight paper or paper that
curls or wrinkles easily after absorbing ink.
When printing on CAD T racing Paper or other
lm-based media, choose a V acuumStrngth setting
of Standard ,Strong , or Strongest in the Control
Panel menu. If the paper still rubs, set Head Height
to Highest in the Control Panel menu.
( → P .621)
( → P .61 1)
The Ejection Guide is soiled. Clean the Ejection Guide .
( → P .646)
T roubleshooting 671
Problems with the printing quality
The surface of the paper is dirty
Cause Corrective Action
The Paper Retainer is soiled. Clean the Paper Retainer .
( → P .647)
In the Control Panel menu, set Roll DryingT ime to
at least 1 min.
( → P .49)
Y ou are using a paper that does not dry easily .
When paper that does not dry easily is used for
printing, it may curl during printing and touch the
Output T ray .
In this case, in the Control Panel menu, set Scan
W ait T ime to an option other than Off .
However , note that printing will now take longer .
( → P .49)
The back side of the paper is dirty
Cause Corrective Action
The Platen has become dirty after borderless printing
or printing on small paper .
Open the T op Cover and clean the Platen .
( → P .647)
Set W idth Detection to On in the Control Panel
menu, and then open the T op Cover and clean the
Platen .
( → P .647)
The Platen has become soiled because you have set
W idth Detection to Off in the Control Panel menu.
Open the T op Cover and clean the Platen . After this,
manually advance the roll onto the Platen before
printing.
( → P .647)
( → P .125)
The Paper Retainer is soiled. Clean the Paper Retainer .
( → P .647)
672 T roubleshooting
Problems with the printing quality
Printed colors are inaccurate
Cause Corrective Action
Color adjustment has not been activated in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver .
In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver ,
access Color Settings in Color Mode to adjust
colors.
Refer to the computer and monitor documentation
to adjust the colors.
Colors have not been adjusted on the computer or
monitor .
Adjust the settings of the color management software,
referring to the software documentation as needed.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if
they are clogged.
( → P .630)
In the Windows printer driver , Application Color
Matching Priority is not selected.
Click Special Settings on the Layout sheet of the
printer driver and select Application Color Matching
Priority in the dialog box.
Printhead characteristics gradually change through
repeated use, and colors may change.
Adjust the Printhead alignment.
( → P .604)
( → P .606)
Color may change slightly even on the same model
of printer if you use a dif ferent version of the rmware
or printer driver , or when you print under dif ferent
settings or in a dif ferent printing environment.
Follow these steps to prepare the printing
environment.
1. Use the same version of rmware or printer driver .
2. Specify the same value for all settings items.
T roubleshooting 673
Problems with the printing quality
Banding in different colors occurs
Cause Corrective Action
The paper feed amount is out of adjustment. Adjust the feed amount.
( → P .612)
Printing does not proceed smoothly because print
jobs are interrupted during transmission.
Exit other applications and cancel other print jobs.
In the Control Panel menu, Adj. Priority is set to
Print Length .
Setting Adj. Priority to Print Quality in the Control
Panel menu and adjusting the feed amount may
improve results.
( → P .612)
The Printhead is out of alignment. Adjust the Printhead alignment.
( → P .604)
The Printhead nozzles are clogged. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if
they are clogged.
( → P .630)
Streaks may occur if you set the Print Quality too
low .
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver and try
printing again.
Printing in Draft or Standard mode is faster and
consumes less ink than in Highest or High modes,
but the printing quality is lower .
( → P .187)
Load paper of the same type as you have specied
in the printer driver .
( → P .106)
( → P .136)
The type of paper specied in the printer driver does
not match the type loaded in the printer .
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer .
1. Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
674 T roubleshooting
Problems with the printing quality
Colors in printed images are uneven
Cause Corrective Action
Line Drawing/T ext is selected when printing images
in many solid colors.
In Print Priority in the Advanced Settings of the
printer driver , choose Image .
Y ou are printing on paper that curls easily . Printed colors may appear uneven on the leading
edge of paper that is susceptible to curling. Select a
stronger level in V acuumStrngth in the Control Panel
menu to increase suction against the paper , and
specify a trailing margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) or more.
( → P .621)
Printed colors may be uneven if you set the Print
Quality too low .
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver .
Printing in Draft or Standard mode is faster and
consumes less ink than in Highest or High modes,
but the printing quality is lower .
( → P .187)
Color may be uneven between dark and light image
areas.
Select Unidirectional Printing in the Advanced
Settings of the printer driver .
Specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver before
printing. In this case, the paper can be printed without
borders on the left and right sides only . Cut the
printed document ejected from the printer , then use
scissors to cut away the edges on the top and bottom.
When borderless printing is used, the edge of the
paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
slightly uneven at the edges.
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver .
( → P .187)
The Printhead is out of alignment. Adjust the Printhead alignment.
( → P .604)
Allowing printed documents to dry on top of each
other may cause uneven colors.
T o avoid uneven colors, we recommend drying each
sheet separately .
Density may be uneven if you use Glossy Paper or
Coated Paper .
In Advanced Settings of the printer driver , choose
Highest or High in Print Quality .
Load paper of the same type as you have specied
in the printer driver .
( → P .106)
( → P .136)
The type of paper specied in the printer driver does
not match the type loaded in the printer .
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer .
1. Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
T roubleshooting 675
Problems with the printing quality
Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs
Cause Corrective Action
The Platen suction is too strong. In the Control Panel menu, set V acuumStrngth to
W eakest .
( → P .621)
The Printhead is set too high in the Control Panel
menu.
In the Control Panel menu, set Head Height to
Lowest .
( → P .61 1)
Load paper of the same type as you have specied
in the printer driver .
( → P .106)
( → P .136)
The type of paper specied in the printer driver does
not match the type loaded in the printer .
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer .
1. Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
The contrast becomes uneven during printing
Cause Corrective Action
The paper feed amount is out of adjustment. Adjust the feed amount.
( → P .612)
Load paper of the same type as you have specied
in the printer driver .
( → P .106)
( → P .136)
The type of paper specied in the printer driver does
not match the type loaded in the printer .
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer .
1. Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
676 T roubleshooting
Problems with the printing quality
The length of printed images is inaccurate in the feeding
direction
Cause Corrective Action
In the Control Panel menu, Adj. Priority is set to
Print Quality .
Set Adj. Priority to Print Length in the Control
Panel menu, and then execute Adjust Length .
( → P .612)
Load paper of the same type as you have specied
in the printer driver .
( → P .106)
( → P .136)
The type of paper specied in the printer driver does
not match the type loaded in the printer .
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer .
1. Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
Images are printed crooked
Cause Corrective Action
In the Control Panel menu, Skew Check Lv . is set to
Loose or Off .
In the Control Panel menu, set Skew Check Lv . to
Standard .
In the Control Panel menu, W idth Detection is set
to Off .
Set W idth Detection to On in the Control Panel
menu.
Documents are printed in monochrome
Cause Corrective Action
In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver ,
Monochrome ,Monochrome (BK ink) , or
Monochrome Bitmap is specied in Color Mode .
In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver ,
specify Color in Color Mode and try printing again.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged. Print a test pattern to check the color ink nozzles and
see if they are clogged.
( → P .630)
T roubleshooting 677
Problems with the printing quality
Line thickness is not uniform
Cause Corrective Action
In the Special Settings dialog box of the Windows
printer driver , Fast Graphic Process is selected.
Access the printer driver Properties dialog box from
Print in the File menu of the source application, and
follow these steps to print.
1. Clear the option Open Preview When Print Job
Starts on the Main sheet.
2. Clear the option Page Layout on the Layout
sheet.
3. Click the Special Settings button in the Layout
sheet to open the Special Settings dialog
box, and remove the check from Fast Graphic
Process .
Load paper of the same type as you have specied
in the printer driver .
( → P .106)
( → P .136)
The type of paper specied in the printer driver does
not match the type loaded in the printer .
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer .
1. Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
Lines are misaligned
Cause Corrective Action
The Printhead alignment is not adjusted. Adjust the Printhead alignment.
( → P .604)
( → P .606)
( → P .608)
Load paper of the same type as you have specied
in the printer driver .
( → P .106)
( → P .136)
The type of paper specied in the printer driver does
not match the type loaded in the printer .
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer .
1. Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
Problems with the printing quality caused by the type
of paper
For paper-specic troubleshooting tips to improve the printing quality , refer to the Paper Reference Guide .
( → P .95 )
678 T roubleshooting
Cannot print over a network
Cannot print over a network
Cannot connect the printer to the network
Cause Corrective Action
The Ethernet cable is not connected
correctly to the printer ’ s Ethernet port.
1. Make sure the printer is connected to the network with the correct
Ethernet cable, and then turn the printer on. For instructions on
connecting the cable, refer to the Setup Guide .
2. Make sure the Link indicator is lit.
The bottom indicator is green if the printer is connected via
1000Base-T , while the top indicator is orange if connected via
100Base-TX and the top indicator is green if connected via
10Base-T .
If the Link indicator is not lit, check the following points.
•Make sure the hub is on.
•Make sure the end of the Ethernet cable is connected
correctly .
Insert the Ethernet cable until it clicks and locks in place.
•Make sure there is no problem with the Ethernet cable.
If there is any problem, replace the Ethernet cable.
•Check the communication mode with the hub.
Although the printer normally detects the hub
communication mode and transmission rate automatically
(in auto negotiation mode), sometimes the hub settings
cannot be detected. In this case, congure the connection
method manually , specifying the communication mode in
use.
( → P .578)
Cannot print over a TCP/IP network
Cause Corrective Action
The printer ’ s IP address is not congured correctly . Make sure the printer ’ s IP address is congured
correctly .
( → P .564)
( → P .565)
The printer ’ s TCP/IP network settings are not
congured correctly .
Make sure the printer ’ s TCP/IP network settings are
congured correctly .
( → P .570)
The computer you are trying to print from is not
congured correctly .
Make sure the computer ’ s TCP/IP network settings
are congured correctly .
( → P .581)
( → P .600)
T roubleshooting 679
Cannot print over a network
Cannot print over a NetW are network
Cause Corrective Action
The printer ’ s NetW are settings are not congured
correctly .
Make sure the printer ’ s NetW are settings are
congured correctly . In particular , make sure a valid
frame type is selected.
( → P .575)
The computer you are trying to print from is not
congured correctly .
Make sure the computer ’ s NetW are settings are
congured correctly .
( → P .593)
The NetW are server and services are not congured
correctly .
Check the following points.
1. Make sure the NetW are le server is running.
2. Make sure there is enough free disk space on the
NetW are le server . Insuf cient disk space may
prevent you from processing large print jobs.
3. Start NW ADMIN or PCONSOLE and conrm that
the print service is congured correctly and the
print queue is available.
4. If data transmission to a printer on another subnet
fails, deactivate NCP burst mode in that printer ’ s
network protocol settings.
5. If the printer is used in queue server mode, specify
“Other/Unknown” as the printer type.
Cannot print over AppleT alk or Bonjour networks
Cause Corrective Action
The AppleT alk protocol is not enabled on the printer . Activate AppleT alk on the printer .
( → P .574)
The computer you are trying to print from is not
congured correctly .
Make sure the computer ’ s AppleT alk settings are
congured correctly .
( → P .598)
( → P .602)
The computer and printer are not on the same
network.
Due to the nature of Bonjour , you cannot print if
the printer is on another network behind a router .
Make sure the computer and printer are on the same
network. For information about network settings, ask
your network administrator .
680 T roubleshooting
Installation problems
Installation problems
Removing Installed Printer Drivers
Follow these steps to remove installed printer drivers and utilities.
Removing printer drivers (W indows)
Remove the printer driver as follows.
Note
•In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows V ista/Windows Server 2008, you must
log on with administrative rights, such as those of the “Administrator” account.
1. From the Windows start menu, select Programs >Canon Printer Uninstaller
>imagePROGRAF Printer Driver Uninstaller to display the Delete Printer window .
2. Select the printer in the list and click Delete .
3. Click Y es after the W arning message is displayed.
4. Make sure that the printer has been removed from the list, and then click Exit .
Removing printer drivers and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Macintosh)
Remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF Printmonitor as follows.
1. Insert the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer in the CD-ROM drive.
2. Start the printer driver installer included in the User Software CD-ROM .
Open the OS X folder and double-click iPF Driver Installer X .
3. In the upper left menu, choose Uninstall , and then click Uninstall .
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF
Printmonitor .
Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (W indows)
Remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor as follows.
1. From the Windows start menu, select Programs >imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
>Uninstaller (imagePROGRAF Status Monitor) to start the wizard.
2. In the wizard window , click Delete , and then click Next .
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor .
Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (W indows)
Remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility as follows.
1. From the Windows start menu, select Programs >imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
>Uninstaller (imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility) to start the wizard.
2. In the wizard window , click Delete , and then click Next .
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .
T roubleshooting 681
HP-GL/2 problems
HP-GL/2 problems
W ith HP-GL/2, printing is misaligned
Cause Corrective Action
The plotter origin is incorrect. Check the printing commands.
The Margin setting in the Control Panel menu is
incorrect.
Adjust the Margin setting values in the Control Panel
menu.
Lines or images are missing in printed HP-GL/2 jobs.
Cause Corrective Action
The memory is full. Check the size of the data in the print job.
An HP-GL/2 command not supported by this printer
was received.
Check the print job and settings.
The printer has received print data that includes HP
R TL commands when Auto Rotate is On in the
Control Panel menu.
In the Control Panel , set Auto Rotate to Off and
print again.
( → P .49)
Lines are printed too thick or thin in HP-GL/2 print jobs
Cause Corrective Action
The W idth setting in the Control Panel menu is
incorrect.
Check the W idth setting value specied for Pen
no. in Palette A or Palette B in the Control
Panel menu. If ne lines are printed faintly , setting
ThickenFineLines to On will print the lines more
distinctly .
( → P .49)
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed in monochrome (or color)
Cause Corrective Action
The Color Mode setting in the Control Panel menu
is incorrect.
Check the Color Mode setting in the Control Panel
menu.
( → P .49)
However , for optimal Printhead performance, the
printer consumes trace amounts of color ink even
when Monochrome is selected as Color Mode .
Printed colors of lines are inaccurate during HP-GL/2
printing
Cause Corrective Action
AdjustFaintLines is On in the Control Panel menu. Setting AdjustFaintLines to Off in the Control
Panel menu may help produce the expected results.
However , lines in some colors may appear broken.
682 T roubleshooting
HP-GL/2 problems
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed 6 mm larger than specied
Cause Corrective Action
The page size of the HP-GL/2 print job, as created in
the source application, is incorrect.
In the Control Panel menu, set PageSizeProcess1
to On .
( → P .49)
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed at maximum size, even if a
standard size is specied
Cause Corrective Action
The page size of the HP-GL/2 print job, as created in
the source application, is incorrect.
In the Control Panel menu, set PageSizeProcess2
or Conserve Paper to On .
The layout will be changed to the optimal layout.
( → P .49)
HP-GL/2 printing takes a long time
Cause Corrective Action
Large print jobs with a lot of data take longer to print. Please wait a while until printing is nished.
A job was printed when Input Resolution in the
Control Panel menu was set to 600dpi .
In the Control Panel menu, set Input Resolution to
300dpi and print again.
( → P .49)
Replotting with HP-GL/2 jobs is not possible.
Cause Corrective Action
The data was lost because of replotting. Data for replotting is lost after the following
operations. In this case, send the print job again.
•The memory buf fer was cleared from the Control
Panel .
•The printer was turned of f.
•The printer has received a new HP-GL/2 print job.
•Printing has been canceled
The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the
carriage stops moving)
Cause Corrective Action
The printer is analyzing the print job. Please wait a while until printing is nished.
A job was printed when Input Resolution in the
Control Panel menu was set to 600dpi .
In the Control Panel menu, set Input Resolution to
300dpi and print again.
( → P .49)
T roubleshooting 683
Other problems
Other problems
The printer does not go on
Cause Corrective Action
The printer is unplugged. Plug the power cord into the outlet, and then turn on
the printer .
The specied voltage is not supplied. Check the voltage of the outlet and breaker .
Use a power source that conforms to the printer
specications.
( → P .71)
684 T roubleshooting
Other problems
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound
Cause Corrective Action
The printer makes a sound during
operation.
The following sounds do not indicate a problem with the printer .
•There is a sound of suction from the Platen
T o prevent paper from rising, paper is held against the Platen by
suction from V acuum holes under it.
•There is a sound when a dif ferent size of paper is used and when
the Carriage goes from side to side
When paper of a dif ferent size is used, a valve is automatically
activated to switch the area for paper suction, which may make a
sound. This mechanism prevents suction from V acuum holes where
there is no paper .
In addition, ink is ejected in sync with the movement of the Carriage
back and forth to ensure optimal ink ow . At this time, the valve
automatically switches the area for paper suction, which may make
a sound.
•Roll paper makes a uttering sound during printing
There may be a uttering sound when large paper is advanced.
•If you suddenly hear the tone for cleaning operations
At regular intervals, for printer maintenance, cleaning operations will
begin automatically , even if the printer is in Sleep mode.
•If you suddenly hear the tone for ink agitation
At regular intervals, to ensure optimal printing quality , the ink is
agitated automatically , even if the printer is in Sleep mode. Ink
agitation takes about 30 seconds.
The ink is also agitated automatically under the following conditions.
Note that other operations are not possible while Agitating is
displayed on the control panel.
•After the printer is turned on. (The time for agitation varies
depending on how long the printer was of f-between about 30
seconds and two minutes.)
•After data transmission. (After about a minute and a half,
printing operations begin. However , printing may start later
after data reception, depending on the size of print data.)
•After ink tank replacement. (Ink agitation takes about three
and a half minutes.)
In other cases, contact your Canon dealer .
T roubleshooting 685
Other problems
Messages advising to check the maintenance cartridge
are not cleared
Cause Corrective Action
Remove the new Maintenance Cartridge you have
just installed and insert it again rmly .
The printer has not detected the new Maintenance
Cartridge that was used to replace the old one.
Restart the printer .
The printer consumes a lot of ink
Cause Corrective Action
Many full-page color images are printed. In print jobs such as photos, images are lled with
color . This consumes a lot of ink. This does not
indicate a problem with the printer .
Head Cleaning B in the Control Panel menu is
executed frequently .
Head Cleaning B in the Control Panel menu
consumes a lot of ink. This does not indicate a
problem with the printer . Unless the printer has
been moved or stored for a long period or you are
troubleshooting Printhead problems, we recommend
not performing Head Cleaning B , to the extent
possible.
Y ou have just nished initial installation, when more
ink is consumed to ll the system.
After initial installation or at the rst-time use after
transfer , ink ows into the system between the Ink
T ank and Printhead , which may cause the ink level
indicators to drop to 80%. This does not indicate a
problem with the printer .
The Printhead nozzles are clogged. Check for nozzle clogging.
( → P .630)
686 T roubleshooting
Other problems
Ink Level Detection
Ink level detection will be deactivated if you load ink tanks once emptied.
Ink level detection
Ink tanks specied for this printer feature an ink level detection function to prevent the ink from running out
during printing, which prevents printer damage. ( → P .622)
This function will not work correctly if you use rell ink tanks. As a result, printing stops. Thus, before using
rell ink tanks, you must cancel the ink level detection.
Printing with the ink level detection canceled may lead to printer damage and printing problems. Canon Inc.
is not liable for any damage that may occur as a result of relling ink.
Caution
•After ink level detection has been released, this function cannot be reactivated for currently loaded Ink
T ank . T o use ink level detection again, replace the Ink T ank with new ones specied for use with
the printer .
•Repeatedly removing and inserting an Ink T ank may damage the connection between the Ink T ank and
the printer , which may cause ink leakage from the Ink T ank and damage the printer .
Releasing ink level detection
1. On the Display Screen , a message indicates that the ink level cannot be detected. After checking
the message, press the ►button.
2. Press ▲or ▼to select Information , and then press the OK button.
3. A conrmation message is shown on the Display Screen about releasing ink level detection.
After checking the message, press the ►button.
4. After checking the message, press the ►button.
T roubleshooting 687
Other problems
5. Press ▲or ▼to select Y es , and then press the OK button.
6. Check the message and press the ►button.
7. Check the message and press the ►button.
8. Press ▲or ▼to select Y es , and then press the OK button.
9. A conrmation message about updating ink information is shown on the Display Screen . After
checking the message, press the ►button.
10. Press ▲or ▼to select Y es , and then press the OK button.
Ink level detection is now released.
688 T roubleshooting
Messages regarding paper
Error Message
Messages regarding paper
MediaT ype Mismatch
Cause Corrective Action
When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel menu
is set to Pause , the type of paper loaded does not
match the type specied in the printer driver .
Follow these steps to ensure the paper type matches
on the printer and in the printer driver .
1. Press ▲or ▼to select Stop Printing , and then
press the OK button.
2. Either change the type of paper specied in the
printer driver settings or replace the loaded paper
and change the paper type setting on the printer .
( → P .78)
( → P .81)
When printing a test pattern for adjustment, use
sheets of the same type of paper , in the required
quantity . Replace the paper as follows and perform
adjustment again.
1. Press ▲or ▼to select Stop Printing , and then
press the OK button.
2. Replace the paper .
( → P .81)
3. Execute adjustment again from the control panel
menu.
Y ou tried to print a test pattern for printer adjustment
on several sheets, but sheets of dif ferent types of
paper were used.
Press ▲or ▼to select Print , and then press the OK
button to resume printing.
However , note that this error may cause paper jams
and af fect the printing quality .
When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel menu
is set to W arning , the type of paper loaded does not
match the type specied in the printer driver .
Y ou can continue to print, but note that this error may
cause problems in the printing results.
Error Message 689
Messages regarding paper
The paper is too small.
Cause Corrective Action
Press ▲or ▼to select Print , and then press the OK
button to resume printing.
However , note that this error may cause paper jams
and af fect the printing quality .
Adjust the paper size setting in the printer driver to
match the size loaded in the printer as follows.
1. Press ▲or ▼to select Stop Printing , and then
press the OK button.
2. Change the paper size setting in the printer driver
to the size loaded in the printer and try printing
again.
When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel menu
is set to Pause , paper smaller than the size specied
in the printer driver is loaded.
Replace the loaded paper with paper of a size that
matches the size setting in the printer driver as
follows.
1. Press ▲or ▼to select Change Paper , and then
press the OK button to stop printing.
2. Replace the loaded paper to match the paper
width setting in the printer driver and try printing
again.
When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel menu is
set to W arning , paper smaller than the size specied
in the printer driver is loaded.
Y ou can continue to print, but note that this error may
cause problems in the printing results.
690 Error Message
Messages regarding paper
The paper is too small.
Replace paper with A4/L TR (vertical) or larger
Cause Corrective Action
Replace the paper with paper of A4/Letter (vertical)
size or larger as follows.
1. Press ▲or ▼to select Change Paper , press the
OK button, and remove the paper .
( → P .144)
2. Switch to paper A4/Letter (vertical) or larger .
( → P .81)
The printer will resume printing.
The loaded paper is too small.
Press ▲or ▼to select Stop Printing , and then
press the OK button.
Replace roll with 10 in. wide or larger roll.
Cause Corrective Action
Replace the roll with a roll 10 inches in width or larger
as follows.
1. Press ▲or ▼to select Change Paper , and then
press the OK button.
( → P .1 16)
( → P .1 18)
2. Replace the roll with a roll 10 inches wide or larger .
( → P .103)
( → P .106)
The printer will resume printing.
The loaded paper is too small.
Press ▲or ▼to select Stop Printing , and then
press the OK button.
Remove paper and check pap. size
Cause Corrective Action
A sheet has come out of the printer during printing.
1. Press the Release Lever back and remove the
paper .
2. Reload the sheet, aligning it with the guide on the
right.
3. Pull the Release Lever forward.
4. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen ,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
( → P .136)
Error Message 691
Messages regarding paper
PaprW idth Mismatch
Cause Corrective Action
Press ▲or ▼to select Print , and then press the OK
button to resume printing.
However , note that this error may cause paper jams
and af fect the printing quality .
Press ▲or ▼to select Stop Printing , and then
press the OK button.
Follow these steps to replace the roll to match the
width specied in the printer driver .
1. Press ▲or ▼to select Change Paper , and then
press the OK button.
( → P .1 16)
( → P .1 18)
2. Replace the paper with paper compatible for
borderless printing.
( → P .103)
( → P .106)
The printer now starts printing the print job.
When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel menu is
set to Pause or W arning , the width of the loaded roll
does not match the width specied in Fit Roll Paper
W idth in the printer driver .
Make sure the roll width selected in the dialog box
displayed when you select Fit Roll Paper W idth in
the printer driver matches the width of the roll loaded
in the printer , and then try printing again.
692 Error Message
Messages regarding paper
Paper size not detected.
Cause Corrective Action
Follow these steps to reload the roll.
1. Push the Release Lever back.
2. Adjust the right edge of the roll to make it parallel
to the orange Paper Alignment Line .
3. Pull the Release Lever forward.
4. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen ,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
( → P .106)
If this error recurs after you reload the roll, remove
the Roll Holder from the printer , push the roll rmly in
until it touches the Roll Holder ange, and reload the
Roll Holder in the printer .
( → P .103)
Paper has been loaded askew , or warped paper has
been loaded.
Follow these step to reload a sheet.
1. Push the Release Lever back.
2. Load the sheet, aligning it with the guide on the
right.
3. Pull the Release Lever forward.
4. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen ,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
( → P .136)
Because the Platen is soiled with ink or other
substances, the size of the clear lm cannot be
detected.
Open the T op Cover and clean the entire Platen .
( → P .647)
Error Message 693
Messages regarding paper
Insufcient paper for job
Cause Corrective Action
Press ▲or ▼to select Print , and then press the OK
button to resume printing.
However , the roll paper may run out during the
print job and you may not be able to print all of the
document.
The printer has received a print job longer than the
amount of roll paper left when ManageRemainRoll
in the Control Panel menu is On .
Press ▲or ▼to select Change Paper , and then
press the OK button to stop printing.
Either change the printer driver Paper Source setting
or the GL2 Settings >Paper Source setting in the
printer menu or replace the roll with a roll that has
enough paper for the print job, and then try printing
again.
( → P .1 16)
( → P .106)
This paper cannot be used.
Cause Corrective Action
Paper smaller than the printer ’ s minimum supported
size has been loaded.
Push the Release Lever back and load paper of the
correct size.
( → P .100)
Paper has been loaded that is too small to print
the test pattern for printhead adjustment or nozzle
checking.
Push the Release Lever back and load unused paper
of A4 size or larger . More than one sheet may be
required depending on the adjustment.
Roll printing is selected.
Cause Corrective Action
Press ▲or ▼to select Load Roll Paper , and then
press the OK button. Load the roll, and then print.
( → P .103)
( → P .106)
Y ou have attempted to print a test print sheet or
other printer status information on a roll, but no roll
is loaded.
T o print on sheets, follow these steps.
1. Press ▲or ▼to select Stop Printing , and then
press the OK button to stop printing.
2. Load a sheet and try printing again.
( → P .81)
694 Error Message
Messages regarding paper
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded.
Cause Corrective Action
Follow these steps to load and print on a roll.
1. Press ▲or ▼to select Eject Cut Sheet , press
the OK button, and remove the sheet.
( → P .144)
2. Load a new roll.
( → P .106)
The printer now starts printing the print job.
A print job for rolls was received when a sheet is
loaded.
Press ▲or ▼to select Stop Printing , and then
press the OK button.
The roll is empty .
Cause Corrective Action
The roll is empty . Follow these steps to replace the used roll with a new
roll of the same type and size.
1. Press the Release Lever back and remove the roll.
( → P .1 16)
( → P .1 18)
2. Load the new roll.
( → P .103)
( → P .106)
3. If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the
type of paper .
( → P .1 10)
4. When you have selected ManageRemainRoll >
On in the control panel menu and a barcode is not
printed on the roll, also specify the paper length.
( → P .1 12)
5. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen ,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
There is remaining roll paper , but because it could
not be advanced, it could not be detected.
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver .
( → P .187)
Error Message 695
Messages regarding paper
Sheet printing is selected.
Cause Corrective Action
Press ▲or ▼to select Load Cut Sheet , and then
press the OK button. Load the sheet, and then print.
( → P .81)
Y ou have attempted to print a test print sheet or other
printer status information on a sheet, but no sheet
is loaded.
T o print on rolls, follow these steps.
1. Press ▲or ▼to select Stop Printing , and then
press the OK button to stop printing.
2. Load a roll and try printing again.
( → P .78)
Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded.
Cause Corrective Action
A print job for printing on sheets was sent when a
roll is loaded.
1. Press ▲or ▼to select Remove Roll Paper , and
then press the OK button to stop printing.
2. After removing the roll, load and print on a sheet
of the type and size of paper you have specied in
the printer driver .
( → P .1 16)
( → P .81)
696 Error Message
Messages regarding paper
Paper jam
Push the release lever back.
Cause Corrective Action
A paper jam occurred in the printer during printing.
1. Push the Release Lever back and remove the
jammed paper .
( → P .120)
( → P .145)
2. Load the paper .
3. Pull the Release Lever forward.
4. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen ,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
( → P .106)
( → P .136)
Manually rewind the roll all the way and press OK.
Cause Corrective Action
A paper jam occurred when advancing the paper .
1. Rewind paper on the Roll Holder manually , all the
way , and then press the OK button.
2. Load the paper .
3. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen ,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
( → P .106)
Error Message 697
Messages regarding paper
Paper is crooked.
Cause Corrective Action
Follow these steps to reload the roll.
1. Push the Release Lever back.
2. Adjust the right edge of the roll to make it parallel
to the orange Paper Alignment Line .
3. Pull the Release Lever forward.
( → P .106)
If this error recurs after you reload the roll, remove
the Roll Holder from the printer , push the roll rmly in
until it touches the Roll Holder ange, and reload the
Roll Holder in the printer .
( → P .103)
Paper loaded crooked was detected when the paper
was advanced.
Follow these step to reload a sheet.
1. Push the Release Lever back.
2. Pull out the sheet.
3. Pull the Release Lever forward.
4. Reload the sheet, aligning it with the guide on the
right.
( → P .136)
Note
•T o disable this message (if it is displayed repeatedly despite reloading paper , for example), choose Off
or Loose in the Skew Check Lv . setting of the printer menu. However , this may cause jams and
printing problems because paper may be askew when printed. Also, the Platen may become soiled,
which may soil the back of the next document when it is printed.
698 Error Message
Messages regarding paper
Paper not aligned with right guide.
Cause Corrective Action
When paper was loaded, it was not aligned with the
guide on the right side.
Follow these step to reload a sheet.
1. Push the Release Lever back.
2. Pull out the sheet.
3. Pull the Release Lever forward.
4. Reload the sheet, aligning it with the guide on the
right.
Cannot detect papr
Cause Corrective Action
Follow these step to reload a sheet.
1. Remove the paper and press the OK button.
2. Reload the sheet, aligning it with the guide on the
right.
( → P .136)
The paper has come out of the printer .
Follow these step to reload a sheet.
1. Push the Release Lever back and remove the
paper .
2. Pull the Release Lever forward.
3. Reload the sheet, aligning it with the guide on the
right.
( → P .136)
Error Message 699
Messages regarding paper
Paper cutting failed.
Cause Corrective Action
There are sheets left on the Ejection Guide .
1. Push the Release Lever back and remove the
paper .
2. Load the paper .
3. Pull the Release Lever forward.
4. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen ,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
( → P .106)
There is a foreign object by the Output T ray ,
obstructing the Cutter Unit .
1. Lift the T op Cover and remove the foreign object.
2. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen ,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
Y ou are not using the printer under the recommended
environmental conditions for the paper .
Use the printer only where the recommended
environmental conditions for the paper are met.
Note that various environmental conditions are
recommended for various types of paper . For details
on the recommended environmental conditions for
paper , see Paper Reference Guide ."
( → P .95)
Y ou are using paper that is not compatible with
automatic cutting.
1. Specify Manual as the cutting method and use
scissors or a cutting tool to cut the roll.
( → P .129)
For information about paper that is compatible
with automatic cutting, see the Paper Reference
Guide .
( → P .95)
2. Push the Release Lever back and remove the
paper .
In other cases, the Cutter Unit may be damaged. Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
End of paper feed.
Cause Corrective Action
Y ou are pressing the ▲button on the Control Panel
and trying to rewind the roll to the edge.
Release the ▲button.
700 Error Message
Messages regarding paper
Rel lever is in wrong position.
Cause Corrective Action
The Release Lever is pushed back. Pull the Release Lever forward.
T urn of f the printer and wait a while before restoring
power .
Borderless printng not possible.
Cause Corrective Action
Follow these steps to change the settings of the print
job to enable borderless printing.
1. Press ▲or ▼to select Stop Printing , and then
press the OK button.
2. Make sure the correct printer driver for the printer
is selected and try printing again.
For information on types of paper compatible with
borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference
Guide .
( → P .95)
Select None when you have set Detect Mismatch
on the control panel to W arning .
The print job received species a type or width of
paper that is not compatible with borderless printing.
Press ▲or ▼to select Print W ith Border , and
then press the OK button to continue printing. The
document will be printed with a border .
Press ▲or ▼to select Stop Printing , and then
press the OK button.
Replace the paper with paper compatible for
borderless printing as follows.
1. Press ▲or ▼to select Change Paper , and then
press the OK button.
( → P .1 16)
( → P .1 18)
2. Replace the paper with paper compatible for
borderless printing.
( → P .103)
( → P .106)
The printer now starts printing the print job.
For information on types of paper compatible with
borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference
Guide .
( → P .95)
The loaded paper is a size not compatible with
borderless printing.
Press ▲or ▼to select Print W ith Border , and
then press the OK button to continue printing. The
document will be printed with a border .
Error Message 701
Messages regarding paper
Paper position not suitable for borderless printing.
Cause Corrective Action
Press ▲or ▼to select Stop Printing , and then
press the OK button.
Use each type of paper only where the recommended
environmental conditions are met. For details on
environmental conditions for various paper , see the
Paper Reference Guide .
( → P .95)
Because paper expands or contracts depending on
the environment of use, it may become narrower or
wider than the supported width for borderless printing.
Select None when you have set Detect Mismatch in
the Control Panel menu to W arning .
However , note that this error may af fect the printing
quality .
Press ▲or ▼to select Fix Paper Position and
straighten the paper so that the edges are between
the ink grooves for borderless printing.
Insert the roll rmly until it touches the ange of the
Roll Holder .
( → P .103)
Select None when you have set Detect Mismatch in
the Control Panel menu to W arning .
However , note that this error may af fect the printing
quality .
The paper is loaded askew .
Press ▲or ▼to select Print W ith Border , and
then press the OK button to continue printing. The
document will be printed with a border .
Roll paper is not securely in contact with roll holder .
Cause Corrective Action
When the roll was loaded, the roll was not inserted
rmly all the way on the Roll Holder .
Follow these steps to reload the roll.
1. Press the OK button and remove the roll holder
from the printer .
2. Insert the roll rmly on the Roll Holder until it
touches the ange.
( → P .103)
3. Load the Roll Holder in the printer .
702 Error Message
Messages regarding ink
Messages regarding ink
Ink insufcient.
Cause Corrective Action
Press ▲or ▼to select Rep. Ink T ank , and then
press the OK button. Replace the Ink T ank that is
low with a new Ink T ank .
( → P .623)
The ink level is low , so you cannot print, clean the
Printhead , or do other operations that require ink.
Press ▲or ▼to select Continue to print , and then
press the OK button to resume printing. However ,
note that this error may af fect the printing quality .
No ink left.
Cause Corrective Action
There is no ink left. Open the Ink T ank Cover and replace the Ink T ank
for which the Ink Lamp is ashing.
( → P .623)
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected.
Cause Corrective Action
Ink level detection cannot work correctly if you use
rell ink tanks.
The rell ink tank can no longer be used. See the
section “Ink level detection” and take the appropriate
action. ( → P .687)
Unable to detect ink level correctly .
Cause Corrective Action
The remaining ink level could not be correctly
detected.
Close the Ink T ank Cover .
The buzzer will stop once the error is cleared.
Close Ink T ank Cover
Cause Corrective Action
The Ink T ank Cover is open. Close the Ink T ank Cover .
The buzzer will stop once the error is cleared.
Error Message 703
Messages regarding ink
Ink tank is empty .
Cause Corrective Action
There is no ink left in an ink tank. Open the Ink T ank Cover and replace the Ink T ank
for which the Ink Lamp is ashing.
( → P .623)
Not much ink is left.
Cause Corrective Action
Not much ink is left. Prepare a new Ink T ank .
W e recommend replacing the Ink T ank with a new Ink
T ank at this point if you plan to print large-format or
high-quantity jobs.
No ink tank loaded.
Cause Corrective Action
There is no Ink T ank of the indicated color in the
printer .
Load or reload the Ink T ank .
( → P .623)
There is a problem with the Ink T ank . Replace it with a new Ink T ank .
( → P .623)
W rong ink tank.
Cause Corrective Action
The Ink T ank in the printer is incompatible. Load an Ink T ank specied for use with the printer .
( → P .623)
Do not pull out ink tank.
Cause Corrective Action
The remaining ink level could not be correctly
detected.
Install the Ink T ank that was removed.
The buzzer will stop once the error is cleared.
704 Error Message
Messages regarding printing or adjustment
Messages regarding printing or adjustment
Cannot adjust printhead.
Cause Corrective Action
The Printhead nozzles are clogged. Execute Head Posi. Adj. again, as follows.
1. Press the OK button to clear the error .
2. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
( → P .630)
3. Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
( → P .632)
4. Execute Head Posi. Adj. again.
( → P .604)
The Printhead cannot be aligned; highly transparent
lm is loaded.
Press the OK button to clear the error .
W e recommend using a type of paper that you often
use, other than lm, for Printhead adjustment.
( → P .604)
The Printhead is installed crooked. Straighten the Printhead as follows, and then execute
Head Posi. Adj. again.
1. Press the OK button to clear the error .
2. Use Head Inc. Adj. to adjust the angle of
inclination of the Printhead .
( → P .608)
3. Execute Head Posi. Adj. again.
( → P .604)
Cannot adjust paper feed.
Cause Corrective Action
The Printhead nozzles are clogged. Execute Adj. Quality again, as follows.
1. Press the OK button to clear the error .
2. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
( → P .630)
3. Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
( → P .632)
4. Execute Adj. Quality again.
( → P .614)
Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used
for automatic feed amount adjustment.
Press the OK button to clear the error , and then
adjust the feed amount manually .
( → P .616)
Error Message 705
Messages regarding printing or adjustment
Check printed document.
Cause Corrective Action
The Printhead nozzles are becoming clogged. If printing is faint, clean the Printhead .
( → P .632)
706 Error Message
Messages regarding printheads
Messages regarding printheads
Cannot adjust printhead.
Cause Corrective Action
The Printhead nozzles are clogged. Execute Head Posi. Adj. again, as follows.
1. Press the OK button to clear the error .
2. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
( → P .630)
3. Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
( → P .632)
4. Execute Head Posi. Adj. again.
( → P .604)
The Printhead cannot be aligned; highly transparent
lm is loaded.
Press the OK button to clear the error .
W e recommend using a type of paper that you often
use, other than lm, for Printhead adjustment.
( → P .604)
The Printhead is installed crooked. Straighten the Printhead as follows, and then execute
Head Posi. Adj. again.
1. Press the OK button to clear the error .
2. Use Head Inc. Adj. to adjust the angle of
inclination of the Printhead .
( → P .608)
3. Execute Head Posi. Adj. again.
( → P .604)
W rong printhead.
Cause Corrective Action
An incompatible Printhead has been installed. Open the T op Cover and replace the Printhead with
a new one.
( → P .633)
Printhead error
Cause Corrective Action
There is a problem with the Printhead . Open the T op Cover and replace the Printhead with
a new one.
( → P .633)
Error Message 707
Messages regarding printheads
No printhead
Cause Corrective Action
No Printhead is installed. Install the Printhead .
( → P .633)
Execute printhead cleaning.
Cause Corrective Action
Follow these steps to clean the Printhead .
1. Stop printing by pressing ▲or ▼to select Stop
Printing .
2. Clean the Printhead .
( → P .632)
If this message is still displayed, replace the
Printhead .
( → P .633)
Press ▲or ▼to select Print , and then press the OK
button to resume printing. However , note that this
error may af fect the printing quality .
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
If OK is shown on the Display Screen , clean the
Printhead .
1. Press the OK button on the Control Panel to stop
printing.
2. Clean the Printhead .
( → P .632)
If this message is still displayed, replace the
Printhead .
( → P .633)
708 Error Message
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge
Insert the maintenance cartridge.
Cause Corrective Action
The Maintenance Cartridge is not installed. Install the Maintenance Cartridge .
( → P .639)
W rong maintenance cartridge.
Cause Corrective Action
A Maintenance Cartridge for a dif ferent model of
printer is installed.
Replace it with the Maintenance Cartridge for your
particular model.
Maint. cart. The level is low
Cause Corrective Action
The Maintenance Cartridge is almost full. Y ou can continue to print, but prepare a new
Maintenance Cartridge to use when the message for
replacement is displayed.
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity .
Cause Corrective Action
The Maintenance Cartridge cannot absorb enough
ink for Printhead cleaning or other operation.
After conrming that the printer has stopped
operating, replace the Maintenance Cartridge .
( → P .639)
Maintenance cartridge full.
Cause Corrective Action
The Maintenance Cartridge is full. After conrming that the printer has stopped
operating, replace the Maintenance Cartridge .
( → P .639)
Maintenance cartridge problem.
Cause Corrective Action
An incompatible or used Maintenance Cartridge has
been installed.
Install an unused Maintenance Cartridge specied for
use with the printer .
( → P .639)
Error Message 709
Messages regarding HP-GL/2
Messages regarding HP-GL/2
This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2.
Cause Corrective Action
Follow these steps to replace the type of paper in
the printer .
1. Press ▲or ▼to select Stop Printing , and then
press the OK button.
2. Replace the paper with a type compatible with
HP-GL/2. For details on paper compatible with
HP-GL/2, refer to the Paper Reference Guide .
( → P .95)
The printer has received a HP-GL/2 print job that
cannot be printed on the paper that has been
advanced.
Press ▲or ▼to select Print , and then press the OK
button to resume printing. However , note that this
error may cause paper jams and af fect the printing
quality .
GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full. (xxxx is 0501, 0903, or
0904)
Cause Corrective Action
The printer memory is full. Because the entire print job could not be received,
the printer may not be able to print the entire original.
Check the printing results.
GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range.
Cause Corrective Action
Check the print job.A parameter specied in a HP-GL/2 command is out
of the supported range.
If you have specied ProcessingOption >W arning
>On in the Control Panel menu, set it to Off instead.
GL2: W0504 This command is not supported.
Cause Corrective Action
Check the print job.The printer has received an unsupported HP-GL/2
command.
If you have specied ProcessingOption >W arning
>On in the Control Panel menu, set it to Off instead.
710 Error Message
Other Messages
Other Messages
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)
Cause Corrective Action
T ry printing again, using the correct printer driver .There is a problem with the print job.
It is also possible to continue printing in this state.
However , you may not be able to obtain the desired
printing results.
ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)
Cause Corrective Action
An error requiring service may have occurred. W rite down the error code and message, turn of f the
printer , and contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Hardware error . xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or
number)
Cause Corrective Action
The last portion of roll paper was used during a
print job. The paper was not advanced because the
trailing edge is taped to the roll.
T urn of f the printer and remove the roll from the
printer before restoring power .
Fastening tape or the Belt Stopper has not been
removed inside the T op Cover .
T urn of f the printer , open the T op Cover and remove
the tape or the Belt Stopper before restoring power .
An error requiring service may have occurred. T urn of f the printer and wait at least three seconds
before restoring the power .
If the message is displayed again, write down the
error code and message, turn of f the printer , and
contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
T op cover is open.
Cause Corrective Action
Open the T op Cover fully , remove any foreign objects,
and close the T op Cover again.
The printer has detected that the T op Cover is open.
If the error occurs again, close the T op Cover , turn of f
the printer , and wait a while before restoring power .
Error Message 71 1
Other Messages
Prepare for parts replacement.
Cause Corrective Action
It is almost time to replace consumables for which
service is required.
Y ou can continue to use the printer for some time
until Parts replacement time has passed. will be
displayed.
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Parts replacement time has passed.
Cause Corrective Action
It is past the recommended time to replace
consumables for which service is required.
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Unknown le.
Cause Corrective Action
Data sent to keep the printer up to date (such as
paper information) is in the wrong format.
Check the data. T urn of f the printer and wait a while
before restoring power , and then resend the data.
Check the rmware version. T urn of f the printer and
wait a while before restoring power , and then resend
the rmware.
Y ou have uploaded rmware for a dif ferent model.
If the message is displayed again, contact your
Canon dealer for assistance.
Multi-sensor error
Cause Corrective Action
Direct sunlight or strong lighting may be shining on
the printer and causing the sensor to malfunction.
T ake steps to ensure the printer is not used when
exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting.
The performance of a sensor inside the printer may
be impaired.
T urn of f the printer and wait at least three seconds
before restoring the power .
If the message is displayed again, contact your
Canon dealer for assistance.
Error in cutter position.
Cause Corrective Action
The Cutter Unit stops in the middle of cutting.
1. Push the Release Lever back and remove the
paper .
2. Pull the Release Lever forward.
712 Error Message
Index
Index 713
Index
A
About This User Manual .............................................1
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Mac OS X) ........................................460
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Windows) ..........................................346
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the
Operating System Menu (Windows) .......................348
Accounting ..............................................................437
Accounting Manager ..............................................437
Accounting Manager Basic Procedures .................441
Accounting Manager Main Window ........................438
Job List Area .....................................................439
Listed Job Selection Area .................................439
Menu Bar .........................................................438
Status Bar .........................................................440
Title Bar ............................................................438
Toolbars ............................................................438
Totals Area ........................................................440
Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X) ....................474
Data Send Method ...........................................474
Adjusting Images ....................................................177
Adjusting Line Length (Adjust Length) ...................619
Adjusting Line Misalignment (Head Inc. Adj.) .........608
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver .................177
Color Adjustment ..............................................178
Color Mode .......................................................177
Matching ...........................................................179
Adjusting the feed amount ......................................612
Adjusting the Printhead ..........................................603
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength (VacuumStrngth) ..621
Adjustments for Better Print Quality .......................603
Advanced Settings .................................484, 512, 548
Print Priority ......................................484, 512, 548
Print Quality ......................................484, 512, 548
Aligning Objects .............................................411, 531
Align Bottom ............................................. 411, 531
Align Left ..................................................412, 532
Align Right ................................................412, 532
Align Top ................................................... 411, 531
Center Horizontally ...................................412, 532
Center Vertically ....................................... 411, 531
An error message is shown on the Display
Screen ....................................................................668
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls ...........................103
Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and
Colors (Head Posi. Adj.) .........................................604
Automatic Banding Adjustment (Adj. Quality) .........614
Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular
Intervals ..................................................................446
B
Banding in different colors occurs ..........................674
Basic Printing Workow ............................................76
Binding Settings Dialog Box ...................................420
Binding .............................................................420
Binding Edge ....................................................420
Fold Line Color .................................................420
Fold Line Type ..................................................420
Only Print Center and Edges ............................420
Print Fold Lines ................................................420
Borderless Printing .................................................232
Borderless Printing at Actual Size ..................225, 246
Borderless Printing ...................................225, 246
Borderless Printing Method ......................225, 246
Print Image with Actual Size .....................226, 247
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
(Mac OS X) .....................................................229, 250
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
(Windows) ......................................................227, 248
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the
Roll Width ...............................................................239
Borderless Printing ...........................................239
Borderless Printing Method ..............................239
Scale to t Roll Paper Width .............................240
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the
Roll Width (Mac OS X) ...........................................243
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the
Roll Width (Windows) .............................................241
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match
the Paper Size (Mac OS X) ....................................236
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match
the Paper Size (Windows) ......................................234
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size ....232
Borderless Printing ...........................................232
Borderless Printing Method ..............................232
Fit Paper Size ...................................................233
Borderless printng not possible. .............................701
Index
714 Index
C
Canceling print jobs ..................................................90
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X .......................92
Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel ...........90
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows .........................91
Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition .........446
Cannot adjust paper feed. ......................................705
Cannot adjust printhead. ................................705, 707
Cannot connect the printer to the network .............679
Cannot detect papr .................................................699
Cannot load sheets ................................................665
Cannot print over a NetWare network ....................680
Cannot print over a network ...................................679
Cannot print over a TCP/IP network .......................679
Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks ..680
Carriage ....................................................................17
Centering originals .................................................289
Changing the Object Overlapping Order ........413, 533
Bring Forward ...........................................413, 534
Bring to Front ............................................413, 533
Send Backward ........................................414, 534
Send to Back ............................................413, 533
Changing the Object Size ...............................408, 528
Resizing by means of mouse operation ...408, 528
Resizing by specifying a scaling value .....408, 528
Changing the Type of Paper ................... 110, 139, 195
Changing the Type of Paper .............110, 139, 195
Using the Same Type of Paper
Regularly .......................................... 111, 140, 196
Check printed document. .......................................706
Checking for Nozzle Clogging ................................630
Checking Images Before Printing ...........................313
Checking Ink Tank Levels .......................................628
Checking Instructions During Printer Operations .....69
How to view instructions .....................................69
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ...313
Open Preview When Print Job Starts
(Windows) ........................................................313
Preview (Macintosh) .........................................314
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
(Mac OS X) .....................................................317, 459
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
(Windows) ......................................................315, 342
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge
Capacity .................................................................644
Choosing a Paper for Printing ................................194
If the paper type is not listed for selection ........194
Media Type .......................................................194
Choosing Paper for Printing ...................................194
Choosing the Document Type and Printing
Conditions (Mac OS X) ...........................................192
Choosing the Document Type and Printing
Conditions (Windows) ............................................190
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover ...............................647
Cleaning the Printer ................................................646
Cleaning the Printer Exterior ..................................646
Cleaning the Printhead ...................................632, 650
Clearing a Jammed Sheet ..............................145, 662
Clearing Jammed Paper
(Paper Feed Slot) ...................................123, 148, 657
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper .........................120, 659
Close Ink Tank Cover .............................................703
Color Adjustment ............................................488, 514
Adjusting Color .........................................488, 514
Adjusting Monochrome .............................489, 515
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (Windows) .............356
Apply to Sample ...............................................356
Brightness ........................................................356
Contrast ............................................................356
Cyan / Magenta / Yellow ...................................356
Defaults ............................................................357
Gray Tone .........................................................356
Object Adjustment ............................................357
Sample Type ....................................................356
Saturation .........................................................357
View Color Pattern ...........................................356
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome (Windows) ..361
Apply to Sample ...............................................361
Brightness ........................................................361
Contrast ............................................................361
Cyan / Magenta / Yellow ...................................361
Defaults ............................................................362
Gray Tone .........................................................361
Object Adjustment ............................................362
Sample Type ....................................................361
Saturation .........................................................362
View Color Pattern ...........................................361
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ......421, 536
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog
Box .................................................................424, 538
About Button .....................................................424
Add Button ................................................424, 538
Add to Startup folder ........................................424
Delete Button ............................................424, 538
Delete les in the folder ....................................538
Delete the entire folders, as well as items in the
list above ..........................................................538
Index
Index 715
Edit Button ................................................424, 538
Hot Folder .........................................................424
Monitor Hot Folder Constantly ..........................538
Operation Guide Button ....................................424
Save Printed Data ............................................424
Start Button ......................................................424
Stop Button .......................................................424
Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X) .................467
Apply to Sample ...............................................467
Brightness ........................................................467
Color Adjustment pane: color ...........................467
Contrast ............................................................467
Cyan / Magenta / Yellow ...................................467
Gray Tone .........................................................467
Matching Method ..............................................468
Matching Mode .................................................468
Matching pane ..................................................468
Object Adjustment ............................................468
Sample Type ....................................................467
Saturation .........................................................468
View Color Pattern ...........................................467
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X) .....469
Apply to Sample ...............................................469
Brightness ........................................................469
Color Adjustment pane: Monochrome ..............469
Contrast ............................................................469
Cyan / Magenta / Yellow ...................................469
Gray Tone .........................................................469
Object Adjustment ............................................470
Sample Type ....................................................469
Saturation .........................................................470
View Color Pattern ...........................................469
Color Settings Panel ...............................487, 513, 551
Color Adjustment / Matching ....................487, 513
Color Mode .......................................487, 513, 551
Mode ................................................................551
Print Button ...............................................487, 513
Restore Defaults Button ...........................487, 513
Update Printer Info. Button .......................487, 513
Colors in printed images are uneven ......................675
ColorSync ...............................................494, 520, 554
Conguring NetWare Network Settings ..................593
Conguring TCP/IPv6 Network Settings .................568
Conguring the Communication Mode Manually ....578
Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Networks
(Macintosh) .............................................................598
Activating AppleTalk on the printer ...................598
Conguring the destination (Mac OS X) ...........599
Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network
(Macintosh) .............................................................602
Conguring the Destination in TCP/IP Networks
(Macintosh) .............................................................600
Conguring the Destination (Mac OS X) ..........600
Conguring the IP Address on the Printer ..............563
Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING
Commands .............................................................567
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility ................................453, 564, 595
When specifying an IPv4 IP address ..453, 564, 595
When specifying an IPv6 IP address ..453, 564, 595
Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control
Panel ......................................................................565
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination
(Macintosh) .............................................................596
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination
(Windows) ..............................................................581
Conguring the Printer's AppleTalk Network
Settings ..........................................................574, 597
Conguring the Printer's NetWare Network
Settings ..........................................................575, 584
Conguring the Printer's TCP/IP Network
Settings ..................................................................570
When using an IPv4 IP address .......................570
When using an IPv6 IP address .......................572
Conguring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager ......441
Conguring Units and Display Settings in
Accounting Manager ..............................................445
1000 Separator .................................................445
Area Display Format .........................................445
Currency Unit ...................................................445
Date Display Format .........................................445
Decimal Symbol ...............................................445
Ink Consumed ..................................................445
Paper Length ....................................................445
Paper Width ......................................................445
Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X) ....................457
Checking a preview of the settings ...................457
Checking a print preview ..................................458
Conrming Print Settings (Windows) ......................340
Checking a preview of the settings ...................340
Checking a print preview ..................................341
Conserving roll paper .............................................301
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without
Top and Bottom Margins ........................................307
No Spaces at Top or Bottom
(Conserve Paper) .............................................307
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without
Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) .....................310
Index
716 Index
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without
Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) ......................308
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees ..................................................................301
Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) .....301
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees (Mac OS X) ..............................................304
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees (Windows) ................................................302
Control Panel ......................................................20, 22
Control Panel Display ...............................................26
Mode transition ...................................................28
Printer status and modes ...................................27
Types of tabs ......................................................26
Creating a New Hot Folder .............................426, 539
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing .............................331
Automatic Cutting .............................................331
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X) .........333
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) ...........332
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper
Automatically ..........................................................133
D
Deleting a Hot Folder .............................................543
Depression on the leading edge is left ...................665
Detailed Settings ....................................................394
Device Settings Sheet (Windows) ..........................377
About ................................................................377
Color Compatibility ...........................................377
Device Setup Utility ................................................452
Dialog Area .............................................................382
Cancel Button ...................................................382
Center Originals Across Roll ............................382
Layout Selection ...............................................382
Media Type / Paper Source /Paper Size ..........382
No Spaces at Top or Bottom ............................382
Print Button .......................................................382
Printer Information ............................................383
Status Monitor Button .......................................383
Update Printer Information Button ....................383
Digital Photo Front-Access .....................................449
Display with Actual Size .........................................502
Display with All .......................................................501
Display with Fitting to the Width of the Paper .........500
Do not pull out ink tank. ..........................................704
Documents are printed in monochrome .................677
Driver Matching Mode ............................492, 518, 552
E
Easy Settings .........................................482, 510, 546
Print Quality ...................................... 483, 511, 547
Print Target .......................................482, 510, 546
Editing a Hot Folder (Setting Print Conditions) .......541
Email Notication When Printing is Finished or
Errors Occur ...........................................................579
End of paper feed. ..................................................700
Enhanced Printing Options .....................................177
Enlarge/Reduce the screen display ........................389
ERROR Exxx-xxxx
(x represents a letter or number) ............................711
Error in cutter position. ...........................................712
Error Message ........................................................689
Execute printhead cleaning. ...................................708
Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File .................447
Listed Jobs .......................................................447
Selected Jobs ...................................................447
F
Favorites Sheet (Windows) ....................................372
Add ...................................................................373
Application Settings Priority ..............................372
Apply Favorite ..................................................372
Comment ..........................................................372
Delete ...............................................................372
Down ................................................................373
Edit ...................................................................372
Export ...............................................................373
Favorites ...........................................................372
Import ...............................................................373
Settings Details ................................................372
Up .....................................................................373
Feeding Roll Paper Manually .................................125
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images
(Mac OS X) .............................................................184
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images
(Windows) ..............................................................181
Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount
(Adj. Fine Feed) ......................................................618
Finished Size Settings Dialog Box .........................419
Finished Size ....................................................419
Folded Duplex Window ..........................................416
Layout Area ......................................................417
Menu Bar ..........................................................416
Status Bar .........................................................417
Tool Bar ............................................................416
Index
Index 717
Format Dialog Box ..........................................399, 525
Enl./Red. ...........................................................399
Object Position .................................................400
Object Size ...............................................400, 525
Position Sheet ..................................................400
Rotate .......................................................399, 525
Scaling ..............................................................525
Size Sheet ........................................................399
Free Layout ....................................................390, 504
Free Layout Main Window ..............................393, 506
Dialog Area .......................................................507
Layout Area ..............................................393, 506
Menu Bar ..................................................393, 506
Status Bar .........................................................394
Tool Bar ....................................................393, 506
Frequently Asked Questions ..................................655
Front .........................................................................13
G
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) ..................711
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and
Colors for Printing ...................................................187
Advanced Settings ...........................................187
Color Settings ...................................................188
Enhancing printing quality ................................189
Print Priority ......................................................187
Print Quality ......................................................187
GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range. ..........710
GL2: W0504 This command is not supported. .......710
GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full.
(xxxx is 0501, 0903, or 0904) .................................710
Go to Page Dialog Box ...........................................495
Page .................................................................495
H
Handling Paper .........................................................95
Handling rolls ..........................................................103
Handling sheets ......................................................136
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx
(x represents a letter or number) ............................711
Hot Folder .......................................................425, 539
How to use this manual ..............................................1
How to View Instructions With Navigate ...................29
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed 6 mm larger than
specied .................................................................683
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed at maximum size, even if
a standard size is specied ....................................683
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed in monochrome
(or color) .................................................................682
HP-GL/2 Printing ....................................................170
HP-GL/2 printing takes a long time ........................683
HP-GL/2 problems ..................................................682
HTML Version of the Manual for Printing ....................5
Printing a group of individual topics in the
manual ..................................................................7
Printing a group of topics in the manual ...............5
Printing selected topics ......................................10
I
ICC Matching Mode ................................493, 519, 553
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound ....................685
Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs ...676
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ....................452
Images are printed crooked ....................................677
Initializing the Network Settings .............................580
Ink Filling.. is displayed ..........................................667
Ink insufcient. ........................................................703
Ink Level Detection .................................................687
Ink level detection .............................................687
Releasing ink level detection ............................687
Ink Tank Cover (Inside) .............................................18
Ink tank is empty. ....................................................704
Ink Tanks ................................................................622
Insert the maintenance cartridge. ...........................709
Installation problems ..............................................681
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup
Utility ...............................................................452, 594
Insufcient paper for job .........................................694
Introduction .................................................................1
J
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF
Printmonitor ............................................................558
Canceling Print Jobs ........................................558
Pausing/Resuming Print Jobs ..........................558
Preempting Other Jobs ....................................558
Printing Held Jobs ............................................559
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status
Monitor ...................................................................436
Canceling Print Jobs ........................................436
Pausing/Resuming Print Jobs ..........................436
Preempting Other Jobs ....................................436
Printing Held Jobs ............................................436
Index
718 Index
K
Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left ....126
L
Launching the Accounting Manager .......................437
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple
Application Programs on One Page ...............404, 526
Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One
Page ...............................................................401, 526
Laying out Objects Automatically ...................410, 530
Layout Sheet (Windows) ........................................368
Copies ..............................................................369
Defaults ............................................................369
Edit Watermark .................................................368
No Spaces at Top or Bottom
(Conserve Paper) .............................................369
Page Layout .....................................................368
Page Options ....................................................369
Print Centered ..................................................368
Reverse Order ..................................................369
Rotate 180 degrees ..........................................368
Set ....................................................................368
Special Settings ................................................369
Watermark ........................................................368
Watermarks ......................................................368
Line thickness is not uniform ..................................678
Lines are misaligned ..............................................678
Lines are printed too thick or thin in HP-GL/2 print
jobs .........................................................................682
Lines or images are missing in printed HP-GL/2
jobs. ........................................................................682
Loading and Printing on Rolls ..................................78
Loading and Printing on Sheets ...............................81
Loading Rolls in the Printer ....................................106
Loading Sheets in the Printer .................................136
M
Mac OS X Software ................................................454
Main Pane (Mac OS X) ..........................................461
Color Mode .......................................................463
Common Items .................................................461
Conguration using Advanced Settings ............463
Conguration using Easy Settings ...................462
Economy Printing .............................................463
Get Information .................................................461
Media Type .......................................................461
Print Preview ....................................................461
Print Priority ......................................................463
Print Quality ..............................................462, 463
Print Target .......................................................462
Printer ...............................................................461
Reduce Print Unevenness ................................463
Set ............................................................461, 463
Sharpen Text ....................................................463
Thicken Fine Lines ...........................................463
Unidirectional Printing ......................................463
View set. ...........................................................462
Main Sheet (Windows) ...........................................350
About ................................................................351
Advanced Settings ...........................................350
Color Mode .......................................................352
Color Settings ...................................................352
Common Items .................................................350
Conguration using Advanced Settings ............352
Conguration using Easy Settings ...................351
Defaults ............................................................351
Economy Printing .............................................352
Get Information .................................................350
Media Type .......................................................350
Open Preview When Print Job Starts ...............350
Print Priority ......................................................352
Print Quality ..............................................351, 352
Print Target .......................................................351
Sharpen Text ....................................................352
Status Monitor ..................................................350
Thicken Fine Lines ...........................................352
Unidirectional Printing ......................................352
View Settings ....................................................351
Maint. cart. The level is low ....................................709
Maintenance ...........................................................622
Maintenance Cartridge ...........................................639
Maintenance cartridge full. .....................................709
Maintenance cartridge problem. .............................709
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation ..............................................................321
Mirror ................................................................321
Orientation ........................................................321
Rotate 180 degrees ..........................................321
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Mac OS X) ..........................................324
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Windows) ............................................322
Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors
(Head Posi. Adj.) ....................................................606
Manual Banding Adjustment (Adj. Quality) .............616
Index
Index 719
Matching .........................................................490, 516
Input Prole ..............................................490, 516
Matching Method ......................................490, 516
Matching Mode .........................................490, 516
Printer Prole ............................................490, 516
Soft Proof .................................................491, 517
Matching Sheet (Windows) ....................................359
Driver Matching Mode ......................................359
ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode and Host
ICM Mode .........................................................360
Input Prole Settings ........................................360
Matching Method ..............................................359
Matching Mode .........................................359, 360
Printer Prole Settings ......................................360
MediaType Mismatch .............................................689
Menu Operations ......................................................32
Accessing menus ...............................................33
Executing menu commands ...............................34
Specifying menu items .......................................34
Specifying numerical values ...............................34
Menu Settings ..........................................................49
Ink Menu .............................................................51
Job Menu ............................................................51
Paper Menu ........................................................49
Set./Adj. Menu ....................................................52
Menu Settings (During Printing) ...............................60
Ink Menu .............................................................60
Job Menu ............................................................60
Set./Adj. Menu ....................................................61
Menu Structure .........................................................35
Ink Menu .............................................................37
Job Menu ............................................................38
Paper Menu ........................................................35
Set./Adj. Menu ....................................................39
Messages advising to check the maintenance
cartridge are not cleared ........................................686
Messages regarding HP-GL/2 ................................710
Messages regarding ink .........................................703
Messages regarding paper .....................................689
Messages regarding printheads .............................707
Messages regarding printing or adjustment ...........705
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge ....709
Moving a Page ...............................................389, 503
Moving an Object ...........................................409, 529
Multi-sensor error ...................................................712
N
Network Environment .............................................560
Network Environment .......................................562
System requirements .......................................560
Network Setting ......................................................560
Network Setting (Mac OS X) ..................................596
Network Setting (Windows) ....................................581
No ink left. ..............................................................703
No ink tank loaded. .................................................704
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. .......................709
No printhead ...........................................................708
Not much ink is left. ................................................704
Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom ...............385, 498
O
Object Adjustment dialog box: Color ......................358
Graphics ...........................................................358
Image ...............................................................358
Text ...................................................................358
Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome ..........363
Graphics ...........................................................363
Image ...............................................................363
Text ...................................................................363
Operating Environment ..378, 390, 421, 476, 504, 536
Optional accessories ................................................70
Other Maintenance .................................................651
Other Messages ..................................................... 711
Other problems .......................................................684
Other useful settings ..............................................318
Output Settings Panel ....................................485, 549
Borderless Printing ...................................485, 549
Enlarged/Reduced Printing ......................485, 549
No Spaces at Top or Bottom ....................486, 550
Output Method Button ......................................550
Paper Size ................................................486, 549
Print Button .......................................................486
Print Centered ..........................................486, 550
Restore Defaults Button ...................................486
Rotate Page .............................................486, 550
Update Printer Info. Button ...............................486
Output Stacker .......................................................150
P
Page Options Dialog Box .......................................397
Margins .............................................................398
Order ................................................................397
Index
720 Index
Roll Paper Length .............................................397
Page Options Dialog Box (Windows) .....................370
Format Settings ................................................370
Print Date .........................................................370
Print Page Number ...........................................370
Print User Name ...............................................370
Page Setup Dialog Box ..........................................523
Order ................................................................523
Paper Orientation .............................................523
Paper Size ........................................................524
Roll Paper Length .............................................523
Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X) ...............................471
Borderless Printing ...........................................471
Enlarged/Reduced Printing ..............................471
Fit Paper Size ...................................................471
Fit Roll Paper Width .........................................471
Free Layout ......................................................472
No Spaces at Top or Bottom ............................472
Page Size .........................................................471
Paper Size ........................................................472
Paper Source ...................................................471
Print Centered ..................................................472
Roll Width .........................................................471
Rotate Page 90 degrees ..................................472
Scaling ..............................................................471
Page Setup Sheet (Windows) ................................364
Borderless Printing ...........................................364
Defaults ............................................................366
Enlarged/Reduced Printing ..............................365
Fit Paper Size ...........................................364, 365
Fit Roll Paper Width .........................................365
Orientation ........................................................365
Output Method ..................................................366
Page Size .........................................................364
Paper Size ................................................364, 365
Paper Source ...................................................365
Print Image with Actual Size .............................364
Roll Paper Options ...........................................365
Roll Paper Width ..............................................365
Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) .....365
Scale to t Roll Paper Width .............................364
Scaling ..............................................................365
Size Options .....................................................366
Paper ........................................................................95
Paper cutting failed. ................................................700
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X) ...465
Automatic Cutting .............................................465
Between Pages ................................................465
Between Scans ................................................465
Cut Speed ........................................................465
Drying Time ......................................................465
Media Type .......................................................465
Mirror ................................................................466
Near End Margin ..............................................465
Roll Paper Margin for Safety ............................465
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows) .....354
Between Pages ................................................354
Between Scans ................................................354
Cut Speed ........................................................354
Drying Time ......................................................354
Mirror ................................................................354
Near End Margin ..............................................354
Roll Paper Margin for Safety ............................354
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box
(Mac OS X) .............................................................464
Paper Source ...................................................464
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box
(Windows) ..............................................................353
Paper Source ...................................................353
Paper is crooked. ...................................................698
Paper is not cut ......................................................665
Paper is not cut straight ..........................................665
Paper jam ...............................................................697
Manually rewind the roll all the way and press
OK. ...................................................................697
Push the release lever back. ............................697
Paper not aligned with right guide. .........................699
Paper position not suitable for borderless printing. ..702
Paper rubs against the Printhead ...........................670
Paper Settings Panel ..............................480, 508, 544
Automatic Cutting .............................................545
Copies ..............................................481, 509, 545
Easy Settings / Advanced Settings ...480, 508, 544
Media Type .......................................480, 508, 544
Paper Source ...................................480, 508, 544
Print Button ...............................................481, 509
Restore Defaults Button ...........................481, 509
Roll Paper Width ..............................480, 508, 545
Update Printer Info. Button .......................481, 509
Paper size not detected. .........................................693
Paper Size Options Dialog Box (Windows) ............367
Add ...................................................................367
Custom Paper Size Name ................................367
Delete ...............................................................367
Paper Size ........................................................367
Paper Size List .................................................367
Units .................................................................367
Index
Index 721
Paper Sizes ............................................................100
Rolls .................................................................100
Sheets ..............................................................101
PaprWidth Mismatch ..............................................692
Parts replacement time has passed. ......................712
Pasting a Copied or Cut Object ......................415, 535
Pausing Printing .......................................................94
Preferences Dialog Box ..........................395, 495, 521
Auto Arrange Spacing ..............................395, 522
Divisions ...................................................395, 521
Grid Color .................................................395, 521
Gridlines ...................................................395, 521
Object Frame Style ...................................396, 521
Print Object Frames .........................................521
Units .................................................395, 495, 521
Prepare for parts replacement. ...............................712
Preparing to Transfer the Printer ............................651
Access the Move Printer menu ........................651
Pack the printer ................................................653
Remove paper ..................................................651
Remove the Ink Tank ........................................652
Preview ...........................................................378, 476
Preview Main Window ....................................380, 478
Dialog Area ...............................................381, 479
Drawer Area .....................................................479
Menu Bar ..................................................380, 478
Preview Area ............................................381, 478
Status Area .......................................................479
Status Bar .........................................................381
Tool Bar ....................................................380, 478
Print Area ..................................................................75
Rolls ...................................................................75
Sheets ................................................................75
Print on the Center .........................................384, 497
Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees .............................499
Print with No Borders .............................................496
Printed colors are inaccurate ..................................673
Printed colors of lines are inaccurate during
HP-GL/2 printing .....................................................682
Printer Driver ..................................................336, 454
Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X) ........................454
Printer Driver Settings (Windows) ..........................336
Printer Menu Operations ..........................................30
Menu operations during printing .........................31
Menu operations when no print job is in
progress .............................................................30
Printer Parts .............................................................13
Printer Specications ................................................71
Printhead ................................................................630
Printhead error .......................................................707
Printheads ..............................................................630
Printing at full size ..................................................219
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) .............................222
Printing at Full Size (Windows) ..............................220
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes ....253
Printing CAD Drawings ...........................................159
Printing does not start ............................................667
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a
Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X) .........................555
Completing the scanning settings on the Color
imageRUNNER. ...............................................556
Registering a hot folder on your computer .......555
Scanning the original and print an
enlargement .....................................................556
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a
Color imageRUNNER (Windows) ...........................432
Completing the scanning settings on the Color
imageRUNNER. ...............................................433
Registering a hot folder on your computer .......432
Scanning the original and print an
enlargement .....................................................433
Printing enlargements or reductions .......................201
Printing From a Desired Starting Point ...........113, 141
Load paper in the desired position to start
printing from ............................................. 113, 142
Set Width Detection to Off ........................ 113, 141
Printing in Mac OS X ................................................84
Printing from the source application ...................84
Registering the printer ........................................84
Printing in Windows ..................................................83
Printing Interface Setting Reports ............................65
Conrming Interface Print information ................65
Printing Interface Print reports ............................65
Printing is faint ........................................................669
Printing Large Posters (Windows) ..........................287
Printing Line Drawings and Text .............................160
Easy Settings ...................................................160
Print Quality ......................................................161
Print Target .......................................................160
Print targets for line drawings and text .............160
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X) .........164
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) ...........162
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other .......269
Free Layout (Windows) ....................................269
imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh) ......270
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
(Mac OS X) .............................................................273
Index
722 Index
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
(Windows) ..............................................................271
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously .....................275
Roll paper (banner) ..........................................275
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously
(Mac OS X) .............................................................278
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously
(Windows) ..............................................................276
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet ..........................280
Page Layout .....................................................280
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) ......283
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) ........281
Printing Ofce Documents ......................................171
Easy Settings ...................................................171
Print Quality ......................................................171
Print Target .......................................................171
Print targets for ofce documents .....................171
Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS X) ..................174
Printing Ofce Documents (Windows) ....................172
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes ..................261
Registering non-standard paper size in the
printer driver .....................................................261
Specifying custom paper sizes for temporary
use ....................................................................261
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
(Mac OS X) .............................................................266
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
(Windows) ..............................................................262
Printing by using Custom Paper Size ...............264
Printing by using Custom Size .........................262
Printing on Oversized Paper ..................................219
Oversize ...........................................................219
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets .................76
Roll printing ........................................................76
Sheet printing .....................................................77
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls ......................289
Centering originals relative to roll paper width ...289
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) ..292
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) ....290
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets ...................295
Centering originals on sheets ...........................295
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets
(Mac OS X) .............................................................298
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets
(Windows) ..............................................................296
Printing Photos and Images ...................................152
Easy Settings ...................................................152
Print Quality ......................................................153
Print Target .......................................................152
Print targets for photos and images .................152
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) ...............156
Printing Photos and Images (Windows) .................154
Printing Posters in Sections ...................................286
Page Layout .....................................................286
Printing procedure ....................................................76
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners
(Large-Format Printing) ..........................................253
Fit Roll Paper Width .........................................253
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners
(Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) ........................258
Print the banner ................................................259
Register a Custom Page Sizes ........................258
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners
(Large-Format Printing; Windows) .........................254
Creating the banner in the application ..............255
Printing the banner ...........................................255
Registering a Custom Paper Size ....................254
Printing with Selecting the Layout ..........................387
Printing With Watermarks .......................................318
Watermark ........................................................318
Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and
so on (Windows) .....................................................319
Printmonitor ............................................................557
Prints using Folded Duplex ....................................418
Folded Duplex ..................................................418
Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees ...................386
Problems Regarding Paper ....................................657
Problems with the printing quality ...........................669
Problems with the printing quality caused by the
type of paper ..........................................................678
R
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls ..........................134
Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. ....696
Rel lever is in wrong position. .................................701
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly
detected. .................................................................703
Removing Installed Printer Drivers .........................681
Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
(Windows) ........................................................681
Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows) ........................................................681
Removing printer drivers (Windows) ................681
Removing printer drivers and imagePROGRAF
Printmonitor (Macintosh) ..................................681
Removing Sheets ...................................................144
Removing the Roll from the Printer ........................116
Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls ..................... 118
Replacing Ink Tanks ...............................................623
Index
Index 723
Access the menu for Ink Tank replacement .....624
Compatible ink tanks ........................................623
Install the ink tanks ...........................................625
Make sure the printer is ready for Ink Tank
replacement ......................................................623
Precautions when handling ink tanks ...............623
Remove the Ink Tank ........................................624
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge ....................639
Access the menu for Maintenance Cartridge
replacement ......................................................640
Compatible maintenance cartridges .................639
Make sure the printer is ready for Maintenance
Cartridge replacement ......................................640
Precautions when handling the Maintenance
Cartridge ...........................................................639
Replace the Maintenance Cartridge .................641
Replacing the Printhead .........................................633
Access the menu for Printhead replacement ...634
Compatible printheads .....................................633
Precautions when handling the Printhead ........633
Replace the Printhead ......................................635
When to replace the Printhead .........................633
Replotting with HP-GL/2 jobs is not possible. ........683
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value ......213
Enlarged/Reduced Printing ..............................213
Scaling ..............................................................213
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
(Mac OS X) .............................................................216
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
(Windows) ..............................................................214
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ..................207
Enlarged/Reduced Printing ..............................207
Fit Roll Paper Width .........................................207
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
(Mac OS X) .............................................................210
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
(Windows) ..............................................................208
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size ...........201
Enlarged/Reduced Printing ..............................201
Fit Paper Size ...................................................201
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
(Mac OS X) .............................................................204
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
(Windows) ..............................................................202
Roll Cover (Inside) ....................................................17
Roll Holder Set .................................................70, 135
Roll Paper Cannot be Inserted into the Paper Feed
Slot .........................................................................665
Roll Paper is Continuously Ejected ........................666
Roll paper is not securely in contact with roll
holder. .....................................................................702
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. .....695
Roll printing is selected. .........................................694
Rotating an Object ..........................................409, 529
S
Searching Topics ........................................................3
Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method
(Feed Priority) .........................................................613
Selecting an Object ........................................407, 527
Setting the Print Parameters ..........................431, 544
Apply Sharpness ..............................................431
Setting the Unit Cost for Ink ...................................442
To set different unit costs for each ink color .....442
To set the same unit cost for all the inks ..........442
Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and
Paper ......................................................................444
Setting the Unit Cost for Paper ...............................443
Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows) ...........376
Copy .................................................................376
Sharing the Printer in Windows ..............................582
Sheet printing is selected. ......................................696
Showing Job Properties .........................................448
Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper
Consumed ..............................................................448
Showing, Saving and Loading Selected Unit Cost
Data ........................................................................448
Load Unit Cost Data .........................................448
Save Unit Cost Data .........................................448
Show Unit Cost Data ........................................448
Side ..........................................................................15
Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows) .................371
Adjust faint lines ...............................................371
Application Color Matching Priority ..................371
Enable Preview Switching ................................371
Fast Graphic Process .......................................371
FineZoom Settings ...........................................371
Reduce Print Unevenness ................................371
Specications ...........................................................71
Ink .......................................................................72
Interface .............................................................72
Options ...............................................................74
Output stacker capacity, in sheets ......................74
Paper ..................................................................73
Printer .................................................................71
Printing performance ..........................................71
Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot
Folder .....................................................................429
Index
724 Index
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings .......167
Color Compatibility ...........................................167
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings
(Windows) ..............................................................168
Specifying NetWare Print Services .........................588
Choosing the type of print services ..................588
Using NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to set up the
print server .......................................................589
Specifying NetWare Protocols ................................591
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver ....................197
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
(Mac OS X) ...............................................88, 199, 455
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
(Windows) ................................................86, 197, 338
Specifying Printer-Related Information ...................577
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .................129
Eject (waiting for ink to dry after printing) .........130
Manual (when using media that cannot be cut
with the Cutter Unit ) .........................................131
Paper cutting (to have the roll cut at your
specied position) .............................................132
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls .................127
Mac OS X .........................................................128
Windows ...........................................................127
Specifying the Paper Length .................................. 112
Specifying the Printer's Frame Type .......................586
Specifying the frame type using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility ..........................................586
Specifying the frame type using the printer
Control Panel ....................................................587
Stand ........................................................................19
Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy ...............................................................422, 537
To start by selecting imageRUNNER
Enlargement Copy from the start button ..........423
To start by selecting Printers and Faxes from
the start button .................................................422
Starting Free Layout .......................................391, 505
Starting Preview .............................................379, 477
Status Monitor ........................................................434
Status Print ...............................................................62
Checking the information in Status Print
reports ................................................................62
Printing Status Print reports ...............................62
Support Pane (Mac OS X) ......................................475
About ................................................................475
Settings ............................................................475
Support Information ..........................................475
User Manual .....................................................475
Support Sheet (Windows) ......................................375
Settings Summaries .........................................375
Support Information ..........................................375
User Manual .....................................................375
Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and
Regularly Acquired Jobs .........................................447
Jobs on Printer .................................................447
Regularly Acquired Jobs ...................................447
T
The back side of the paper is dirty .........................672
The contrast becomes uneven during printing .......676
The Data Reception Lamp on the Control Panel
does not light up .....................................................667
The display screen indicates Agitating ...................667
The edges of the paper are dirty ............................671
The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy ...............................................................421, 536
The Features of Free Layout ..........................390, 504
The Features of imagePROGRAF Printmonitor .....557
The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor ...434
The Features of Preview ................................378, 476
The length of printed images is inaccurate in the
feeding direction .....................................................677
The paper is too small. ...................................690, 691
Remove paper and check pap. size .................691
Replace paper with A4/LTR (vertical) or larger ..691
Replace roll with 10 in. wide or larger roll. ........691
The printer consumes a lot of ink ...........................686
The printer does not go on .....................................684
The printer does not respond even if print jobs are
sent .........................................................................667
The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper ...............668
The printer stops during a print job .........................668
The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job
(the carriage stops moving) ............................668, 683
The roll is empty. ....................................................695
The size of clear lm cannot be detected ...............665
The surface of the paper is dirty .............................672
This paper cannot be used. ....................................694
This type of paper is not compatible with
HP-GL/2. ................................................................710
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet ........................269
Top Cover (Inside) ....................................................16
Top cover is open. .................................................. 711
Troubleshooting ......................................................655
Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images
(Head Height) ......................................................... 611
Index
Index 725
Turning the Printer On and Off .................................24
Turning the printer off .........................................25
Turning the printer on .........................................24
Types of Paper .........................................................95
Accessing the Paper Reference Guide from
imagePROGRAF Support Information ...............95
Updating paper information ................................98
U
Unable to detect ink level correctly. ........................703
Unknown le. ..........................................................712
Updating the Firmware ...........................................654
Conrming the rmware version .......................654
Updating the Firmware .....................................654
Using Favorites ......................................................327
Favorites ...........................................................327
Using Favorites (Mac OS X) ...........................330, 460
Using Favorites (Windows) ............................328, 344
Printing using the favorite .........................329, 345
Registering a favorite ...............................328, 344
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals ...............450
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals ..............450
Using RemoteUI .....................................................569
Using the Output Stacker .......................................150
Note regarding the Extended position ..............151
Using the ruler ........................................................389
Utility Pane (Mac OS X) .........................................473
Set ....................................................................473
View ..................................................................473
Utility Sheet (Windows) ..........................................374
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ........374
Maintenance .....................................................374
V
View settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Mac OS X) .............................................................466
Details ..............................................................466
Name ................................................................466
Print Target .......................................................466
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Windows) ..............................................................355
Details ..............................................................355
Name ................................................................355
Print Target .......................................................355
W
When to Replace Ink Tanks ....................................629
Before print jobs and maintenance that consume
a lot of ink .........................................................629
If a message for checking the ink is shown on
the Display Screen ...........................................629
If a message for ink replacement is shown on
the Display Screen ...........................................629
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge ........645
If a message for checking the Maintenance
Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen .......645
If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge
replacement is shown on the Display Screen ..645
When much of the Maintenance Cartridge
capacity is depleted ..........................................645
Windows Software ..................................................336
With HP-GL/2, printing is misaligned ......................682
Working With Various Print Jobs ............................152
Wrong ink tank. .......................................................704
Wrong maintenance cartridge. ...............................709
Wrong printhead. ....................................................707
Z
Zoom Dialog Box ....................................398, 495, 524
Scaling ..............................................398, 495, 524
©CANON INC. 2009

Navigation menu